Electrical Installation of Buildings: EBCS-10

EBCS-10
Ethiopian Building Code Standard
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
OF BUILDINGS
FOREWORD
The Proclamation to define the powers and duties of the Central and Regional Executive
Organs of the Transitional Government of Ethiopia No. 41/1993 empowers the Ministry of Works
and Urban Development to prepare the Country's Building Code, issue Standards for design and
construction works, and follow up and supervise the implementation of same.
In exercise of these powers and in discharge of its responsibility, the Ministry is issuing a
series of Building Code Standards of general application.
The purpose of these standards is to serve as nationally recognized documents, the

application of which is deemed to ensure compliance of buildings with the minimum requirements
for design, construction and quality of materials set down by the National Building Code.
The major benefits to be gained in applying these standards are the harmonization of
professional practice and the ensuring of appropriate levels of safety, health and economy with due
consideration of the objective conditions and needs of the country.
As these standards are technical docum~nts which, by their very nature, require periodic
updating, revised editions will be issued by the Ministry from time to time as.appropriate.
The Ministry welcomes comments and suggestions on all aspect of the Ethiopian Building
Code Standards. All feedback received will be carefully reviewed by professional experts in the
field of building construction with a view to possible incorporation of amendments in future
editions.
Haile Assegidie
Minister
Ministry of Works and
Urban Development
1995
INTRODUCTION
This Code Standard for the Electrical Installation of Buildings is part of the Building Code
of Ethiopia:
This Code Standard for the Electrical Instaijation of Buildings is mairily adopted from
lEE Regulations for Electrical Installations and Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, to suit
the Ethiopian conditions. Other publications quoted are shown in the respective sections
of the Code and the Ethiopian Authority for Standardization maintains registers of a
number of foreign national and international standards.
The Code embr~ces several aspects of electrical installation work and sets standards and
provisions for safe utilization of electricity.
The Technical Committee for Code Standards for the Electrical Installation of Buildings
comprises of the following Institutions representing balanced interest of all segments of the
public concerned with the subject matter:
• Ministry of Works & Urban Development (MWUD)

• Building Design Enterprise ·(BDE)
• Ethiopian Electric Light & Power Authority (EELP A)
• Addis Ababa University, Faculty of Technology (AAU)
• Ethiopian Authority for Standardization (BAS).
---" .------ --- - ---

ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD
EBCS-10 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF
BUilDINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section 1 Scope And Definitions
1.1 Scope 1
1.2 Nonnative references 1
1J Defmitions 2
Section 2 Gen~ral Requirements
2.1 Administrative 20
2.1.1 Authority for rules i ••••••••••••••.•••••••••• i ••• 20
2.1.2 Pennit 20
2.1.3 Application for inspection 20
2.1.4 Posting of penn it ', , 20
2.1.5 Notification re-inspection 20
2.1.6 Plans and specifications 21
2.1.7 Connection authorization 21
2.1.8 Re-inspection 21
2.1.9 Renovation of existing installation 21
2.1.10 Use of approved equipment 22
2.1.11 Deviation or postponement 22
2.1.12 Powers of rejection 22
2.1.13 Installation of electrical equipment 22
2.1.14 Damage and interfer•••.• ~e 22
2.2 Technical 23
2.2.1 Conventional symbols '.' 23
2.2.2 Co-ordination 23
2.2.3 Location and requirement of substation 23
2.2.4 Rooms (spaces) required 23
2.2.5 Location and requirements of distribution boards 24
2.2.6 Location and requirements of PBX/PABX rooms 24
2.3 Planning and designing 25
2.3:1 General 25
2.3.2 Layout and installation drawing 25
2.3.3 Design 25
2.4 Marking of equipment " 26

2.4.1 General , , 26
2.4.2 Workmanship and materials 27
2.4.3 Material for anchoring 27
2.4.4 Protection of persons and property ,. 27
2.4.5 Maintainability , 27
2.4.6 Enclosures ,. 28
Section 3 Illumination
3.1 Scope 29
3.2 Normative references 29
3.3 Definitions , 30
3.4 Lighting requirements 35
3.4.1 IllumiQance " 35
3.4.2 Luminance '.. " 35
3.4.3 Glare' ' 36
3.4.4 Light direction and modelling 36
3.4.5 Colour rendering , .. , 36
3.5 Emergency lighting requirements 37

3 .5.1 Escape lighting 37
3.5.2 Safety lighting for particular hazardous workplaces 37
3.5.3 Standby lighting 38
3.6 Lighting requirements for various types of buildings 38

3.6.1 General 38
3.6.2 Industrial 39
3'.6.3 Offices.,., ' ' 39
3.6.4 Hotels and restaurants, 39
3.6.5 Educational establishments . "" 40
3.6.6 Hospitals , 40
3.7 Outdoor lighting requirements 42

3.7.1 Illuminance , , 42
3.7.2 Colour r~ndering group 42
3,7.3 Limitation of glare : ' .' , 43
3.7.4 Lighting of outdoor fixed location work spaces 43
II
Se~tion 4 Conductors
4.1 Scope ',' " 66.

4.3 Definitions 67
4.4 Size of conductors 69
4.4.1 Ph~e conductors in a.c. Circuits and live conductors in d.c. circuits .. 69
4.4.2 Neutral conductors , 69
4.5 Ampacity of wires, cables and flexible cords 70

4.5.1 Conductor operating temperature 70
4.5.2 . Cables connected iri parallel 70
4.5.3 Cables connected to bare conductors or busbars 70
'4.5.4 Voltage drop ~ 70
4.6 Flexible cords " 70

4.7 Colour of conductors '.' : 71
4.8 Maximum permissible temperll,ture 71
Annex (preface) 74
Annex A (Normative) - Correction factors 85
Annex B (Normative) - Type of cable and ampacity 90
Section 5 Service And Service Equipment
5.i Scope " 141

5.2 Normative references '.' 141
5.3 Definitions 141
5.4 General requirements ' " 142
5.4.1 Number of services permitted 142
5.4.2 Consumer's installation not to be supplied through another building 143
5.4.3 .conductors considered outside of a building 143
5.4.4 Other' conductors in raceway or cable· 144
5.4.5 Clearance from building openings 144
5.5 Service equipment 144

5.5.1 General 144
5.5.2 Control ·.. 145
III
5.6 Wiring methods 148
5.6.1 Underground consumer's service conductors 148
5.6.2 Overhead consumer's service conductors 148
5.7 Metering equipment 149

5.7.1 Connection 149
Section 6 Circuit Loading and Demand Factor
6.1 Scope 150

6.3 Defmitions 150
6.4 General 151
6.4.1 Current calculation 151

6.4.2 Voltage drop 151
6.4.3 Maximum circuit loading 151
6.4.4 Use of demand factor 151
6.5 Services and feeders 151
6.5.1 Single-family dwellings 151

6.5.2 Apartment and similar multi-family buildings , 152
6.5.3 Schools 153
6.5.4 Hospitals 153
6.5.5 Hotels, motels, dormitories, and buildings of similar occupancy 154
6.5.6 Other types of occupancy 155
6.5.7 Branch circuits 155
6.5.8 Feeder demand factors for lifts 155
Section 7 Earthing, Bonding, and Lightning Protection

Part I - Earthing, and Bonding
7.1 Scope 157

7.3 System and circuits earthing 158
7.3.1 Direct current. systems 158
7.3.2 Alternating - current systems 158
IV
7.4 Location of system earthing connections 159
7.4.1 D.C. systems 159
7.4.2 A.C. systems 159
7.4.3 Isolated systems , , , '.' 1·59
7.4.4 Single service supply to two or more buildings or structures ., 160
7.4,5 Conductors to be earthed , , 160
7.4.6 Current over earthing conductor ,, , , .. 160
Bonding 161
7.5.1 Non-current carrying metal parts , , , 161
1.5.2 Exposed non-current-carrying metal parts of equipment •....... 161
7.5.3 Non-metallic wiring systems 161
7.5.4 Non-electrical services 161
7.5.5 Extraneous fixed metalwork 164
7,6 Method of earthing , , 164
7.6.1 Effective earthing _ 164

7.6.2 Common earthing conductor , 164
7.6.3 Common earthing electrode '. , ,,., 164
7.6.4 Underground service 165
7.6.5 Short section of raceway 165
7.6.6 Fixed equipment , .. ", ,. 165
7.7 Bonding methods , \. , 166
7.7.1 Clean sUifaee , 166

7.7.2 Bonding at service equipment ...........•.............. 166
7.7.3 Means of assuring continuity at service equipment , 166
7.7.4 Metal annour or tape of service cable, 167
7.7.5 Bonding at other than service equipment , 167
7.7.6 Loosely jointed metal raceways 167
7.7.7 Bonding jumpers ,., , 167
7.8 Earthing electrodes .. , , 168
7.8.1 General, , 168

7.8.2 Service pipe electrode, , 168
7.8.3 Artificial earthing electrodes 169
v
7.9 Earthing and bonding conduc;tors 171
7.9.1 General 171

7.9.2 Installation of system earthing conductors 172
7.9.3 Installation of equipment bonding conductors 173
7.9.4 Earthing conductor size for d.c. circuits 174
7.9.5 Earthing conductor size for a.c. system 174
7.9.6 Bonding conductor size 174
7.10 Earthing and bonding conductor connections 175
7.10.1 Bonding. conductor connection to raceways 175

7.10.2 Earthing conductor connection to water pipe electrodes 175
7.10.3 Earthing conductor connections to other than water pipe electrodes .. 175
7.10.4 Bonding conductor connection to circuits and equipment 176
7.10.5 Earthing conductor cQJ111Cction to electrodes 176
Section 7 Earthing, Bonding and LightninlZProtection

Part n- pghtning Protection
7.11 Scope .' 178

7.13 Definitions 179
7.14 Materials 180
7.14.1 General 180
7.14.2 Galvanic compatibility 180
7.14.3 Corrosion protection , 181
7.14.4 Mechanical protection 181
7.14.5 Use of aluminium 181
7.15 Form and size 184

7.15.1 Air termination 184
7.15.2 Conductors 185
7.15 J Earth termination 185
7.15.4 Minimum dimension 185
7.16 Air termination 185

7.16.1 General 185
7.16.2 Support 185
7.16.3 Metallic projections 185
7.16.4 Metallic materials 186
7.16.5 Structure within zone .of protection ' 186
7.16.6 Air termination on roof 186
7.16.7 Air termination on reinforced concrete structure 186
VI
!
7.17 Down conductor , , 186
7,17.1 General " , ' 186
7.17.2 Routing , 187
7,17.3 Recommended number ,., 187
7.17.4 Mechanical protection 187
7.17.5 Corrosive soil .....•............................... 187
7.17.6 External routes not available , , .. , " 187
7.17 .7 Lift shafts , ,,. , 188
7.17.8 Re-entrant loops . , '.' 188
7.17,9 Sharp bends , 188
7.17.10 Bonding to prevent side flashing 188
7.1 7.11 Bonds ' 188
7.17.12 Testpoints , : 189
7.18 Earth termination ..........................•............ 190
7.18.1 Termination, , , 190

7.18,2 Resistance to earth , ' , , . 190
7.18.3 Earth electrodes. , , , . , .. , , . , .. , 190
7.18.4 Connection point .. ,.".', , , , 190
7.19 Common earthing :., , 192
7.19.1 Common earth potential , 192

7.19.2 Common earth bonding , . , . 192
7.20 Use of reinforcement for earthing in concrete Structures .. , .. : .. , 193

7.20.1 General, , , ,', . , . , , ,, 193
7.20.2 Electrical continuity . , . , ,, , .. , , , .. , .. 193
-7.20.3 Prestressed concrete members ' , 193
7.20.4 Precast concrete members "" .. , .. 193
7.21 Structural ~teel framing for lightning protection , ".,. 194

7.21.1 General '.' ' " . , . 194
7.21.2 Air termination ,.,., 194
7.21.3 Connection ' , 194
7.21.4 Earthing .. , , , 194
7.21.5 Interconnection , ,., ' 194
Annex (Informative)
Annex A - System design 219
Annex B - Consultation , .. , 220
VII
Section 8 Wiring Methods
8.1 Scope ······················ 223

8.2 Normative reference 223
8.3 General requirements 223
8.3.1 Methods of-installatiOns 223
8.3.2 Wiring in ducts and plenum chambers , 224
8.3.3 Underground installations 224
8.3.4 Conductors in hoistways 225
8.4 Conductors ······················ 226

8.4.1 Types of conductors 226
8.4.2 Radii of bends in conductors 226
8.4.3 Conductor joints and splices 227
8.4.4 Supporting of conductors 228
8.5 Open wiring 228
8.5.1 Open and clipped direct 228

8.5.2 Spacing of conductors 228
8.5.3 Conductor supports 229
8.5.4 Spacing of supports 22?
8.6 Exposed wiring on exterior of buildings and between Buildings on the same premises 229
8.6.1 Location of conductors 229
8.6.2 Clearance of conductors 229
8.6.3 Power supply conductors 229
8.7 Bare bus bars and risers 230

8.8 Installation of boxes, cabinets, outlets and terminal fittings 230
8.8.1 Number of outlets per circuit 230
8.8.2 Outlet boxes 231
8.8.3 Conductors in boxes 231
8.8.4 Terminal fittings , ·231
8.9 Cables, conductors and wiring methods 232
Annex A (Normative): Schedule of methods of installation of cables 233
VIII
Section ® Protection and Control
9.1 Scope 237

9.2 Normative references ' 237
9.3.1 Protective and control devices 237
9.3.2 Types and ratings of protective and control devices 238
; 9.4 Protective devices 238

./I
9.4.1 Overcu.rrent devices 238
9.4.2 Earth fault protection 239
9.5 Fuses 240

9.6 Circuit breakers 240
9.7 Control devices 240
9.8 Switches 241
9.9 Protection and control of miscellaneous apparatus 241
Section 10 Class 1 and Class 2 Circuits
10.1 Scope 245

10.2 Normative references 245'
10.3 Classification .10. ••••••••••••••••••••• \ •••••••• 245
10.3.1 General 245
10.3.2 Class 1 extra-low-voltage power circuits 246
10.3.3 Class 2 low-energy power circuits 246
10.3.4 Hazardous location 246
10.3.5 Circuits to safety control devices 246
10.3.6 Circuits in communication cables \ 246
10.4 Class 1 circuits 247

10.4.1 Limitation of Class 1 circuits 247
10.4.2 Methods of installation for Class 1 circuits 247
10.4.3 Overcurrent protection of Class 1 circuits 247
10.4.4 Location of overcurrent devices in Class 1 circuits .; 247
10.4.5 Class I extra-low-voltage power circuit ~ources including Transfonners . 248
10.4.6 Conductor material and sizes 248
10.4.7 Insulated conductors for Class 1 wiring " 248
10.4.8 Conductors of different circuits in the ,same enclosure, cable, or Raceway 248
10.4.9 Mechanical protection of remote-control circuits 249
10.4.10 Class 1 circuits extending aerially beyond a building 249
IX
10.5 Class 2 circuits , 249
10.5.1 Limitations of Class 2 circuits 249
10.5.2 Methods of installation on supply side of overcurrent protection or
Transformers or other devices for Class 2 circuits 250
10.5.3 Marking 250
10.5.4 Overcurrent protection for Class 2 circuits 250
10.5.5 Location of over current devices '" 251
10.5.6 Conductors for Class 2 circuit wiring 251
10.5.7 Separation of Class 2 circuit conductors from other circuits 251
10.5.8 Conductors of different Class 2 circuits in the same cable, enclosure, or
raceway 252
10.5.9 Penetration ofa fire separation 252
10.5.10 Conductors in vertical shafts and hoistways ; . 252
10.5.11 Class 2 conductors and equipment in ducts and plenum chambers .. 252
10.5.12 Equipment located on the load side of overcurrent protection, transformers, or
current-limiting devices for Class 2 circuits , , , 252
10.5.13 Class 2 circuits extending beyond a building 253
10.5.14 Underground installations , , 253
Section 11 Installation of Electrical Equipment
11.1 Scope 254

11.2 Normative references , .. , 254
11.3 General , 254
11.3.1 Fusible equipment ' 254
11.3.2 Connection to identified terminals or leads 25~
11.3.3 Equipment over combustible surfaces 255
11.3.4 Installation of ventilated enclosures , ". 255
11.3.5 Outdoor installations 255
11.4 Electric heating and cooking appliances 255

11.4.1 Location of non-portable appliances 255
11.4.2 Rating of portable appliances 255
11.4.3 Appliance exceeding 1500w 256
11.5 Heatingequipment ; , 256

11.6 Submersible pumps 256
11.7 Motors and associated ,circuits 257
11.7.1 Wiring methods and conductors 257
11.7.2 Overcurrent protection 260
11.7.3 Overload and overheating protection 262
11.7.4 Undervoltage protection ~ 265
11.7.5 Control 266
11.7.6 Disconnecting means 267
x
11.8 Air conditioning and refrigerating equipment '.' 268
11.8.1 General 268
11.82 Branch circuit 268
11.8.4 Supply cords , 269
11.9 Storage batteries ',' 269

11.9.1 Location of storage batteries 269
11.9.2 Ventilation of battery rooms or areas 269
11.9.3 Battery vents 269
11.9.4 Battery instillatio~ ' 269
11.9.5 Wiring ; .......•... 270
Section 12 Hazardous Locations
12.1 Scope , ; 279

12.2 Nonnative reference 279
12.3 Classification 279
12.3.1 Division of Class I locations ...............•............ 279
12.3.2 Division of Class II locations 280
12.3.3 Division of Class III locations 281

12.4.1 Electrical equipment 281
12,.4.2 Marking .. " 282
12.4.J Non-essential electrical equipment 283
12.4.4 Equipment rooms ' 283
12.4.5 Cable trays ; 284
12.5 Class I locations 284

12.5.1 Installations in Class I, Division 1 locations 284
. 12.5.2 Installat~ons in Class I, Division 2 locations 286
12.6 Class II locations '.' 287

12.6.1 Installations in Class II, Division 1 locations 287
12.6.2 Installation in Class II, Division 2 locations ...............• ~ 289
12.7 Class III locations 290

12.7.1 Installations in Class III, Division 1 locations 290
12.7.2 Installations in Class III; Division 2 locations 293
XI
Section 13 Fhimmable Liquid Dispensing and Service Stations, Garages, Bulk Storage
Plants, Finishing Processes and Aircraft Hangars
13.1 Scope 294

13.3 Gasoline dispensing and service stations 295
13.3.1 Hazardous areas 295
13.3.2 Wiring and equipment within hazardous areas 296
13.3.3 Wiring and equipment above hazardous areas 297
13.4 Commercial garages, repairs and storage 297

13.4.1 Hazardous areas 297
13.4.2 Wiring and equipmentin hazardous areas 298
13.4.3 Wiring above hazardous areas 298
13.4.4 EqUIpment above hazarqous areas 298
13.5 Residential storage garages 298

13.5.1 Non-hazardous location. 0 0 •••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 298
13.5.2 Hazardous location . ; 299
13.5.3 Wiring : 299
13.6 Bulk storage plants ' 299

13.6.1 , Hazardous areas : . , .. 0 .' ••••••••••••••••••••• 299
13.6.2 Wiring and' eq~ipment in hazardol,ls areas 302
13.6.3 Wiring and equipment above hazardous areas 302
13.7 Finishing processes 0' •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 302

13.7:1 Hazardous locations ,0 ••• ·•..•• ; •••••••.••.••••...... 302
13.7.2 Wiring and' equipment in hazardous areas 304
13.7.3 Wiring and equipment aqove .hazardous areas .. 0 •• 0 ••••••••• 305
13.8 Aircraft; hangars .:. 0 •••• 0 •••••••••• o' 0 ••• 0 ••••••••••••••••• 305
13.8.1 Hazardous . areas.. .. ... 0 .' .' ••••• 0 ••••• '. 0 •• \ • , ' ••••••••••••• 305
13.8.2 Wiring .and equipment in ,hazardous 'areas ... '0' o. : 0 •••••••••• 306
13.8.3 Wiring not within' hazardous area. " '.' 0.' •••• 0 ••••••••••••• 306
13.8.4 Equipment-not within hazardous' areas 0 ••••••••••••••••••• 307
Section 14' Patient Care' Areas
14.1 Scope· , 0 ••• ' ••••• ,; •••••••••• 0 • , •••• 0 ••••••••••••• 308

14.2 Nonnative references ' : , 308
XII
14.3 Definitions 308'
14.4 Circuits in basic care areas 31 i
14.4.1 Branch circuits '...•.. 311
14.4.2 Bonding to earth in basic-care areas ,311
14.4.3 Socket outlets in basic-care areas ' '.' .: ' 312
14.5 Circuits in intermediate and critical-care areas 313
14.5.1 Branch circuits 313

14.5.2 Bonding to earth in intermediate and critical-care areas '.' 313
14.5.3 Receptacles in intermediate-and critical-care areas 313
14.6 Isolated systems ' 314

14.6.1 Sources of supply " , 314
14.6.2 Single-phase isolated circuits , : 314
14.6.3 Three-phase isolated systems \ 315
14.7 Essential electrical systems ' 315

14.7.1 Circuits in essential electrical systems .. ,\ ~ 315
14.8 Transfer switches ,' 316

14.9 Emergency supply , 316
Section 15 Installation of Lighting Equipment
15.1 Scope : 3 18
15.2 Normative references " , . :.' .. '.' . " 318
15.3 Interior lighting :quipment : '.' , . '.. ~.~.. , 318
15.3.1 General ' ' 318
15.3.2 Location of lighting equipment· ..........•.............. 320
15.3.3 Installation. of ligpting equipment ' 323
15.3.4 Wirin~ of lighting. equipment .' ~ 323
15.3.5 Earthing of-lighting equipment :." 326
15.3.6 Electric-discharge lighting systems operating at 1000V or less 326
·15.4 q~tdoor lighting equipment '.' ., , 327

15..4.1 General, : 327
15.4.2: Permanent outdoor floodlighting installation ; 328
1,5.4.3 'Exposedwirin~ for permanent outdoor lighting 331
Annex A (Normative) .' ; .. , 334
XIII
Section 16 Fire Alarm System and Fire. Pumps
16.1 Scope , , ' ,:,. ~ , ,, 344

16.2 Normative references , , 344
16.3 Definitions ",., -,' ,, ., , , . , .....•... ,' 344
16.4 Design consideration
, .. , . ~ , , .. : , .. , 346
. . '.
16.4.1 General , , , .. , . , , , 346·

..
16.4.2·<Circuit design ,., .. , , , , 347 -
16.4.3 Manual call points ., , , , , .. , . .'., 348,'

16.4.4 Selection of fITe detectors , ': , , .. , -. , 349
16.4.5 Sitting of detectors ,."" .. ,." .. '., '.' 350
16.4.6 Sitting of heat' sensitive (point) detectors, .... , .. , '. , , . , '. , , . , , 35 i
16.4.7 Vibration combined with rapid temperature change .. '.' , , , .. 353
16.4.8 Sitting ofheat-sensitive.(line) detectors. , . , .... , ., , ; " .. ~54
16.4.9 Sitting of smoke-sensitive detectors ... ,.,.".,.:.""., .• 354
16.4.10 Audible and visual alarms , .,,, ., , . , . , , .. , . 354
16.5 Cables and wiring .,' .. ,.,., ,., ', .. , , ,,·356_

16,5.1 Cables" ,-.. ,-.,., , . .-,- , .. , , 356
16.5.2 Wiring method .. , . , . , ,., , ,. , , ,., , , , , 357
16.6 Equipment bonding .... , ... , , , .. , , .. , .. .' . , .. , , , , . ", . , 359,

16.6.1 Exposed non-current carrying'metal P¥t , , , 359
16.6.2 Bonding conductor .. , ., ,.. ,." .. , ,', .. ", .. 35~,
16.7 Power supply system .. , , .. .' . , 359

16.7.1 Operating voltage, , , , .,., , ., , 359
16.7.2 Sources of power . , , , , .. , , , 359,
16.7.3 Current supply , , , , 360
16..8 Fire pumps -, . , , , '. , . , , . , . , 361

16.8.1 Conductors , .. ,., , .. , 361
16.8.2 Wiring method , . , .. , . , . , ,. , , , 361
16.8,3 Consumers' service mr fire pumps , , . , .. , , .. , , , , . , , 361
16.8.4 Protection , , , .. ,., .. , 362
Annex A (Informative) , ,.,. 363

_Annex B (Informative) , , . 365
XIV
, '
Section 17 Signs and Outline Lighting
..17.1 "' Scope· ' 371

17.3 .1' Construction 371

17.3.3 Rating of.disconnecting means and control devices 3 /2
17.3.4 Thermal protection ' 372
17.3.5 Branch. circuit capacity ' 372
17.3.6 Location ,': .'. : 372
17.3.7 Bonding ' ' 373
17.3.8 Protection of sign leads ' '.' 373
17.3.9 Installation of conductors :' ' : . '
373
17.3.10 Fuseholders and flashers ' 373
17.4 High-voltage luminous discharge tube signs and outline Lighting ' 373
17.4.1 Enclosure .' ~ . '.. : .. '.: .. , ; .. 373
17.4.2 Protection of uninsulat.edpart : , 374
17.4.3 Transformers : ' : .. 374
17.4.4 High-voltage wiring methods '.< 375
Section 18 Lifts, Escalators and Similar Equipment
18.1 Scope : .. ~ " .' . '.' ' : : 377

18.2 Normative references ,".. , ,,''' 377
18.3 General : " : : 377

18.3.1 Voltage limitation ' 3i7
18.3.2 Live parts enclosed,: ' 377
18..4 Conductors , , '

378
18.4.1 Installation of conductors 378
18.4.2 Minimum size of conductors 378
18.4.3 Motor circuit conductors 379
18.5 Wiring : 379

18.5.1 Wiring methods 379
18.5.2 Branch circuits for auxiliary systems 380
xv
18.6 Installation of conductors ' 380
18.6.1 Number of conductors in raceway ~ 380
18.6.2 Supports 380
18.6.3 Different systems in one raceway or travelling cable , 380
18.6.4 Wiring in hoistway 381
18.6.5 Electric equipment in garages and similar occupancies 381
18.6.6 Sidewalk lifts 381
18.7 Travelling cables 381

" 18.7.1 Suspension ~,_ 381
18.7.2 Hazardousjclassified) location 382
18.7.3 Protection against damage 382
18.7.4 Installation 382
18.8 Disconnecting means and control 382

18.8.1 General ················ 382
18.8.2 Type : 383
18.8.3 Location \ 383
18.8.4 Phase protection , 383
18.9 Overcurrent protection .. ~ ; 383

18.9.1 Control and opet~lting circuits 383
18.9.2 Motors 384
18.10 Machine room ; 384

18.10.1 Guarding equipment 384
18.10.2 Clearance around control panels and disconnecting means 384
18.11 Earthing " 384

18.11.1 Metal raceway attached to cars 384
18.11.2 Electric lifts 385
18.11.3 Non-electric lifts 385
18.11.4 Method of bonding 385
18.12 Overspeed , 385

18.12.1 Overspeedprotection 385
18.12.2 Motor-generator overspeed device 386
18.13 Emergency power 386

18.13.1 Supply ················· 386
18.13.2 Disconnection 386
18.13.3 Hydraulic lifts disconnecting means 386
XVI
18.14 Machine rooms and hoistway pits lighting and Auxiliary 386
18.14.1 Machine room 386
llU4.2 Hoist pits 387
Section 19 Theatrelnstallation
19.1 Scope ; 388

19.3 Wiring method 388
19.4 Fixed stage switchboard ' 389
19.4.1 Fuses 389
19.4.2 Overcurrent protection :: 389
19.4.3 Dimmers 390
19.4-4 Control of stage and gallery pockets : 390
19.4.5 Conductors 390
19.5 Portable switchboard on stage 391

19.5.1 Construction of portable switchboards 391
19.5.2 Supply for portable switchboard 391
19.6 Fixed stage equipment 391

19.6.1 Footlights 391
19.6.2 Metal work 391
19.6.3 Clearance at terminals 392
19.6.4 Mechanical protection of lamps in borders, etc 392
19.6.5 Suspended fixtures 392
19.6.6 Connections at lampholders 392
19.6.7 Ventilationfor mogullampholers, ~ 392
19.6.8 Conductor insulation for field-assembled fixtures 392
19.6.9 Branch circuit overcurrenf protection 392
19.6.10 Pendant lights rated more than lOOW 393
19.6.11 Cables for border lights 393
19.6.12 Wiring to arc pockets 393
19.6.13 Socket outlets and plugs 393
19.6.14 Curtain motors 394
19.6.15 Flue damper control 394
19.7 Portable stage equipment 394

19.7.1 Fixtures on scenery 394
19.7.2 String or festooned lights , - 395
19.7.3 Flexible conductors fr?m portable equipment 395
19.7.4 Portable equipment for stage effects 395
XVII
Section 20 Emergency Systems, Unit Equipment, and Exit Signs
20.1 Scope 396

20.2 Normative reference 396
20.3 General 396
20.3.1 Adequate capacity 396
20.3.2 Instruction 397
20.3.3 Batteries maintenance 397
20.3.4 Lamps 397
20.3.5 Circuits 397
20.3.6 Method of wiring 397
20.4 Emergency systems 398

20.4.1 Supply 398
20.4.2 Control 398
20.4.3 Overcurrent protection 398
20.4.4 Audible and visual trouble-signal devices 398
20.5 Unit equipment 399

20.5.1 Mounting ,.. ' 399
20.5.2 Supply connections 400
20.6 Exit signs 401

20.6.1 Power supply 40 I
20.6.2 Wiring 401
Section 21 Motion Picture Studios, Projection Rooms, Film Exchanges and Factory
21.1 Scope 402

21.3 General 402
21.3.1 Wiring method 402
21.4 Viewing, cutting and patching table fixture 403

21.5 Film-vaults and storage rooms 403
21.5.1 Equipment in film vaults and storage rooms 403
21.5.2 Wiring method in film-vaults 403
21.5.3 Lighting fixtures in film-vaults 403
21.5.4 Film-vault circuits 404
XVIII
~_. ------ ~I
21.6 Motion picture projection rooms .. i ••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 404
21.6.1 Lamps in projection rooms 404
21.6.2 Arc lamp current supply 404
21.6.3 Ventilation 404
21.7 Motors and generators 404
Section 22 Diagnostic Imaging Installation
22.1 Scope 405

22.2 Nonnative references " 405
22.4 High-voltage guarding 406
22.5 Connections to supply circuit 406
22.6 Disconnecting means 406
22.7 Transfonners and capacitors ; 407
22.8 Control 407
22.9 Ampacity of supply conductors and rating of overclirrent protection 408
22.10 Bonding 408
Section 23 Electrical Communication Systems
23.1 Scope - 409

23:2 Nonnative reference 409
23.3 General 409
23.3.1 Circuits in communication cables 409
23.3.2 Hazardous locations 410
23.3.3 Approved transfonners 410
23.4 Inside conductors 410

23.4.1 Conductors arrangement 410
23.4.2 Insulation 410
23.4.3 Earthing conductors with an outer metal covering 410
23.4.4 Separation from other conductors 410
23.4.5 Penetration of a fire separation 411
23.4.6 Communication cable in hoistways 411
23.4.7 Communication conductors in ducts and plenum chambers 4.12
23.4.8 Data processing systems 412
23.4.9 Conductors under raised floors _ 412
23.4.10 Conductors in concealed installations 412
23.4.11 Type CFC under-carpet wiring system 413
XIX
23.5 Equipment 414
23.5.1 Communication equipment in bathrooms 414
23.5.2 Equipment in air ducts, plenums, or suspended ceilings 414
23.5.3 Exposed equipment and terminations : 415
23.5.4 Earth circuits 415
23.5.5 Communication systems in hospitals 415
23.6 Outside conductors 415

23.6.1 Overhead conductors on poles 415
23.6.2 Overhead conductor$ on roofs ~ 415
23.6.3 Lightning conductors 416
23.6.4 Swimming pools 416
23.7 Underground circuits ; 416

23.7.1 Direct buried systems " l . 416
23.7.2 Underground raceway '~ 417
23.8' Earthing 417

23.8.1 Bonding of cable sheath ." : 417
23.8.2 Cable-sheath bonding conductor - A18
23.8.3 Earthing electrode '.. 418
23.8A Earthing electrode connection : 419
23.8.5 Bonding of electrodes 419
Section 24.. Community Antenna Installation For Radio And television Reception
. 24.1 Scope ",: :.~ 420.

24.2 Normative references'.: 420
24.3 Technical requirements' 421
24.3.1 Mechanical· 421
24.3.2 Electrical 421
24.4 Equipment 421

24.4.1 Community antenna distribution amplifiers and other power sources . 421
24.4.2 Exposed equipment and terminations 422
24.4.3 Equipment earthing 422
24.5 Community antenna distribution network : 422

24.5.1 Conductor 422
24.5.2 Voltage limitation 422
24.5.3 Hazardous locations 423
xx
\
24.5.4 Supports 423
24.5.5 Earthing of outer conductive shield'of a coaxial cable 423
24.5.6 Earthing conductor 423
24.5.7 Earthing electrode 424
24.5.8 Earthing electrode connection 424
24.6 Conductors within buildings ~ ; ;' 42~

24.6.1 Separation from other.~onductors '" ..• ; ; .424
24.6.2 Conductors ina vertical shaft .. ; . ; .......•......... , 425
24.6.3' Penetration of aJire separation : ' 426
''24.6.4 Commuriityantenna distributionconductorsin ducts and plenum Cambers .. 426'
24.6.5 Raceways ' '.' .............•..... 426
24.7 Conductors outside of buildings : " 426

24.7.1 Overhead conductors on poles ; 426 .
24.7.2 Overhead conductors on roofs ',' 426
24.7.3 Conductors on buildings ..................•........... 426
24.7.4 Conductors entering buildings 427
24.7.5 Swimming pools ' '. 427
24.8 Underground conductors , .•......................... 427

. 24.8.1 Direct buried systems ' ; '~ 427
24.8.2 Underground raceway ................•.•............. 428
. 24.8.3 . Underground bluck dIstribution 429
24.9 Lightning arresters for receiving stations 429

24.9.1
.,
Lightning arrester 429
24.94 Earthing conductor 429
.24.9.3 Earthing electrode 430
Annex A (Informative) 431

---
Section 25 Swimming Pools,· Fountains and Similar Installations
25.1 Scope ' 446

25.2 Normative reference ' 446
25.4 General 447
25.4.1 Equipment installation 447
25.4.2 Overhead wiring 448
25.4.3 Underground wiring 448
XXI
25.4.4 Bonding to earth 449
25.4.5 Junction and deck boxes 450
25.4.6 Transformers and transformer enclosure 451
25.4.7 Socket outlets 452
25.4.8 Luminaries and lighting equipment 452
25.4.9 Earth-fault circuit breakers 454
25.5 Permanently installed swimming pools 455

25.5.1 General 455
25.5.2 Conduit type 455
25.5.3 Circuit segregation 455
25.5.4 Drainage 455
25.6 Storable swimming pools 455

25.6.1 Electrical equipment 455
25.6.2 Pumps ' 456
25.7 Hydromassage bathtub 456

25.7.1 Protection 456
25.7.2 Control 456
25.7.3 Other electric equipment 457
25.8 Spas and hot tubs 457

25.8.1 Bonding to earth 457
25.8.2 Controls and other electrical equipment 457
25.8.3 Leakage current ~ 458
25.8.4 Field-assembled units 458
Annex A (Informative) 460
Section 26 Graphical Symbols
26.1 Scope 462

26.3 Definitions ··········· 462
XXII
26.4 Symbols 463
Annex A - (Infonnative) 470
Annex B - (Infonnative) 471
Appendices
Appendix I Inspection and testing A-I

Appendix 2 Fonns of completion and inspection certificate A-9
XXIII
ECTION 1
SCOPE AND DEFINITIONS
1.1 SCOPE
(1) This Code applies to the design, selection, erection, ~nspection and testing of electrical
installations for residential, commercial, public and industrial premises including prefabricated
buildings, construction sites, exhibitions, fairs and other temporary installations up to and
including lOOO.OY a.c. or I500.0Y d.c.
(2) This Code does not apply to:
a) electric traction equipment,

b) electrical equipment of automobiles,
c) electrical equipment on board ships,
d) electrical equipment in aircraft,
e) public street-lighting installations,
f) installations in mines,
g) radio interference suppression equipment, except so far as it affects safety of the
installation,
h) fixed wiring for telecommunication, signalling, control and the like,
i) internal wiring- of apparatus,
j) systems for distribution of energy to the public, or power generation and transmission
for such systems.
1.2 NORMATIVE REFERENCES
(I) The following references contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute
provisions of the Ethiopian Building Code Standards on Electrical Installation of Buildings.
a) IEC 364-1:1972 Electrical Installations of Building, Part 1, Scope, Object and

Definitions.
1 EBCS-10 1995 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF BUILDINGS
b) lEC 50:1982 International Electrotechnical Vocabulary.
c) BS 7671:1992 Requirements for Electrical Installations, lEE Wiring Regulations,

Sixteenth Edition.
d) C 22.1:1992 Canadian Electrical Code, Part I, Safety Standard for Electrical

Installations, Sixteenth Edition.
(2) At the time of publication of this Building Code Standard, the editions indicated were valid.
All references are subject to revisions, and parties to agreement and based on this Ethiopian
Building Code Standard are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent
editions of the references indicated below. The Ethiopian Authority for Standardization
maintains registers of a number of foreign national and international standards.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
(1) For the purpose of this Code, the following definitions shall apply.
acceptable acceptable to the Authority enforcing this Code.
accessible (as applied to wiring methods) not permanently closed in by the structure or
finish of the building and capable of being
removed without disturbing the building
structure or finish.
. accessory a device, other than current-using equipment,

associated with such equipment or with the
wiring of an installation.
ambient temperature the temperature of the air or other medium

where the equipment is to be used.
ampacity a steady value of current which can be carried

by a conductor under specified conditions
without its steady state temperature exceeding
a specified value.
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD EBCS-10 1995 2

SECTION 1: SCOPE AND DEFINITIONS
appliance an item of current-using equipment other than a luminaire or

an independent motor.
arms's reach a zone of accessibility to touch, extending from any point on

a surface where persons usually stand or move about, to the
limits which a person can reach with his hand in any direction
without assistance.
barrier a part providing a defined degree of protection against contact

with live parts, from any usual direction of access.
basic insulation insulation applied to live parts to provide basic protection

against electric shock and exclusively for functional purposes.
bonding conductor a protective conductor providing equipotential bonding.
branch circuit that portion of the wiring installation between the final
overcurrent device protecting the circuit and the outlet(s).
building void, accessible a space within the structure or the components of a building
accessible only at certain points.
building void, non-accessible a space within a structure or the components of a building

which has no ready means of access. (
)
bunched cables cables are said to be bunched when two or more are contained
within a single conduit, duct, ducting, or trunking or, if not
enclosed, are not separated from each other by a specified
distance.
bus a conductor which serves as a common connection for the

corresponding conductors of two or more circuits.
busway .a raceway -consisting of metal troughing (including elbows,

tees, crosses, in addifion to straight runs) containing
conductors, the conductors being supported on insulators.

cabinet an enclosure of adequate mechanical strength, composed entirely of

noncombustible and absorption-resistant material, designed either
for surface or flush mounting, and provided with a frame, mat, or
trim, in which swinging doors are hung.
cable bracket a horizontal cable support system, consisting of elements fixed at

one end only, spaced at intervals along the length of the cable and
on which the cable rests.
cable channel an enclosure situated above or in the ground, ventilated or closed,

and having dimensions which do not permit the access of persons
but allow access to the conductors and/or cables throughout their
length during and after installation. A cable channel mayor may
not form part of the building construction.
cable cleat a component of a support system, which consists of elements

spaced at intervals along the length of the cable or conduit.
cable coupler a means of enabling the connection or disconnection, at will, of two

flexible cables. It consists of a connector and a plug.
cable ducting a manufactured enclosure of metal or insulating material, other than

conduit or cable trunking, intended for the protection of cables
which are drawn-in after erection of the ducting ..
cable ladder a cable support consisting of a series of supporting elements rigidly

fixed to main supporting members. The supporting elements
occupy less than 10% of the plan area.
cable tray a cable support consisting of a continuous base with raised edges
and no covering. A cable tray is considered to be non-perforated,
where less than 30% of the material is removed from the base.
cable trunking a manufactured enclosure for the protection of cables, normally of

rectangular cross-section, of which one side is removable or hinged.
4 EBCS-1 0 1995 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

cable tunnel an enclosure (corridor) containing supporting structures

for conductors and/or cables and joints and whose
dimensions allow persons to pass freely throughout the
entire length.
cartridge fuse link a device comprising a fuse element or several fuse

elements connected in parallel enclosed in a cartridge
usually filled with arc-extinguishing medium and
connected to terminations. See fuse link.
circuit an assembly of electrical equipment supplied from the

same origin and protected against overcurrent by the
same protective device(s).
circuit-breaker a device capable of making, carrying and breaking

normal load currents and also making and automatically
breaking, under predetermined conditions, abnormal
currents such as short-circuit currents. It is usually
required to operate infrequently although some types
are suitable for frequent operation.
circuit-breaker (linked) a circuit-breaker the contacts of which are so arranged

as to make or break all poles simultaneously or in a
definite sequence.
circuit protective conductor (CPC) a protective conductor connecting exposed conductive

parts of equipment to the main earthling terminal.
Class I equipment equipment in which protection against electric shock

does not rely on basic insulation only, but which
includes means for the connection of exposed
conductive parts to a protective conductor in the fixed
wiring of the installation.
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD EBCS-1 0 1995 5

ELECTRICAL INSTALLAtiON OF eUILDINGS
Class II equipment 'equipment in which protection against electric shock

does not rely on basic insulation only, but in which
additional safety precautions such as supplementary
J
insulation ate provided, there being no provision for the

connection of exposed metalwork of the equipment to
a protective conductor, and no refianc-e upon
precautions to be taken in the fixed wiring of the
installation.
conduit a part of a closed wiring system for cables in electrical

installati()fis, allowing them to be drawn in and/or
replaced, but not inserted laterally.
cutren/-permit a written petrfiission from Authority having jurisdiction

to a supply authority to the effect that electric energy
may be supplied to a particular installation.
conneC/or the part of a cable coupler or of an appliance coupler

which is prOVided with female contacts and is intended
to be attached to the end of the flexible cable remote
from the supply.
contractor any person who as principal, servant or agent, by

himself or his 'associates, employees, servants or agents
perfOIinS or engages to perform either for his own use
and berrefit Or for that of 'another and for o-r without
remunefation or gain any work with respect to any
electrical installation or any other work to which this
Code applies.
current-carrying capacity of a conductor the maximum current which can be carned by a

cowductot under specified conditions without its steady
state temperature exceeding a specified value.
cu"ent-usmg equipment equipment which converfs electrical energy into another

form of energy, such as light, heat, or motive power.

SECTIQN 1: SCQPE AND DEFINITIONS
danger risk of injury to persons (and livestock where expected to be

present) from:
a) fire, electric shock, and bums arising from the use of electrical
energy;
b) mechanical movement of electric~lly controlled equipment, in
so far as such danger is intended to be prevented by electrical
emergency switching or by ~lectrical ~witching for mechanical
maintenance of nop-electrical parts of such equipment.
design c14rrent (of a circuit) the magnitude of the current (r.m.s. valll,e for a.c.) to be carried by
the circuit in normal service.
direct contact contact of perSOnSor livestock with live parts which may result in
electric shock.
distribution board an assembly containing switching or prote~tive devices (e.g. fuses

or circuit-breakers) associated with one or more outgoing circuits
fed from one or more incoming circuits, together with tenninals for
the neutral arid protective circuit conductors. it may also include
signalling and other control devices. Means of isolation may be
includ~d in the board Qr may be provided s~parately.
distribution circuit circuit cQnn~cting the origin of the installation to:
a) an item of switchgear,
b) an item of controlgear, or
c) a distribution board
to which one or more final circuits or items of current usmg

equipment are connected. (~ee also final circuit.)
A distribution circuit may also connect the origin of an installation

to an outlying building or separate installation, when it is
sometimes called a sub-main.
double insulation insulation comprising both basic insulation and supp'lementary

insulation.

duct a closed passageway formed underground or in a structure and

intende~ to receive one or more cables which may be drawn in.
ducting (see cable ducting)
earth the conductive mass of the Earth, whose electric potential at any
point is conventionally taken as zero.
earth electrode a conductor or group of conductors in intimate contact with, and

providing an electrical connection to, earth.
earth electrode resistance the resistance of an earth electrode to earth.
earth-fault current a fault current which flows to earth.
earth-fault loop impedance the impedance of the earth-fault current loop starting and ending at
the point of earth fault. The earth fault loop comprises the
followiBg, starting at the point of fault:
(a) the circuit protective conductor;
(b) the consumer's earthing terminal and earthing conductor;
(c) the earth return path;
(d) the path through the earthen neutral point of the transformer
and the transformer winding; and the phase conduCtor from the
transformer to the point of fault.
earth-leakage current a current which flows to extraneous-conductive-parts, in a circuit

which is electrically sound. This current may have a capacitive
component including that resulting from the deliberate use of
capacitors.
earthen equipotential zone a zone within which exposed-conductive-parts and extraneous-

conductive-parts are maintained at substantially the same potential
by bonding, such that, under fault conditions, the differences in
potential between simultaneously accessible exposed and
extraneous-conductive-parts will not cause electric shock.
earthing the act of connecting the exposed-conductive parts of an installation

to the main earthing terminal of an installation.
-- -- --------~---------------------'---
earthing conductor a protective conductor connecting the main earthing terminal

of an installation to an earth electrode or to other means of
earthing.
electric shock a dangerous physiological effect resulting from the passing of

an electric current through a human body or livestock.
electrical equipment any item for such purposes as generation, conversion,

transmission, distribution or utilization of electrical energy,
such as machines, transformers, apparatus, measuring
instruments, protective devices, wiring materials, accessories,
appliances and luminaries.
electrical installation an assembly of associated electrical equipment supplied from

a common origin to fulfil a specific purpose and having certain
coordinated characteristics.
electrically independent earth electrodes earth electrodes located at such a distance from one another
that the maximum current likely to flow through one of them
does not significantly affect the potential of the other(s).
)
electrode boUer, electrode water heater equipment for the electrical heating of water or electrolyte by
the passage of an electric current between electrodes immersed
in the water or electrolyte.
emergency stopping emergency switching intended to stop a dangerous movement.
emergency switching rapid cutting off of electrical energy to remove any unexpected
hazard to persons, livestock, or property.
enclosure a part providing an appropriate degree of protection of

equipment against certain external influences and a defined
degree of protection against contact with live parts from any
direction.
equipment (abbr., see electrical equipment).

equipotential bonding electrical connection maintainirig various exposed-conductive-parts

at substantially the same potential.
equipotential zone (see earthen equipotential zone).
exposed-conductive-part a conductive part of equipment which can be touched and which is

not a live part but which may become live under fault conditions.
external influence any influence external to an electrical installation which affects the
design and safe operation of that installation.
extraneous-conductive-part a conductive part liable to introduce a potential, •generally earth

potential, and not forming part of the electrical installation.
fault a circuit condition in which current flows through an abnormal or

unintended path. This may result from an insulation failure or the
bridging of insulation. Conventionally the impedance between live
conductors or between live conductors and exposed or extraneous-
conductive-parts at the fault position is considered negligible.
fault current a current resulting' from a fault.
feeder a conductor or group of conductors that transmit electrical energy

from a service supply, transformer, switchboard; distribution centre,
'generator, or other source of supply to branch circuit overcurrent
device.
final circuit a circuit connected directly to current-using equipment, or to a

socket-outlet or socket-outlets or other outlet points for the
connection of such equipment.
fIXed equipment equipment fastened to a support or otherwise secured in specific

location.
flexible wiring system a wiring system designed to provide mechanical flexibility in use
without degradation of the electrical components.

funcJionaJ earthing .
connection to earth necessary for proper functioning of electrical
equipment.
functional extra-Iow volt4ge any extra-low voltage system in which not all of the protective
measures required for SELV have been applied.
fuse a device that by the fusing of one or more of its specially designed
and proportioned components, opens the circuit in which it is
inserted by breaking ther current when this exceeds a give~ value
for a sufficient time. The fuse comprises all the parts that form the
complete device.
fuse element a part of a fuse designed to melt when the fuse operates.
fuse lin~ a part of a fuse, including the fuse element(s), which requires
replacement by a new or renewable fuse link after the fuse has
operated and before the fuse is put back into service.
hot air sauna a room or location in which air is heated to a high temperature and
in which the rekrtive humidity is normally low, rising for short
periods of time only when water is poured over the heater.
indirect contact contact of persons or livestock with exposed-conductive-parts made

live by a fault and which may result in electric shock.
installation (abbr., see electrical installation).
insulation suitable non-conductive material enclosing, surrounding, or

supporting a conductor.
isolation a function intended to cut off for reasons of safety the supply from
all, or a discrete section, of the installation by separating the
installation or section from ~very source of electrical energy.
isoilltor a mechanical switching device which provides the function of

isolation.
ladder (see cable ladder)
ETHIOPIANBUILDING CODE STANDARD EBCS-10 1995 11

live part a conductor or conductive part intended to be energised

in nonnal use, including a neutral conductor.
luminaire bquipment which distributes, filters, or transfonns the

light from one or more lamps, and which includes any
parts necessary for supporting, fixing and protecting the
lamps, but not the lamps themselves, and where
necessary, circuit auxiliaries together with the means
for connecting them to the supply. For the purpose of
the regulations a lamp holder, however, supported is
deemed to be a luminaire.
luminaire supporting coupler (LSC) a means, comprising an LSC outlet and an LSC plug,
providing mecl1a.n-malsupport for a lu.minaire and the
electrical connection to and disconnection from a fixed
wiring installation.
a combination of one or more low-voltage switching

devices together with associated control, measuring
signalling protective, regulating equipment, etc.,
completely assembled under the responsibility of the
manufacturer with all the internal electrical and
mechanical interconnection and structural parts. The
components of the assembly may be electro mechanical
or electronic. The assembly may be either type-tested
or partially type-tested.
main earthing terminal the tenninal or bar provided for the CC/lili".:tlOnof
}lrotective conductors, including equipotential bonding
conductors, and conductors for functional earthing if
any, to the means of earthing.
mechanical maintenance the replacement, refurbishment or cleaning of lamps

and non-electrical parts of equipment, plant and
machinery.
EBCS-1 0 1995 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

neutral conductor a conductor connected to the neutral point of a system and

contributing' to the transmission of electrical energy.
nominal voltage (see voltage, nominal).
obstacle a part preventing unintentional contact with live parts but not
preventing deliberate contact.
origin of an installation the position at which electrical energy is delivered to an electrical

installation.
overcurrent a current exceeding the rated value. For conductors the rated value
is the current-carryingcapacity. \
overcurrent detection a method of establishing that the value of current in a circuit

exceeds a predetermined value for a specified length of time.
overload current an overcurrent occurring in a circuit which is electrically sound.
permit the official written permission of the Authority having jurisdiction

on a form provided for the purpose, authorizing work to be
commenced on any electrical installation.
phase conductor a conductor of an a.c. system for the transmission of electrical

energy other than a neutral conductor. The term also means the
equivalent conductor of a d.c. system unless otherwise specified in
this Code.
plug a device, provided with contact pins, which is intended to be

attached to a flexible cable, and which can be engaged with a
socket-outlet or with a connector.
point a termination of the fixed wiring intended for the connection of

current-using equipment.
portable equipment electrical equipment which is moved while in operation or which

can easily be moved from one place to another while connected to
the supply.

prospective fault current the value of overcurrent at a given point in a circuit resulting from
a fault of negligible impedance between live conductors having a
difference of potential under normal operating conditions, or
between a live' conductor and an exposed-conductive-part.
protective conductor a conductor used for some measures of protection against electric
shock and intended for connecting together any of the following
parts (refer to Figure 1.1):
(a) exposed conductive parts

(b) extraneous conductive parts
(c) the main earthing terminal
(d) earth electrode(s)
(e) the earthen point of the source, or an artificial neutral.
;-
raceway an enclosed channel designed expressly for holding wires, cables,
or busbars, with additional function as permitted in this Code.
reduced low voltage sysiem a system in which the nominal phase to phase voltage does not
exceed 110.0V ahd the nominal phase to earth 'voltage does not
exceed 63.5V.
reinforced insulation single insulation applied to live parts, which proyides a degree of
protection against electric shock equivalent to double insulation
standard .
. 14 EBCS-10 1995 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

4
c
z p
B
Figure 1.1 Enmple of earthing arrangements
1,2,3,4 Protective conductors B Main earthing terminal

.1 circuit protective conductor M Exposed ·conductive part
2 main equipotential bonding conductors C Extraneous conductive part
3 earthing conductOr P Main metallic water pipe
4 supplementary equipotential bonding T Earth electrode
conductors(where required) E Other means of earthing
residual current the vector sum of the instantaneous values of current flowing
through all live conductors of a circuit at a point in the electrical
installation.
residual current device a mechanical switching device or association of devices intended to

cause the opening of the contacts when the residual current attains
a given value under specified conditions.
residual upet'atlng current residual current which causes the residual current device to operate
under specified conditions.
ETHIOPIAN BUIL.DING CODE STANDARD EBCS-10 1995 15

resistance area (for an earth electrode only) the surface area of ground (around an earth electrode)
on which a significant voltage gradient may exist.
restrictive conductive location a location comprised mainly of metallic or conductive

surrounding parts. within which it is likely that a person
will come into contact through a substantial portion of
his body with the conductive surrounding parts and
where the possibility of preventing this contact is
limited.
ring final circuit a final circuit arranged in the form of a ring and
connected to a single point of supply.
safety service an electrical system for electrical equipment provided

to protect or warn persons in the event of a hazard, or
essential to their evacuation from a location.
1iLV an· extra-low voltage system which is electrically

separated from Earth and from other systems in such a
way that a single fault cannot give rise to the risk of
electric shock.
service the conductors and equipment for delivering energy

from the electricity supply system to the wiring system
of the premises served.
shock (see electric shock).
shock current a current passing through the body of a person or

livestock such as to cause electric shock and having
characteristics likely to cause dangerous effects.
short-circuit current an overcurrent resulting from a fault of negligible

impedance between live conductors having a difference
in potential under normal operating conditions.
simultaneously accessible parts conductors or conductive parts which can be touched

simultaneously by a person or, in locations specifically
intended for them, by livestock.
16 EBCS-10 1995 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING"CODESTANDARD

Simultaneously accessible parts may be Live parts, eXPQsed-

conductive-parts, extraneous-conductive-parts, protective
conductors, or earth electrodes.
socket-ouNet a device, provided with female contacts, which is intended to be

installed with the fixed wiring, and intended to receive a plug. A
luminaire track system is not regarded as a socket-outlet system.
spur a branch from a ring final circuit.
stationary equipment electrical equipment which is either fixed, or equipment having a

mass exceeding 18.0kg and not provided with a carrying handle.
supplementary insulation independent insulation applied in addition to basic insulation in

order to provide protection against electric shock in the event of a
failure· of basic insulation.
supply authority any municipal corporation, commission, company or person

supplying electrical power or energy intended for sale or
distribution to the public.
switch a mechanical device capable of making, carrying and breaking

current under .normal circuit conditions, which may· include
specified operating overload conditions, and also of carrying for a
specified time currents under specified abnormal circuit conditions
such as those of short-circuit. It may also be capable of making,
but not breaking, short-circuit currents.
switch, linked a switch the contacts of which are so arranged as to make or break
all poles simultaneously or in a definite sequence.
switchboard an assembly of switchgear with or without instruments, but the term

does not apply to groups of local switches in final circuits.
switchgear an assembly of main and auxiliary switching apparatus for

operation, regulation, protection or other control of an electrical
installation.

system an electrical system consisting of a single source of electrical

energy and an installation. For the purpose of this 'Code, the
.system adopted shall be IT system. A system having one point of
the source of energy directly earthen, the exposed-conductive-parts
of the installation being connected to. earth electrodes electrically
ihdependent of the earth electrodes of the.source, (see Figure 1.2).
temporary supply unit an enclosure containing" equipment for the purpose of taking a
temporary electrical supply safely from an item of street furniture.
trunking (see cable trunking).
voltage, nominal voltage by which an installation (or part of an installation) is

designated. The following ranges of nominal voltage (r;m.s. values
for a.c.) are defined:
extra-low: Normally not exceeding 50.0Y a.'C. or 120.0Y ripple

free d.c., whether between conductors or to earth,
low: Normally exceeding extra-low voltage but not

exceeding lOOO.OY a.c. or 1500.0Y d.c. between
conductors,- or 600.0Y a.c. or 900.0Y d.c. between
conductors and earth.
The actual voltage of the installation may differ from the nominal
value by a quantity within normal tolerance.

SOURCE OF ENERJi
1I
L2
L3
~
CONSUMERS
SOURCE EARlH r-
I
I
J'~'~\.-------,
I
I
,
I
I
•I
,I
I I , I
, I ,
I I EQUf'tolENl IN
I
I INStALLAllON - I.
,
,
L _ EXPOSED
CONDUCTJV
1
.J
INSlALLAlI~ PARlS
fAR1H __ INSlAUAllOi
ELE:ClROOE fARlH ELCCTROfl:
Figure 1.2 TT System
voltage reduced (see reduced low voltage system).
wiring system. an assembly made up of cable or busbars and parts which secure
and, if necessary, enclose the cable or busbars.

SECTION 2
9ENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 ADMINISTRATIVE
2.1.1 Authority for Rules
(1) By virtue of the authority vested in the Authority having jurisdiction, this Code has been
adopted and hereby orders and directs its ·observance.
2.1.2 Permit
(1) Electric~l contractors or others responsible for the carrying out of the work shall obtain a
permit from the Authority having jurisdiction before commencing work with respect to
installation, alteration, repair, or extension of any electrical equipment.
2.1.3 Application for Inspection
(1) An application for inspection shall be fixed with the Authority having jurisdiction on a form
provided by the latter at the time the permit is obtained;
2.1.4 Posting oCPermit
(1) A copy of the permit shall be posted in a conspicuous place on the site of the work and shall
not be removed until the inspection is completed.
2.1.5 Notification Re-inspection
(1) The Authority having jurisdiction shall be notified in writing by the electrical contractor ~at
work is ready for inspection at such time or times as will permit inspection being made before
any work or portion thereof is commenced.

SECTION 2: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1.6 Plans and Specifications
(1) Plans and specifications in duplicate or in greater number if required by the Authority having
jurisdiction one copy to be retained by the Authority, shall be submitted by the owner or his
agent to, and acceptance obtained from, the Authority before work is commenced on:
a) wiring installations of public buildings, industrial establishments, factories, and other

buildings in which public safety is involved:
b) large light and power installations and the installation or apparatus such as generators,
transformers, switchboards, large storage batteries:
c) such other installations as may be prescribed by the Authority having jurisdiction.
2.1.7 Connection Authorization
(I) Where any electrical installation or part thereof to which electrical power or energy has not
previously been supplied is made in or upon any land building or premises, where any electrical
installation or part thereof has been disconnected or cut off from any service or other source of
supply under this Code, no supply authority, contractor or other person shall connect or re-
connect the installation or part thereof to any service or other source of supply unless:
a) the installation and all work in respect thereof have been inspected by an inspector; and
b) a connection authorizatioft has been issued by the Authority having jurisdiction in respect
of the installation.
2.1.8 Re-inspection
(1) The Authority having jurisdiction reserves the right to re-inspect at any time electrical
installation notwithstanding any previous inspection and acceptance, if and when it considers
suc~ action to be necessary.
2.1.9 Renovation of Existing Installation
(1) The Authority having jurisdiction may require such changes as may be necessary to be made
to existing installations where, through hard usage, wear and tear, or as a result of alteration or
extensions, dangerous conditions have developed.

2.1.10 Use of Approved Equipment
(1) No one shall use any electrical equipment other than approved electrical equipment of a kind
or type and rating approved for the specific purpose for which it is to b e employed.
2.1.11 Deviation or Postponement
(1) 10 any case where deviation or postponement of this Code may be necessary, special
permission shall be obtained befo~ proceeding with the work, but this special permission shall
apply only to the particular installation for which it is given.
2.1.12 Powers of Rejection
(1) Even though approval has previously been granted, the Authority having jurisdiction may
reject, at any time, any electrical equipment under any of the following conditions:
a) If the equipment is substandard with respect to the sample' on which approval was
granted.
b) If the conditions of use indicate that the equipment is not suitable.
c) If the terms of the approval agreement are not being carried out.
2.1.13 Installation of Electrical Equipment
(1) Electrical equipment shall be installed as to ensure that, after installation, ,there is ready
access to nameplates and access to parts requiring maintenance.
2.1.14 Damage and Interference
(1) No person shall interfere with any electrical installation or component thereof except when,
in the course of alterations or repairs to non-electrical equipment or structures, it may be
necessary to disconnect or move components of an electrical installations.
(2) It shall be the responsibility of the persGiDiCarryingout thelalterations or repairs to ensure that
the electrical installation is restored to a safe operating condition as soon as the progress of the
alterations or repair will permit.

1.1 TECHNICAL
1.1.1 Conventional Symbols
(1) Graphical symbols that are to be used in all drawings, wiring plans, etc for electrical
installations of buildings shall be as indicated in Section 26 of this Code.
1.1.1 Coordination
(1) Proper coordination and collaboration between the architect, building engineer and the
electrical engineer shall be effected from the planning stage of the installation.
(2) The provisions that will be needed for tile accommodation of substation, transformer, switch
room, lift wells and other appurtenant rooms, service cable ducts, rising mains and distribution
cables,sub-distribution boards, openings and chases in floor and walls for all required electrical
installation, etc, shall be specified in advance.
2.1.3 .Location and Requirement of Substation
(1) The ideal location of an electrical subsbttion for a group of buildings would be at the load
centre and shall be located on the ground floor.
(2) In multi-storeyed buildings, the substation shall preferably be installed on the lowest floor
level, but direct access from the street for installation or removal of the equipment shall be
provided. The floor level of the substation or switch room shall !>eabove the highest flood level
ofthe locality. 'In this case, the load centre would be somewhere between the geometrical centre
andthe air-conditioning plant room.
(3) The availability of power lines nearby may also be kept in view while deciding the location
of the substation.
2.2.4 Rooms (Spaces) Required
(I) In allocating area of a substation, it shall be noted that the flow of electric power is from
su~ly company's room to high tension room, then to transformer and finally to the low voltage
switchgear room. The layout of rooms shall be in accordance with this flow.
ETHIOPIAN ,BUILDING CODE STANDARD EBCS-10 1995 23

(2) The following rooms are required in a substation:
a) Switchgear Room - Supply 60mpany's switchgear room and/or space for meters.
b) Transformer Rooms - The number and size of transformer rooms shall be ascertained
from the total power requirement of the consumer.
c) Low-Voltage Switch RoomS - The floor area requirement in respect of low voltage
switchgear room shall be ascertained from the number of feeders.
d) Stand-by Generators. A room space not less than 6.0m x 9.0m may be provided for
housing a stand-by generator.
e) Location of Switch Rooms - In larg~ installations other than where a substation is

provided, a separate switch room shall be provided; this s,hall be located as closely as
possible to the electrical load centre and suitable ducts shall be laid with minimum
number of bends from the point of entry of the supply to the position of the main
switchgear. The switch room shall also be placed in such a position that rising ducts
may readily be provided therefrom to the upper floors of the building in one straight
vertical run~ In larger buildings, more than one rising duct and horizontal ducts may also
be required for running cable from the switch room to the foot of each rising main.
Such cable ducts shall be reserved for .the electrical services only which may, however,
include medium and low voltage installation, such as call-bell system,s; telephone
installations should be suitably segregated.
2.2.5 Location and Requirements of Distribution Boards
(1) The electrical control gear distribution boards and other apparatus, which are required on
each floor may conveniently be mouuted adjacent to the rising mains, and adequate space should
be provided at each floor for this purpose.
2.2.6 Location and Requirements of PBXlPABX Rooms
(1) Information regarding provjsion for and location ofPBXlPABX shall be obtained from the
relevant authority and adequate space should be provided for installation of t!te boards.

2.3 PLANNING AND DESIGNING
2.3.1 General
(1) The design and planning of an electrical installation shall take into account all the prevailing
conditionswhich may include some .or all of the following:
a) Type of supply.
b) Envisaged load having regard to the requirements of the owner or occupant.
c) The probable modifications and future extensions.
d) The degree of electrical and mechanical protection necessary.
e) The probable operation and maintenance cost taking into account the electricity supply
tariffs available.
£) The relative cost of various alternative methods.
g) The need for radio and telecommunication interference abatement.
2.3.2 Layout and Installation Drawing
(1) The electrical layout should be considered after proper locations of all outlets for lamps,
fans,appliances - both fixed and transportable, motors, etc, have been selected and best methods
of wiring determined.
(2) All runs of wiring and exact positions of all points of switch-boxes and other outlets shall
be first marked on the plans of the building and approved by the engineer in charge or the owner
before the actual commencement of the work.
2.3.3 Design
(1) The design of electrical installation shall ensure:

a) the protection of persons, livestock and property;
b) the proper functioning of the electrical installation for the intended use.
(2) The information required as a basis for design shall be:
a) nature of current: a.c. and/or d.c.
ETHIOPIANBUILDING CODE STANDARD EBCS-10 1995 2§

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF BUILDtNGS
b) nature and number of conductors:

i) for a.c.:
- phase conductor(s);
- neutral conductor;
- protective conductor.
ii) for d.c.:

- conductors equivalent to' those listed above.
c) voltage and voltage tolerances;

d) frequency and frequency tolerance;
e) maximum current allowable;
f) prospective short-circuit current;
g) nature of demand;
h) emergency supply or supplies;
i) environmental conditions.
(3) The design shall comply with the requirements of this Code.
2.4 MARKING OF EQUIPMENT
2.4.1 General
(1) Each piece of electrical equipment shall bear such of the following markings as may be
necessary to identify the equipment and ensure that it is suitable for the particular installation:
a) The maker's name, trademark, or other recognized symbol of identification.

b) Catalogue number or type.
c) Voltage.
d) Rated load amperes.
e) Watts, volt-amperes, or horsepower.
f) Whether for a.c., d.c., or both.
g) Number of phases.
h) Frequency in Hertz.
i) Rated load speed in revolution per minute.
D Designation of terminals.
k) Whether for continuous or intermittent duty.
1) Evidence of approval.
m) Such other marking as may be necessary to ensure safe and proper operation.

'SECTION 2: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
(2) Each service box, at the time of installation, shall be marked in a conspicuous, legible, and
pennanent manner to indicate clearly the maximum rating of the overcurrent device which may
be used for this installation.
(3) At each distribution point, circuit breakers, fuses, and switches shall be marked, adjacent
thereto, in a conspicuous and legible manner to indicate clearly:
a) which installation or portion of installation they protect or control;

b) the maximum rating of overcurrent device that is permitted.
2.4.2 Workmanship and Materials
(1) Careful attention shall be paid to the m~chanical execution of the work in connection with
any electrical installation.
(2) Any insta1!ation that has been badly arranged or poorly executed, either generally or in any
particular way, will not be accepted by the Authority having jurisdjction.
2.4.3 Material for Anchoring to Masonry and Concrete
(1) Wood or other similar materials shall not be used as an anchor into masonry or concrete for
the support of any electrical equipment.
2.4.4 Protection of Persons and Property
(1) Electrical equipment shall be installed and guarded so that adequate provision is made for
the safety of persons and property and for the protection of the electrical equipment from
mechanicalor other injury to which it is liable to be exposed.
2.4.5 Maintainability
(1)An assessment shall be made of the frequency and quality of maintenance the installation
canreasonably be expected to receive during its intended life.
(2)Where an authority is to be responsible for the operation of the installation, that authority
shallbe consulted.
ETHIOPIANBUILDING CODE STANDARD EBCS-10 1995· 27

(3) The following characteristics are to be taken into account in applying the requirements of
this Code, having regard to the frequency and quality of maintenance expected:
a) Any periodic inspection and testing and maintenance and repairs likely to be necessary
during the intended .life can be readily and safely carried out.
b) The effectiveness of the protective measures for safety during the intended life IS
ensured.
c) The reliability of equipment fot proper functioning of the installation is appropriate to

the intended life.
2.4.6 Enclosures
(1) Degree of protection provided by enclosures for ~lectrical equipment shall be in accordance
with mc 529.

SECTION 3
LJ..JUMINA TION
3.1 SCOPE
(I) This Section of the Code gives guidance on design and installation of artificial lighting
systemsin interio.rs; it also applies to artificial lighting of outdoor areas.
(l) The following references contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute
provisionsof the Ethiopian Building Code Standards on Electrical Installation of Buildings.
(a) BS 8206: 1985 Part 1 - Lighting for Building.
(b) DIN 5035:1990 Part 1 - Artificial Lighting, Terminology and General Requirements.
(c) DIN 5035:1990 Part 2 - Artificial Lighting, Recommended Values for Lighting
Parameters for Indoor and Outdoor Workplaces.
(d) DIN 5035:1988 Part ~ - Artificial Lighting of Interiors, Hospital Lighting.
(e) DIN 5035: 1983 Part 4- Artificial Lighting of Interiors, Special Recommendations for
Lighting Educational establishments
(t) DIN 5035:1987 Part 5 - Artificial Lighting of Interiors, Emergency Lighting.
(g) DIN 5035: 1988 Part 7 - Artificial Lighting ofInteriors, Lighting of Rooms with VDU
Workstation or VDU Assisted Workplaces.
ETHIOPIAN
BUILDING CODE STANDARD EBCS-10 1995 29
3.3 DEFINITIONS
.
(1) For the purpose of this Section of the Code, the following definitions shall apply in addition
to the terms defined in Section 1.
mean illuminance (E) the arithmetical mean of the illuminance in a room or in a room
zone being defined as that area of a room in which the same type
of activity is performed at a number of work-places or which is
used for similar purposes.
rated illuminance (E,) the nominal value of the mean illuminance that the lighting
installation is {fesigned to illuminate.
light loss factor (V) the ratio of the rated illuminance, En' to the design value of the
mean illuminance of a lighting system.
depreciation factor (P) the reciprocal of the light loss factor.
reflectance (Pc) the ratio of the luminous flux reflected from a surface to the
luminous flux incident on it.
general lighting the required average illuminance with a certain degree of

uniformity over the total area; and is obtained by a regular
arrangement of luminaries over the ceiling area (see Figure 3.1).
localized lighting a non-uniform illuminance over the whole work area (see
Figure 3.2).
local lighting lighting for individual workplace in addition to the general lighting
produced by placing luminaries close to the visual task and
supplemented by a general lighting (see Figure 3.1).

SECTION 3: ILLUMINATION
/\
-
1\
- .
---.----.- ----.-.- - --------~~-._
1\
- :-;-.-.
/\
.._---_
1\
..---.-
1\/ \/ \/ \/ \
" I \ I I
I \ I \ I \ I \
;. a) grouped
Figure 3.1 Generallighting
b)awitched
/\ 1\ 1\ 1\
/ V \ / V \
I/\ \ /\
/ \ B
Figure 3.3 Locallighting

Figure 3.2 Localized Lighting

glare a condition in which vision is affected by an excessive luminance

and/or excessive differences in luminance in the visual field (i.e;
parts of this field are excessively bright).
Note: A distinction is made between:
disability glare, defmed as glare causing an actual physiological reduction in visual

capability (impaired, perception of contrasts and forms), and
discomfort glare, defined as glare considered solely in terms of its psychological

effect on the occupant. Discomfort glare experienced by the occupant of a room
increases with time and leads to premature fatigue and a reduction in performance,
performance attitude, and well-being.
direct glare a glare caused directly by luminance from luminaries of luminous

ceilings.
reflected glare glare and contrast reduction caused by reflection of high luminance
from glossy surfaces.
Note: The main disturbances caused by such reflection are contrast reduction, and impaired accommodation
and fusion.
colour appearance the chromaticity of an ilIuminant and is generally expressed as the

colour impression received when looking at a light source.
Note: The colour of the light emitted by a near-white sources can be indicated by its correlated colour
temperature (CCT). Each lamp type has a specific CCT; but for practical use, they have been grouped
into three classes (see Table 3.1).
Table 3.1: Correlated colour temperature classes
.
-
Correlated colour temperature
Intermediate
Warm (white)
Cool WW (white)
•(daylight whlte)-• NW
TW
CCT CI18S H
5300
3300 < CCT < 5300
32 EBCS·1 0 1995 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODe STANDARD

c%ur rendering the relationship between the original colour of an object and the
colour in which it is rendered by artificial lighting.
Note: The ability of light source to render colours of s~ace accurately can be conveniently quantified by'
the CIE general colour rendering index. This index is based on the accuracy with which a set of test
colour'are reproduced by the lampt of interest relative to how they are reproduced by an appropriate
standard light source, identical agreement being given a value of tOO.Ou. Each lamp type has a
specific CIE general colour rendering index; but for practical use they can be divided into a number
of groups (see Table 3.2)
'Table 3.2 Colour rendering groups
Colour
CIE general colour
rendering Typical application
rendering Index (AJ
groups
1A R.>90 Wherever accurate colour matching is required;
e.g. colour printing inspection.
18 Wherever accurate colour judgements are

necessary and/or good colour rendering Is
, essential to appearance; e.g. shops and other
commercial premises.
2 60 < R~<80
Wherever moderate coiour rendering Is required.
3 40< R. < 60
Wherever colour rendering is 01 little significance
but marked distortion 01 colour is acceptable.
4 20 < R. < 40
Wherever colour rendering Is 01 no Importance at
all and. marked distortion 01 colour is acceptable.
emergency lighting lighting designed to become operative promptly if the power supply
to normal artificial lighting fails.
safety lighting an emergency lighting required for reasons of safety (general safety,
prevention of accidents).
t For tabular florescent lamps apparent colour and colour rendering characteristics, refer to Table 3.4.

escape lighting a specified minimum illuminance for

emergency escape purposes, thus, permitting
buildings and plant to be safely evacuated at
any time during their utilization.
sll/ety /igllting lor partial/Ju hazardous WOI'kplacu safety lighting designed to ensure that the work
performed at such workplaces can be safely
terminated in the manner required and the
workplaces themselves evacuated' without
danger.
Note: Particular hazardous workplaces are those which represent an immediate risk of accident or a potential
source of danger to third parties if the supply to the 'lighting should fail, raised platfonns, theatre
stages, race-courses and arenas counting as particularly hazardous workplaces.
standby lighting an emergency lighting which can assume the function of

normal artificial lighting for a limited period so as to enable
normal activities to continue.
response time the interval between a failure in the power supply to, the
normal artificial lighting and the provision of the required
illuminance by the emergency lighting.
.rated duration 01 operation the period of time for which an emergency lighting system is
designed to operate.
Umit duration 01 operatiOn the minimum period of time during which an emergency
lighting system shall still be capable of achieving the minimum
illuminance specified for the given application.
Note: This concept applies specifically to battery-operated systems.
lI$efullife the duration of an emergency lighting system from the date of

its commissioning up to the point in time at which it only
achieves the limit duration of operation.
safety luminaries a luminary which mayor may not be provided witll its own
power supply and which is used for safety lighting.
,34 EBCS-10 1995 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

escape sign luminaries a moulded luminaire bearing a graphical symbol to serve as an

escape sign; it indicates and assist the ide~tification of. escape
route.
standby lighting luminaries a luminary which mayor may not be provided with its own
power supply and which is used for standby lighting.
3.4 LIGHTING REQUIREMENTS
3.4.1 D1umin~nce
(1) Recommended illuminance for different types of interiors, tasks and workspaces given in
Table 3.5 and Table 3.6 shall be taken as the recommended minimum values on which the
design and assessment of lighting install~ions are to be based.
(2) For indoor workplaces that are manned full-time, a minimu~ rated illuminance of 200.01x
shall be provided unless other factors (such as nature of operation, physiological reasons) require v
different values.
(3) (it) In interiors designed for permanent human occupation, a minimum rated illuminance of
100.01x is required.
(b) If tasks are performed at fixed-location workplaces outdoors that correspond to tasks
performed indoors (e.g. operation of wood-work machines), then a rated illuminance
specified for such tasks in Table 3.5 for indoor workplaces shall be provided.
/ (4) At no stages in the useful life of the lighting installation shall the mean illuminance, E,
obtained at the workplaces be less than 0.8 times the value ofthe rated illuminance; at no single
workplace shall illuminance ever fall to less than 0.6 times the rated illuminance.
3.4.2 Luminance
(1) Reflectance in the working zone shall be planned so that the ratio between task luminance
(inner field) and that of the surrounding of the task are no greater than approximately 3: 1.
(2) Reflectance of from 0.2

.
to 0.5 are recommended for working surfaces such as bench and,
-------------
dt?,sktops.

3.4.3 Glare
(1) Glare shall not be caused by lamps 0/ luminaries (direct glare) nor by reflection of high
luminance from glossy surface (reflected glare).
(2) Lamps with a high luminance (e.g. filament lamps and high discharge lamps) shall always
be shielded. \I
(3) In case of luminaries for local workplaces lighting, a direct view of the lamps shall be
precluded by shielding or by arranging them in a suitable position.
3.4.4 Light Direction and Modelling
(1) Lighting shall be directed to produce an adequate degree of modelling shadow to enable
objects and surface texture to be easily recognized.
(2) Unduly hard shadows shall be,avoide,d. If the ratio Ez (cylindrical):En (horizontal) at a hight
of I.20m above floor is not smaller than 0.3, unduly hard shadows can be avoid~d.
(3) Deep shadows producing excessive. luminance contrasts shall be avoided.
3.4.5 Colour Rendering
(1) For inspection and comparison of colours, the CIE general colour rendering index ~ shall
not exceed 90 and the rated illuminance shall be IOOO.O/x.
(2) Only lamps meeting the requirements of Colour Rendering Group 3 (or higher) shall be used
for lighting interiors.
(3) Safety colours shall be duly recognizable as such.

3.5 EMERGENCY LIGHTING REQUIREMENTS
3.5.1 Escape Lighting
3.5.1.1 Illuminance
(1) The minimum illuminance of the safety lighting for escape routes shall be 1.0/x. This
requirement applies to the centre line of an escape route along a horizontal plane O.2m above
floor level.
(2) The response time shall not exceed a maximum of I5.0sec.
(3) The rated duration of operation shall at least equal to the time that will be specified by safetY
law to be enacted by the concerned government body.
(4) The limit duration of operation shall be % (for l.Ohr) or % (for 3.0hr) of the rated duration.
(5) Safety luminaries for escape routes shall be sited according to their luminance distribution
so as to meet the requirements specified for safety lighting and in such a way that they cannot
easily be rendered ineffective. (Principal locations for the sitting of safety luminaries are, thus,
near the exits of escape routes and at poil}ts where it is necessary to emphasize the positions of
potential hazards.)
3.5.2 Safety Lighting for Particular Hazardous Workplaces
3.5.2.1 I/Iuminance
(I) The minimum illuminance for such workplaces shall be O.1En (rated illuminance specified
for the task and room of such workplaces in Table 3.5) but not less than IS.O/x.
(2) The minimum illuminance for platform and theatre stages shall be 3.0/x, and I5.0/x for
arenas and race-courses.
3.5.2.2 Colour rendering
(1) The colour rendering shall at least be equivalent to Group 3 so as to ensure that safety
colours remain recognizable as such.
ETHIOPIANBUILDING CODE STANDARD EBCS-1 0 1995 37

3.5.2.3 Response time
(1) The response time of safety lighting shall not exceed a maximum of 6.5s.
(2) In case of raised platform, theatre stages, arenas and race-courses, the maximum response
time shall be 1.0s.
3.5.2.4 Rated duration of operation
(1) For workplaces, the lighting shall be effective for as long as the hazard subsists, with a
minimum duration of 1.0min.
(2) For raised platform, theatre stages, race-courses and arenas, the rated duration of operation
shall at least be equal to the duration required by law.
3.5.2.5 Siting of safety luminaries in hazardous workspaces
(1) Safety luminaries shall be sited so as to ensure that the required illuminance is provided over
the entire area in which hazardous tasks are carried out.
3.5.3 Standby Lighting
(1) The requirements to be met by standby lighting are analogous to those applying for normal
artificial lighting. To enable normal activities to continue, a minimum illuminance of 10% of
the rated illuminance value is generally required.
3.6 LIGHTING REQUJ:.REMENTS FOR VARIOUS TYPES OF BUILDINGS
3.6.1 General
(1) The design objectives for lighting shall be to provide both good task visibility and a
satisfactory visual environment.
(2) (a) The lighting of workspaces shall ensure good visibility of the visual objects.
(b) The lighting of workplaces shall also be conducive to concentration and performance
attitudes, counteract premature fatigue and permit any potential hazards to be clearly
recognized.

3.6.2 Industrial Buildings
(I) In addition to the lighting required for specific tasks, a general illumination shall be provided
to allow safe movement through the building at all material times.
(2) Where critical colour matching is to be done for a long period, a minimum illuminance of
IOOO.Olx shall be provided.
3.6.3 Offices
(I) As indicated on rated illuminance tables, for general offices illuminance of 500.01x and for
drawing offices illuminance of 750.01x shall be provided.
(2) Where VDU (Visual Display Units) are used, the illuminance shall be restricted to 500.01x
or less to minimize the high brightness reflection from the screen and large luminance
differences between screen, any source documents and the backgrounds against which these
items are seen.
(3) Where localized lighting is used, the ratio of illuminance between adjacent areas shall not
be more than 3: 1 with a minimum illuminance for lUtycontinuously occupied area of 200.0/x.
(4) Where locallightingjs used, the ratio of illuminance between task area and the surrounding
area shall not exceed 3: 1.
(5) A glare limiting index of 19 is appropriate for general office rooms and an index of 16 is
desirable for drawing offices because of the more demanding nature of work.
(6) Where daylight makes a substantial contribution, lamps with a CCT of 4000.0k or above
should be used.
3.6.4 Hotels and Restaurants
(1) In dinning rooms and restaurants an illuminance of 100.0lx is recommended on a dinning table.
(2) In lounge and public bars, an average illuminance of 50.0/x is recommended.
(3) In kitchens.and other service areas, a general illuminance of 300.0/x is recommended and
working areas should have an illuminance of 500.01x.

(4) Escape lighting shall be provided for public rooms, staircases and corridors and provisions
shall be made for emergency lighting and exit signs.
3.6.5 Educational Establishments
(1) The wide range of activities carried out in teaching and 'the variety of working media used
create constant changes in visual tasks; due to this, special requirements, over and above those
given in Clause 3.4.1, shall apply to the quality of the lighting in teaching rooms. This
requirements are given in the following Clauses.
(2) The guideline values for illuminance, colour appearance, colour rendering group and quality
of class of direct glare restriction given in Table 3.7 shall be applied in teaching spaces.
(3) Should the relevant type of room or activity not be listed in Table 3.7, the values given for
a similar, comparable room or activity shall be used mutatis mutandis.
(4) The guideline values given in Tables 3.5 and 3.6 for workspaces shall appJy to rooms which
have the same visual requirements as comparable workplaces, as well as to general purpose and
office-type rooms.
(5) The main chalkboard in teaching rooms and demonstration desks in teaching rooms for
special subjects shall be equipped with a supplementary lighting system to increase the vertical
illuminance.
3.6.6 Hospitals
(1) The guideline values for hospital lighting set in Table 3.8 shall apply to all rooms and zones
of a hospital.
(2) The lighting of bedded areas shall be conducive to the well-being of the patient, while also
~nabling examination or treatment to be carried out. To achieve these goals:
a) (i) the general lighting illuminance shall be IOO.Olx and shall not dazzle the patients or
nursing staff.
(ii) the mean luminance as perceived by the recumbent patients shall be limited to
IOOO.Ocdlm2while the luminance of the ceiling shall nowhere exceed 500.0cdlm2•
40 EBCS-10 1995 ETHIOPIAN B~ILDING CODE STANDARD

b) (i) Each bed shall be equipped with a rigidly mounted, adjustable luminaire. A rated
illuminance of 300.0lx shall be achieved on the reading plane (see Figure 3.4).
(ii) To avoid glare in multi-bed wards, the luminance of reading luminaries in the field
of vision of other patients shall not exceed IOOO.Ocd/m2•
c) (i) For the examination and treatmen~ of patients at.the bedside, a rated horizontal
illuminance of 300.Olx, inclusive of the general lighting, shall be provided O.ISm
above the longitudinal axis of the plane of the bed surface.
(ii) At no point along the axis in (i) above shall the illuminance be less than ISO.Olx.
(iii) The uniformity ratio of illuminance Emin:Eishall here not be less than 1:2.
d) (i) Night watch lighting with illuminance of approximately S.Olx shall be provided for
keeping patients under observation during the night. .
(ii) In wards occupied by infants, a rated illuminance of 20.0lx is recommended.
(3) (a) General lighting with a rated illuminance of 500.0lx and Group I colour rendering
properties shall be provided for examination and treatment.
(b) In addition to the general lighting an illuminance of at least IOOO.Olx is generally "
required at the site of examination.
(4) (a) The lighting in operating theatre shall always be designed in conjunction with the
lighting of the operating theatre field.
(b) In view of the illuminances of 20,OOOlx to IOO,OOO.Olx required in the operating field,
the surrounding lighting shall be designed to reduce the adaptation problems which
would be caused by extreme difference in the luminance between operating field and the
surrounding area.
(c) The illuminance of the surrounding light shall not be less than IOOO.Olx at a height of
I.Om above floor level.
(5) (a) Standby lighting system shall be provided for the operating theatres, anaesthetic rooms,
sterilizing sinks and recovery rooms.

(b) The standby lighting of the -operating table should be equal in all respects to the normal
lighting of this area, and should be of the maintained type to ensure continuous
illumination.
800
900
Reading plane
Examination
plane
Plane'a;-'
be~ lurf.lce °l
C>
C>
0' ::
gl
•....
lG
Figure 3.4 Reference plans of a hospital bed
3.7 OUTDOOR LIGHTING REQUIREMENTS
3.7.1 Illuminance
(1) For outdoor workspaces, circulation areas/zones and work roads, the recommended rated
illuminances in Table 3.6 shall be provided and they are to be taken as the recommended
minimum values.
(2) If the type of application of interest to the user is not listed, the recommended values
specified for a similar space shall be applied analogously.
3.7.2 Colour Rendering Group
(1) At fixed location workspaces, the colour rendering capability shall at . least meet the
requirements of Group 3t; safety colours and colours used for classification purposes shall be
recognizable as such.
t
Data on the group to which lamps belong with respect to their colour rendering capability are given in
product lists of manufacturers.

3.7.3 Limitation of Glare
(1) Limitation of direct glare shall be based on Clause 3.4.3 of this Section.
(2) If the outdoor workplace is floodlight, the luminaries used shall be so located and arranged
that hazards due to direct glare are precluded.
3.7.4 Lighting of Outdoor Fixed Location Workspaces
(I) If-tasks are performed at fixed location work spaces outdoors that correspond to tasks
performed indoor, then, local workplace lightings shall be provided with rated illuminance
equivalent to the values specified for such tasks in Table 3.5.

I1c G VI r
i;~' :
.J:>.
.J:>.
Table 3.3 Typical characteristics of lighting sources used for general lighting
Hot cathode Cold cathode High-pressure
Tungsten Tungsten Low-pressure High-pressure
Characteristics tul;lular tubular mercury Mercury halide
Filament halogen sodium sodium
fluorescent fluorescent fluorescent
Range of luminous
efficacy (1.0 Irn/W) 8 to 18 18 to 24 100 to 175 65 to 120 35 to 90 40 to 60 35 to 55 65 to 85
Available wattage range

rN> 25 to 1500 100 to 2000 10 to 200 50 to 1000 4 to 125 20 W/mto 30 50 to 2000 250 to 10000
W/m
Range of nominal life
(h) 1000 to 2000 2000 to 4000 6000 to 12000 6000 to 12000 5000 to 10000 20000 5000 to 10000 5000 to 10000
Colour rendering group 1A 1A Non existent 2 or 4 3 Can very widely

depending on depending on additives
lamp pressure used. Manufacturers
should be consulted.
Need for control gear No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Operating position Any Horizontal Horizontal Any Any . Any Any Some restrictien
Run-up time (min) Immediate Immediate 6 to 12 4 to 7 Immediate Immediate 4 5
Restrike time (min) Immediate Immediate 3 Immediate Immediate 10 10
CCT(K) 25000 to 3000 28ooot03100 Not applicable 2200 2700 to 6500 2700 to 6500 4000 3600 to 4400
Note: Detailed information about any specific lamp type should be obtained from the manufacturer.
Table 3.4 Tubular fluorescent lamps apparent colour and colour rendering characteristics of lamps in general use
Lamp name 18 Apparent
23given
18 colour Typical application
Warm Equal
similar
Similar emphasis
Emphasizes
Emphasizes
to 1A
to IInorth
Colour 1A
subdues
group
yellows
northsky Intermediate
3oranges,·
oranges, Cool
Warm
Cool
yellows
and,
greens
light/colour
yellows, light;
and to and
to emphasizes
rendering less deep
allmatching
colours
blues
andextent. reds
reds
I[but
extent, is
blue-violets,
and towards
blues
BS
subdues
slightly
needed
green
violets;
emits
and,
greens;
95:Part
Factories,
significant
Factories,
Hotels,
Social
colour
Used
but some
where
areas,
subdued,
Ishops,
violet
Commercial/public 1fine
offices
rendering
critical,is
offices
blues
required
and
yellows
proportion
homes;
criticaland
restaurants,
colour
or to
shops
f'nd
of
colour
subdued
less
buildings
shops,
as
matching
shops adeep
rendering extent,
daylight
hotelsis reds
matching
where
and
greens
is admitted
replacement
particularly
required
and
or
shifted
where
for
matching
good, buttungsten
complying
homestogether
wherea daylight
isnot
with
required
critical,
with
good
s,
al which
sky light Colour rendering characteristics Used where
fl<Jt colour colour judgements
rendering similar are
to required,
north sky e.g.
filament lamps
orange
ower compact shift towards
hospitals, violet
art galleries and museums
high luminous efficacy
"
~
VI
"
•••
0\
Table 3.5 Indoor workspaces recommended illuminance

Colour kinds and search and -
1.6 Building services
1.2.2spaces
1.3.1 Warehouses
Aisles installations
6 glarewith goods1 rendering
of different appearance
1 General 33121when
lA
4ww,nw
35
2
Class
ww,nw
ww,nw a and
limitation
2A gangways
Remark
of 2A 2 500
20
200
100
300
50 50
200
L
I
Supplementary
atmosphere.
lighting
to
optional
be create
used
Incandescent
direct
I1.2.3 Control
Warehouses mirror
specific
lighting
lampswithmayis
reading tasks
ww,nw 1.3.2
100 group platform En. in Ix
, retrieval 1.2.1
tasksWarehouses for goods of one kind or of large unit size I
1.1 Circulation zones in storerooms

Table 3.5 Indoor workspaces recommended illuminance (conte'd)
--
1
group
I
Class 4Colour
IAdjustment
circulation
illuminance
For persons
Only glare 35
2of33En2
3ww,nw
3- 6areas.
direct
Remark
=luminaries
ww,nw to
ofColour ! Only rendering
rated 2
luminaries 2 100
100
used.
50 are 3 adjoining
En2
En1~0.1 Enww,nw
the spaces;
of adjoining
interior.
area
The
tEn 3
shed
entrance of theentrance
The
interior
of isshed
adjoining
the to
area
adjoiningbeof is
'limitation
interior to without luminous
be illuminated.0,5 x Ent
Ent
En. In!!
ww,nw where En1 = En of the
luminous
anels illuminated
0,2spaces
Ent I
"
•••
~
00

I
2 3 4 I 5 I 6
Type of interior and/or task

Rated
illuminance En
Colour
appearance
Colour!
--
rendenn
9
I ----1
...
.
Class limitation
glare of direct I
Remark
1_
. 'I
-- in~
I
group_ I __ I
3 Offices and similar rooms I I
I I
I I
3.1 Offices with daylight-oriented workplaces,
all in immediate vicinity of windows 300 ww,nw 2 I 1 I Workplace-oriented general lighting;
minimum of 0.8 En at workplace
3.2 Offices 500 ww,nw 2A High reflectance: ceiling: 0.7

3.3 Open-plan offices with average minimum, walls/partitions: 0.5
reflectance with high reflectance 1000 ww,n', 2 minimum, local workplace lighting
3.4 Technical drawing office 750 ww,nw 2A permitted
3.5 Conference and consultation rooms 300 ww,nw 2A

3.6 Reception rooms 100 ww,nw 2,
3.7 Rooms open to the public 200 V'IW,nw 2A En referred to working plane of
3.8 500 ww,nw 2A drawing board of 75° to the
Data processing rooms ~ horizontal at the centre point of the
board and a height of 1.2m.
21, 1 rendering
i I Icontrolled nw
4532 33 appearance
3Colour
3required
lA
limitation
12A 6300.02s. group
ww,nw
Remote
2A
- I -may
I Local
Where
En ww,nw,tw
ww,nw
ww,nw
ww,nw
Colour
Class
be process
workplace lighting
of than
less direct
for 2recommended
engineering plants
recommended,
glare
operational reasons, 200
750 1000
50
500
300 100
500
300
I illuminance,
Remark with shielding against En>
light sources of
observations
engineering
otherparts;
light glazing;
griding types.
materialsmixers, posts
plants
glass
and engraving; at grinning
blowing
medium plantquality
in brickworks
tasks ,
4.1 Workplaces or zones at furnaces/kilns, at raw

5.1
~
\0
ov. Table 3.5 Indoor workspaces recommended illuminance (conte'd)
appearance 1
3group ~ may be lessRemark
than 3oo.0~
g, 345
glare
wvr,nw
ww,nw
Colour
may
Where 32112A
ww,nw,tw
ww,nw 2A
Cliiss
exceed 6 2
of direct
limitation
rendering
required 5oo.01x
for operational reasons, 100
50 500
200
300
500
750 200
300
200
illuminance, En'
Vfoundrl&!
mills,deviations
rolled less
stations
intervention
machining
plants
permissible
cold plant
Colour
than 0.1
deviations
sectional mm
greater
strip than 0.1 mm ~
6.1
7.1 Production plants ofnotsmall
Hammer-forging requiring
parts manual
Table 3.5 Indoor works paces recommended illuminance (conte'd)
appearance 1 Remark
Underfloor
Class
Tool, Local 45
ww,nw
ww,nw
ww,nw
ww,nw,tw1132manufacture;
3Colour
3
2
men-sized
ww,nw,tw
gauge of
2- 3Alimitation
direct
workplace
jig 6
trenches,
glare
lighting 2precision
belt
recommended 50 1000 lIIumlnance,E.,
100 300
200
300
500
750 200
Colour rendering group
7.14.1
7.16.1
7.12.1
mechanics; Electroplating
Low precision
highprecision
conveyor roads, cellars, etc. assembly
7.12 Assembly
Vl
N
Colour
Cable
Loading
Electrical assembly
Where
require.
manufacture; 21-212A
3
ifww,nw
ww,nw
ww,nw
ww,nw,tw
ww,nw,tw
By providing
plant
with the
Shielding
fluorescent
engineering 2Blines
varnishing
against with
3operational
3required
45 13lighting 6local
fordirect workplace
2glare
operational
and
supplementary
Industrymay limitation
impregnation
conditions
be lighting
at
dispensed
rendering
groupso 500
1000
750
300
Remark 50
300
50 .500
200
100
illuminance,
Class Colour
of direct glare
while
stations
rooms
and
of work
7.18.1
coils;
reasons, is
Shell
armatures carried
~ maywith
simple out.
manufacture
be heavy-gauge
assembly
less than wire
tasks;300.0~.
winding of coils
9.1 8.1
7.18 Motor vehicle manufacture
521121A
43
3 12A
1A
3
limitation13 Industry
2A
1B group
2 making 500 1500
1000
500 500
100 Remark
200
1500
300
750
1000
Work recommended
Jewellery
Electrical
Woodworking Local nw,tw
ww,nw,tw
ww,nw
ww,nw
ww,nw,tw
engineering
Industry,
at woodworking
workplace
Colour
Class watch and6 clock
lighting
appearance
of direct (conte'd)
machines;
glare turning, illuminance, ,ac:l;';'::.~3nded
Local workplace lighting (
Colour rendering
11.6
calibration
chamfering,
marquetry
Industry
gaugecomponents
winding
cutting, wire ofdressing,
work coils andrebating,
sawing,sinking armaturesslotting,
with medium-
11.1 10.1
Steam Manufacture
pits of jewellery
Table 3.5 Indoor workspa~es recommended illuminance (conte'd)
--- ww,nw
1------------ for -- --
-- --Remark
shoe
mills
cardboard
to
avoided
500
Leather
vertical
hand
sorting;
composing; by
Cia
incidence.
I Industry
lighting,
composing,means
pressing;
1
Colour
appearance
--recommended.
...............
___
45
ww,nw,tw
ww,nw
ww,nw,tw",
For tubs,
selection
Saddlery work;
Colour
3glare
2A
••321of-
limitation
of
due1A
2A dlutet
•• OOO+OI}o(.
WW.OW
quilting;
group
reflections
suitable
obliquely
AV6idance
cutting
make-ready
6sewing
edtention
correct
being
to from
of
lightmust
3 For dark materials, increase to
manufacture
fabricedion
Local ofworkplace lighting
light
size the
reflected
be render!ng
glare by
punching;
given
incidence;
polishing;
1-
lC)CaJ _ClIrk,?,I~~
- ,lighting
500
2000
1000
750
300
200
300
1500
illuminance,
2
side.
~I-
13.1 12.1
WorkWork
ed vl'.ds; tubs, pits
ed Hollanders, edge runners, grinding
Type of Interior and/or task

2
rated illuminance,
InJ!
-t--~-Colour
Colour
4
.rendering
5
Class of direct
glare
6
Remark
Em appearance
group limitation
13 Leather Industry (conte'd)
13.4 Leather dyeing (mechanical) 750 WW,nw,tw 2A

For surface inspection tasks, provide
13.5 Quality control supplementary lighting with oblique
13.5.1 Medium standard incidence. Local workplace lighting
750. nw 18 1,
13.5.2 High standard recommended.
1000 nw,tw 18 1
13.5.3 Very high standard 1500 nw,tw 18 1
13.6 Colour matching 100 tw,nw 1A

Shield from light sources with a
different iIIuminant. Local workplace
14 Manufacture and processing of textiles

lighting recommended.
--
14.1 Workplaces and work zones at baths and in 3
ww,nw 3
bate breaking areas 200
14.2 Combing, washing, ironing, devilling and
carding work; drawing, teasing, sizing, card
cutting; slubbing; jute and hemp spinning 300 ww,nw 3 2
14.3 Dyeing 300 ww,nw 2A 2
14.4 Warping, beaming, spinning, spoiling and
winding, twisting, braiding, knitting, and
weaving 500 ww,nw 2A
H.5 Comb pricking; perching; sewing; block printing 750 Local workplace lighting
ww,nw 2A recommended.
14.6 Millinery 750 ww,nw,tw 2A
14.7 Trimming; burling 1000 For colour matchIng tasks, shield
WW,nw,tw 2A
from light sources with a different
14.8 Goods inspection; colour matching 1000 ww,nw,tw 1A illuminant.
14.9 Invisible mending 1500 2A
I nw,tw 1
VI
VI
Table 3.5 Indoor works paces recommended iIIuminance(conte'd)
Colour
1glass rendering' Rated illuminance,
500
Cutting
Workplaces
Making
For
Colour colour
Depending
Workplace
Inspection
Sorting of 2A
45
Class11
2
32A
limitation
ww,nw
nw
ww,nw
ww,nw,tw
matching;
and 1A
sorting
delicatessen
matching,
and
on
and
ofwashing work
the
ofwork 6
directofoffruit 2in
andand
zones
shield
products;
laboratories
layout
zones
jars glareofin
produce;from
theabattoirs,
breweries
product 300
200
500
group 1000 300 illuminance.
Colour appearance Remark
recommended.
beds
cellar
sorting
kitchens;
light sources
control;
and
barrels,
fermenting
grinding,
i1luminant.
vegetables
workplace,
cooking
work cigar
malthouses;
zones
chocolate and Local and
with
garnishing,
cleaning,
mixing.
ensurE! a
leaf cigarette
different
decorating,
sieving,
tobacco;
packaging
workplace
inboiling
sugar
factories; adequate
washing,
in
refineries.
canning
workplaces manufacture
peeling,
fermenting
lightingand
vertical
tiling for
and
in
anddrying
15.1
16.1 Sales areas
Table 3.5 Indoor works paces recommended illuminance (conte'd)
13 Remark Rated illuminance,

ww,nw
Hotels
Removing
Injectionand rust
Local 1B
45 2-1
213
Colour
Class
and
I moulding 1
restaurants
ww,nw,tw
ww,nw
ww,nw 1B
2A
ww 1A direct
of Colour
painting
glare
workplace 2 rendering
6 steel components
limitation
lighting permitted 300
500
200
1000
group 500 200
300
200 750
500 ww,nw
19.1
18.1 .118.2.1
system Reception
branches) Washing
17.1
18.1
Table 3.6 Outdoor workspaces
.-
Colour rendering Rated
0.2
0.4
3 92
0.2
0.5group
4
3relate 50
Sw gi~
s. •.Uniformity
s.
and •.... 40.34
illuminance,
gi~O.08
shall and
s..inl£
be 4of related
g2 tog,the
1.0~minimum. to the2 centreline
5= centre line of the 10
20 20 Sn~3
5
uminance, En of
1
thepath
path.
Remarks
-.. cross traffic and a speed limit of 50.0km/h
!!
in
heavy 30.0km/h or
2 Parking areas
1.3.2 3.1
Works roads
1.1 Container
Gates
3.1.1 Open with loadingareas
transshipment
storage andareas
unloading zone areas
and circulation or with
Table 3.6 Outdoor works paces (conte' d)
I group Colour
1 rendering II Rated
Wharfs
Docks
Repair
Quayage I 4
20
0.2
Workspaces for mixed
passenger
facilities in 30.2
0.5
,I 0.2
0.2
0.2, 44
trafficII3shipping
harbour
inilluminance,
Idepot
Uniformity
iI Supplementary
Dazzling traffic
areas
ofIE. oflocal5to 2 I•••
workplace I lighting
be avoided. I 3035 30
100
20.
20
50
10 required in containers.
30 34!I
10 i I
!I
I I
9! =E~ Remarks g." in Ix
ance, 3.3.1 Unit loads I IiI
I I
3.1.2 Loading and unloading I containers
0\
o
Table 3.6 Outdoor workspaces (conte' d)
Paths and roads

Circulation areas
- 43 group
Colour
3-0.5
rendering
1 5 Rated
-
30
,
Directional
Switchboard 91 0.2
Lighting
lighting
plant 0.5
0.2
0.2
= 44 where
only
Uniformity
Illuminance,
Em~ of needed 2 5
3 10 100
2020 20
20
10
in Ix
Remarks
ance, EN 9.1.1 Conventional fuel power stations
10.1
9.1
11.1
Table 3.7 Guideline values for educational establishment lighting
Colour
appearance
Community stacks
If ww,nw
wW,nw
ww,nw
Room for objects 51-23aids
43direct
cabinets
ww:nw
Remarks
ww,nw
teaching
necessary,
rooms
Quality
1 supplementary
23exhibited,
restriction
and of
glare 6 2 and
collections
platforms lighting
lighting )
shelves.
for
for 200
10<:\
50
200 300
100
20
200
300
500
Colourclass
property group rendering illuminance, ~
3.6 above
3.1 1.1
Corridors
2.1 Roofed recreation area
Table 3.7 Guideline values for educational establishment lighting (conte'd)
illuminance, En 2 4 in Rated
Ix 3property
5
I Remarks
rendering 6
restriction
Colour
Quality class
direct glareof
appearance group
Colour
Type of space or activity
4 General,teachlng rooms The main chalkboard and/or demonstration

desk require supplementary lighting.
4.1 Rooms for pre-schooling purposes 300 ww,nw 2
4.2 Teaching rooms, if not included under 4.3 below 300' ww,nw 2 1) At the working positions, a minimum of
4.3 Teaching rooms with a day-light factor ..Q (see DIN O.BS is required.
5034 Part 1) less than 1% at the most unfavourable 2) The TIluminancerequired if the room is
working position, teaching rooms used chiefly in the put to other uses can be attained by
evening or specially for adult education 50ci ww,nw 2 switching parts of the lighting system
3) High reflectance is deemed to be at least
4.4 Open-plan teaching spaces I 0.7 for the ceiling, at least 0.5 for the
- with high reflectance' 750 ww,nw 2 1t walls or room dividers.
- with medium reflectance 1000 ww,nw 2
II l-- 1t l -
5 Teaching rooms for special purposes
I I
I
5.1 Kitchens for teaching purposes 500 ! _,nw 2 I 2 i
ww,nw I 2
5.2 Rooms for manual training I I 2 I
500 I ww,nw I 2
5.3 Rooms for handicrafts, sewing, typewriting
500 I
1
5.4 Drawing, painting ww,nw
I 1 I
5.5 Physics, chemistry and biology 500 ww,nw 2 I 1 II 4) En
positioned
with respect
as forofuse
the at
drawing-board
75° from the
5.6 Laboratories, demonstration rooms 500
500 I ww,nw I
2 I 1 I horizontal, the centre of the board being
J.----.--+-----
5.7 Technical drawing' ww,nw
~._~ 1 : ---
7at a height of 1.2m
6 Lecture theatres
- --1-- 700---l- I
I
I I
6.1 Lecture theatres with windows 500 ww,nw 2

750 I 2
6.2 Lecture theatres without windows I I
ww,nw I I
t The values of the luminance restriction curve belonging to the next highest nominal illuminance shall be observed
Table 3. 8 Guidance value for hospital lighting
T I I of I Ratad I U hI colour I Quality class for I
-i--~- t
Room type i I I I I
='
L
"IYIpelof alct vlty type I illuminance,
n~ 'I 91t ng renderinggro
up i
i
restriction
9 areof direct I Remarks
Bedded area I um nat on ... E I •.•. co our 1 I I

I General lighting -- -r~-ww --, 1 i 1 -----:
I Reading lighting I 200 I ww I 1 I 1 ! Reduced glare for patients
Infants ward
Night watch lighting
Examination lighting
Night lighting
General lighting
Night-watch lighting
L
I
'II
300
200
I
:
I
I
ww
ww
ww
ww
:
I
I'
1
1
1
1
r---
'I
II
1
1
1
I
I
I
Approximately 5.0~
General lighting at workp,laces

not less than 160.0Ix
+-~~--~~-=-----------
I
I I . ,
General examination and General lighting I
: 500 ww,nw 1
treatment rooms At site of examination L-- 20
I
I ••• I 1
I
I
I~
I
I >1000 ww,nw, 1 I
--+ ----~
Special examination
treatment rooms
and
Preparation ww,nw
ww,nw
ww,nw
WW,nw
I
I
20
500
55
50
I
Ii I---~---I
I
I
1
I
I
I
,
I
i
I
If required, switchable or
yonitor
ry
metry
ycopy For endoscope examination , 1 I
• I controllable to give lower
1 ! illuminance values
hting
1 I
For ophthalmic examination 1

1
1
1 If required, switchable or
1 controllable to give lower
1 illuminance values
1
for radiographic examination

Table 3.8 Guidance value for hospital lighting (conte'd)
colour
nw colour Rated
- lighting
1ww
1WW
nw
ww,nw
Workplace
Reduced
required.
Quality11 Remarks
Illuminance:
tw
100000.0Ix,
ww,nw
restriction
minimum; from
1ooo.01x
glare of for
desired 20000
direct
lighting,
class for 500
to1000
300
100
General
rendering
patients
if General lightinglighting
room for changing Illuminance, illuminance: 2OOO.01x
glare
Wash rooms
treatment
rooms
areas
Medicinal rooms
preparation
treatment
Ughting
group1)
baths (conte,d)
s.. !!
Type ofin activity / Type of
Intensive
Operating
Dialysis care areas
for
for dentalrooms
theatre
dermatological suites
examinationsexaminations
Table 3. 8 Guidance value for hospital lighting (conte'd)
Colour
colour-1 Remarks Rated
1
22
1nw
ww
ww
nw2-1
nw
nw Bedded areas
I If restriction
ww,nw
required,
Quality
lighting forclassof direct
workplace
filling
glare
~~--
group'
for 200
50
300
100500
1000
300
hypodermic200
100 for
>5000
Lighting
General
Sanitary
rendering
Type difficult
lighting
blocks
--- of activity
in...!!
visualof tasks
connecting
/ Type to illuminance s.. -
etc. Lighting
- day-time
syringes, sorting medicines
ELECTICAL INSTALLATION OF BUILDINGS
SECTION 4
CONDUCTORS
4.1 SCOPE
1) This Section of the Code specifies the nom inal cross-sectional areas of conductors in electric
cables and cords used for lighting, appliance and power supply circuits for a nominal voltage
not exceeding 1.0kV.
2) The conductors include solid and stranded copper and aluminium conductors in cables for
fixed installation and flexible copper conductors.
3) The provisions of this Section do not apply to conductors for telecommunication purposes.
(1) The following references contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute
provisions of the Ethiopian Building Code Standards on Electrical Installation of Buildings.
(a) BS 767]:]992 Requirements for Electrical Installation, lEE Wiring

Regulations Sixteenth Edition.
(b) BS 6360:]991 Specification for Conductors in Isolated Cables and Cords.
(c) IEC 228:1976 Conductors of Insulated Cables.
(d) IEC 50(46]):]984 International Electrotechnical Vocabulary.
(e) IEC 364-5-523:1993 Electrica] Installation of Buildings.
66 EBCS-1 0 1995 ETHIOPIAN BILDING CODE STANDARD

SECTION 4: CONDUCTORS
(1) C22.1: 1990 Canadian Electrical Code, Part I, Safety Standard for Electrical
4.3 DEFINITIONS
\
j
(1) For the purpose of this Section of the Code, the following definitions shall apply in addition
to those terms defined in Section 1.
conductor (of a cable) a part of a cable which has the specific function of carrying current.
plain conductor a metal conductor in which the wire or wires are not coated with
an additional metal.
metal coated conductor a conductor in which eacn individual wire is covered with a thin
layer of a different metal or metal alloy.
solid conductor a conductor consisting of a single wire. (A Solid conductor may be

circular or shaped otherwise.)
shaped conductor a conductor the cross-section of which is other than circular.
stranded conductor a conductor consisting of a number of individual wires, all or some

of which generally have a helical form. (The stranded conductor
may be circular or shaped otherwise.)
flexible conductor a stranded conductor having wires of diameters small enough and
so assembled that the conductor is suitable for use in a flexible
cable.
concentric conductor a conductor so constructed as to surround one or more insulated

conductors.
insulation (of a cable) insulating materials incorporated in a cable with the specific
function of withstanding voltage.
extruded insulation insulation consisting generally of one layer of a thermoplastic or

thermosetting material and applied by extrusion process.
ETHIOPIAN' BUILDING CODE STANDARD EBCS-1 0 1995 67

mineral insulation insulation consisting of compressed mineral powder.
conductor screen an electrical screen of non-metallic and/or metallic material
covering ~ne conductor.
insulating screen; core screen an electrical screen of non-metallic material covering the insulation.
shield (of a cable) a surrounding earthed metallic layer to confine the electric field
within the cable and/or to protect the cable from external electrical
influence. (Metallic sheaths, armours and earthed concentric
conductors may also serve as shields).
core (insulated conductor) an assembly comprising a conductor with its own insulation (and
screen if any).
sheath (jacket) a uniform and continuous circular covering of metallic or non-

metallic material, generally extruded.
oversheath a non-metallic sheath applied over a metallic covering, constituting

the outer-most sheath of the cable.
armour a covering consisting of a metal tape(s) or wires, generally used to

protect the cable form external mechanical effects.
single-conductor cable; slng/e-cote cable a cable having only one core.
multiconductor cable a cable having more than one core.
multicore cable a .cable having more than one core.
flat (multicore) cable a multicore cable having cores or groups of cores arranged in
parallel flat formation.
flexible cable a cable which is required to be capable of being flexed while in

service and of which the structure and materials are such as to fulfil
this requirement.
68 EBCS-1 0 1995 ETHIOPIAN BILDING CODE STANDARD

cord a flexible cable with a limited number of conductors of ~mall cross-

sectional area.
aerial (insulated) cable an insulated cable designed to be suspended overhead and outdoors.
heating cable a cable with or without a shield or a metallic sheath, intended to

give off heat for heating purposes.
4.4 SIZE OF CONDUCTORS
4.4.1 Phase Conductors in a.c. Circuits and Live Conductors in de circuits
(1) The minimum nominal cross-sectional area of conductor shall be:
a) .1.0mm2 for cables and insulated copper conductors for power and lighting circuits;
b) 10.0mm2 for bare copper conductors for power circuits;
c) 16.0mm2 fo~ bare aluminium conductors for power circuits; .•.
d) O.5mm2 for flexible cables of copper conductors for extra low voltage.
4.4.2 Neutral Conducton ~

,.l
(1) For a polyphase circuits in which imbalance may occur in normal service, the neutral
conductor shall have a cross-sectional area adequate to carry the maximum connected load
between the neutral and anyone ungrounded conductor.
(2) For a polyphase circuit in which serious imbalance is unlikely to occur in normal service,
other than a discharge lighting circuit, multicore cables incorporating a reduced neutral conductor
may be used. When single-core cables are used in such circuits, the neutral conductor shall have
a cross-sectional area appropriate to the expected value of the neutral current.
(3) In a discharge lighting circuit, the neutral conductors shall have a cross-sectional area not
.less than that of the· phase conductor(s).

4.5 AMP ACITY OF WIRES, CABLES AND FLEXIBLE CORDS
4.5.1 Conductor Operating Temperature
(1) The current to be carried by any conductor for sustained periods during normal operation
shall be such that conductor operating temperature given in the appropriate table of current-
carrying capacity in Annex B of this Section is not exceeded.
4.5.2 Cables Connected in Parallel
(1) Except for a ring final circuit, cables connected in parallel shall be of the same construction,
of cross-sectional area, length and disposition, without branch circuits and arranged so as to
carry substantially equal current.
4.5.3 Cables Connected to Bare Conductors or Busbars
(1) Where a cable is to be connected to a bare conductor busbar, its type of insulation and/or
sheath shall be suitable for the maximum operating temperature of the bare conductor or busbar.
4.5.4 Voltage Drop
(1) The size of conductors shall be, such that the voltage drop between the supply terminal and.
fixed current-using equipment shall not exceed 4% of the nominal voltage of the supply line,
when the conductors are carrying the full, load current.
4.6 FLEXIBLE CORDS
(1) Flexible cords may be used for:

a) electrical equipment for household or similar use having a rating of 16~OAor less at
voltages not exceeding 230.0V and which is intended to be moved from place t-o place~.
b) electrical equipment for industrial use which must be capable of being moved from place
to place for operation;
c) pendants;
d) the connection of stationary equipment to facilitate its fnterchange;
e) the connection of electrical components between which relative motion is necessary;
f) the connection of appliances such as ranges and clothes dryers;
g) 'supplying of current of portable lamps and other devices or exhibition purposes;
h) wiring of cranes and hoists.
70 EBCS-10 1995 ETHIOPIAN BILDING CODE STANDARD

(2) Flexible cord shall not be used:
a) as a substitute for the fixed wiring of structures and shall not be:
i) pennanently secured to any structural member; or

ii) run through holes in walls, ceilings, or floors; or
iii) run through doorways, windows, or similar openings;
b) at temperature above the temperature rating of the cord or at a temperature sufficiently

low as to be liable to result in damage to the insulation or overall covering;
c) for the suspension of any device weighing more than 2.3kg unless the cord and device
assembly are marked as capable of supporting a weight upto 11.Okg.
(3) Flexible cord shall be protected by insulating bushing or in some other acceptable manner
where it enters or passes through the enclosure wall or the partitioning of a device or enters a
lampholder.
(4) Where a flexible cord is used as an extension cord or to plug into an appliance or other
device, no live parts shall be exposed when one end is connected to a source of supply and the
other end is free.
4.7 OLO OF CONDUCTORS
(1) Colour identification of conductors shall be as specified in Tables 4.1 anr 4.2 V'
4.8 MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE TEMPERATURE
(1) Any cable must be capable of withstanding the maximum expected short-circuit current in
its circuit for the maximum expected disconnection time of its protective device without
exceeding the maximum pennissible temperature given in Table 4.3 ,,/

Table 4.1 Colour identification of cores of flexible cables and cords
Number of cores Phase

Phase
Function
Brown Blue
Brown
Phase
Brown of core
or black
.Green-and-yellow
Colour(s)
Green-and-yellow
Green-and-yellowof ' core
Protective
Neutral
Neutral
Table 4.2 Colour identification of cores of non-flexible cable and

bare conductors for fixed wiring
Function I Colour identification

Protective (including earthing) conductor Green and yellow
Phase of a.c. single - phase circuit red or yellow or blue
Neutral of a.c. single or three-phase circuit black
Phase R of 3- phase circuit red
Phase Y of 3-phase a.c. circuit yellow
Phase B of 3-phase a.c. circuit blue
Positive of d.c. 2-wire circuit red
Negative of d.c. 2-wire circuit black
Outer (positive or negative) of d.c. 2-wire circuit derived from red
3-wire system red
Positive of 3-wire d.c. circuit black
Middle wire of 3-wire d.c. circuit blue
Negative of 3-wire d.c. circuit
72 EBCS-1 0 1995 ETHIOPIAN SILOING CODE STANDARD

Table 4.3 Maximum conductor operating temperature
Conduct Insulation
60°C
70°C rubber
220
200
250 material
160(general
85°C 160/140t
Mineral160/140t 250°C
160
temperature
Umltlng
p.v.c
p.v.c final
purpose) 105 80
70
60
90
70 (sheath) Conductor
(sheath)
85
operating temperature °C
combustible
- Plasticinmaterials
touchnor contact with
covered or exposed to
70°C p.v.c (general purpose)
t above 300.6m2

ANNEX
PREFACE TO THE TABLES IN ANNEX At AND

ANNEX Btt FO,R CABLES AND FLEXIBLE CORDS
A.I BASIS OF TABULATED CURRENT -CARRYING CAPACITY
The current-carrying capacity set out in Annex B takes account of IEC Publica~ion 364-5-523(1983),
so far as the later is applicable.
For types of cable not treated in the IEC publication (e.g. annoured cables), the current-carrying
capacity of Annex B is based on data provided by ERA Technology Ltd.ttt, and the British
Cable Makers' Confederation (see also ERA Report 69-30 'current Rating Standards for
Distribution Cables"),
The tabulated current-carrying' capacity relates to continuous service and is also known as the
full thermal current rating' of the cable, corresponding to the conductor operating temperature
indicated in the headings to the tables concerned.
It is intended to provide for a satisfactory life of conductor and insulation subject to the thermal
effects of carrying current for sustained periods in normal service. A cable may be seriously
damaged, leading to early failure, or its service life may be significantly reduced, if it is operated
for any prolonged period at a temperature higher than the indicated value.
In addition, there are other considerations affecting the choice of the cross-sectional area of a
conductor, such as the requirements for protection against electric shock, protection against
thermal effects, overcurrent protection (see A.5 below), voltage drop (see A.7 below) and the
limiting temperatures for terminals of equipment to which the conductors are connected.
t Annex A: Correction factors
tt Annex B: Current-carrying capacity and voltage drop

ttt ERA Technologies Ltd, Cleave Road, Leatherhead, Surrey KT22 7SA

The tabulated current-carrying capacity relates to a single circuit in the instanation methods
shown in Annex A of Section 8, in an ambient air temperature of 30°C. The curr<?nt-carrying
capacity given in the tables for a.c. operation apply only to frequencies in the range 49.0 to
61.0Hz. For other conditions, appropriate correction factors are to be applied as described below.
The current ratings given for, single-core armoured cable are for the condition of armour bonded
at 'both ends and to earth.
A.2 CORRECTION FACTORS FOR CURRENT-CARRYING CAPACITY
The current-carrying capacity of a cable for continuous service is affected by grouping" by

ambient temperature, by partial or total enclosure in thennal insulating and for a.c., by
frequency. Annex A provides relevant correction factors as in the following:
A.2.1 Grouping -..I
Tables A.I, A.2 and A.3 give the correction factors to be applied to tPe tabulated current-
carrying capacity where cables or <rcuits are grouped.
A-2.2 Ambient temperature v

Tables A.4 and A.S give the correction factor to be applied to the tabulated current-carrying
capacity depending upon the actual ambient temperature of the location in which the cable is to
<beinstalled.
In practice, the ambient air temperatures may be detennined by thennometers placed in free air
as close as practicable to the position at which the cables are installed or are to be installed,
subject to the provision that the measurements are not to be influenced by the heat arising from
the cables; thus, if the measurements are made while the cables are loaded, the thennometers
should be placed about 0.5m or ten times the overall diameter of the cable, which ever is the
lesser, from the cables, in the horizontal phme, or 150.0mm below the lowest of the cables.
Tables AA and A.5 do not take account of temperature increase, if any, due to solar or other
infra-red radiations; where cables are subject to such radiation, the current-carrying, capacity may
need to be specially calculated.

A.2.3 Other frequencies
In extreme cases, notably for large multicore cables, the reduction in current-carrying capacity
of cables carrying, for example, balanced 400.0Hz a.c. compared with the current-carrying
capacity at 50.0Hz, may be as much as 50%. For small cables and flexible cords, such as may
be used to supply individual tools, the difference in the 50.0Hz and the 400.0Hz current-carrying
capacities may be negligible.
A.3 EFFECTIVE CURRENT -CARRYING CAPACITY
The current-carrying capacity of a cable corresponds to the maximum current that can be carried
in specified conditions without the conductors exceediQg the permissible limit of steady state
temperature for the type of insulation concerned.
The values of tabulated current represent the effective current carrying capacity only where no
correction factor is applicable; otherwise, the current-carrying capacity corresponds to the
tabulated value multiplied by the appropriate factor or factors for ambient temperature, grouping
and thermal insulation, l!S applicable.
Irrespective of the type of overcurrent protective device associated with the conductors
concerned, the ambient temperature correction factors to be used when calculating current-
carrying capacity (as opposed to those used when selecting cable sizes) are those given in
Table A.4.
A.4 RELATIONSHIP OF CURRENT-CARRYING CAPACITY T<i OTHER

CIRCUIT PARAMETERS
The relevant symbols used in Annex A and Annex B are as follows:
v the current-carrying capacity of a cable for continuous service, under the particular
installation conditIons concerned.
It the value of current tabulated in Annex B for the type of cable and installation
method concerned, for a single circuit in an ambient temperature of 30°C. ,
~ Ib the design current of the circuit, i.e. the current intended to be carried by the circuit
in normal service.

SECTION 4: -CONDUCTORS
In the nominal current or current setting of the device. protecting the circuit against /"
overcurrent.
12 the operating current (Le. the fusing current or tripping current for the conventional
operating time) of the device protecting the circuit against overload.
G - A correction factor to be applied where the installation conditions differ from those for
which values of current carrying capacity are tabulated in Annex B. The various
correction factors are identified as follows:
c. for ambient temperature

Cg for grouping
Cj for thermal insulation
Ct for operating temperature of conductor.
In all circumstances, Iz must be not less than Ib, and In also must be not less than lb.
Where the overcurrent device is intended to afford protection against overload, 12 must not
exceed 1.451. and In must not exceed Iz (see A.5 below).
Where the overcurrent device is intended to afford short circuit protection only, In can be
greater than Iz and 12 can be greater than 1.451z.
A.5 OVERLOAD PROTECTION
Where overload protection is required, the type of protection provided does n9t affect the
current-carrying capacity of a cable for continuous service (lz), but it may affect the choice of
conductor size. The operating conditiQns of a cable are influenced not only by the limiting
conductor temperature for continuous service, but also by the conductor temperature which might
be attained during the conventional operating time of the overload protection device, in the event
of an overload.
This means that the operating current of the protective device must not exceed 1.45Iz. Where the
protective device is a fuse or a miniature circuit-breaker, this requirement is satisfied by selecting
a value of Iz not less than In
In practice, because of the standard steps in nominal rating of fuses and circuit-breakers, it is
often necessary to select a value of In exceeding lb' In that case, because it is also necessary for

Iz in turn to be not less than the selected value of Iu, the choice of conductor cross-sectional area
may be dictated by the overload conditions and the current-carrying capacity (IJ of the
conductors will not always be fully used.
The size needed for a conductor protected against overload by a semi-enclosed fuse can be
obtained by the use of a correction factor, 1.45/2=0.725, which results in the same degree of
protection as that afforded by other overload protective devices. This factor is to be applied to
the nominal rating of the fuse as a divisor, thus indicating the minimum value of -4 required of
the conductor to be protected. In this case also, the choice of conductor size is dictated by the
overload conditions and the current-carrying capacity (IJ of the conductors cannot be fully used.
A.6 DETERMINATION OF THE SIZE OF CABLE TO BE USED
Having established the design current (Ib) of the circuit under consideration, the appropriate
procedure described in A-6.1 to A-6.4 below will enable the designer to determine the size of
the cable that will be necessary to use.
As a preliminary step, it is useful to identify the length of the cable run and the permissible
voltage drop for the equipment being supplied, as this may be an over-riding consideration (see
A.7 below). The permissible voltage drop in mV, divided by Ib and by the length of run, will
give the value of voltage drop in mv/Alm which can be tolerated. A voltage drop not exceeding
that value is identified in the appropriate table and the corresponding cross-sectional area of
conductor needed on this account can be read-off directly before any other calculations are made.
The conductor size necessary from consideration of the conditions of normal load and overload
is then detennined. All correction factors affecting Iz (that is, the factors for ambient
temperature, grouping and thermal insulation) can, if desired, be applied to the values of -4 as
multipliers. This involves a process of trial and error until a cross-sectional area is reached
which ensures that Iz is not less than Ib and not less than Iu of any protective device that is
intended to select. In any event, if a correction factot for protection by a semi-enclosed fuse is
necessary, this has to be applied to Iu as a divisor. It is, therefore, more convenient to apply all
the correction factors to In as divisors.
This methojl is u"sed in A.6.1 through A.6.3 and produces a value of current and that value (or
the next larger value) can readily be located in the appropriate table of current-carrying capacity
and the corresponding cross-sectional area of conductor can be identified directly. It should be
noted that the value of -4 appearing against the chosen cross-sectional area is not Iz. It is not
78 ~EBCS-10 1995 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD,

necessary to know Iz where the size of conductor is chosen by this method; but if it is desired
to identify Iz the value is determined by the method indicated in A.3 above.
However, this method cannot be used. for cables installed in enclosed trenches (Installation
Methods 18, 19 and 20 of Annex A, Section 8) because the correction factors given in Table A3
are related to conductor cross-sectional areas. For such cables, it is, therefore, necessary to use
the process of trial and error described above, selecting on a trial basis a particular size of cable
from, for instance, voltage drop considerations.
A.6.1' Overload protection afforded by a fuse or a miniature circuits breaker
(1) For single circuits
- divide nominal current of the protective device (In) by any applicable correction factor
for ambient temperature (CJ given in Table AA.
- then further divide by any application for thermal insulation (CJ
(2) The size of cable to be used shall be such that its tabulated current-carrying capacity (~)
give in Equation (AI) below is not less than the value of nominal current of the protective
device adjusted as above:
~ (AI)
~J! -I) (Ampere)
Ca~:
(3) For groups
- divide the nominal current of the protective device (In) by the correction factor for
grouping (Cg) given in Table::. A.l, A.2" or A.3:
(A2)
Alternatively, it may be selected in accordance with the following formulae, provided that the
circuits of the group are not liable to simultaneous overload:
------~--~----~---~--~~---~--~---~----~--~---~
(A.3)
and
(AA)
(Ampere ).
I: +0.48/; [1~/e2l
t'c;; Ct."
The size of cable to be used shall be such that its tabulated single-circuit current-ca.rrYing
capacity (It) is not less than the value of It calculated in accordance with Equation (A.2) ab~ve
or, where Equations.(A.3) and (A.4) are used, not less than the larger of the resulting two values
of~.
Where correction factors C. and/or Cj are applicable, they are to be applied as divisors to the
value of It determined by the above formulae.
A.6.2 Protection· device a semi-enclosed fuse
(1) For single circuits
- divided the nominal current of the fuse (In) by any applicable correction .factor for
ambient temperature (CJ given in Table A.Sj
- then further divide by any applicable correction factor for thermal insulation, (Cj);
J ~ then further divide by 0.725.
The size of cable to be used shall be such that its tabulated current-carrying capacity (~) is not
less than the value of nominal current of the fuse adjusted as above:
(A. 5)

/'
(2) For groups
- divided the nominal current of the fuse In by 0.725 and by the applicaole correction
factor for grouping (Cg) given in Tables AI, A2 ,or AJ
(A6)
Alternatively, it may be selected by the following formulae, provided that the circuits of the
group are not liable to simultaneous overload.
(A7)
and
(AS)
(Ampere)
The size of cable to be used shall be such that its tabulated single-circuit current-carrying
capacity (It) is not less than the value of It calculated in accordanc€; with Equation (A6) above
or, where Equation (A7) and (AS) are used, not less than the larger of the resulting two values
of It.
(J) Where correction factors C. and/or Cj are applicable, they are to be applied as divisors to -the
value of It determined by the above Equation.
A.6.3 Overload protection not required
Where the cable under consideration is not required to be protected against overload, the design
current of the circuit (Ib) is to be divided by any applicable correction factors, and the size of
the cable to be used shall be such that its tabulated current-carrying capacity (It)given by

Equation (A.9) below for the installation method concerned is not less than the value of Ib
adjusted as above:
(A.9)
(Ainpere)
A.6.4 Variation of installation conditions along a cable route
The procedures in A.6.1 through A.6.3 above are based on the assumption that all the conditions
necessitating the use of correction factors apply ,to the same part of the route of the conductors
of the circuit. Where various factors apply to different parts of the route, each part may be
treated separately or, alternatively, only the factor or combination of factors appropriate to the
roost onerous conditions encountered along the route may be applied to the whole of the route.
It is permissible to obtain more precise factors by calculation of the various conductor
temperature rises that will occur along such a route, provided that the appropriate limiting
temperature of the conductor is nowhere exceeded.
A.7 TABLES OF VOLTAGE DROP
In the tables, values of voltage drop are given for a current of one ampere for a metre run, i.e,
for a distance of 1.Om along the route taken by the cables, and represent the result of the voltage
drops in all the circuit conductors. The values of voltage drop assume that the conductors are
at their maximum permitted nolffial operating temperatures.
The values in the tables, for a.c. operation, apply only to frequencies in the range 49.0Hz to
61.0Hz; and for single-core armoured cables, the tabulated values apply where the armour is
bonded to earth at both ends. - The values of voltage drop for cables operating at higher
frequencies may be substantially gre&ter.
For a given run, to calculate the voltage drop (in mY) the tabulated value for the cable
concerned has to be multiplied by the length of the run in metres and by the current the cable
is intended to carry; namely, the design current of the circuit (Ib) in amperes. For three-phase
circuits, the tabulated mV/AIm values relate to the line voltage and balanced conditions have
been assumed.
82 _' EBCS-10 1995 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

For cables having conductors of 16.0mm2 or less cross-sectional area, their inductances can be
ignored and (mV/Alm)r values only are tabulated. For cables having conductors greater than
16.0mm2 cross-sectional area, the impedance values are given as (mV/Alm)z, together with the
resistive component (mV/Alm)r and the reactive component (mV/Alm)x
The direct use of the tabulated (mV/Alm)r or (mV/Alm)z values, as appropriate, may lead to
pessimistically high calculated values of voltage drop or, in other words, to unnecessarily low
values of permitted circuit lengths. For example, where the design current of a circuit is
significantly less than the effective current-carrying capacity of the cable chosen, the actual
voltage drop would be less than the calculated value because the conductor temperature (and,
hence, its resistance) will be less than that on which the tabulated mV/Aim had been based.
As regards power factor in a.c. circuits, the use of the tabulated mV/Aim values, (for the larger
cable sizes, the tabulated (mV/Alm)z values) to calculate the voltage drop is strictly correct only
when the phase angle of the cable equals that of the load. When the phase angle of the cable
does not equal that of the load, the direct use of the tabulated mV/Aim or (mV/Alm)z values
leads to a calculated value of voltage drop higher than the actual yalue. In some cases, it may
be advantageous to take account of the load power factor wher calculating voltage drop.
Where a more accurate assessment of voltage drop is desirable the following methods may be
used.
(a) Correction for operating temperature shall be carried as follows:
For cables having conductors of cross-sectional area 16.0mm2 or less, the design value of
mV/Aim is obtained by multiplying the tabulated value by a factor Ct, given by
12
c=
t
230 + t -
p
(CC - ~)(t
a g i t p
- 30) (A. 10)
230 + tp
where ~ is the maximum permitted normal operating temperature, DC.
Equation (A. 10) applies only where the overcurrent protective device is other than a fuse and
where the actual ambient temperature is equal to or greater than 30°C.

Note: For convenience, the above fonnula is based on the resistance-temperature coefficient of 0.004 per °C at 20
°C for both copper and aluminium conductors.
For cables having conductors of cross-sectional area greater than 16.0mm2, only the resistive
component of the voltage drop is affected by the temperature and the factor Ct, is therefore
applied only to the tabulated value of (mV/Alm), and the design value of (mV/Alm)z is given
by the vector sum of Ct (mV/Alm), and (mV/Alm)x'
For very large conductor sIzes where the resistive component of voltage drop is much less than
the corresponding reactive part (i.e when x/r~3) this correction factor need not be considered.
(b) Correction for load power factor·
For cables having conductors of cross-sectional area of 16.0mm2 or less, the design value of
mV/Aim is obtained approximately by multiplying the tabulated value by the power factor of
the load, CDS ~.
For cables having conductors of cross-sectional area greater than 16.0mm2 the design value of
mV/Aim is given approximately by: CDS ~ [tabulated (mV/Aim),] + sin ~ [(tabulated (mV/Alm)xl
For single-core cables in flat formation, the tabulated values apply to outer cables and may
underestimate for the voltage drop between an outer cable and the centre cable for cross-
sectional areas above 240.0mm2 and power factors greater than 0.8.
(c) Combined correction for both operating temperature and load power factor
From (a) and (b) above, where it is considered appropriate to correct the tabulated mV/Aim
values for both operating temperature and load power factor, the design values of mV/Aim are
given as follows:
i) For cables having conductors of 16.0mm2 or less cross-sectional area:
Ct CDS ~ (tabulated mV/Alm)
ii)For cables having conductors of cross-sectional area greater than 16.0mm2:
CtCDS ~ (tabulated mV/Alm),) + sin ~ (tabulated mV/Alm)x)'

ANNEX A (NORMATIVE)
CORRECTION FACTORS
Table A.I: Correction factors for groups of more than one circuit of single-core cables, or more than one multi~ore cable ;/.1
([0 be applied to the corresponding current-carrying capacity for a single circuit in Tables B.I through B.8, B.9 through B.16, B.l7 throughB.l9, B.20, B.2?, B.28, B.31 through B.38, B.39 through B.46t) Il.-
,
-- -,-,--
320
-,, -, ,--
0.81
60.67
0.69
0.70
0.71
0.73
7100.39
90.38
14
0.72
0,74
0.70
0.66
0.77
0.76
0.62
0.90
0.50
0.52
0.54
0.57
0.60
0.65
0.43
0.72
0.75
0.79
5
4 0.90
12
0.730.41-
0.45
0.460.77
0.90
0.90
16 0.65
0.71 I0.91
0.6 0.66
0.7
0.94
7~.
-
Vertical
Spacedtt#
0.60
0.66
Correction factor (C~
l;",
J.-'t
Number touching
of circuits (Method
horizontal (method 11)
11) cables
or multicore ../' Spacedtt J.:r
J,b
'c9-<f
3cs
t When cables having differing conductor operating temperatures are grouped together, the current rating shall be based upon the lowest operating temperature of any cable "
in the group.
tt Spaced by a clearance between adjacent surfaces of at least one cable diameter (D.) where the horizontal clearances between adjacent cable exceeds 2D., no correction factor need be applied.
# Not applicable to mineral insulated cables, see Table A.2.
00
V\
/
U'f~(~~!St
Table A.2 Correction factors for mineral insulated cables installed on
perforated tray
(To be Applied to the Corresponding Current-Carrying Capacity for Single Circuits for Reference Method 11 ~
Table B.27)
l
Tray 93.
.0.95
4
0.90
21;0
0.75
0.80
0.70
0.75
1.0
1.0
0.85
1.0 1
-6Number of multicore
Multiconductor
Arrangement
Single cables
of cables
conductor or1
cablestouching
cables
cables er of
circuits
touching
spacedt
1trefoil
spaced t Numb
••
I c
Vertical Trays ~I
"C
(
,
c
C
I
c
.!
"C
~
C
~I
.!
l
~
t l
Spaced by a clearance by between adjacent surfaces of at least one cable diameter (Dc) I
tt Spaced by a clearance between adjacent surfaces of at least one cable diameter ( 2De). ~
I
c
1
~
Notes to Tables A.I and A.2
Ic
(i) The factors in the Tables are applicable to groups of cables all of one size. The value of current derived from 1
application of the appropriate factors is the maximum current to be carried by any {)f the cables in the group. I
(
I;,
(ii) If, due to known operating conditions, a cable is expected to carry not more than 30% of its grouped rating, it
may be ignored for the purpose of obtaining the rating factor of its grouped rating, it may be ignored for the
purpose of obtaining the rating factor for the rest of the group. For example, a group ofN loaded cables would
normally require a group reduction factor of Cgapplied to the tabulated~. H,owever,if M cables in the group
carry loads which are not greater than O.3CgLtamperes the other cables can be sized by using the group rating
factor corresponding to (N-M) cables.
(iii) When cables having differing conductor operatihrgtemperatures are grouped together, the current rating shall be
based on the lowest operating temperature of any cable in the group.
(iv) Where the horizontal clearances between adjacent cables exceeds 2Dc, no correction factor need be applied.
86 EBCS-10 1995 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD ~

Table A.3 - Correction factors Cor cables installed in enclosed 1:renches
~taIlation Methods 18, 19 and 20 of Annex A, Section 8yt j' l' e-vCf ~[qq7 .
The correction factms tabu1atedbelow relate to the di'l""ition of cable illustrated m lrem No. 18 to lrem No. 20 of Annex A, Soroon 8, and are "1'Plicable to the curren~~.
capacities for Reference Methods 12 or 13 of Annex A, Section 8, as given in the relevant tables of this Annex.
1 0.93
0.92
0.88
core0.90
0.89
0.87
1610
0.81
2
0.76
0.87
0.71
0.82
0.75
0.85
0.84
0.79
3
8
0.67
0.73
0.81
0.66
0.72
0.63
11
0.90
0.61
0.56
0.88
0.83
0.64
0.89
7
0.57
0.52
0.60
0.68
0.51
0.69
0.74
0.63
0.48
0.53
0.67
0.80
0.66
0.72
0.78
0.59
0.82
0.73
5
0.50
0.41
0.43
80.81
0.83
0.85
0.59
0.74
0.80
0.65
0.49
0.55
~0.65
0.91
0.86
0.82
0.80
0.78
0.77
0.69
0.78
0.49
three-0.86
0.54
0.62
4
6
0.46
0.76
9
0.44
0.47
four-
or
0.84
three-
core
core two-core
two-core
0.77
0.70
0.58
\9.86
cables,
42 8 cables
three-
cables
core
or3
three-
cables,
core 63or
cables,
cables,
3 cables,
24
12 core
four-corefour-
two-core
cables
cables
or
cables
three-
three-
cables
or
or
four-
two-core
single-core
0.56
cables,
cables,
core or 41
cables,
cables, four-
cables,
8or
cables, four-
or
4or
single-
single-core 12 9or
6or
212
4
two-
two- cables Installation Installatior:l
Method Installation
18Method
6 single-Method
20core 19
18 6 single-core
single- core' 12 single-core
cross-
{
0)
~
~
'0
o
~J
t when cables having different conductor operating temperatures are grouped together, the current rating shall be based on the lowest operating temperature of any cable in the group.
(Y:)
-J
00
00
Table A.4 Correction factors for ambient temperature where protection is against short-circuit
. Note This table applies where the associated overcurrent protective device is intended to provide short-circuit protection only. Except where the device is a semi-enclosed fuse, the table also applies where the
device is intended to provide overload protection.
---
------- -
0.41
0.29
0.96
0.50
0.54
0.3
0.47
Type90 0.76
0.65
0.40
0.60
0.30
80
95
85 0.75
0.80
0.92
0.43
0.74
0.60
0.58
0.90
0.52
35
60
55
0.95
0.94
0.32
0.93
0.79
0.87
0.35
0.55
0.77
0.67
'0.50
0.35
0.97
0.91
0.94
0.71
0.70
0.88
0.91
7540
65
50
701.0insulation
0.89
0.85
0.41
0.82
4530
0.61
0.63
0.31
0.45
0.57
0.50
0.84
of 1.02
1.02
1.04
1.03 "8Soe
gOOesheath
sooe
800e
700e
700e
Operating Ambient temperature °c
1.03
25
NOTE: (i) Correction factors for flexible cords and for 85°C or 150°C rubber insulated flexible cables are give in the relevant table of current-carrying capacity.
(ii) This table also applies whep determining the current-carrying capacity of a cable.
(t) These factors are applicable ~~ly to rating in Columns 2 through 5 of Tables B.l and B.2.
Table A.5 Correction factors for ambient temperature where the overload protective device is a semi-enclosed fuse
- - -- 1.03
0.86
0.83
0.97
0.84
0.49
0.39
0.48
0.68
0.89
0.42
0.86
0.96
0.88
0.41
0.58
0.71
30
60
55
45
40
80
75
90
35
65
85
95
0.98
0.72
0.62
0.91
0.93
0.95
0.87
0.56
0.69
0.79
0.94
0.80
0.90
0.92
0.89
0.85
0.76
0.96
0.77
0.82
0.55
0.64
0.43
70
50
1.02
-1.021.03
1.01.04 25
1.02
.
85 85
0.90
80
70
60 - -
Ambient temperature FC]
70, sheath
105, sheath
temperature
./
• These factors are applicable only to ratings in columns 2 to 5 of Tables B.I ~d B.2.
Note: Correction factors for flexible cords and for 85°C or 150°Crubber-insulated flexible cables are given in the relevant table of current-carrying capacity.
ANNEX B (NORMATIVE)
TYPE OF CABLE AND AMP ACITY
Table B.1 Single-core P.V.C. insulated cables, non-armoured, with or without sheath
(copper conductor)
Current-carrying capacity (Amperes) Ambient temperature : 30°C

Conductor operating temperature: 70° C
II.~.
..mV
2.5 ac. ,I
ac.
31154
1030
10
.mV151
162
101
125
114
Of
2
--Trefoil
single-phase
3•••
sing!
52611
ac.
119
10.5
14.5
-mV-
19.5 a4953
46
136
134
171
73
216
99
210
239
269
245
273
320
346
400
326
394
1138
1086
34
2621
24
61
15.5
11 42
207
232
164
106
467
656
25
66
31
36
110
mV 91070
12
11
57
192
300
341
151
162
219
172
191
167
234
246
254
156
141
137
60
361
262
369
356
419
69
146
112
126
166
330
306
362
396
436
409
460
521
424
266
472
615
367
465
456
545
561
659
273
311
214
197
404
104
130
463
549
569
709
69
240
1166
826
732
634
652
792
635
920
1265
-mY
655
n943
76
56
41
37
26
ac.
3
7 65
50
264
533
982
749
13.5
15.5 Of
261
161
32
it971
79
43
1149
1079
1337
1216
1420
mV
17.5
16
i{
223
129
349
296
504
564
303
316
515
594
59
27
694
679
723
77616
12
1020
904
692
795
47 mV'
20
-mY
67
1058
I~
2Of
2-2
-14 ac.
cables
-cables,
-;.\ d.c.
cables
4ac.
Of
d.c. Of
cables,
cables,
e-phase
touching
touching
cables
Vertical
2
Of
Of
d.c.flal
cables, Of
- Reference
546
626
720 3 Of
3trefoil
ac. Of
-Reference4cables
cables
d.c. Method Method
Reference
flal 1 (dipped 12 (free air)
HOfizontaJ
in I flal
3single-phase
~\ 33
and ttYee-phase
touching
three
and
three-phase
single-phase
spaced
ttYee-phase
ac.cabI
ac.
ttYee
three-phase
~V esphase
flal
flal
2 touching
cables,
phase trefoil
and
and conduit
etc.) on a~ethod
wall or3 in(endosed
spaced perforaled cable tray horizontal Of
trunking vertical) 3 Of 4 cables
cross- Reference Method 4 (endosed in Reference Method 11 (on a
'l',V
-{
I,
p.•..O<,>.eoc•.••••• by - ooen"Ii-enclo~ E'•.•se. see A.6.2 o£ the preCace 'to this Ar1nex.
Table B.2 Voltage drop (per ampere per meter)
Conductor operating temperature : 70°C
10xz0.20
z)(z rr44
x1.75
0.29
0.195
0.28
0.190
0.180
0.27
0.185
0.28
0.175
0.26 r0.29
29
180.068
20.39
1.80
1.30
0.54
0.69
0.970.059
0.060
Reference
and
r1.30
7.3
11
4.4r1.75
0.63
1.75
1.25
0.46
0.93
1.50
0.49
0.95
0.65
1.80
0.41
1.10
0.55
0.80
0.50
1.50
1.25
0.43
0.57
0.95
0.66
1.10
0.053
0.068
0.180
0.086
0.105
0.145
0.23
0.36
0.45
0.35
0.31
0.39
0.25
0.32
0.11040.33
11
2.8
2.8
29
44
18
7.3
4.4
0.28
0.30
0.29
0.24
1.25
0.81
0.56
0.93
0.47
0.63
0.1300.26
0.160
0.21
0.1950.26
0.086
0.094
0.105
0.130
0.072
0.34
0.30
0.36
0.26
0.160
0.175
0.190
0.150
0.042
0.060
0.052
0.145
0.1400.25
0.31
0.27
0.23
0.220.150
0.0520.130
0.130
0.26
0.25
0.27
0.33
0.22
0.29
0.37
0.21
0.20 -Methods
(Enclosed
59mV
9.5
1.30
0.56
0.72
1.80
1.55
1.002.8
29
18
4.4
1.10
0.93
0.47
0.80
0.84
0.63
1.75
0.41
0.60
1.25
1.50
0.26
0.086
0.081
0.105 0.160
0.165
and
0.1300.140
0.0720.135
0.41
0.47
0.37
0.120
0.150
0.185
0.160
0.40
0.30
0.37
0.24
0.31
0.32
0.21 44
11
9.5
0.55
0.061
0.050
0.::!8
0.27
0.29
0.31
0.33
0.23
0.24
0.25
0.22
0.212.8-
2.4
7.3
25
3.8
0.066
0.26
0.115
0.150
0.185
0.08
0.053 in
84Reference 3etc.
11
0.170
0.165
0.155
0.175
0.85
0.61
0.100.22
0.12
0.14
0.076
0.093
0.140
0.135
0.145
0.155
0.36
0.41
0.32 (Flat
r0.25-in andon 1 touching) Reference Methods 1
0.170
2mV ~conduit
0.82
0.160
0.26
0.29
0.22 1.50
0.42
1.10
0.24
mV 0.55
0.29
0.34
0.27
0.26
0.160
0.098 7
38
15
6.4
1.10
0.80
1.50
0.081
0.32
0.100
mV
conduit
0.40
11
touching)
and
Reference
and 40.31
0.160
1.55
1.10
0.48
0.1300.29
0.21
0.17
0.044 110.160
0.165
0.22
0.23
0.28
0.32
0.32
0.150
0.20
0.30
0.29 0.24
in (Encl~
direct
(spacedt)
and 0.63
0.40
1.15
0.86
1.55
0.34
0.44
0.36
0.30
0.31
0.320.25
0.24
0.24
0.25
0.175
0.27
0.20
0.22
0.25
0.27
0.29
0.31
0.290.26
0.29
0.28
0.185
0.51
Method
12
(clipped
Methods
on or
Methods
trays,
(in or121,a
in 2Reference
cables Method 12 3 ac.
wall ')- single-phase
Reference Methods 3 4 cables
or cross- cables etc.
(flat or
spaced ont)atrefoiQ or - thr~phase ac.
~ t •
~ Spacing larger than those specified in Method 12 (see Annex A, section 8) will result in larger voltage drop.
Table B.3 Multicore P.V.C. insulated cables, non-armoured
(copper conductors)
Current-carrying capacity (Amperes): Ambient temperature : 30"C

Conductor operating temperature: 70"C
32
25
11 470
11099
139
167
16.5
43
219
246
57
9263
7566
192
291
21413
334 3634
8A
-19.5
95
4150
16.5
14.5
16.5
133
111
136
112
119
213
201
256
232
125
39
69
90
1
30
29
223
2
13
10
166
46
60
70
52
62
94
144
23
36
34
20
25
43
344
294
461
297
430
464
497
236
262
57
76
101
206
276
326
259
116
153
160
40
24
51
196
225
319
379
255
364
434
341
403
7
11.5
13.5
63
65
or
-cablet
cablet
cable
or
597
715
557
164
179
514
593
99
23
299
27
392
339
39415
22
196
17
72
61
96
7.5
149
223
146
119
32
41
17.5
cablet
A 402
96
530
t or
d.c.
d.c.
11a.c.
three
or or
1I four-
three-core
three-core
1three-
four-
or Icore
d.c.conduit
four- Reference
on
1core acable,
three-core Method
ceiling,3or(enclosed
wall orthree- in in
A
core
1Reference
two-core
single-phase 12.6
G cable,
cable
Method
a.c. t core cable,
cable
phase
Reference
4t.t (enclosed three-
intray),
a.c. or Reference
anMethod 1 (clippedMethod
direct)13 Reference
trunking) (free air)Method 11 (on a perforated
11phase
phase single-phase
two-core
two-core a.c..
a.c. cable
cable 1 two-core cable t,
single-phase
single-phase a.c. a.c.
t With or without protective conductor.

Circular conductors are assumed for sizes up to and including 16.0mm2• Values for larger sizes relate to shaped conductors and may safely be applied to circular conductors.
Note: Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse, see A.6.2 of the Preface to this Annex.
~---------------------
.Table B.4 Voltage drop (per ampere per meter)
Conductor
0.135
0.100
0.185
0.21
0.185
.J...0.21
0.165
0.55
0.26
0.33
1.50
0.80
1.10
0.41 z.135
x0.34
0.145
0.160
0.24
0.29
0.150
0.130
0.25
0.41
0.65
0.94
1.75
1.25
0.50
0.125
0.145
0.150
0.170
0.140
Q0.21
0.29
1.500.155
0.115
0.130
0.25
00.165
0.155
0.35
0.81
1.10
.1450.190
.130
.135
.140
0.63
1.75
0.93
0.43
0.30
1.25
0.47
0.57
-~ 0.38 '0.105
0.145
0.180
0.23
7.3
11
2.8
4.4
29
18
0.63
1.75
44
0.29
0.46
1.25
0.36
0.93,
mV
Two-core11
7.3
18
4.4three-phase
44
29
2.8
mV
phase 9.5
2.4
3.8
6.4
25
15
38
Three-or
mV
cable four-core
a.c. single-a.c. cable
Two-core
cable d.c.
mm2

\0
~ , Table B.S Single-core armoured P.V.C. insulated cables, non-magnetic armour
(copper conductors)
Current-Carrying Catpacity (Amperes):

Conductor operating temperature: 700c
flat
a.c. 3
105678
21685
4349
9332
11
12
Vertical
a.c.a.c. or spaced
d.c.
cables
trefoil
flat
or
or
and44flat
and Reference Method 12 (free air)
2 296
7720
1041
1441
447
1008
1218
919
843
763
687
525
594
624
976
710
943
891
669
893
805
622
245
193313
269
723
575
469
399
490
465
492
648
1627
816
975
777
1390
728
1174
809
676
721
673
205
179
259
225
342
1035
737
8fO
360
309
401
668
567
501
945
856
731
229
A
,263 285
338
340
357
327
385
396
415
383
578
616
719
748
640
618
632
674
851
885
525
548
422
456
515
550
593
528
566
547
808
967
872
771
997
212
230
216
217
286
279
294
287
238
2Horizontal
Horizontal
cables,
280
324
657
707
489
511
425
568
905
824
231
886
229
272
189
181
33
Vertical cables
cables,
cables,
Vertical,
three~phase
three-phase
flatshingle-
phase
spaced
touching
touching
spaced
A Reference flat Reference
a.c. 2Method
cables
or 4 cables,
perforated cable 11 on a
d.c.
three-phase
tray a.c.
single-phase
Horizontal 2Method
3cables 1single-phase a.c.
cross-
Table B.6 Voltage drop (per ampere per metre)
Conductor operating temperature: 70°C
z0.95
zrx
x0.24
0.86
0.97
0.190
0.26
0.72
0.25
0.68
0.32
0.58
0.175
0..28
0.170
0.24
0.50
0.27
0.45
0.30
0.23
0.160
0.41
0.29
0.34
0.68
0.30
0.29
0.52
0.28
0.180
0.57
0.165
0.37
0.28
0.31 x0.92
x0.190
0.43
0.190
0.38
0.30
0.180r0.079
0.500.33
0.35
0.43
0.37
0.27
0.21
0.84
0.22
0.21
0.20
0.195
0.440.27
0.390.22
0.32
0.22
0.62
0.50
0.34
0.180
0.165 r0.20
0.450.44
0.180
0.320.30
0.270.25
0.170
0.580.57
0.42
0.34
0.23
0.66
0.51
0.370.36
0.175
0.165
0.160
0.155
0.820.79
0.29 r0.135
0.120
0.091
0.175
0.80
0.42
0.165
0.105
0.082
0.140
0.560.125
0.145
0.175
0.30
0.47
0.24
0.29
0.39
0.31
0.095
0.93
0.64
0.48
0.160
0.32
0.140
0.30
0.120
0.27
0.20
0.21
0.1600.21
0.195
0.170
0.24
0.155
0.28
0.26
0.23
0.170
0.165
0.20
0.280.140
0.190
0.79
0.59
0.40
0.34
0.260.135
0.130
0.105
0.091
0.026
0.25
0.29
0.23
0.220.160
0.180
0.160
0.23
0.240.22
0.195
0.185
0.180
0.21
0.150
0.145 3mV
20.22
0.63
0.46
0.086
0.068
0.053
0.145
0.180
0.105
0.36
0.29
0.23
0.20
0.042
0.145
0.140
0.155
0.21
0.93
0.195
0.165 4mV
0.190
0.195
0.170
0.24
11
mV mV
0.22
0.21etouching)
512
andm7V
mV
0.26
0.24
and12 (in
Reference
Reference
(spacedt)
and 11 Reference
trefoil
Methods
Method
11 (Touching)
(Flat and 12 Methods 1 Reference
cables - single-phase
3 or a.c. Methods
4 cables 1, Method
- Reference
three-phac;e a.c. 12
2 cables d.c.
(Flat spacedt)
t, Spacings larger than those specified in Method 12 (see Annex A. Section 8) will result in larger voltage drop.
\0
VI
Table B.7 Multicore armoured P.V.C. immlated cables

(copper conductor)
Current-carrying capacity (Amperes):

Ambient temperature: 30°C
Conductor operating temperature: 700C
a.c. or d.c.
two-core
1single-phase cable,
Conductor
"
A
269
38
45332
35
,83
222
118
175
145
49 3472
562
267
110
128
356
41
33
A
89
163
445
310
251
378
510
207
241
590
26 190
516
231
53
290
336
469
19
31
42 1A three
97
77
102
151
157
125
409
476
291
267
386
306
439
348
592
683
540
621
547
18
21
135
405
22
2528
58
192
core Reference
or
cable, four Method
(Clipped 1 Method tray), or aReference Method 13 (free
three-phase
three-phase 1 three or
core a.c. four Reference
a.c.
perforated
cable,
direct)
horizontal 11 (on
or vertical cable
air)
Note:
Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse, see A. 6.2 of the Preface to this
Annex.

Conductor operating temperature: 70·C
Conductor
r 0.34
0.41
1.75
1.25
0.145
0.140
0.135
0.94
0.50
0.65
0.29
0.24
0.21
0.130
0.41
0.21z0.185
x0.26
Q.1300.29
0.80
1.50
1.10
0.125
0.33
0.165
0.130
0.55 x.21
0.160
00.155
0.150
0.35z1.75
0.170
0.165
0.81
1.10
0.155
0.155
0.57
0.25
1.50
0.160
0.1501.25
0.38
0.100
0.30
0.145
0.43 7.3
0.63
0.145
1.75
11
4.4
0.36
0.63
0.93
0.47
0.25229
0.155
0.11518
0.190
0.93
0.46
0.105
0.180
1.25
2.8
0.29
0.23
phase mV a.c. 2.8
0.185 4.4
7.3
29
18
11
3 9.5
mV
Two-core 2.4
3.8
6.4
25
4 threethree-phase
15
mV
cable or four-corea.c.
singlecable,
d.c.
Two-core cable
1

\0
00 Table B.9 Single-core cables having thermosetting insulation, non-armoured, with or without sheath
(copper conductors)
Current carrying capacity (Amperes): Ambient temp~rature: 30°C

.--10
1288
1443
900
683
783 -phase
--andTrefoil
cables
-ac. flat
three-
and
2459
a.c.
149
189
10091
228
124
341
263
300
400
14
33
32423
1817
58
76
43 or
or1n5
3439
859
1130
1065
1044
1228
17.5 95
12
11
1358
1581
1214
1520
126
228
240
290
336
13
22
109
53
95 990
820-trunking
or
61671
ac.
1191
1423
1069
1485
1323
30
111
375
445
426
189
135
209
170
293
308
351
270
205
355
330
235
143
183
138
156
176
195
436
17
19
25
40
71
81
70
1349
51
3
phase 584
666
904
1150
764
1033
1338
1179
1275
1436
1115
849
936
994
495
385
34
306
573
410
701
606
500
358
511
168
246
274
214
318
259
389
15
46
63
74
7
45793
868
111
163
171
203
299
379
453
26
31
476
328
824
886
794
681
743
493
711
769
630
590
524
570
370
600
651
530
579
279
341
130
140
398
644
461
23
19
85
35
54
915
973
158
226
413
505
545
215
268
730
686
326
161
41
99
3three-phase
cables, touching
three-phase
342d.c.
4cables
trefoil cables
ac.
ac.
Verticalor ac.
three-
cables
cables,
three-phase
three-
three-
single3 cables,
single
spaced ac.d.c. orflat
phase
phase
phase ..or Reference
Horizontal
cables
cables flat orflat
in direct)
3 orReference
trefoil
cables
2conduit 4 a wall1 Method
Method
onMethod or in . 12 (fee air)Reference Method 11 (on a
(clipped
orReference
trunking etc.) (enclosed
and 2ac.
Reference 2
single-phase
.rt33
Insulating
touching
ac. orMethod
or wall
d.c.
d.c. flat
flatetc.)
4 (enclosed 3 3 or 4 cables spaced,
in
and conduit
single-phase
single-phase touching in thermally vertical
perforated cable tray horizontal
I area
Note: Where the conductor is to 'be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse, see A.6.2 of the Preface to this Annex.
The current-carrying capacity in Columm 2 to 5 are also applicable to flexible cables where the cables are used in fixed installations. For cable in rigid p.v.c. conduit, the values stated
~~>~':..~e.::...~}
..~?.?_~!_~~:.~~~~::,~:';.:.~~~re a conductor operates at a temperature exceeding 7cPC. it shall be ascertained that the equipment connected to the conductor is suitable
z0.062
0.9550.072 0.150
0.1300.145
0.0630.150
0.1300.140 Reference
Methods
touching)
direct 0.170
0.165
or 3 and
on trays, Reference
4single-phase
r rrxr0.31
rMethods
z0.28
z1.15
0.29
0.180
0.25
0.155
0.26
0.75
0.28
0.58
0.27
0.24
0.150
0.48
0.43
0.23
0.140
0.37
0.33
1.05
1.35
0.180
0.175
0.170
0.165
0.145z0.22
0.37
x1.65
x0.34
0.165
0.190
0.27
0.26
0.27·
0.73
0.56·
0.41
0.33
0.36
0.99
0.89
0.65
0.25
0.49
0.42
0.24
1.20
1.35
0.68
0.26
0.39
0.49
0.195
0.25
0.0860.155
0.1050.155
0.10
0.155
1.60
0.87
0.61
0.37
0.45
0.25
0.26
0.24
0.1300.155
0.20
0.59
0.43
0.28
0.24
0.240.045
1.90
1.85
0.23
0.47
1.00
0/2.7 231
0.87
0.125
0.088
0.60
0.35
0.44
0.29
0.185
1.35
0.70
0.51
0.41
0.33
0.27
0.175
0.140
0.100
0.120
1.00
0.99
0.68
0.49
0.056
0.072
0.093
0
0.21
0.155
0.120
112
1.85
0.23
7.9
460.39
0.32
0.25
.190
.35
0.90
0.65
0.42
0.32
1.15
1.85
4.7
2.9
19 37.9
0.180
0.175
0.170
0.165
0.31
0.29
0.28
0.160
0.27
1.60
1.15
0.87
0.62
0.46
0.28
0.38
0.32
0.43
0.28
0.20
1.35
0.71
0.43
0.52
0.25
0.36
0.30
0.22
1.00
0.34
0.28
0.22
0.43
1.60
1.15
0.190
x4(Enclosed
0.32
0.31
0.1~5
1.15
0.86
1.850.150
0.100
1.15
0.23
1.60 0.50
0.37
conduit
mV 0.86
0.59
1.15
0.86
0.59
0.34
0.22
1.65 -and
0.21
1.85
0.24
19
31
12
46
3
mV0.22
0.25
4.7
2.9
etc.-0.140
89610
512
446
0.090
0.175
0.185
0.170
0.135
0.110
0.085
31
7.9
4.7
2.9
19
31
0.110
0.074
0.170
inmV7
4.0
16
40
27 0.170
0.078
0.23
0.29
0.25
0.071
0.068
0.110
0.064
0.055
0.059
0.054
0.047
0.050
4.0
0.098
0.088
0.27
0.24
0.135
6.8
4.7
2.5
Reference 0.1400.195
Methods0.135
20.1600.195
0.165
0.155 t0.160
0.1350.175
0.1350.150
0.140
Reference0.160
0.160
or(Spacedcables,
1
12 )0.170
0.24
0.165
0.22
0.180
Method
and 0.21
11
(Flat a.c.
0.24 Cabled.c. oninconduit
s 1.60 and
12
spacedt)
(Flat
1aand 12
wall)
Reference 1,
(In
touching)
11etc.
11,
trefoil)
Method
(Clipped
in or on a wall)
3 or(Enclosed
4 cables- in
three-phase .a.c.
\0
\0 t Spacing larger than those specified in Method 12 (see Annex A, Section B) will result in larger voltage drop'
-oo
Table B.11 . Multicore, non-armouroo cable having thermosetting insulation
(copper conductors)
Current-carrying capacity (Amperes): Ambient temperature: 30"C

~ 11456 -three-or
three-phase
1076251phase
phase three-
-33 orfour-
a.c.
a.c. four-
or conduitor onReference
acable Method
wallthree-
or ceiling 3
, or(enclosed
in three-in
d.c.
4146
119
1265
221
1759A
9180
384
459
305
334
532
A
phase 8276·
246
298
158
127
100
346
399
538
621
192
220
.253
115
183
145
121
225
290
741
289
352
185
149
741A
A563803
410
473
329
542
641
99
386
442
269
209
171
138
295
164
2
130
109
89
68
865 two-core
7
382
268
259
424
506
346
599
396
455
229
197
278
147
119
322
371
500
576
179
667
536
two-core
328
441
1
1281
A
cable227
96
340
693
A00
54
05
98
94 a.c. orcable
single- 1d.c.
core
1 two-core
d.c.
core cable
two-core
perforated
Reference three-
cable
an tray)
or inMethod core orcable trunking)
Reference
1 (clipped Method Reference
direct) 13 (free air)Method 11 (on a
Reference
phase four-core
phase
cablea.c.
cable a.c.cable 4 1(enclosed
Method
single-
single- three-
Note: (i) Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse, see A.6.2 of the Preface to the Annex.
(ii) Where a conductor operates at a temperature exceeding 70°C, it shall be ascertained that the equipment connected to the conductor is suitable for the conductor
operating temperature.
Table B.12 Voltage Drop(per ampere per metre)
r0.150
Conductor
0.145
0.145
0.140
0.175
0.130
0.125
0.86
0.43
0.59
0.115
0.34
0.28
0.22
0.195
0.125
0.155
0.160 z1.90
x0.52
z0.21
0.24
0.42
0.120
0.35
0.29
0.69
1.00
0.135
0:140
1.15
1.600.170
0.185
0.21
0.45
0.37
0.30
0.60
0.87
1.350.50
0.67
0.99
0.40
0.32
0.26
0.26
1.650.130
0.160
0.2000.98
1.85
1.35
1.15 3 2.5
0.120
0.155
0.49
0.67
0.195
0.39
0.31
0.25
1.35
1.85
2.9
2mVmV
phase 4mV
2.9
Three-or
three-phase
Two-corea.c. four-core
a.c.
cable singlecable
Two-core cable
d.c.
1

o
•.....
tv
Table B.13 Single-core cables having thermosetting insulation, non-magnetic armour
(copper conductors)
Current-carrying .capacity (Amperes): Ambient temperature: 30"c
or&3single- d.c.
cablesflata.c.
trefoil
2
10
303
2374phase
3A220
Horizontal
Vertical
277
1082
1170
21139
1137
1016
1032
1314
1146
1246
1204
557
1345
488
425
962
496
791
717
853
662
755
579357
293
322
358
1261
437
383
333
899
792
1055
2100
477
889
929
352
389
425
Horizontal
656
,367
phase
flat
flat
or
phase A
284
266
282
232
253
288
349
331
1266
1474
1528
1092
943
805
842
1744
1809
1155
815
714
749
612
689
587
688
614
643
1238
2026
462
516
600
539
449
497
446
412
436 touching
567spaced
11
93270
A
1094
797
871
940
767
904
700
755
810
906
1042
666
715
782
1041
524
574
618
660
1289
566
510
549
575
504
405
519
485
426
393
3:J7
356 861
961
1110
989
935
851
987
848
923
992
978
and 112
Reference
Horizontal
flat
three-
A
285
222
1214
815
918
720
625
529
463
402
346
027
Vertical
cables,
1119
cables
or 4&&
a.c.
spaced
spaced
d.c.a.c. flat
flata.c. Methodor or
3cables
single-phase
a perforated
Reference
3 414 cable
Method
cables,tray)
three-phase
11(on a.c. 2 cables d.c.
onductor single-
phase flat
three-
touching a.c. Reference Method 12 (free air)
Note: (i) Where the conductor is to be protected by a seini-enclosed fuse, see A.6.2 of the Preface to this Annex.
(ii) Where a conductor operates at a temperature exceeding 7Cf'C, it shall be ascertained tbat the equipment connected to the conductor is suitable for the conductor operating
t.empera'turc.
Conductor operating temperature: 90"C./

- .
z0.195
0.410145
zr0.33
x0.145
r0.080
r0.69
x0.53
0.105
0.180
0.175
0.190
0.175
0.20
0.155
0.27
0.23
0.150
0.165
0.190
0.125
0.180
0.170
0.135
0.24
0.140
0.155
0.170
0.38
0.35
0.31
0.23
0.36
0.24
0.30
0.29
0.092
0.165
0.086
0.125
0.195
0.29
0.26
0.21
0.43 0.29
0.25
0.31
0.41
0.34
0.170
0.165
0.180
0.86 0.26
0.140
0.27
0.30
0.190
0.28
0.30
0.185
0.29
0.84
0.440.175
0.98
0.62
0.84
0.58
0.195
0.21
0.70
0.200
0.90
0.180
0.60
0.59
0.460.160
0.195
0.21
0.49 z.180
x0.21
x0.24
r0.60
0.180
0.27
0.37
0.51
0.30
0.45
0.41
0.28
0.45
0.160
0.32
0.45
0.25
0.28
0
0.52
0.32
0.62
0.47
0.87
0.28
0.34
0.44
0.39
0.26
0.23.150 0.51
0.75
0.71
.25
0.135
0.145
0.21
0.150
0.39
0.25
0.33
0.29
0.51
0.165
0.35
0.40
0.25
0.22
0.65
0.88
0.1300.22
0.155
0.33
0.170
0.195
0.20
0.38
.24
.23
0.170
0
0.24
1.00
0.55 0.125
0.145
0.105
0.092
0.090
0.21 110.056
0.33
0.27
0.170
0.68
0.99 37mV
2and
mV
0.093
0.073
0.115
0.045
0.155
0.195
0.31
0.25
0.49
0.98
0.67
mV 5mV
64Reference
12(Spacedt)
( (in
Reference Flattrefoil
Method Reference
Methodt)12. Methods
Reference 3 or1 -4 single-phase
Methods
2 cables 1Reference a.c. 1.
Methods a.c.
and 2 12
cables spaced
11 (Flatd.c.touching)
cables - three-phase
150
t Spacings larger than those specified in Method 12 (see Annex A, Section 8) will result in larger voltage drop.
Table B.1S Multicore armoured cables having thermosetting insulation

(copper conductors)
Current-Carrying Capacity (Amperes): Ambient temperature : 30°C

1 .5
520
, 11 three-or
23
three-or
phase
34289
31
66544
732
599
636
546
39
52
78
472
463
628
673
847
728
115
90
A 29
73
42
53
25
228
124
154
238
335
386
441
A3323456727
5685
304
251
338
406
49
62
152
188
354
291
410
131
162
99
94110
187
353
197
219
279
146
180
539
three-phase
cable,
87
92
607
51
15
98
36
four-
fouror
a.c.
A1 two-core
a.c.
single-
a.c.
perforated horizontal or vertical
d.c.
1 two-core
core cable, Reference (free air) 11 (on
Method
single-
cable, cable tray} or Reference Method 13
Method 1 (clipped direct)
Note: (i) Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse, see A.6.2 of the Preface to this
Annex.
(ii) Where a conductor operates at a temperature exceeding 7fJ'C, it shall be ascertained that the
equipment connected to the conductor is suitable for the conductor operating temperature.
104 EBCS-10 1995 ETHiOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

, 1.60
Conductor 0.120
0.1250.115
z0.185
x0.140 01z1.65
x 0.160
0.59
0.28
0.140
0.175
r0.86
0.43
1.15
0.22
0.34
0.170
0.145
0.21
0.24
0.140
1.135
0.155
1.35
0.135
0.130
0.125
0.69
0.52
0.150
0.29
0.42
1.00
0.195
1.351.90
0.35 0.16'
1.85
0.99
Two-core
0.13
0.20
.21
.15
.262.9
1.35
0.67
0.50
0.32
0.26
0.40
0.195
1.85
7.9
12
4.7
231
19
.300.25
.370.31
.87
.600.120
0.155
.450.39
0.67
0.49
0.98
mV 331
d.c.Cable
2.9
12
7.9
4.7 4three-phase
19 a.c.
mV
phase
Two-core 10
27
16
2.5
6.8
4.0
mVThree-or four-core
a.c.
cable singlecable
cross-
1

/
Table B.1? Ssingle-core non-armoured cables having 8SoC rubber insulation

(copper conductors)
Current-carrying capacity (Amperes): Ambient temperature: 30°C

flat 219.5
phase
345A46
2593506
17
40
7230
242
293
190
157
127
339
372
96
52719602
835689
510443
22 and2-192
phase
6AA
.996
27
----cables,
cables,
-or
8235
- ac.
9 ac.
single-
or4touching or
or d.c.
d.c.
single Reference Method 11 (on or ad.c.
perforated
phase
428
9753A17.5
19
15
42
45
36
215
167
332
384
827
946
164
177
138
108
85
100
1088
519
Reference
ac.
2 cable
3 75
81
63
31
34
133
143
112
254
274
213
258
308
298
357
411
442
334
755
199
865
54
59
23
cables 229
989
189
379
469
553
607
636
695
791293
356
412
475
860
153
1081919
1143
542
639
25154
735
3 A
three-303
370
431
499
786
929
174
211
269
327
379
437
798
918
573140
1263
679587
499
589
1062
7
679 320
373
432
680
touching
phase
or
167
134
204
262
799
495
1060
A4Method
d.c.
or
single- ac.ac.
cables
cables,
phase orflat
trefoil
trefoil
cables
three-
3 and
(enclosed in
trefoil
three-phase
ac. or 3 or 4 4 cables
3 or cable tray)Horizontal or Vertical single-phase ac.
or vertical flatspaced
three-phase phase
and ac.three-
horizontal
ac.flat
touching Reference Method 1(clipped
Reference Method direct)
12 (free air)
Note:(i) Where the conduc~or is to be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse, see A.6.2 oft the Preface to Annex ..
(ii) Where a conductor operates at a temperature exceeding 70"C ,it shall be ascertained that the equipment cottnected to the conductor is suitable for the conductor operating temperature.
zxz
xz0.24
xz x1.200.95
z0.27
x0.25
0.24
0.22
0.29
0.26
0.25
0.23
0.28
0.29
0.31
0.26
0.48
0.91
1.20r0.87
z0.37
0.280.24
0.25
0.175
0.170
0.155
0.24
0.51
0.37
0.43
0.33 r1.30
r0.58
r0.100
0.073
0.085
0.067
0.073
0.300.072
0.110
0.105
0.29
0.32
0.65
0.27
0.41
0.30
0.88
0.23
0.28
1.15
1.650.135
0.150
0.170
0.135
0.650.48
0.72
0.56
0.40
0.47
0.45
0.52
0.900.65
0.36
0.370.190
1.35
1.00
1.85
1.651.30
0.60
0.44
0.29
0.35
0.23
0.089
0.105
0.130
0.320.085cables
0.22
0.155
0.091
1.15
1.600.140
0.24
0.150
46
0.115
0.180
0.66 0.26
0.170
0.21
0.57
0.84
0.22
1.15
1.60
0.27
1.85
0.57
0.43
1.15
0.84
1.60
0.22
1.60
0.68
0.40
1.35
0.51
0.27
1.80
0.30
0.38
0.25
7.7
4.6
120.35
1.85
1.60
0.62
231
18
2.9
0.115
0.33
0.34
0.42
0.34
1.15
1.85
1.00
mV 0.29
0.23
0.26
0.28
0.29
Reference
3(Enclosed
.
20.28
0.310.21
0.140
0.28
0.26
0.270.29
0.34
0.32
0.31
0.690.23
0.30
46
0.360.31
0.430.39
0.300.25
1.35
1.15
1.600.170
0.175
0.155
0.150
0.165
0.160
0.49
0.25
0.31
0.29
31
3
18
12
4.6
7.7
2.9
.0.25
0.135
0.22
mV0.26
0.145
0.195
d.c.0.32
0.27
0.30
Reference
director
26
16
4.0
2.5
(Flat
40
6.7
10
0.077
0.125
0.175
0.120
0.30 and
spaced
--trefoil
-0.089
0.110
. Reference
0.155
0.195
0.155
0.195
0.31
46
0.25
0.970.135
0.180
0.74
0.39
0.49
1.30
1.40
1.85
0.38
0.49
0.97
0.45
0.86
0.26
0.60
0.27
0.22
0.57
0.84
40
31
7
5
4
18
26
12
4.6
7.7
10
6.7
2.9
0.082
0.27
0.100
0.165
0.28
0.097
0.22
0.170
0.66
0.31
0.42
1.90
1.05
0.43
40
Reference
9
6
8
26
16
4.0
2.5
mV
Reference
mV
Method
inReference
etc. conduit
in
11
0.160
Methods
On
0.25
0.165
0.22
0.190
0.195
0.20
0.52
0.23
0.22
0.24
0.155
1,11,
and 0.21
0.24
0.26
0.22
0.185
Spaced
Meth~
touching)
11
)trays,
(clipped
and 0.20
0.23
1
12 1 2 cables
0.99
)0.175
(Flat
or on aM~hod
3(Enclosed wall)
0.185
Methods
Methods
12(in
touching)
12
in conduit
- single-phase ac.
Reference Method 3 or 4 cables - three-phase ac.
s·
t
Spacings larger than those specified in Method 12 (see Annex A of Section 8) will result in larger voltage drop.
o00
•....
Table B.19 Multicore, sheathed and non-armoured cables having 85°C rubber insulation
(copper conductors)
Ambient temperature: 300C

Current-carrying capacity (Amperes): Conductor operating temperature: 85°C
470499
553
359
636
1
2439
211185
254222
292
509
167147
114100
139122
6.5
48
38 103
1 n
In
34482
5A213
109
19.5
J II 333 1 two-core
phase
cable.
1 6A
256
555
2118.5
2925
1AA
320
368
66
87 329
269
310
272
675
587
436
201
409
381
312
14.5
32
16
58 174
136
144
168
88
20
34
23
413
287
438
326
37
43
33
55
81
76
59
222
117
4825
28
46
6618 7
287
237
593
515
437
151
17.5
three-
cable.
;359
two-core
two-core Reference
123
94
383
40
52
71
186
A
22
30
11phase
three-
three-
ac. or
phaseor Method
or four-core
orcable.
ac.
three-phase
cablephase
cable four-core
four-core
d.c.
ac.
or
single-ac. 3 Reference
ac. cable.
d.c.
single- (enclosed)
three..
ReferenceMethod
Method111 (on
(clipped direct) cable tray). or
a perforated Refrence Metthod 13 (free air)
II
Note: (i) Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse. se{,A.6.2 of the Preface to this Annex.
(ii) Where a conductor operates at a temperature exceeding 70DC, it shall be ascertained that the equipment connected to the conductor is suitable for the conductor operating temperature.
Conductor operating temperatures: 85°C
,
Conductor 0.25
0.99
0.68
1.35
19
r0.155
z0.170
z0
x0.26
0.165
0.150
1.15
0.84
0.86
0.59
1.85
0.175
0.22
0.42
0.52
0.160
0.35 .58
1.60
0.185
0.45
.34
.43
0.135
.27
0.145
0.140
0.150
0.160
0.130
0.30 Two-core
x 0.66
0.97
0.130
0.22
0.36
.170
0.130
0.30
.22 0.65
0.95
46
0.49
1.30
1.850.38
0.31
0.25231
12
0.30
7.7
2.9
4.6
1.30
1.80
0.195
0.155
0.39
0.190
0.150
0.48
0.25
mV cable
2.9 single-phase
3mV
19
12
7.7
46
31
4.6
cable d.c.
Two-core
16
2.5
4
40
26
10
6.7
4.0
mV a.c.
Three- or four-core,
phase a.c.
cable three-
..
Table B.2l 60°C rubber-insulated flexible cables, other than flexible cords
Current-carrying capacity: Ambient temperature: 30°C

(Amperes): Conductor operating temperature: 60"C
343 Single-phase
297
30
73
39
51
Single
without protective
.
394
,.---2738
291
124
102
644
861
192
255
222
158
541
394
471
347
175
302
140
258
A
- a.c. core
single
4
A 216-13
26
63
83
34
A
47 phase
or d.c.
five-cables cable
a.c.core
three-core,
Three-phase
conductor four-core
a.c. or
or d.c.
Conductor 1 two-core cable with or
Notes: (i) The tabulated current ratings are for cables in free air, but may also be used for cables resting on a surface.
If the cable is to wound on a drum on load, the ratings should be reduced in accordance with (iii) below and,
for cables which may be covered, (iv) below.
(ii) Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse, see A.6.2 of the preface to this Annex.
(iii) The current ratings of cables used on reeling drums are to be reduced by the following factors:
a) Radial type drum i) ventilated: 85%

ii) unventilated: 75%
b) Ventilated cylindrical type drum i) 1 layer cable: 85%

ii) 2 layers of cable: 65%
iii) 3 layers of cable: 45%
iv) 9 layers of cable: 35%
A radial-type drum is one where spiral layers of cable are accommodated between closely spaced flanges; if fitted
with solid flanges, the ratings given above should be reduced and the drum is described as non-ventilated, and if
the flanges have suitable apertures as ventilated.
A ventilated cylindrical cable drum is one where layers of cable are accommodated between widely spaced flanges
and the drum and end flanges have suitable ventilating apertures.
(iv) Where cable may be covered over or coiled up whilst on load, or the air movement over the cable restricted,
the current rating should be reduced.
It is not possible to specify the amount of reduction; but the table of rating factors for reeling drums can be used
as a guide.

Conductor
-zzxTwo-core
r zx-1.80 - 0.068
0.090
0.115
-0.49
x0.130 - --
0.170
-- 0.135
0.83
0.57
0.42
1.10
0.33
0.27
0.22
-0.079 - -- d.c.
1.55 1.85
0.175
0.1801.80
4.6
2.9
0.93
1.32
0.36
0.30
0.200.27
0.19512
0.67
0.53
7.80.91
0.140
0.64
0.150
0.1851.55'
0.21
0.130
0.170
0.21 0.190
0.185
0.1900.135
0.145
0.125
0.24
0.43
0.36
0.84
1.15
0.26
0.32
0.20
0.175 0.38
0.150
0.49
0.58
0.44
0.21
mV0.195
1.31
0.31
0.38
0.31
1.31
0.91
0.155
0.25
0.099
0.64
0.120
cable
0.25
Two-core 4.6
2.9
12
7.8
mV
d.c. a.c.mV
cable
cable mV 10r
4.0
2.5
mV
6.7
three-phase
1 three-core,
single-phase a.~
four-core or five-core
Single-phase a.c. t 2 single-core cables touching
t
Larger voltage drop will result if the cables are spaced.
Table B.23 8S·C or lS0·C rubber-insulated flexible cables

741 dc. 3AA

2131114 4476
240
540
orA Threl-phasl
sing/I-phasl a.c. 140
2170
303 1190
1017
Conductor cross-
\
. (1 53
or 41 cors,
cors
47
two-cors
99
73 64
86
36
without 192
414
645
297
354
Singlecable}
four-cors
cable,
touching
sing/I-cors
protlctivs
phasla.c.or(1five-
with
a.c.
cables
or dc. 216
thrsl- 262
397
348
467
537 885
CORRECTION FACTOR FOR AMBIENT TEMPERATURE

85°C rubber-insulated cables:
Ambient Temperature (0C): 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
Correction factor: 0.95 0.90 0.85 0.80 0.74 0.67 0.60 0.52 0.43 0.30
150°C rubber-insulated cables:

Ambient Temperature (0e) 35 to 85 90 95 100 105 110 115t 120t 125t 130135t
Correction factor: 1.00 0.96 0.92 0.88 0.83 0.78 0.73 0.68 0.62 0.55 0.48
Ambient Temperature (0e): 140t 145

Correction factor: 0.39 0.28
t Refer to notes for Table B.2!.

0.105
0.130
0.084 - 0.190 - z0.185
z x-zx-0.180 -
0.29
0.61
0.145
0.46
0.36
0.24
1.20
0.90
Conductor
r 0.21
r0.27
0.33
0.70
0.99
0.41
0.53
1.42 x0.20
0.130
0.140
0.170
0.135
0.175
0.150
0.38
0.130
0.28
0.72
0.125
0.25
0.46
0.33
0.56
0.145
1.01
1.700.150
1.43
0.22 0.190
0.195
2.00
0.185
0.20
0.21 2.00
0.175
0.32
0.22
0.63
00.170
.195
0.48
0.39
0.27
0.91
1.70
1.20 0.165
0.53
0.27
0.073
core 3 --three-phase
2mV cable
8.4
0.125
13
0.33
0.41
0.21
0.70
0.99
0.098
1.42
2.0
5.0
3.1 13
5.0
3.1
8.4
mV 52-three-core,
4mV
7.3
4.3
2.7
Two-core - single-core
a.c.
11
1mV cable a.c.cables touching
single-phase
four-core
1 two-corecables d.c.
or single-core Single-phase a.c.tor flve-
1
Note:(i) The voltage drop figures given above are based on a conductor operating temperature of 85°C and are, therefore, not accurate when the operating temperature is
in excess of 85°C. In the case of the 15<J'C cables with a conductor temperature of 15<J'C, the above resistive values should be increased by a factor of 1.2 (This factor is only
applicable to the range of 1500C rubber-insulated cables up to 16mm2 nominal cross-sectional area).
t (ii) Larger voltage drop will result if the cables are spaced .•
Table B.25 Current-carrying capacity [Amperes] (fleXIble cords)
5342520
twin -225
3A6Three-phase
25
16
10 32
10 16
313 Current-carrying
6flexible cord Maximum capacity
mass
Conductor cross- kg A a.c.
Single-phase a.c.
supportable by
Where cable is on a reel, see notes to Table B.21.
CORRECTION FACTOR FOR AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
60°C rubber and p.Y.c. cords:

Ambient Temperature (0C): 35 40 45 50 55
Correction factor: 0.91 0.82 0.71 0.58 0.41
85°C rubber cords having a h.oJ.r. sheath or a heat-resisting p.Y.c. sheath and for 85°C heat-resisting p.Y.c.
cords:
Ambient Temperature (0C): 35 to 50 55 60 65 70
Correction factor: 1.00 0.96 0.83 0.67 0.47
130
145
140
135
0.40
0.57
0.71
0.82
0.92
ISOOC 160
175
170
165
0.42
0.60
0.74
0.85
0.96
rubber cords: 1.00 155
125
Ambient Temperature (°C):35 to 120
150

Conductor operating temperature: 600Ct
Conductor cross- - .
d.c.2318
2:7
10
32
12
19
54
40
80
46
37
93
62'
mV
m Three-phase a.c.
orV single-phase
1
The tabulated yalues are for 60"C rubber-insulated and p.y.c.-insulated flexible cords. For other types of ..
flexible cords, they are to be multiplied by the following factors:
For 85°C rubber or p.y.c.-insulated: 1.09

150"C rubber-insulated: 1.31
185°C glass fibre: 1.43

Table B.27 Mineral insulated cables bare and exposed to touch (see Note ii below) or having overall covering of P.V.C.
(copper conductors and sheath)

Reference Method 1 (Oipped Direct) Sheath operating temperature: 70C
-three-
----1loaded
cables
cable
formation, a.c.
four-core
all
in cores
flat
515
64
47
37
16.5
26
19.5
21
85 -72
98.5
29
18.5
70
52
11055
41 87133
40
10.0
3132
120
38
264
18
21
14.5
23
17
18126
trefolle
28
cores
A19.5
cable
1A
phase4
125
17.5
221
392
92
45
19.522
303
346
147
202
102
247
296
A A163
loaded
A65
48
37
-112
35
249
616.5
94
14.5
45711.5
2 2816
26
31
23
19
28
21
86
371
9.5
12.0
131207
286
10
327
16.0
773
137
434
13
25
357
34
340
388
A 15
169 .loadedphase
-Asingle-core
three-core
cables
single
all
cable
cable,
440 loaded
seven-core
514 a.c.
two-core
or in
cores
twelve-core 1
core
all
three- 1 four-core 1 nineteen-
11 loaded
cable
phase .core
3phase all 3three-
a.c.
cable, cores
cable
cores
orsingle-
a.c.
single-core
Note: i) For -single-core

n_ -
cables. the sheaths of the circuit are
hloe ••.~cx-r.c>""'.cd 1-~ 1-c->'L."" •.•.• 1-he:;; tnhl...:llr.tec::1
assumed to be connected together
al'U1cs. ,..h~,-"Id be> m •.•It.iplie.;:.l nv
.••.••. 0.9_
at both ends.
"'"£.-.t:»le
:B-27 lVIineral ins&.alat:.edcables bare a •..•
d. exposed to to&.ach(see Note ii bela,"",>or havi •.•.
g overall coveri •..•
g or p.v.c.
(copper conductors and sheath) (conte'd)
Current-carrying capacity (Amperes): Ambient temperaPire: 3O-C
Reference Method 11 (On a perforated cable tray, horizontal or vertical) Sheath operating temperature: 70C
-cores
.. -- -core
- 246
164
472
202
294
335
380
424
105
135
32
43
35
80
25
47
59
19
17.5
16.592
37
3021
399
21
2232
28
147
223
187
279
27
28
124
30
466
120
69
21
40
51 17
39
97
153
229
15.5
182
267
308
352
3710
25
11
154
90
230
333
382
431
537
22471
125
73
275
314
358
11
67
28
53
43
541
188-cores
core
29' 1-28
-142 core
-1
-34
-8cores 1 three-
core Trefoil a.c.
21
AA12
48
41
19
18
A17
119
482
405
22
14
20
15
1 19
16 215
36
39552
47
364
44
26
317
11
Horizonta
loaded
cable
IVertical
spaced
A A 267
17.5
21
13
109
174
472
416
264
19.5
60
33
82
25 182
30
27
466
120
101
40
35
308
9
37
16
22
20
78
147
399
223
352
92
21
7
24
44
12
14
cable 4
16.5
14
69
59
51
183
116
245
89
6 0
135
524
3
448
18.5
52016
57
78
24
842
31
four-core
204
104
251
13 25
346
165
395
twelve-
seven-
A
AA
three-phase
touching 1
nineteen-
1
301
loaded
Flat
singleAfour-
all
allsingle-
2
two- - core phase
loaded
cable,
cables
cable
three-
3 three-phase loaded
a.c. a.c .. 1 space cable all
1
1.0
Note: i) For single-core cables, the sheaths of the circuit are assumed to be connected together at both ends.
ii) For bare cable exposed to touch, the tabulated values should be multiplied by 0.9.
..•
..• Table Dol7 Mineral insulated cables bare and exposed to touch (see note 2) or having overall covering of P.V.C•
10
Current-carrying capacity (Amperes): Ambient temperature: 3O"C
Reference Methods 12 and 13 (Free air) Sheath operating temperature:

.
7DC
I
.•
- Horizont
A20
213
259
353
309
400
446
497
110
142
173
26
34
45
37
49
62
84
40 496
30
32
5622
1
377
241
132
26
25
41
34
45
426
331
31
242
23
29
39
51
43
57
71
77
95
289
351
507
565
102
125
161
197
402
198
18
294
162A
29
32
45,4-
20
A A
- -cables
all-9---cores
loaded
1all
loaded
core
19
A
11
28
27
28
26
15.5
10
11
17
21
12
1416
59
44
101
core18
14
24
35
25
20
27
78
13
Vertical
Touchin
phase
loaded
cable
-- 1or
1 cores
seven-
load
1 loaded
16
89
28
24
30
23
21
25
33
19.5
44
21
174
264
47
60
3
cores
twelve-
four-core
cable
cable
cable
16.5
37
22
30
223
466
40
92
9nineteen-
A A A
A399
18
68
51
116
472
26
36
317
215
109
82
416
552
142 308
2
23
17.5
21
147
267
69
352
51
182
120
a.c.
cables
three-
cores
four-core
1 two-
al
8 all
phase
1cable,
three
orind.c. a.c.or
core
trefoil phasea.c.
3 phase a.c.
single-core
3 single-core cables three-
spaced
.
1.0
1 spaced three-
I
Note_" ~~ble~~~"",s?..=:,-~s
i) For ~in_gle-c?~e_ .~"O~ ~ •• ~~~"'~~~~~dt~~..-..a~::~:::~~~~g~t:Per
~_~~c::';~~ at both ends.
TableB.28 Mineral insulated cables bare and exposed to touch or having an overall covering
of p.v.c
Voltagedrop (per ampere per meter) for single-phase operation sheath operating temperature: 70°C
-z--x-z
r 0.200
x0.145
0.160
0.25
0.185
0.165
0.175
0.49
0.91
0.29
0.180
0.64
0.170
0.41
0.34
0.195
1.65
1.65
1.20
1.65 0.62
0.37
1.20
0.190
0.89
0.46
0.25
0.30
1.65 2.6
102.6
4.2
2728
42
1"1
317
.
42 Multicore
4.2
10
mV
Touching
mV
Two cables
single-core cables,
--

Table B.28 Mineral insulated cables bare and exposed to touch or having an overall covering
of p.v.c
Voltage drop (per ampere per meter) for single-phase operation sheath operating temperature: 70°C
--- r r r
x x-z0.21 10.31 Three single-core cables cables
0.200.29 0.28Spaced
0.21
0.54
0.32
0.78
0.40
0.26
1.05
1.45 0.140
0.26
0.155
0.58
22441.600.1251.60
0.150 3m0.41
50.44
0.36
0.1650.1400.22
0.36
0.26
0.320.160
0.150
0.145
0.25
0.27
6.06.0
9.19.1
2.3
3.6
3636
14
0.165
0.1702.3
3.6
6.0
9.1
14
24
36
1.45
1.05
0.82
mVmV240.21
0.79
2.3
3.6
141.05
1.45
0.29
0.25
0.55 cable
-V-0.56
0.26
0.330.39
0.30
0.36
0.28
0.80
0.43
0.30
0.36
0.42
0.22
1.05
1.45
0.32
0.25
0.29
0.23 0.60Touching.Flat formation
0.65
0.220.46
0.24 0.47
0.83
1.10
1.50
1.10
1.45
0.87
0.53
0.40
Multicore
Conductor Trefoil, touching
diameter apart
-

Table B.29 Mineral insulated cables bare and neither exposed to touch nor in contact ""th comhustible materials
Reference Method 1 (Oipped Direct) Sheath operating temperature: 105°C
----
- ---1 four-core
cables
loaded a.c.inthree-
flat
2485
544
35
41
36
117
134
140
260
119
107
17.5
17.5
20
26
cables
phase
551
cores
cable
251
7022
28
38
51
31
203
307
127
166
424
24
550
cable,
phase
369 3
643
42 95
68358
7A
312
212
trefoil
21
334
572
230
4
18.5
21
A
16.5
27
383
47
'22
24
30
280
67
187
154
103 19
40
46
59
50
33
171
22
465
32
53
2
21
1214
13
4cables
359
435
410
44
492
28 twelve-core
single
15.5
90
loaded
cable
core
A
cable,
1 or
loaded
seven-core
a.c. or
three-core
16.5 loaded'
all all
cable
nineteen-'
single-
a.c. 1in
core
cores cores
three-
single-core all 1 cable,
four-core
phase all
a.c. formation,
1.0 3
cable cores 3loaded
single-core
three-phase cores,
10.5
ii) No correction factor for grouping need be applied.

iii) Where a conductor operates at a temperature exceeding 7ffc it shall be ascertained that the equipment connected to the conductor is suitable for the conductor operating
temperature.
•....• Table B.29 Mineral insulated cables bare and neither exposed to touch nor in contact with combustible materials
tv (copper conductors and sheath) (conte'd)
tv

Reference Methods 12 and 13 (Free air) Sheath operating temperature: 105'?C
61
105
216
266
323
385-----
137
56
178
441
498
624
26
33
43
47
78
Touching
core
1phase
cable
1all
four-core
43629
56
70
51
64
71
617
40
19
18
530
120
A
96
127
157
39
359
23
29
200
247
300
411
469
204
164
89
29
37
49
248
304
370
505
565
704
441
25
32
For
1 85
12
11
16
24
30
73
115
54
112
54
3220
14cores
441
500
35
46
87
64
63
146
150
385
26
50
28
38
37
228
279
335
21
584
126
26
18
49
34
184
28
13
19
11
35
32
17
15
core
phase 14
core
all
41
24
137
179
333
400
460
220
60
33
45
spaced
3272
526
697
104 all a.c.
S1n21e-corecables,
three-core
Horizontal
Atrefoil
loaded
1
Athree-
four-core
A
Acable
cables
22
43
16.5twelve-
97loaded
three-
Acores
loaded
all
loaded
cores
Vertical
557 2cable
orsingle-
nineteen-
1
54 cores
cable,
76
31 seven-
cores
a.c.
single-
a.c 3..in
cable 1 the sheaths 01 the CIrcUItare assumed to be connected tOQetler at both ends.
.
1
1.0 phase cable,
two-core
a.c.
single- spaced
3 single-core cables three-phase
10
ii) No correction factor for grouping need be applied.

iii) Where a conductor operates at a temperature exceeding
at.inp:: temporat.-ure.
ope •... 7Cf'C. it shall be asce:1:ained that the equipment connected to the conductor is suitable for the conductor
Table B.30 Mineral insulated cables, bare and neither exposed to touch nor in contact with
combustible materials
Voltage drop (per ampere per metre) for single-phase operation Sheath Operating Temperature:
105°C
, --
x-z-1.85
x0.145 - 0.51
r 0.26
z1.00 Touching
6 Conductor
0.155
1.850.180
0.150
0.160
0.165
0.175
0.170 0.36
0.44
0.31
1.85
0.71
0.540.33
1.85
0.41
0.27
1.350.21
1.35
0.69
1.00 3.0
4.7
231
7.8
1247
19 331
47
12
4.7
7.8
19
~ i.
3.0 A A Multicore cables
l Two single-core cables

Table B.30 Mineral insulated cables, bare and neither exposed to touch nor in contact with
combustible materials (conte' d)
Voltage drop (per ampere per metre) for single-phase operation: Sheath operating temperature: 105°C
- zr-x -76Trefoil
xz r
xrx 0.60
0.36
0.29
0.87
1.15
1.60
0.45
0.23 0.145
0.135
0.26
0.63
0.39
0.34
0.150
0.90
0.155
0.160
1.60
0.140
0.48
0.130
0.29
5
43
mV0.61
0.31
0.22
0.37
0.88
1.15
1.60
0.46
0.26
'4.1
27
16
4.1
40
10
2.6
6.8
10
16
40
27
6.8
2
40
1
mV
10
2.6
Spaced4.1
1.20
mV
2.6 touching
0.1800.1300.22
6.8
2.6
2 0.62
0.25
0.290.70
0.38
0.27
0.195
0.32
0.21
0.20
0.88
0.29
0.22
1.20
0.125
1.65
0.31
0.23
0.47
0.28
0.21
0.26
0.27
Flat
10.30 0.36
0.43
0.48
0.29
0.65
0.37
0.42
0.95
0.91
1.65
1.60
1.20
1.65
0.56
0.50
0.39
0.33
formation
cable1.25 Touching
Three single-core cables cables
Multicore
diameter apart

Table B.31 Single-core P.V.C.-insulated cables, non-a •.•••oured, "..jth or without sheath
(aluminium conductors)
Current-carrying capacity (Amperes):
Ambient temperature: 30°C
413
1022
477-three-
or
cables,thre
cables,
545
phase
900
touching
771 3d.c. or
three-
and
a.c.4
flat Reference Method
direct) 1 Reference Method 11
or
phase108956144
3364
12
71066
625
507
680
787
210
234
435
306
261
312
375
149
230
316
237
273
274
317
501
466
344
170
128
148
107
165
181
129
203
234
1293
1026
11776
902
546
590
761
472
584
352
502
266
4
245
210
225
358
410
269
227
354
432
299
226
204
123
150
159
444
433
469
384
407
324
394
298
240
283
277
301
462
626
1073
1125
1229
823
709
956
820
405
726
582
629
A
2cables 11
837
511
543
134
104
163
132
172
133
169
185
161
256
206
538
194
186
118
142
679
669
722
886
591e-phase
293
215
189
289
164
252
191
953
907
926
84
999 -three-
-Reference
3Bspaced
cables
three-
or
2
Vertical
single-
phase phase
phase d.c.
d.c. or
cables,
A
single- or
Trefoil
three-
cables
and 4a.c.
d.c.
d.c.
flat
or
a.c.
single-
a.c. or Method
3spaced
flat
a.c.
flat 3Horizontal
a.c.
tray,
(on
(clipped
flat4
Reference
ahorizontal Method
perforatedor cab3 I 12 (free air)- vertical)
120 23 single-
touchingor
phase 2 cables
trefoil
flattrefoil
cables,
single- andand
cables,
a.c. Reference
(enclosed
a Method
wall or inintrunking
conduit etc.)
on 2 cables,
cross-
Nnte: Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-enclosedfuse, see A.6.2 of the Preface to this Annex.
~
~
Conductor Operating Te~perature:70
,
"C
,,,.Zx
z0.91
A
0.25
D.26
0.77
0.39
0.22
D.22z1.35
x0.21
D.24
1.40
0.26
0.70
0.770.24
0.155
0.34
0,48
0.31
0.26
D.29
0.37
0.79
0.52
0.145
0.30
0.35
0.67
0.170
0.59
0.61
1.550.45
D.25
0.92
1.40
1.55
1.35
1.55
1.35
0.071
0.155
0.230.24
0.089
0.135
D.28
0.42
0.21
0.67
0.53
0.26
0.34
0.24
0.91
0.61
0.49
1.05
0.170
0.195
0.23
0.55
0.45
0.36
0.125
0.190
0.135
030
0.110
0.140
0.24
0.21
0.61
0.53
0.49
0.30
0.28
0.26
0.40
0.165
1.05
0.91
0.42
0.67
0.130
0.32
0.29
0.30
D.27
0.71
0.58
0.51
0.145
0.74
0.160
0.61
0.27
0.40
0.35
0.44
0.1511
0.28
D.28
0.41
0.97
0.94
0.64
-'.,0
0.26
D.23
0.140
0.35
0.27
0.43
0.21
0.185
0.190
0.28
0.32
1.05
0.30
0.23
0.82
0.25
0.31
0.55
0.37
0.86
0.185
0.70
0.1811
0.175
0.42
D.24
D.26
0.511
0.52
0.36
0.27
0.74
0.26
0.40
0,47
0.46
0.96
0.22
0.165
0.29
0.23
0.69
0.55
0.160
0.30
1.60
0.25
0.37
0.23
0.22
D.23
0.0590.22
..1.55
1.35
0.94 1 J I5
zZXxx 0.26
1.15
1.35
0.155 0.64
0.81
0.51
0.32
1.60
0.42
1.10
D.220.110
0.18110.24
1.55
2mV
"0.1811
0.155
0.170
0.082
0.077
0.068
0.075
D.29
0.060
0.165
0.094
0.1511
•0.195
0.190
0.1811
0.140
0.23
0.1511
0.120
0.77
0.099
0.190
1.05
0.61
0.49
0.39
0.30
0.28
0.27
0.100 mV
0.094
Reference
Reference
fin tray$,
,nd
4mV
C8bJesd~.
Cflnduit
,nd 4,nd
11
7etc.
ow
mV
0.066
11
tflUching}
tflUChing}
Referenc,
andIFIIt
(fndostJd
Reference
Reference in
Methods
12 {Indirect
Mllthods
,nd{cippetl
0.077
M,thod
4ctmduit
0.066
{enclosed
sp,c.!}
II'
in
0.074
fiR ,0.105
"1 fI'
treflJi
0.086
Reference
MiJtlllJds
MethlJd
{sp,c.!}
11 {Flat
12
.0.135
in
etc.
tflUchingJ
If fin0.1511
inMethods
121
, 3
wall
Reference
2 c,bIes . singfe-p/llse a.c. Methods 3
3 " 4 c,bIes· tJuee.(Jhasea.e.
t Spacings larger than those specified in Method 12 (see Annex Annex A of Section 8) will result in larger voltage drop.
Table B.33 Multicore P.V.C,-insulated cables, non-armoured

4 cable,
·1 207
237
135
155
176
11381
245
210
280
330
285
212
227
259
248
305
351
160
197
184
cable,
phase
phase n
6110
278
or
104
86150
140
58
three-
.130
108
131
118
210
116
139
44173
157
170
195
54
41
73
71
53
65
3
A66
48
61
89
83
62
125
111
117
135
103 -single-
-A
89559
160
183
98
A
92
96
90 d.c.
a.c.
three- a.c.
d.c.
three-phase
phase
cable,
cable, three-
core
1
phase
core or
core
1a.c. or7four-
cable
two-core
cable,three- four-
two-core,
three-phase
a.c.
a.c.
or
a.c.
single-
cable,
single-
single-
1
Reference two-core or
Reference
direct)
Reference
MethodMethod
Reference 4 Reference
(enclosed
Method 3 11
Method (on a
(enclosed
in air) 1 (clipped
trunking)
13 Method
(free
in
perforated cable tray), or
cross- sectional
Conductor Operating Te~perature:70
,
"C
.
II II 0.53
0.26
0.77
1.05
0.36
0.77
0.40
D.28
0.26
0.42
0.49
0.67
0.34
0.91
0.53
0.61
0.39
0.55
0.70
z1.05
r0.28
030
0.155x0.37
IZ0.135
0.53
0.61Z
1.35
A
X
0.165
1.05
0.30
0.91
0.67
0.34
0.58
0.61
D.29
0.71
0.42
0.23
0.22
0.45 X
0.35
0.74
0.43
1.40
D.35zZD.21
1.15
0.15/1
0.40
0.79
0.31
D.24
0.86
0.185
0.61
0.5/1
0.37
0.51
D.29
0.190
1.550.27
0.26
1.55
1.55
0.160
0.44
0.97
0.37
0.41
0.94
"1.10
0.64
0.185
0.190
D.28
0.32
0.67
0.27
0.70
0.180
0.82
0.25
0.74
D.26
0.46
0.47
0.40
0.42
0.96
0.55
1.60
1.40
0.30
0.92
0.089
0.071
0.059
0.49
0.42
0.48
0.21
0.24
D.28
D.26 D.23
0.24
0.25
0.52
0.135
0.155
0.170
0.195
0.125
0.23 0.55
0.26
0.30
0.59
0.175
0.52
0.45
D.24
0.24
0.110
0.140
0.130
0.24
0.155
0.21
0.32
0.29
0.30
D.27
0.31
D.26
D.280.23
0.145
1.350.23
0.145
0.140
0.27
0.21
0.30
0.35
0.170
0.36
0.23
1.35
1.35
0.69
.;1.55
0.94
X
1.35
0.21
0.165
0.22
0.29
0.25
0.160
D.25
0.26
0.22
0.22
D.22 1 J I5
XX 0.64
1.10
0.51
0.26
0.180
1.60
0.42
0.81
0.32 1.55
0.61
0.49
0.24
0.099
0.180
'0.28
0.21
0.15/1
/0.23 mV
0.094
Reference
In tny£.
touching)
2mVubles
0.77
0.39
1.05
0.30
0.170
0.165
0.082
0.155
0.068
0.094
0.077
0.075
0.29
0.060
0.195
0.180
0.140
0.110
0.15/1
0.120
0.190
0.190
D.27
0.100 7
4mV
mV
mr
mVd.c.
0.066
Reference
andIFIIIt
1Int14 Reference
conduit etcy in
(EndtJSIJd
Reference
IInd
MethlJds
tlUelling)
Reference
1111nt1
1Int1 12 {TntrefrJi
MethtJds
11 {tipped
4ClJndtit
0.077
0.066
bl
11 (Flatin
0.074
MethtJd
"1 01
direct
0.086
In II0.105
{endtJstJdin
SPIIC.!)
Reference
MethIJd
.0.135
etcy 12
tluclling)121
Methods
(spac.!)
0.15/1
inMethtJds
IJf on II 3 2 cilbies . single-p/lIISBII.C.
WIIIJ
Reference MethtJds 3
3 II 4 cilbies . t!IrrJe.pMSBII.t.
t Spacings larger than those specified in Method 12 (see Annex Annex A of Section 8) will result in larger voltage drop.
Table B.33 Multicore P.V.C,-insulated cables, non-armoured

11207
210
248
330
237
285
381
135
155
176
259
305
351
184
212
245
280
227
160
197
4 cable,
cable,
phase
phase n
83110
2118
or
58
78
150
three-
44
54
41
71
53
65
.130
108
131
104
12566
48
61
139
157
116
86
three-
73
89
210
111
1A 83
6259-core
56140
195
183
160
98
92
90
96
173
A03-single-
9a.c.
170
117
135 d.c.
a.c.
A d.c.
cable,
core
three-phase
phase
cable,
cable, phase
Reference
or
core7a.c.
three-
1a.c. orfour-
two-core
or
cablefour-
two-core,
three-
cable,
three-phase
a.c.
a.c.
single-
single-
single-
1 two-core or
Method
Reference Method
Reference
direct)
Reference Method 3 11
Method
4 {enclosed in
trunking)
Reference
13 (free
Method
air) 1 {clipped
(on a
{enclosed in
perforated cable tray), or
cross- sectional
Note: Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse, see A.6.2 of the Preface to this Annex .
•
r

0.53
0.42
0.34
0.26 -
z0.175
r0.170
x0.25
x2.9
Conductor2.50.150
1.80
0.90
1.35
0.67
0.170
0.165
0.160
0.68
01.80
1.35
0.92
2.1
0.79
1.55
1.05
.145
.150
.140
2.5
1.55
1.05
0.77
2.1
0.130
0.55
0.44
0.37
0.135
0.30 2.9 20.21
-
Two-core
4.5
2.9
1.55
0.77
1.05
2.1
cable
mV 43.9
34.5 three-phase
mV
d.c.
phase
Two-core mV
Three-or four-core
a.c.singe-
cable a.c. cable,
120 cross-
1
I
Table B.35 Single-core armoured P.V.C.-Insulated cable, Non-magnetic armour.
(aluminum conductors)

Conductor operating temperature : 70"C
2 2221
a.c. cables
single-
143 819 cables
flat and Reference
single-phase a.c. Method 11
183
255
294
334
596
642
715
168
303
1171
1360
-651
706
808
952
880
405
452
479
202
692 975658
728
8342550
10 12
11
769
802
200
178
497
133
141
374
372
214
245
205
233
246
238
267
282
275
319
315
868
866
501
534
568
427
498
430
475
589
666
707
986
770
212
159
354
832
Vertical
A
452
393
518
586
893
phase
6520
618
656
828
859
194
213
202
518
551
613
638
559
152
131
155
169
157
167
413
415
443
452
472
437
234
255
247
261
270
272
293
303
285
310
312
335
349
323
352
379
382
400
1317
774 543
168
259
299
340
389
196
770
822
616
604
655
474
505
545 cables
phase
trefoil
696
724
1133
726
902
938
756457
236
288
333
371
742
629
523
A Vertical
583
3 cables
single-
flats
A
Horizontal
3spaced
a.c. (onflat
a.c.
,2Reference
flat
paced
a perforated
or spaced
d.c.
or flat
touching
3 cables
2
Method
cable
Horizontal
Horizontal
14 cables,
-t1)uching d.c.
flatspaced
three-phase
spaced a.c.Reference Method 12 (free air)
cables
three-phase orand4
cross
~
IV
\0 Note: Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-enclosedfuse, see A.6.2 of the Preface to this Annex.
z0.23
0.21z0.22
rrrr 0.190
x0.23
0.170
0.155
0.30
0.38
0.320.21
0.22
0.26
0.28
0.35
0.40
0.29
0.38
0.44
0.26
0.51
0.30
0.58
0.170
0.28
0.39
0.160
0.165
0.28
0.39
0.47
0.24
0.54
0.81
0.68
0.70
1.35
0.93
0.92
1.35
0.31
0.195
0.33
1.35
1.10
0.190
0.93
1.35
0.22
0.26
0.185
0.26
0.27
0.094
0.180
0.115
0.100
0.195
0.185
0.145
0.175
0.140
0.165
0.32
0.24
0.200
0.175
0.31
0.22
0.150
0.23
0.145
0.20
0.170
0.160
0.21
0.24
0.180
0.185
0.25
0.32
0.29
0.54
0.28
0.33
0.42
0.50
0.460.160
0.195
0.24
0.155
0.37
0.45
0.53
0.24
0.34
0.27
0.44
0.34
0.185
0.22
0.45
0.27
0.52
0.25
0.35
0.36
0.27
0.32
0.18
0.190
0.195
0.66
0.60
0.57
0.65
0.62
0.68
0.71
0.180
0.57
0.25
0.73
0.70
0.81
0.75
0.80
0.86
0.21
0.95
1.30
1.55
1.05
0.96
1.55
1.00
0.1300.20
0.21 2 cables
xzz 3 0.160
x0.60 0.26
0.190
0.170
0.15
0.50
0.41
0.62
0.78
1.55
1.05
0.200
0.1650.120
0.135
0.115
0.110
0.180
0.22
Reference
0.060
0.39
0.49
0.30
0.61
0.77 56Reference
1,11
0.097
0.075
0.190
0.150
0.24
1.55 7mV
2mVrY)V
1.05 mV d.c.and 12
Reference 4Methods
(In
Method
Methods
:
0.3~ 1 and
Referencetouching)
11 (Flat
12 (Spacedt)
Methods 2 cables, 3 single-phase
or 4 cables, a.c.
three-phase a.c.
12Reference Method1 and 11 (Touching)
(Flat spacedt)
t Spacings larger than those specified in Method 12 (see Annex A, Section 8 ) will result in. a larger voltage drop.
Table B.37 Multicore armoured P.V.C.-insulated cables


Conductor operating temperature:70"C
113115
175 94-or Reference Method 13 (free air)
202
232
360
1A
265
312 3or99
216
250
342
two-core
287 d.c.
Reference
single-phase
- - cable,
(clipped
a.c.
(on Reference
Method
direct)
a 1
perforated Method
cable 11
tray)
Conductor 76
phase 131
14368
2three-
1994
A139119
211186
1cable,
3
58
9489A
71 61
599
80
151
A
four-core
1
core
a.c. or
three-
three-
phase a.c. or three-
cable, four-
ingle-
Note: Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse. see A.6.2 of the Preface to this
Annex.


r 0.90
Conductor x2.10
z1.55
z1.80 0.53
0.42
0.26
0.21
Two-core -
-Two-core
cable
0.135
6.135
0.1450.55
2.50.150
1.35
1.80
0.67
0.150
0.140
0.170
0.165
0.160
0.175
0.170
2.90
0.79
1.05
0.92
0.1301.35
2.90
2.10
1.55
0.44
0.30
0.25
0.68 0.31
0.77
2.5
1.05
0.37 4.5
0.77
1.55
1.05
2.9
2.1
2mV d.c.4.5
mV
phase 3.9
3 three-phase
4 cableor single-
mV
Three-
a.c. four-core
a.c. cable,
~ cross-
1

._••~ •..••.••~~ __ i t<ed -=-b.~,. _CJl •• - CJl•••• ~
(alUID.inium con.duc1.ors)
Current-carrying capacity (Amperes): Ambient temperature: 3O"C
Conductor operating temperature: 9{fC

I 410 -a.c.
cables,
three-phase
1001
1176
1333
353
469
564
656
765
671 -A-a.c.
-3trefoil
-flat
Reference Reference Method
3 or 112 (free air)
flat471
344
4
3
7
10561
12
5
6
11
1056
649
300
256
9
1025
1216
376
469
566
679
743367
2phase
1151
1307
395
470
515
343
406
446
509
507
544
652
541
742
796
665
726
692
636
1143
1072
1440
1106
1643
1217
1355
366
911
951
979
990
266
242
200336
.149.
171
217
253
215
142
273
296
210
159
226
157
113
265
261
206
244
251
351
140
197
191
125
156
220
253
1191
A396
430
314
346
436
706
594
626
927
766
903
791
1249
1341
1550
cables
231
261
234
332
271
211
306
367
326
165
169
179
160
166
a.c.
a.c.
or
a.c.and
Vertical
or a.c.
611
4cables,
2cables,
three-phase
cables,
single-
three-phase
touching
phase
3...ables three-ph¥e
touching
three-phase or
a.c.
or
d.c.
flat
flat
trefoil,
2three-phase d.c.,
cables,
three-phase
singl/:!-
single-
single- phase
spaced &d.c.
or4or
and
or
d.c.
flat
or Horizontal
Method
and33etc.)
a.c. or 4(clipped
4 4
Reference
323 orcables, direct)
Method
single-
2 cables, Reference Method 11
touching
a.c.
phase Trefoilora.c.
or
a.c.
d.c. (on Reference
horizontal
(enclosed
wall or or Method
vertical
inintrunking
a perforated conduit 3on, a
cabletray
etc.) 2 cables, flats paced
Note: 1. Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse, see A.6.2 of the Preface to this Annex.
ii .Where a conductor operates at a temperature exceeding 7fJ'C, it shall be ascertained that the equipment connected to the conductor is suittable for the
conductor operating temperature
Table 8.40 Voltage drop (per ampere per meter)
Conductor operating temperature: WOe

, r r-r-0.079x-zxx1.70 - - ~.
r0.070 etc3~orand
0.21
0.1700.165
-1.65
z0.98
x1.72 0.135
2 0.165
0.155 0.150
0.27
0.17
0.23
-0.1400.165
.cables
-0.32 45 (enclosed
e789touching)
(enclosed in in 0.155
0.170
0.150
0.41
0.36
0.31
0.28
028
0.22
025
0.30
0.280.28
0.32
0.185
0.160
0.61
0.155
1.00
1.04
1.46
1.48
0.97
0.45
0.36
0.75
0.48
0.26
0.71
0.57
0.45
0.165
0.24
1.12
0.82
0.65
0.43
0:36
0.91
0.79
0.64
0.54
0.53
0.45
1.21
1.15
0.300.57
0.36
0.47
0.39
0.135
0.145
0.076
0.31
0.145
0.35
022
0.30
0.38
0.34
0.71
0.29
0.180
0.25
0.175
0.24
0.50
0.43
0.57
0.38
0.32
0.94
0.23
0.74
0~70
0.61
0.58
0.49
0.28
0.22
0.190
1.44
0.52
0.59
0.300.73
0.59
0.25
0.27
0.30
1.68
0.97
0.45
0.120
3.24
0.150
0.26
0.230.29
0.24
0.180
0.25
0.180
0.063
0.270.28 0.28
0.86
0.68
0.54
0.34
1.17
0.45
d.c. 473
0.36
0.26
1.08
1.14
0.84
1.44
1.45
0.52
1.65
1.12
0.71
0.27
0.26
0.22
0.23
0.22
2.0.33
0.41
0.37
0.64
0.54
0.67
0.55
0.46
0.57
0.65
0.42
0.31
0.28
0.32
0.23
0.140
0.30
0.20
0.34
0.145
0.29
0.78
1.66
mV0.62
0.• mV
110.165
0.120
0.150
0.110
0.135
0.087
0.095
mV
Methods0.07
0.20
0.120
0.082
0.180
0.23
0.070
0.100
Reference
0.21
Methods
(flat Methods
and 12
(clipped 022
0.22
0.082
0.22
0.21
0.100
0.21
1
Reference
1.and
(in 0.1400.160
111 0.25
0.092
0.1350.160
0.1150.160
0.1350.170
0.23
and11
trefoil) 0.21
0.18
0.19
Refer~nce
Methods
conduit, on 4
Reference Method
2 cables - single-phase 1.13
0.32
0.26
0.53
0.42
0.82
0.130
0.080
0.160
0.105Methods
a.c. 123orand
12
on
and
(flat
touching)
trays,
4direct
Reference
spacedt)
(Spacedt)
a wall) . 3 or 4 cablesReference
-'
Method
- three-phase a.c.
r 0.20
0.65
0.064
t Spacings larger than those specified in Method 12 (see Annex A of Section 8) will result in a larger voltage drop.
Tabl •••B~ ftIlI••• tI_·~8 1•••••••• • non-•••••••
ou..-
Current-carryingcapacity(Amperes): Ambient temperature: 30"C

Conductor operating temperature: 9O"C
two-core
1313
273
272
440
180
206
233
323
216
245
240
283
318
382
364
three.-phase
263
304
409
471
6157
75589135
347
d.c. thee-
-1-three-
core or four-incable
--corecable,
cable,
a.c.
. perforated .Reference
conduit on Method
tray), a wall
or or3 ceiling,
Reference(enclosed
175
145
115
phase60
278
3A
241 A
211
175
131
198
156
188
136
154
124
138
94
71
112
103
64
72
5211
90
4
174
101
126
84
1A
phase
four
cable, 257
164
108
cable,
1
phase 977
cable,single-
s.c.
210
104
115
87
96
76 Afour-core
227
187
146
97
1 d.c.
two-core
three-pbase
cable,single-
1
Reference d.c.
two-core
120 a.c.
two-core
cable,
three-
four-core
1cable,
or
three-
a.c.
single-
a.c. oror
single-
or Method
Reference Method
4 (encloseddirect)
11 (on a
Method 13 (free air)
cross phase a.c. three- Reference Method 1 (clipped
Note: i) Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse, see A.62 of th" Preface to this Annex ..
ii) Where a conductor operates at·a temperature exceeding 7ffc, it shall be ascertained that the equipment connected to the conductor is suitable for the conductor operating
temperature.
ELECIAICAlINSTALLATION OF BUILDINGS

0.56
0.45
0.28
0.37
0.23
r0.71 --
--
x3.10
x0.165 z0.82
Two-core-- d.c.
cable
Conductor 0.1500.84
1.90
0.96 z1.95
0.72
1.400.135
2.70.160
0.155
0.160
0.140
0.135
2.7
0.97
1.45
2.20
3.10
1.15
0.125
0.130
0.31
0.47
0.39
0.26
0.140
2.20
1.65
0.581.65
1.101.10
1.60
3.1
2.2
4.8
2mV
0.82 34.8 4.2
4 cable
mV a.c.
Two-core
phase mV single- a.c.
three-phase Three or four-core cable,
1

Table D.43 Single-core cables having thermosetting insulation, non-magnetic armour
Current~carrying capacity (Amperes): Ambient temperature: 30°C

/
Horizontal
flat spaced
Reference Method
1163
276
228
179
419
368
320
836
934
747
655
1236
568
494
1076
1250
1121
1094
1014
1187
212
786
880
706
988
764
688
597
468
400
444
352
390
308
340
267
307
222
176
192
199
872
909
757
1036
801
780
950
989
824
897
835
642
790
825
685
714
717
765
906
1435
1488
1052
573
704
735
608
625
649
639
1658
1715
1141
508
595
626
666
701
624
654
536
521
443
523
554
572
605
549
378
467
490
391
477
480
333
337
394
411
441
409
429
291
343
372
384
294
332
310
328
252
296
209
207
244
253
275
254
269
162
165
942
576
511
197
216
838
3911
22d.c.,
or
or phase
2
890
903
990
970
980
10563
1118
465
A
215
911
1043
540
447
424
292
357
358
270
812
324
192
and 3
832
cables
cables
120~ or
cables,
Vertical
Vertical
d.c.,
a.c.,
Horizontal
touching
cables, or flat
three-phase
flat phase
spaced
spaced
single
flat
single- 3 or 41 Ii.C.
44single-phase
Horizontal
trefoil
Vertical
cables flat
flat a
a.c. Reference
perforated 2 Method
cables
cable
cables, d.c.
tray)
11 (on
three-phase a.c.
Acables,a.c. Reference method 12 (free air)
Note: i) Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse, see A.6.2 of the Preface to this Annex.
ii) Where a conductor operates at a temperature exceeding 7rflC, it shall be ascertained that the equipment connected to the conductor is suitable for the
conductor operating temperature.
-
l.H
00
Conductor operating temperature: 9(fC
rr r 0.29
0.27
0.165
0.160
0.22
0.175
0.140
0.24
0.105
0.21
0.150
0.210.160
0.175
0.135
0.175
0.31
0.24
0.20
0.29
0.29
0.32
0.26
0.1600.22
0.46
0.40
0.41
0.32
0.35
0.175
0.23
0.160
0.39
0.165
0.40
1.40
0.71
0.760.29
0.30
0.165
0.90
0.175
0.76
0.490.26
0.190
0.24
0.20
0.47
0.60
0.46
0.99z0.34
0.97
0.60
1.05z1.10
x0.25
0.160
0.26
0.170
0.21
0.54
0.64x.31
0.96
0.49Reference
0.140
0.34
0.41
0.74
1.40.29
0.23
1.60
0.43
0.60
0.33
0.66
0.53 0.160
0.32
0.26
0.21
1.60
1.10
0.52
0.66 Reference
- Methods
mV mV
,11 and 1(Flat Methods 1,
oss-
0.20
0.190
0.25
0.170
0.195
0.135
0.093
0.140
0.24
0.22
0.190
0.120
0.26
0.39
0.35
0.33
0.25
0.24
0.37
0.30
0.195
0.23
.0.160
0.25
0.36
0.45
0.47
0.44
1.60
0.65
1.35
0.46
0.74
0.54
0.27
1.60
1.40
0.63
0.15
0.96
0.69
0.57
1.10
0.52
0.56
0.69
0.29
0.70
0.74
1.15
0.62
1.00
0.220.26
0.145
0.33
0.20
0.165
0.36
0.53
0.57
0.195
0,20 0.120
0.170
0.195
0.21
0.34
0.25
0.22
0.155
0.34
0.27
0.26
0.63
0.22
0.25 0.105
0.080
0.064
0.160
0.34
0.27
0.32
0.63
.30
0.30
0 0.105
0.130
0.185
0.62
0.42
mV
2d.c.
cables and12
mV
mV (In(Flat
Reference
Reference
Reference
11 trefoil
(Spaced1) Method
Method 2 Cables
Methods
andspacedt)
1 - single-phase
1212
11touching)
(Touching)
a.c.
3 or 4 cables - three-phase a.c.
t Spacings larger than tho~ specified in Method 12 (see Annex A. Section 8) will result larger voltage drop.
Table B.45 Multicore armoured cables having thermosetting insulation

(aluminium conductor)

Reference
242
201
159
132
1'08
82 .
21-A-441
two-core
305
418
single-phase
249
264
284
328
386
356
488
211
138
254
137
145
113
120
214
224
85
71
A
74
three-phase
single-phase
1 two-core
1-- three-
53174
4166
112185
98
A
92 core
a.c.
cable
corephase
cable,a.c.
Method
cable
1 (clipped1 three-
or four
cable,
a.c. three-
a.c.
cable tray)
(free 11
direct) or four-Reference Method
or Reference Method 13
air)(on a perforated
Note: i) Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse, see A.6.2 of the Preface to this
Annex.
ii) Where a 'conductor operates at a temperature exceeding 7fYC, it shall be ascertained that the
equipment connected to the conductor is suitable for the conductor operating temperature.


r 0.56
Conduct 0.45
0.23
0.37
0.28 --
0.96
0.71
1.40
20.130
0.135
0.155
0.130
0.135
1.90
.
----zx Two-core
0.72
1.10
0.97
1.65
0.82
1.65
1.15
0.140
..7
3.1
2.2
0.165
0.160
3.10
0.125
0.1500.58
0.47
0.39
2.20
2.72.2
0.31
1.45
0.84
1.95
0.160 014.8
0.26 -
2.82
.10
.60
3.1
cable
mV 34.8 cable
mV
d.c.
Two-core
phase 44.2
mV
Three
three-phase
a.c. or four-core
single- a.c. cable,
or cross-
1

SECTION 5
EQUIPMENT
5.1 SCOPE
(1) This. Section covers services, service equjpment, and metering equipment and their
installation requirements for systems operating at 1000. OV or less.
provisions of the Ethiopian Building Code Standard on Electrical Installation of Buildings.
(a) C22.1:1992 Canadian Electrical Code Part 1, Safety Standard for Electrical
Installations, Sixteenth Edition
(b) NFP A 70/NEC: 1986 National Fire Protection Association/ AmericanNational Electrical
~ Code, 1987 Edition
(c) IEE:1970 The Institute of Electrical Engineers, Regulations for the

Electrical Requirements of Buildings, Fourteenth Edition
Incorporating Amendments
5.3 DEFINITIONS
(1) For the purpose of this Section, in addition to the terms defined in Section 1, the following
defmitions shall apply.
service conductors / cable the supply conductors/cable that extend from the street main or
from transformers to the service equipment of the consumer's
installation.

service drop the overhead service conductors from the last pole or other aerial
support to and including the splice, if any, connecting to the
service-entrance conductors at the building or other structure.
service-entrance conductors, overhead system the service conductors. between the

terminals of the service equipment and a point usually outside the building, clear of building
walls, where joined by tap or splice to the service drop.
service-tntrance conductors, underground system the underground service conductors

between the terminals of the service equipment and the last point of connection to the service
entrance conductors.
Note: Where service equipment is located outside the building walls, there may be no service-entrance conductors,
or they may be entirely outside the building.
consumer's in$tallations wiring and apparatus situated upon the consumer's premises installed
and controlled by him, excluding any switchgear of the Supply Authority·which the consumer
may be permitted to use.
5.4 GENERALREQUIREMENTS
5.4.1 Number of ServicesPermitted
5.4.1.1 Single service
(1) Except as provided in 5.4.1.2" each consumer's installation shall be supplied with a single
service.
5.4.1.2 Multiple services
Unless prohibited by Code or Standard or by regulations of the Supply Authority concerning

the number of services, additional services shall be permitted in the following cases:
(a) In multiple-occupancy building, by special permission, where there is no available space

. for service equipment accessible to all the occupants.
(b) Due to capacity requirements, two or more services shall be permitted where:

SECTION 5: SERVICE AND SERVICE EQUIPMENT
i) the load requirements are in excess of 3000.0A at a voltage supply of 600.0V· or

less; _---/~
ii) the load requirements of a single-phase installation are greater than that normally
supplied through one service.
(c) For fire pumps wher~ a separate service is required.

(d) For emergency, legally required standby, optional standby, or parallel power production
systems where a separate service is required.
(e) For different characteristics, such as for different voltage, frequencies or phase, or for
different uses, such as different rate schedules.
(
5.4.1.3 Marking
(I) Where more than one service is permitted or provided, a pennanent plaque or directory shall
be installed adjacent each service equipment location denoting all other services on or in the
consumers' installation and the area served by each.
5.4.1.4 Grouping
(1) When two or more supply services are installed to a building, all service boxes associated
with the various consumer's services shall be grouped, where practicable.
5.4.2 Consumer's Installation Not to be Supplied Through Another Building
(1) Service conductors supplying a consumer's installation shall not pass through the interior of
another building or other structure.
5.4.3 Conductors Considered Outside of a Building
(1) Conductors shall be considered outside of building or other structure under any of the
following conditions:
(a) Where installed under not less than 50.0mm of concrete beneath a building or other
structure; and
(b) Where installed within a building or other structure in a raceway that is enclosed by
concrete or brick not less than 50.0mm thick.
. 143 EBCS-10 1995 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

5.4.4 Other Conductors in Raceway or Cable
(1) Conductors other than service conductors shall not be installed in the same service' way or
service~entrance cable.
Exemption: Earthing conductors and load management control conductor having overcurrent protection.
5.4.5 Clearance from Building Openings
(1) Service conductors installed as open conductors or multi conductor cable without an overall
outer jacket shall have a clearance of not less than 925.0mm from windows, doors, porches, fire
escape, or similar locations.
(2) Service conductors shall not be installed beneath openings through which materials may be
moved, such as openings in farm and commercial buildings.
(3) Overhead wire shall not be run such that they obstruct entrance to these building openings.
Exemption: Conductors running above the top level of a window shall be permitted for a clearance of requirements
of less than 925.0mm as in (1) above.
5.5 SERVICE EQUIPMENT
5.5.1 General
5.5.1.1 Enclosed or guarded live parts
(1) Service equipment's live parts shall be enclosed or guarded as specified below:
(a) They shall be enclosed so that they will not be exposed to accidental contact; or
(b) If not enclosed they shall be installed on a switch board, panel board, or control board
and guarded by providing a means for locking or sealing doors giving access to them.
5.5.1.2 Earthing and bonding
(1) Service equipment, raceway, cable armour, cable sheaths, panel boards, etc and any service
conductors that are to be earthed shall be done in accordance with the relevant Parts of
Section 7.

5.5.1.3 Available short-circuit current
(1) Service equipment shall be suitable for the short-circuit current available at its supply
tenninal.
5.5.1.4 Working space
(1) Sufficient working space shall be provided to the vicinity of the service equipment to permit
safe operation, inspection, and repairs.
5.5.1.5 Location
(1) Service boxes or other consumer's serVice equipment shall be installed in an acceptable
location and in compliance with applicable Codes or Standards or by-laws of the Supply
Authority concerning the location of service boxes or other equipment and shall be:
(a) readily accessible or have the means of operation readily accessible;

(b) not located in coal bine, clothes closets, bathrooms, stairways, rooms in which the
temperature normally exceeds 30°C, dangerous or hazardous locations, in locations where
the headroom clearance is less than 2.0m, nor in any similar undesirable locations; and
(c) placed within the building being served, unless environmental conditions within the
structure are unsuitable, in which case the- service box or other consumer's service
equipment may be placed on the outside of the building or on a pole and shall be:
i) protected from the weather, or be weatherproof;

ii) protected from mechanical injury if less than 2.0m above ground;
iii) placed as close as practical to the point where the consumer's service conductors
enter the building.
5.5.2 Control
5.5.2.1 General
(1) Every consumer's installation shall be adequately controlled by switchgear readily accessible
to the consumer and which shall incorporate:
(a) means of disconnect,

(b) means of overcurrent protection,

(c) means of earth-leakage protection (if necessary),
Note: Where the Supply Authority provides switchgear and pennits part of it to be used by the consumer, the
consumer need not then duplicate that part.
5.5.2.2 Means of disconnect
(1) The means of disconnect required by 5.5.2.1 shall comprise a linked switch suitable for
operation on load or a linked circuit breaker, arranged to disconnect all circuit.
(2) Alternatively, for systems where one conductor is connected with earth, the linked switch
or circuit-breaker may be arranged to disconnect the live conductors only and an isolating link
may be inserted in the earthed conductor; such an isolating link shall be so arranged that it is
in contact before the linked switch can be closed, or shall be securely fixed. by bolts or screws.
Overcurrent protection
/ 5.5.2.3
/
(1) The means of overcurrent protection referred to in 5.5.2.1 shall comprise either a fuse
inserted in each live conductor of the supply or a circuit-breaker having an overcurrent release
fitted in each live conductor of the supply.
Exemption: The means of overcurrent protection may be omitted provided that
i) the rating of all cables connected between the Supply Authority's fuse or circuit-breaker and the consumer's
sub-circuit fuse or circuit breakers is not less than the rating of the Supply Authority's fuse or circuit-
breaker; and
ii) the overcurrent device protecting all circuits controlled by the switchgear are located within the same
enclosure as the switchgear or, alternatively, are fixed immediately adjacent to it.
oJ 5.5.2.4 Earth-leakage protec#on
(1) Means for earth-leakage protection shall be provid~d for service equipment in accordance
with Clause 9.4.2, Section 9.
Note: When an installation is being planned, it is desirable to consult the Supply Authority, or a competent person
having knowledge of local conditions, to ascertain whether satisfactory protection against earth leakage will be
obtained by the use of the fuses or circuit breakers provided for overcurrent protection or by the use of earth-leakage
circuit breaker.

5.5.2.5 Sequence of control
(1) The sequence of the equipment forming the switchgear required by 5.5.2.1 shall be such that
the means of disconnect follows the consumer's terminal without the intervention of any other
apparatus (see Figure 5.1).
~ f~ lObi
IIII
~:~:~~n~lu~in.~p~ue.::e~t'l~~!:"~I=
owltchaut ••.• Included.) ::d t~c.ica~~-::~
F•. ' Service rUle .nd ncutrallink. If .ny.

Wh .upply.
W.tt-hour meter and/or time .witch where requlrccl for ofl"-pcaklatifl"
S Consumer'. linked .wltch.
F•.2 Consumer'. main fu~
CB Consumer'. Iinlcedextas-currcnt circuit-bRoker with or without earth-
Db ~~~~P,'distribution board;
Figure 5.1 SeqJlence of control
Note: The consumer:s linked switch and the consumer's main fuse may be combined in a switch and fuse unit
5.5.2.6 Detached building

..
,r(1) Where a consumer's installation comprises installation in two or more buildings, separate
. means of disconnect complying with the requirements of 5.5.2.2 shall be provided in each
building.
5.5.2.7 Capacity of protective gear
(1) Every means of overcurrent protection shall be suitable for the maximum short-circuit current
attainable or available. V
5.5.2.8 Discrimination
(1) The characteristics and settings of overcurrent protective gear, including fuses, and the
arrangement of the installajion shall be such that discrimination in the operation of the
overcurrent protective gear is ensured.

5.6 WIRING METHODS
5.6.1 Underground Consumer's Service Conductors
5.6.1.1 Installation and type
(1) A consumer's service conductors running underground to a building from an underground

supply system or from a pole line shall be:
(a) installed in rigid conduit and be of a type suitable for use in wet locations;
(b) a single or multiple conductor cable for service entrance use below ground provided that:
i) The installation is in accordance with Section 8;

ii) Rigid conduit is used for mechanical protection where portions are exposed to
injury; and
Hi) The cable ~ without splice or joint from a point of connection at the supply service
to the consumer's service equipment in the building.
5.6.1.2 Conduit to drain
(1) Consumer's service conduit entering a building underground shall be suitably drained.
5.6.1.3 Conduitseal
.(1) ·Consumer's service conduit connected to an underground system shall be sealed with a
suitable compound to prevent the entrance of moisture or gases.
5.6.2 Overhead Consumer's Service Conductors
(1) Conductors of a consumer's service which is connected to an overhead supply service at any
point above ground on a building or other structure shall be installed in a rigid metal conduit
or in one of the following ways, if acceptable:
(a} Other type' of rigid conduit,

(b) Busway
(c) Flexible metal conduit, the conductors being lead-sheathed cable
(d) Mineral-insulated cable other than the lightweight type
(e) Aluminium sheathed cable

(f) Any other suitable type cable

(g) Service entrance cable, provided that:
i) it is protected by an acceptable means if within 2.0m of the ground;

ii) the voltage does not exceed 230.0V to earth;
iii) it is supported at intervals not more than 1.0m; and
iv) it is mounted on insulating supports which hold it not less than 500.Omm from a
conducting surface, if adjacent to such a surface.
(2)Bare overhead supply conductors running on the outside walls of a building may be run as
exposed wiring using types of conductor suitable fdr exposure to the weather .
.(3) The length of consumer's service conductors beyond the service head shall ~e adequate. to
enableconnection to tHe supply service conductors or to the conductors referred to in·5.6.2. with
a minimum length of 750.0mm.
(4) Consumer's service condqctors shall be provided with drip loops.
(5) Consumer's service conductors shall be suitable for the temperature which can be
experienced in the particular locality.
5.7 METERING EQUIPMENT
5.7.1 Connection
(1) Metering equipment shall be connected on the load side of the service box except that it may
be connected on the supply where:
(a) no live parts or wiring are exposed;

(b) the voltage does not exceed 380.0V between conductors; and
(c) the rating of the consumer's serVice does not exceed:
i) 200.0A for a meter mounting device, or'

ii) 600.0A for transformer rated meter mounting device located outdoors.
Note:- Transfonnerrated meter mounting device means a meter mounting device with current transfonners and with
or without test sw.itches mounted in the same enclosure~

SECTION 6
CIRCUIT LOADING AND DEMAND FACTOR
6.1 SCOPE
(1) This section covers conductor ampacities and equipment ratings required for consumer's
services, feeders and branch circuits.
6.2 NORMATIVEREFERENCES
(a) C22.1: 1990 Canadian Electrical Code, Safety Standard for Electrical Installations
Sixteenth Edition.
(b) NEC Hand book 1981 National Electrical Code Handbook Based on the 1981
(NEC), Seventeenth Edition.
6.3 DEFINITIONS
(1) For the purpose of this Section, the followingdefinitions shall apply in addition to the terms
defined in Section 1.
demand factor it is the ratio of the maximum demand of a system or part ora
system, to the total connected load on the system, to the maximum
demand of the whole system,or part of a system, under
consideration.
diversity factor the ratio of the sum of the individual maximum demands of the
various subdivisions of a system, or part of a system, to t~e
maximum demand of the whole system, or part of a system, under
consideration.
continuous load any condition in which the maximum load current in a circuit flows
without interruption for a period of not less than 3.0hrs.

SECTION 6: CIRCUIT LOADING AND DEMAND FACTOR
6.4 GENERAL
6.4.1 Current Calculation
(1) When calculating the currents from loads expressed in watts or volt-amperes, to be supplied
by a low voltage a.c. system, the voltage divisor to be used shall be 230.0Y or 380.0Y as
applicable.
6.4.2 Yoltage Drop
(1) Voltage drop in an installation shall be based upon the calculated demand load of the branch
circuits and shall satisfy the requirements of Clause 4.5.4.
6.4.3 Maximum Circuit Loading
For loads other than motors, the total load on consumer's service, feeder or a branch circuit shall v
be 80% .of the circuit rating when the load is a continuous one ..
6.4.4 Use of Demand Factor
(1) Where two or more loads are so installed that only one can be used at anyone time, the one
providing the greatest demand shall be used in determining the calculated demand.
(2) Where a feeder supplies loads of a cyclic or similar nature such that the maximum connected
load will not be supplied at the same time, the ampacity of the feeder conductors shall be based
on the maximum load that may be connected at anyone time .•.....
(3) The ampacity of conductors of a feeder or branch circuit shall not exceed the ampacity of
the conductors of 'the service or of the feeder from which they are supplied.
6.5 SERVICES AND FEEDERS
6.5.1 Single-Family Dwellings
(1) The minimum ampacity of service or feeder conductors supplying a single-family dwelling
shall be based on the following:
151 EBCS-10 1995 ETHIOPIAN PiUILDING CODE STANDARD

(a) a basic load of 2500.0W for the first 70.0m2 of living area; plus
(b) an additional 1000.OW for each 70.0m2 or portion thereof in excess of 70.0m2; plus
(c) 3500.0W for any electric "Injera Mitad"; plus
(d) 6000.0W for a single cooking stove having a rating of 12.0kW or less, plus 40% of the
amount by which the rating of the cooking stove exceeds 12.0kW; plus
(e) any electric water heater with a demand factor of 100%.
6.5.2 Apartment and Similar Multi-Family Buildings
(1) The minimum ampacity of service or feed,er conductors from a main service supplying loads
in dwelling units shall be based on the following:
(a) a basic load of 2500.0W for the first 45.0m2 of living area; plus
(b) an additional 1500.0W for the second 45.0m2 or portion thereof; plus
(c) an additional 1000.0W for each 'additional 90.0m2 or portion thereof in excess of the
initial 90.0m2; plus
(d) 3500.0W for any electric "Injera Mitad"; plus
(e) 6000.0W for a single cooking stove having a rating of 12.0kW or less, plus 40% of the
amount by which the rating of the cooking store exceeds 12.0kW; plus
(t) any electric water heaters with a demand of 100%
(2) The minimum ampacity of service or feeder cond~tors from a main service supplying two
or more dwelling units shall be based on the calculated load obtained from Clause 6.5.2(1) and
the following:
(a) Exciuding any air-conditioning loads, the load shall be considered to l;?e:
i) 100% of the calculated load in the unit having the heaviest load; plus
ii) 65% of the sum of the calculated loads in the next 2 units having the same or next
smaller load to those specified in (i) above; plus
iii) 40% of the sum of the calculated loads in the next 2 units having the same or next
smaller loads to those specified in (i) above; plus
iv) 25% of the sum of the calculated loads in the next 15 units having the same or next
smaller loads to those specified in (i) above; plus
v) 10% of the sum of the calculated loads in the remaining units;

SECTION 6: CIRG.UIT LOADING AND DEMAND FACTOR
(b) If air-conditioning is used, the amount by which the sum of all the air-conditioning loads
exceeds 1500.0V A shall be added, with a demand factor of 100%, to the load determined
in accordance with (a) above.
(c) In addition, any lighting, heating, and power loads not located in dwelling units shall be
added with a demand factor of 75%.
Note: The living area designated in Clause 6.5.1 and 6.5.2 shall be determined from the outside dimensions of the
group floor of the dwelling plus 75% of the basement area based on the inside dimensions, plus any area
which might normally be used for living purposes on the upper floors.
6.5.3 Schools
(l) The minimum ampacity of service or feeder conductors shall be based on the following:
a) a basic load of 50.0W/m2 of classroom area; plus

b) 10.0W/m2 of the remaining area of the building based on the outside dimensions; plus
c) air conditioning, and power loads based on the rating of the installed equipment.
(2) Demand factors may be applied as follows:
(a) 75% for a building with an area upto and including 900.0m2 based on the outside
dimensions.
(b) For a building with an area exceeding 900.0m2 based on the outside dimensions, the load
may, be divided by the number of square meters to obtain a load-pre-square-meter rating
and the demand load may be considered to be the sum of: V
i) 75% of the load per square meter multiplied by 900; and
ii) 50% of the load per square meter multiplied by the area of the building in excess of
900.0m2•
6.5.4 Hospitals
(1) The minimum ampacity of service or feeder conductors shall be based on the following:
(a) a basic load of 20.0W/m2 of the area of the',building based on the outside dimensions;
plus
(b) 100.0W/m2 for high intensity area such as operating rooms; plus
(c) air conditioning, and power loads based on the rating of the installed equipment
••
(a) 80% for a building with an area upto and including 900.0m2 based on the outside
dimensions;
(b) For a building with an area exceeding 900.0m based on the outside dimensions, the
balance of the load may be divided by the number of square meters to obtain a load-per-
square-meter rating aDd the demand load may be considered to be the sum of:

900.0m2•
6.5.5 Hotels, Motels, Dormitories, and Buildings of Similar Occupancy
(1) The minimum ampacity of service or feeder conductors shall be based on the following:
(a) a basic load of 20.0W/m2 of the area of the building based on the outside dimensions;
plus
(b) lighting loads for special areas such as ballrooms; based on the rating of the equipment
installed; plus
(c) air conditioning and power loads based on the rating of the equipment installed.
a) 80% for a building with an area upto and including 900.0m2 based on the outside
dimensions;
b) For a building with an area exceeding 900.0m2 based on the outside dimensions, the
balance of the load may be divided by the number of square meters to obtain a load-per-
square meter rating and the demand load may be considered to be the sum of:

900.0m2•

SECTION 6: CIRCUIT LOADING AND DEMAND FACTOR
6.5.6 Other Types of Occupancy
(1) The minimum ampacity of service of feeder conductors for the types of occupancies
specified in Table 6.1 shall be based on the following:
(a) a basic load to be calculated on the basis of watts per square meter required by Table
6.1 for the area served based on the outside dimensions, with application of demand
factors as indicated therein; plus
(b) special loads such as air conditioning, power loads, show window lighting, stage lighting,
etc, based on the rating of the equipment installed with such demand factors as are
permitted by this Code.
6.5.7 Branch Circuits
(1) Conductors of a branch circuit supplying "Injera Mitad" and/or cooking stove in a dwelling
unit shall be considered as having a demand of
(a) 3.5kW for "Injera Mitad";

(b) 8.0kW where the rating of the cooking stove does not exceed 12.QkW; or
(c) 8.0kW.plus 40% of the amount that the rating of the cooking stove exceeds 12.0kW.
Note: For the purpose of Clause 6.5.7(1), two or more separate built-in cooking units may be considered as one
cooking
(2) For "Injera Mitadn and or a cooking stove installed in commercial, industrial, and
institutional establishments, the demand shall be considered as not being less than the rating.
(3) The demand loads given in (1) above shall not apply to cord-connected hotplates or other
appliances.
6.5.8 Feeder Demand Factors for Lifts
(1) Feeder demand factors for lifts shall be as shown in Table 6.2.

Table 6.1 Demand factor for service and feeders and watts per square meter for
various types of occupancy
Feeders
100
90
100
80
70
80
100
70-90
70
75
95qO Watts30
50
15
10
20
5per m2
25
1Q Demand factor [%] -.
Service
conductor
Table 6.2 Feeder demand factors for lifts
Number of lifts on 6987Demand

0.95
0.90
1.00
100.73
0.79
0.85
0.77
0.82
orDemand
0.75
Number
a single more
0.72 of factors
(OF)
feeder
(OF) lifts on
Note: Demand factors (DF) are based on 50% duty (i.e, half-time load, half-time no load).

SECTION 7
EARTHING, BONDING, AND LIGHTNING
PROTECTION
PART I - EARTHING AND BONDING
7.1 SCOPE
(1) Part I of this Section covers the prote;:ctionof electrical installation by earthing and bonding.
(2) This part also covers provisions for insulating and guarding as suitable alternatives to
earthing where permi~d by this Code.
(a) C22.1: 1992 Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, Safety Standard for
Electrical Installations, Sixteenth Edition.
(b) NFPA 701NEC:1987 An American National Electrical Code.
(c) IEE:1970 The Institute of Electrical Engineers, Regulations for the

Electrical Equipment of Buildings, Fourteenth Edition,
Incorporating Amendments.

7.3 SYSTEM AND CIRCUITS EARTHING
7.3.1 'Direct Current Systems
(1) A two~wire direct-current system suppiying interior wiring and operating at not more than
300.0V or not less than 50.0V between conductors shall be earthed, unless such system is used.
for supplying industrial equipment in limited areas and the circuit is equipped with an earth
detector.
(2) The neutral conductor of all3-wire direct-current systems supplying interior wiring shall be
earthed.·
7.3.2 Alternating Current Systems
(1) Except as otherwise provided for in this Code, alternating-current systems shall be earthed
if:
a) by so doing, their maximum voltage-to-earth does not exceed 230.0Y; or

b) the system incorporates a neutral conductor.
(2) Wiring ,.. systems supplied by an unearthed supply shall be equipped with a suitable earth
(
Idetection device to indicate the presence of an earth fault.
(3) Circuits of less than 50.0V shall be earthed under any of the following conditions:
a) Wliere supplied by transformers that are energized from:
i) systems of more than 230.0Y-to-earth; or

. ii) unearthed system.
b) where installed as overhead outside of buildings.
(4) Where primary windings of current and voltage instrument transformers are connected to
circuits of 230.0V-or-more-to-earth, the secondary circuits of the transformer shall be earthed.
(5) Where the transformers are on switchboards, the secondary circuits shall be earthed
irrespective of the voltage of the circuits.

,.
.. BONDING AND LIGHTENING PROTECTION

SECTION 7:' EARTHING,
7.4 LOCATION OF SYSTEM EARTHING CONNECTIONS
7.4.1 D.C. Systems
(1) D.C. systems to be e~hed shall have the earthing connection made at one or more supply
stations; but not at individual services nor elsewhere on interior wiring.
7.4.2 A.C. Systems
(1) An internal wiring system that is supplied by an a.c. service and which is to be earthed shall
have at each service, an earthing conductor connected to an earth electrode which complies with
Clause 7.8 below.
(2) The earthing conductor shall be connected to the earthed service conductor at any accessible
point from the load end of service drop or service lateral.
(3) Where the transformer supplying the services is located outside the building, at least one
additional earthing connection shall be made from the earthed service conductor to an .earth
electrode, either at the transformer or elsewhere outside the building.
(4) An earthing connection shall not be made'toany earthed circuit conductor on the load side
of the service disconnecting
\
means.
\
(5) For circuits that are supplied from two sources in a common enclosure or grouped together
in separate enclosure and employing a tie, a single earthing electrode connection to the tie point
of the earthed circuit conductors from each power-supply source shall be permitted.
(6) Where the system is earthed at any point, the earthed conductor shall be run to each
individual service and not be smaller than the required earthing conductor specified in Table 7.1,
and where the earthed circuit conductor also serves as the neutral, the requirements of the
relevant Clauses of Section 4 shall be met.
7.4.3 Isolated Systems
(1) For a wiring system or circuit which is required to be earthed, and which is not conductively
connected to a distribution system, the earthing connection shall be made at the transformer, or
other source of supply, or on the supply side of the first switch controlling the system, and
satisfying both the following conditions:

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF BUilDINGS
a) The earthing conductor shall not be smaller than that specified in Table 7.1.
b) If two or more systems are employed, a common system earthing conductor shall be
installed unless separate earthing is supplied for each such system, in which case the
earthing for the individual systems shall be interconnected.
7.4.4 Single Service Supply to Two or More Buildings or Structures
(1) Where to or more buildings or structures are supplied from a single service:
a) the earthed circuit conductor at each of the buildings or structures shall be connected to
an earthing electrode and bonded to the non-current-carrying metal parts of the electrical
equipment; or
b) except for buildings housing livestock, the non-current-carrying metal parts of the
~lectrical equipment in or on the building or structure shall be pennitted to be bonded
to earth by a bonding conductor run with the feeder or branch circuit conductors.
7.4.5 Conductors to be Earthed.
(1) For a.c. wiring systems, the conductors to be earthed shall be as follows:
a) Single-phase, 2-wire, the identified conductor;

b) Single-phase, 3-wire, the identified neutral conductor;
c) Multi-phase systems having one wire common to all phases, the identified neutral
conductor;
'd) Multi-phase systems having one earthed phase, the identified conductor;
e) Multi-phase systems in which one phase is used as in (b) above, the identified conductor.
7.4.6 Current Over Earthing Conductor
(1) Where wiring systems, circuits, electrical equipment, cable annour, conduit and other metal
./ . raceways are earthed as a protective measure, the earthing shall be arranged so that there is no
objectionable passage of current over the earthing conductor or earthing path.
(2) If the use of multiple earthing connecti9ns results in an objectionable flow of current, one
or more of the following alterations shall be made:
a) Abandon one or more of the earthes.

b) Change the locations of the earthing connections .
ETHIOPIAN BUilDING CODE STANDARD EBCS-10 1995 160

SECTION 7: EARTHING, BONDING AND LIGHTENING PROTeCTION
c)· Interrupt the continuity of the conductors between the earthing connections.
d) Take other suitable remedial 'action to limit the current.
Note; The temporary currents which are set up under accidental conditions while the earth conductors are
performing their intended protective functions are not considered objectionable.
7.5 BONDING
7.5.1 Non-Current-Carrying Metal Parts ..
(1) Atl non-current-carrying metal work of wiring systems including cable sheaths and armour,
conduit, ducts, trucking boxes, and catenary wires, shall be bonded to earth.
(2) Where isolation of metal is adopted as a protective measure (prevention of dangerous earth-
leakage current), it shall be confined to the following items: .
a) Short isolated lengths of metal used 'for the mechanical protection of cables having a
non-metallic sheath.
b) Metal clips used for fixing cables.
c) Small metal parts such as screws, '''r name-plates isolated by isolating material.
7.S.~ Exposed Non-Current-Carrying Metal Parts of Equipment
(1) Exposed non-current-carrying metal parts of equipment shall be bonded to earth; however
this does not apply to double-insulated equipment or isolated metal parts referred to in Clause
7.5.1(2).
7.S.3 Non-Metallic Wiring Systems
(1) Where nonmetallic wiring sY$tems are used:
a) an earth connection shall be provided at all outlets; and

b) metal boxes shall be earthed.
'.S.4 Non-Electrical Services
(1) Metal parts of water supply services and gas services which may become energized shall be
bonded to earth.

(2) The bonding conductor shall be attached to the water supply service or gas service:
a) at a location as near to consumer's electrical service entrance as is practicable; and

b) at a location where a sub-feeder enters a building.
(3) The water supply service or the gas service shall be bonded by means of a copper bonding
conductor riot less than the appropriate value shown in Table 7.1 subject to a minimum size of
2.5mm2•
Note:- i) For the purpose of Clause 7.,5 the associated circuit conductor is the largest conductor connected into
the input side of the consumer's switchgear.'
ii) Conductor of material other than copper shall have a resistance not exceeding that of the prescribed
copper conductor. _
Hi) Connection to the pipes of the services shall be made by means of a clamp.

SECTION 7: EARTHING, BONDING AND LIGHTENING PROTECTION
Table 7.1 Minimum sizes of copper-earthing and copper-bonding conductors not

contained in a composite cable, flexible cable, or flexible cord
-Nominal cross-sectional 16
50
506670 of bonding
1.0t
Nominal
50'
70
2.5
1
6
6
2.5t
1.0t
mm2
area
mm2 cross-sectional
coductor
~ are.
Nominal
of earthing
cross-sectional
conductor
mm2
t 2.Smm2 for bonding metal work of other services at points of entry to premises.

7.5.5 Extraneous Fixed Metalwork
(1) The exposed metal parts of all equipment which is required by this part of the Code to be
earthed, which might otherwise come into fortuitous contact with extraneous fixed metalwork,
shall be either effectively segregated therefrom, or effectually bonded thereto, so as to prevent
appreciable voltage differences at such possible points of contact.
(2) For sizes of bonding conductors, refer to Table 7.1.
Note: The extraneousfixed metalworkrequiredto be bondedand earthedin these circumstancesincludesthe

following:
i) Baths and exposedmetal pipes,sinksandtanks,in the absenceof metal-to-metaljoints of negligible
electricalresistances.
ii) Wherepracticable,accessiblestructuralsteelwork.
Hi) Frameworkof mobile equipment,such as cranes and lifts, on which an electrical apparatusis
mounted.
7.6 METHOD OF EARTHING
7.6.1 Effective Earthing
(1) The path to earth from circuits, equipment, or conductor enclosures shall be permanent and
continuous and shall have:
/ a) sufficient ampacity to conduct safely any current liable to be imposed on it; and
b) impedance sufficiently low to limit the voltage above earth, and to facilitate the operation
of overcurrent devices in the circuit.
7.6.2 Common Earthing Conductor
(1) The earthing conductor for circuits shall be permitted to be used as a bonding conductor for
equipment, conduit, and other metal raceways, or enclosure for conductors, including service
conduit or cable sheath and service equipment.
7.6.3 Common Earthing Electrode
(1) Where the alternating-current system is connected to an earthing electrode in or at building

as specified in Clauses 7.4.2, the same electrode may be used to earth conductor enclosures and
equipment in or on that building.
t _
SECTION 7: EARTHING, BONDING AND LIGHTENING PR01ECTION
7.6.4 Underground Service
(I) Where an underground service cable is served from a continuous underground metal sheathed
cablesystem and the sheath or armour of the service cable is connected to the underground
system,the sheath or armour of the service cable shall not be required to be bonded to earth at
thebuilding if it is insulated from the interior conduit or piping.
(2) Where a metal-sheathed service cable served from a continuous underground metal sheathed
cablesystem is bonded to the underground system and is contained in an underground service
conduit,the conduit shall not be required to be bonded to earth at the building if it is insulated
fromthe interior conduit or piping.
7.6.5 Short Section of Raceway
(1) Isolated section of metal raceway or cable armour, if required to be bonded to earth, shall
preferably be bonded so by connecting to other earthed raceway or armour.
7.6.6 Fixed Equipment
(I) Fixed equipment shall be bonded to earth in one of the following ways:
a) An effective metallic connection to earthed metal raceways, 4metal sheath,

' or cable
aiIDOUrexcept:
i) Armour as specified in Clauses in '(2) and (3) below; and/or

ii) sheath of mineral-insulated cable when of stainless steel as specified in (4) below;
and/or
iii) where the raceway or cables are run underground, in locations subject to corrosion.
b) A bon,ding conductor which is run with circuit conductors as a part of a cable assembly
and which may be uninsulated; but, if provided with an individual covering, the covering
shall be finished to show a green colour or a green/yellow combination.
c) A separate bonding conductor installed the same as a bonding conductor for conduit and
the like.
d) Other acceptable means.

(2) The armour of armoured cables incorporating a bonding conductor shali not be considered
as fulfilling the requirements of a bonding conductor for the purpose of this ~lause, and the
bonding conductor provided in these cables shall comply with (1b) above.
(3) The armour of flexible metal conduit and liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall not be
considered as fulfilling the requirements of bonding conductor for the purposes of this Clause,
and a separate bonding conductor shall be run within the conduit.
7.7.
(4) The sheath of mineral-insulated cable having a stainless steel shall not be considered as
(1)
fulfilling the requirements of a bonding conductor for the purposes of this Clause and bonding
con
shall be by one of the methods specified in (1b) or (1d) above.
ear
7.7 BONDING METHODS

7.7
7.7.1 Clean Surface

(1)
as~
(I) Where a non-conductive protective coating such as paint or enamel ii used on the equipment,
conduit, couplings or fittings, such coating shall be removed from threads and other contact
surfaces in order to ensure a good electriq~1 connection.
7.7.2 Bonding at Service Equipment
(1) The electrical continuity of the earthing circuit at the service equipment shall be assured by
one of-the means given in Clause 7.7.3 for the following equipment and enclosures if of metal:
7.
a) Service raceways or service armour or sheaths.

(1
b) All service equipment enclosures containing service entrance conductors including meter
b:
fittings, boxes or the like, interposed in the service raceway or armour.
c) Any conduit or armour which forms part of the earthing conductor to the service
raceway.
n
7.7.3 Means of Assuring Continuity at Service Equipment

i
(1) Electrical continuity at service equipment shall be assured by:
(
a) the use of threaded couplings and threaded bosses on enclosures with joints made up
tight rigid metal conduit is used; or

b) the use of threadless couplings made up tight where electrical metallic tubing is used;
or
c) the use of bonding jumpers meeting the requirements of Clauses 7.7.7 and 7.9, or
d) other devices (not standard locknuts and bushings) such as earthing bushings equipped
with bonding jumpers meeting the requirements of Clause 7.7.7 below.
7.7.4 Metal Armour or Tape of Service Cable
(1) Where service cable has an un insulated earthed service conductor in continuous electrical
contactwith its metal armour or tape, the metal covering shall be c,?nsidered to be adequately
earthed.
7.7.5 Bonding at Other-Than-Service Equipment
(1) The electrical continuity of metal raceway, metal sheathed, or armoured cable shall be
assuredby one of the methods specified in Clauses 7.7.3 or by the use of:
a) threadless fittings, made up tight with conduit or armoured cable;

bY two locknuts, one inside and one outside of boxes and cabinets; or
c) one locknut and a metal conduit bushing provided the bushing cable installed so that it
is mechanically secure and makes positive contact with the inside surface of the box or
cabinet.
7.7.6 Loosely Jointed Metal Raceways
(1) Expansion joints and telescoping sections of raceways shall be made electrically continuous
by bonding jumpers or other acceptable means.
(2) Metal through raceways used in connection with sound recording and reproducting equipment
madeup in sections shall contain an earthing conductor to which each section shall be bonded.
7.7.7 Bonding Jumperst
(l) Bonding jumpers shall satisfy the following:
A bonding jumper is a reliable conductor to assure the required electrical conductivity between metal
parts required to be electrically connected.

,.
a) They shall be copper or other corrosion-resistant material.

b) They shall be of sufficient size to have an ampacity not less than that required for the
corresponding earthing conductor.
c) They shall be attached to cabinets and similar equipment in a manner specified in
Clause 7.10.4.
d) They shall be straps when used for bonding non-current-carrying metal parts; shall not
be less than 19.0mm in width and not less than.:
i) l.4mm in thickness if of steel; or
ii) 1.2mm in thickness if of aluminium or copper.
7.8 EARTHING ELECTRODES
7.8.1 General
(1) The type and embedded depth of an earth electrode shall be such that the drying and
freezing of soil will not increase its resistance above the required value.
(2) The design used in and the construction of an earth electrode shall be such as to withstand
damage and to take account of possible increase in resistance due to corrosion.
7.8.2 Service Pipe Electrode
7;8.2.1 Public water pipe _
(1) Where a service water pipe from a public water main to a building is used as earthing
electrode, it shall be:
a) continuously conductive;
b) located or placed underground not less than 2S0.0mm below the normal permanent
moisture level; and
c) the underground portion extends not less than 3.0m beyond the extremities of the
building served.
7.8.2.2 Independent metal water pipes
(1) Where a conductive independent metal water piping system is used as earthing electrode, it
shall be placed underground not less than 2S0.0mm below the normal permanent moisture level
and the underground portion extend not less 3.0m beyond extremities of the building served.

7.8.2.3 Metal casing of a pump
(1) Where a metal casing of a pump system is used as earthing electrode, it shall not be less than
75.0mm in diameter and shall extend at least 15.0m below the well-head.
7.8.2.4 Bonding
(1) Where more than one of the earthing means listed under Clause 7.8.2 exist at a building,
they shall be bonded together with a conductor complying with Clause 7.5.4(3).
7.8.3 Artificial Earthing Electrodes
7.8.3.1 Concrete-Encased Electrode
(1) A concrete-encased electrode shall be encased within the bottom 50.0mm of a concrete
foundation footing that is in direct contact with the ground and shall be:
a) a bare copper conductor not less than 6.0m in length and of size specified in Table 7.2,
or
b) a plate electrode that shall:
i) present not less 0.4m2 of surface to the concrete encasing the plate;
i
ii). be not less than 6.0mm in thickness if of iron or steel; or .5mm in thickness if
non-ferrous metal; and
iii) have a means of attachment for' the system earthing conductor that shall be
accessible after the concrete is poured.
Table 7.2 Minimum size for concrete encased electrodes
Ampacity of largest associated 50

35
70
95
25
conductor Size of copper conductor
[(mm2]
160 or less

, 7.8.3.2 Rod electrode
(1) A rod electrode shall:
a) be not less than 16.0mm in diameter if of iron or steel, or 12.7mm if non-ferrous metal
or ferrous metal clad with a non-ferrous metal;
b) be not less than 3.0m in length;
c) have a clean metal surface which is not covered with paint, enamel, or other poor
conducting material; and
d) be spaced not less than 3.0m apart (if more than two rods are required).
7.8.3.3 Plate electrode
(1) Plate electrode shall present not, less than O.2m2 of surface to exterior soil and be not less
than 6.35mm in thickness if of iron or steel, or 1.5mm if of ferrous metal.
7.8.3.4 Laying
(1) An artificial earthing electrode shall be buried: .
a) at least 250.0mm below permanent moisture level as far as practical;

b) in a horizo,lltal trencl\ where rock bottom is encountered at depth less than 1.2m.
7.8.3.5 Driving rod electrode
(1) A rod electrode shall be driven to a depth of no less than 3.0m regardless of the size or
number used, except that:
'.
J.
a) where rock bottom is encountered at a depth of 1.2m or more, it shall be driven to rock
bottom; or
b) where rock bottom is encountered at a depth of less than 1.2m, it shall be buried in a
horizontal trench and be not less 3.0m long.
7.8.3.6 ~l'acing
(1) Each electrode shall be separated at least 2.0m from any other electrode including an
electrode used for signal circuits, radio, lightning, or any other purpose.
ETHIOPIAN BUII,..DINGCODE STANDARD EBCS-10 1995 170

7.8.3.7 Connection of electrodes
(1) Where separation of the different system electrodes is not possible, the electrodes shall be
connectedtogether, at or below ground level, with a copper conductor of a size not less than that
of the earthing conductor for the electrical system and in no case shall the conductor be smaller
than l6.0mm2 copper.
7.8.3.8 Bonding
(1) Where any or all of the separate earthing electrodes are bonded together the bonding ,
conductor shall be:
a) a copper conductor not smaller than l6.0mm2;

b) installed so as not to be subjected to mechanical damage; and
c) connected to electrodes for power systems by means of a bolted clamp or soldered joints
and preferably be connected to other electrodes in the same manner.
7.9 EARTHING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS
7.9.1 General
7.9.1.1 Continuity of earthing and bonding conductors
(1) No automatic cutout or switch shall be placed in the earthing or bonding conductor of a
wiring system unless the opening of the cutout or switch disconnects all sources of energy.
7.9.1.2 Material for system earthing
(I) The earthing conductor of a wiring system, whether also used for earthing electrical
equipment or not, may be insulated or bare, an~ shall be of copper.
7.9.1.3 Material for bonding conductors
(1) The earthing conductor of a wiring system, whether also used for earthing electrical
equipment or not, may be insulated or bare, and shall be:
a) a conductor of copper or other corrosion-resistant material, insulated or bare;

b) a bus bar or steel pipe; _

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF BUILDINGS .
c) rigid metal canduit, except where used undergraund ar in any lacatian where material
.
having a deteriarating effect may came into. cantact with the metal, ar in any expased
raceway installed autdaars where it may be subject to. mechanical damage fram vehicular
traffic, in which case a separate canductar as required in (a) abave shall be installed
within the canduit;
d) electrical metallic tUbing, except where used in cancrete ar masanry slabs in cantact with
the graund ar in any lacatian where material having a deteriarating effect may came into.
cantact with the metal, ar in any expased raceway installed autdaars where it may be
subject to. mechanical damage fram vehicular tra~c, in which case, separate canductar
as required in (a) abave shall be installed within"the tubing;
e) the sheath af mineral-insulated cable, except when it is stainless steel, ar any canductar
af a mineral-insulated cable if it is permanently marked at the time af installatian so. that
it can be readily distinguished fram canductars that are nat used as banding canductars,
except that if the sheath is af aluminium in an undergraund run ar in a lacatian where
materials having a deteriarating effect may came in cantact with the metal, carrosion
resistant protection suitable for the carrasive condition encauntered shall be provided;
f) the sheath af aluminium-sheathed cable, but if used far underground runs or in lac~atians
where materials having a deteriorating effect may came in contact with the metal,
c~)ITasian-resistant pratectian suitable far the corrasive canditions encauntered shall be
pravided; ar
g) ather metal raceways or cable armaur as provided for in Clause 7.6.6.
7.9.2 Installation of Earthing Conductors for a System
(1) The earthing canductar far a system shall be withaut jaint ar splice throughaut its length,
except in the case af bus bars, thermit welded jaints, campressian connectars applied with a
campressian taal compatible with the particular cannectar, ar devices acceptable far connection
in series with the earthing canductor.
(2) 16.0mm2 ar larger capper earthing canductar which is free from expasure to. mechanical
injury may be run alang the surface af the building constructian withaut metal cavering or
protectian, if it is rigidly stapled to. the canstructian; o.therwise, it shall be in conduit, electrical
metallic tubing or cable armour.

(3) A copper earthing conductor of IO.Omm2 shall be in conduit, electrical metallic tubing or
cable annour.
(4) Metal enclosures for earthing conductors shall be continuous from the point of attachmen~
to cabinets or equipment to the earthing electrode and shall be securely fastened to the earthing
clamp or fitting.
(S) Where an earthing conductor is run in the same raceway with other conductors of the system
to which it is connected, it shall be insulated, except that where the length of the raceway does
not exceed IS.Om between pull points and does not contain more than the equival~ll_tof two
quarter bends between pull points, an uninsulated earthing conductor may be used.
(6) Notwithstanding the requirements of (2) above, earthing conductor of I6.0mm2 or larger may
be embedded in concrete provided that the points of emergency are so located or guarded as not
to constitute exposure to mechanical injury.
7.9.3 Installation of Bonding Conductors for Equipment
(1) The bonding conductor for equipment shall be pennitted to be spliced or tapped; but such
splices or taps shall be }.nadeonly within boxes except that, in the case of open wiring, they shall
be pennitted to be -made externally from boxes and shall be covered with insulation.
(2) Where more than one bonding conductor enters a box, all such conductors shall be in good
. electrical contact with each other by securing all bonding conductors under bonding screws, or
by connecting them together with an acceptable solderless connector and connecting one
conductor only to the box by a bonding screw or a bonding device, and the arrangement shall
be such that the disconnection or removal of a receptacle, fixture, or other device fed from the
box, will not interfere with or interrupt the bonding continuity.
(3) Where a bonding conductor is run in the same raceway with other conductors of the system
to which it is connected, it shall be insulated, except that where the length of the raceway does
not exceed I5.0m and does not contain more than the equivalent of two quarter bends, an
uninsulated bonding conductor shall be pennitted to be used.
(4) Where a t;igid metal conduit or steel pipe is used as a bonding conductor, the installation
.shall comply with Section 8 of this Code.

(5) A copper bonding conductor shall:
a) if 16.0mm2 or larger and attached securely to the surface on which it is carried, be

protected where exposed to mechanical injury; and
b) if smaller than 16.0mm2 or if the installation does not come within the provision in (a)
above, be installed and protected in the same manner as the circuit conductor for a given
installation.
(6) An aluminium bonding conductor shall:
a) if 25.0mm2 or larger and attached securely to the surface on which it is carried, be

protected where exposed to mechanical injury; or
b) if smaller than 25.0mm2 or if the installation poes not come within the provisions in (a)
above, be installed and protected in the same manner as the circuit conductor for a given
installation.
(7) Where a separate bonding conductor supplements the bonding afforded by a ferrous metal
raceway, it shall be installed in the same raceway as the circuit conductor.
7.9.4 Earthing Conductor Size for D.C. Circuits
(1) The ampacity of the earthing conductor for a direct-current supply system or generator shall
be not le~s than that of the largest conductor supplied by the system, except where the earthing
circuit conductor is a neutral derived from a balancer winding or a balancer set, the size or the
earthing conductor shall be not less than that of the neutral conductor.
(2) The system earthing conductor shall be copper and in no case smaller than IO.OmrW.
7.9.5 Eathing Conductor Size for A.C. System
(I ) The size of the earthing conductor shall not be less than those given in Table 7.1
7.9.6 Bonding Conductor Size
(1) The size of a bonding conductor shall be not less that.l that given in Table 7.1; but in no case
does it need to be larger than the largest unearthed conductor in the circuit.-,

7.10 EARTHING AND BONDING CONDUCTOR CONNECTIONS
7.10.1 Bonding Conductor Connection to Raceways
(1) The point of connection of the bonding conductor to interior metal raceways, cable armour
and the like shall be as near as practicable to the source of supply and shall be chosen so that
no raceway or cable armour is bonded through a run of smaller size that is called for in
Clause 7.9.6.
7.10.2 Earthing Conductor Connection to Water Pipe Electrodes
(1) Where the earth electrode is a metal water-piping system to which a common earthing
conductor or the earthing conductor of a system is attached, the point of attachment shall be
a) on the street side of the water meter; or

b) on a cold-water pipe of adequate ampacity and as near as practicable to the point of
entrance of the water service in the building.
(2) Where practicable, the point of attachment shall be accessible.
(3) The metal cold water system shall be made electrically continuous from the point of
attachment of the earthing conductor to the water service entrance by bonding together all parts
thereof if these parts contain insulating section or may become disconnected at meters, valves
and unions.
(4) Equipment may be earthed to a cold-water pipe which is near the equipment.
7.10.3 Eathing Conductor Connections to Other-Than-Water-Pipe Electrodes
(1) Where aI metal water-piping system is not available, the earthing conductor shall be attached
to other electrodes at a point which will assure a permanent earth.
(2) Where practicable, the point of attachment in (1) above shall be accessible.

---------------
7.10.4 Bonding Conductor Connection to Circuits and Equipment
(1) The bonding conductor or bonding jumper shall be attached to circuits, conduits cabinets
equipment and the like, which are to be bonded, by means of lugs, pressure wire connector
clamps, or. other acceptable means.
(2) Connections which depend on soldering shall not be used.
(3) The bonding conductor shall be secured to every metal box by means of a bonding screw
which shall be used for no other purpose.
(4) The bonding conductor shall be brought into every nonmetallic outlet box in such a manner
than it can be connected to any fitting or device which may require bonding to earth.
(5) Equipment shall be so installed that, if the connections between the branch circuit and the
. internal conductors pass through an access c'over, the bonding connection shall remain
continuous when the cover is removed.
(6) A bonding jumper shall be installed to connect the bonding conductor to the earthing
terminal of a socket outlet and in such a manner that disconnection or removal of the socket
outlet will not interfere with or interrupt earthing continuity.
(7) In the case of metal-enclosed systems where the earthing path is provided by the metal
enclosure, a bonding jumper shall be installed to bond the earthing terminal of the socket outlet
to the enclosure.
(8) Notwithstanding the Provisions of (6) and (7) above, the bonding jumper, in the case of
socket outlets having earthing terminals isolated from the mounting strap required for special
equipment, may be extended directly back to the distribution panel.
7.10.5 Earthing Conductor Connection to Electrodes
(1) The earthing conductor shall be attached to the earthing electrode by means of:
a) a bolted clamp,
b) a pipe fitting plug or other device screwed into the pipe or into the fitting,
c) copper welding by the thermit process brazing or silver solder, or
d) other equally substantial means.

(2) Where a bolted clamp is used for a wet location or for direct earth burial, the clamp shall
be of copper, bronze or brass, and the bolts shall be of a similar material or of stainless steel.
(3) The earthing conductor shall be attached to the earthing fitting as required by
Clause 7.10.4(1).
(4) Connections which depend on solder shall not be used except for connections utilizing silver
solder.
(5) Not more than one conductor shall be connected to the earthing electrode by a:single clamp
or fitting unless the clamp or fitting is specifically designed for multiple conductor connection.

SECTION 7
EARTIllNG, BONDING, AND LIGHTNING
PROTECTION
PART II - LIGHTNING PROTECTION
7.11 SCOPE
(1) This Part of the Code covers the installation of lightning protection requirements for all types
of structures with the exception of those structures used for manufacturing explosives.
(2) Electric generation, transmission and distribution systems, overhead telephone lines, and ,
radar stations are not covered by this Code.
(a) BS 6651: 1986 British Standard Code of Practice for Protection of Structures against
Lightning, 1990
(b) NSI/NFPA78:1986 An American National Standard), Lightning Protection Code.
(c) UL 96A: 1983 Under writers Laboratories Standard for Installation Requirements for
Lighting Protection systems, Ninth Edition.
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD EBCS-10 1995. 178

SECTION 7: EARTHING, BONDING AND UGHTEN1NG PROTECTION
7.13 DEFINITIONS
(1) For the purpose Qfthis Section, In addition to the terms defmed in Section I, the following
definitions shaliapply:
lightning flash an electrical discharge between cloud and earth, of atmospheric

origin, comprising one or more impulse of many kiloamps.
lightning strike a lightning flash ,attaching to a ,structure.
lightning stroke one of the single distinguishable -current impulses of a lightning

flash.
lightning protection system a 'complete system of air termination, conductors, earth termination;
interconnection conductors, and other connectors and fittings
required to protect a 'structure from the effect of. lightning.
airtermin-ation that component of a lightning protection 'system that is intended to

intercept lightnirrg flushes.
down c;onductor a conductor intended to be used to 'carry lightningcurren:ts between

air lermirration 1U1d ~arth temrimrtioo.
b-ond 'a conductor intended to prov.ide :eIectrica1 connection 'between the

liglftrringprotection system ,and 'Other metal-woiksand ·between
various porti'Ons of the latter.
joint a mecbanica1 and/or electrical junction between two or more

port-ions of a lightning proteCtion system.
test joint a joint designed and situated so ·as to enable .resistance 'or 'Continuity
measurement to be made.
earth'termination that part of a lightning protection system which is intended to

discharge 'lightning currents into the general mass of earth.
179 EBCS-10 1995 ETHIOPIAN ,BUILDING CODE STANDARD

-
ring (loop) earth electrode an earth electrode fonning a closed loop round the structure below
or on the surface of the earth, or within or under the foundations.
It may be ~sed for interconnecting other earth electrodes.
side flash an electrical spark, caused by differences of potential, occurring

between conductive metal bodies and component of lightning
protection system or earth.
zone of protection that space adjacent to a protection system which is substantially

immune to direct lightning flashes (see Figure 7.2).
7.14 MATERIALS
7.14.1 General
(1) A lightning protection systemt shall be made of materials that are resistant to corrosion or
shall be acceptably protected against corrosion.
(2) No combination of materials that forms an electrolytic-couple of such nature that, in the
presence of moisture, corrosion is accelerated shall be used.
Note: One or more of the following materials are acceptable:
i) Copper of the grade ordinarily required for commercial electrical work, generally designated as being of
98% conductivity when annealed.
ii) A copper alloy as resistant to corrosion as copper under similar condition.
iii) Aluminium conductors of electrical grade aluminium.
iv) Galvanized steel with cross~sectionalarea equivalent to that of copper.
7.14.2 Galvanic Compatibility
(1) Metals shall be used in combination that are galvanically compatible.
t The principal parts of a lightning protection system are air termination, down conductors, joints and bonds, test
joints, earth termination, and earth electrode.

7.14.3 Corrosion Protection
(1) Components shall be protected against corrosion; any part of a copper system that is
exposed to direct action or chimney gases or other similar cOlTosive gases shall be protected by
a co,ntinuous hot-dipped coating of lead.
(2) All components located within 610.0rnm of the chimney top shall be so protected.
(3) Aluminium components are not required to have a coating of lead.
7.14.4 Mechanical Protection
(1) Any part of a lightning protection system that is subject to mechanical damage or
displacement shall be protected with a protective moulding or tubing.
(2) Metal pipe or tubing shall be bonded to the conduit at both ends of the tubing.
(3) Conductors shall be securely attached to objects upon which they are placed (see Figure 7.1
and Table 7.5).
7.14.5 Use of Aluminium
(1) Aluminium systems shall be installed in accordance with other applicable clauses and subject
to the following conditions:
a) Aluminium lightning-protection components shall not be installed directly on copper

roofing materials or other copper surfaces where exposed to the run off from copper
surfaces.
b) (i) Aluminium components shall not be used where they come into direct contract with
earth.
(ii) Fittings used for the connection of aluminium earthing equipment shall be of the
bimetallic type; such bimetallic connectors shall be installed not less than 460.0mm
above ground level.

ltL.EC'f"RjCAbINSfALbAllCN
,.h·.·· ..•. _ .. _ .
OF BUILDINGS
_.
c) Aluminium conductots and componertts shaH hot be
i)embedded in Cbncrete or masonry,;

Ii) ih direct contact with a surface coated with art alkaline base paint; m-
iH) installed in a l'Ocatibrisubject to excessive moisture.
Note:' Co'pper lightning-protection components shaH not lie insfalled directly on alumihium routing, siding or other
aiuminium surfaces,
ETH'IOPIAN 'B'UIL.O~NG CObE STANDARD ESCS-10 1995 1"2

S50TION 7: E:ARTHINCJ,~ONDING AND l-:'GHT~NINa P-RQT~Q'fIGN
P!m~"e!(l Area
CO!l'lPpnent.
fie
.d Compgnent
mm mm~
Airtermination!!; Fixe~ co""~iQl'\!l (Qond!l) In
~urpir\ium, c;opper 20 lC2.5 50·9 llI.umini\J!'fl, alurnlni\lm alloy, P\lpl?llr
1I11c1.
gl!lvan~{l~ ~1l81 AAd \IalV¥l~!ld st,~I;
!!trip. {lxterpaj ~~p ?Q x g,? 5().Q
exterl'\al rodll ll·Odi~ 5()·()
alu!TI!ni\lm, al\lmini\lm 8.0 dia. ~O.O Intllmal !l'\rip 2,0 ~ 1.? 3().()
alloy, copper, interp.l!l rods e.? dis, ~~.O
I1ho~phor, b.rc:mze~d
galvanized steel rods
Suspllndlld conductors: Flexi!?l@or larnln~ed cpnn~i9nll

~randed ah,lIT1inium 7/3.0 SO.Q (bondli);
~rlll"1c1.e~
c;opp{lr 1~/1.8 5p.0 llJdernal, a14miF1ium 20 x 2.5 50,0
stranglld llIuminium 7/3.0 50·9 e>\lemal, ,,"l1ealel;\ coppllr 20 x 2.5 50.0
(~lllli reinforc{ld) internal, aJurnil1lum 20 x 1.5 ~O.Q
§lrllOded galvanized 7/~,0 59,0 internal, aon'aJe9 Cppptlr 20 x 1.5 i30.Q
~lllli
P9Wl1C;qnd4ctOI"1l:
~\!mil1hJm, popper 50.()
!!'ld Qalvanized
steel strip
~Y!'fliF1i\lm,~l,Iminium
~19Y,pOPPllr I¥1d
\J~Y~iz{ld steel r!XIs

~~h tllrrninl!tions: o FQr <?0pp!!lr~la~ steel rQdll' thl! cor{l should bll 01 !p",
!!y~@nitic iron cwPpn stl!l!1 w~~~ llIOS!11l~r@(1!l1~qf llpprp1<irn~@!y
9QP!!llr!l!1d galy~ized eoo.ONfmm' Md qf a quality n~ l!!l!!sthl'l'\ ilrade
stlllli ~rip 43.OA qf ~S 4360. ihe clal;\dinil llho\llg b~ 01~.9~
cQPper !lAd g~Iv!ll1iz~ p\lr!l e!ll¢.rolytlc <?C?Oper!T\olecl,Jl!lJ'!yI?onqed ~o th!!
stefll rOOs lllee! core. T~e raelia! t~i\l~I1l!SSof the coPPer !l~Cluld
hard qraWn copper be n¢ leS~.than 0.?5rnm.
rqgs for girect ~riving iQ Q!:ll,!plin\lli for \lPp'per-Q!!l~ steel r~~ lihClUld be
into soft \Iround m.ad!! frorp copPllr~silicon !l!lpy, gr~de Qfi1P1 gr Bfi
h!lJ"d~rawn or 287~, or alumll1!\Jrp prcll'1zeallClYI\:Ira~e CA10? BS¢
8F1nealedcopper r9d~ ?871.
or sQlid wires for ili) The u!je ¢ intemal phosphor prClnze dowels !T'ay
iF1dirllgtdriving or 11.0c;jia. 50.q givll lliower resist8T1cethlVl the e>\le!T\aJcOlJplil1g1101
layint! in \lround d!arnetllr gre(lter than the rog.
rods for h!lJ"d\:Iroung 11;3.0 Iv) For ~1lIv,,"~!ld. lll~! rggll! steel 01 gr!l~e ~.OA
c;opp@r-c!ador !!p!!Cifi~ In B~ ~!$() sl'\@l,llgP@ \lllltd, t~{l thrl!!lds
\Ialvan~ecl. steel rQds being c\ll before ~ot-dip gaiV!l"izing tel BS 7~.
(s~ nQte!!tQ tabl@) for v) strandeq con.ql,!~o!,! "l! ngt nQrmaJly !lsed felt 9OW~
harcler\:Ir94F1c1 99f191Ag!QI'l!pr I!~hll'
vi) ~reater diml!nsion!l arl! r@~\lired for the 1oUpw!n~:
• stl1Jcturell exceeding ?P·Qrn in tl!li~~t
• Sp!.lC;i!!lc;:1~Il!lS¢. !l1l1Jglurl!l,
• Mec;tl,,"icll.! or corro~lve reason!!.
183 EBCS~10199~ ETHIOPIAN SUILOIN<l CODr= STANDARD

Table 7.4 Minimum thicknesses of sheet metal used for roofing and forming Part of the
air termination net work
Material Aluminium
Zinc
LeadMinimum
nd0.7
2.0
Material
Minimum
thickness
0.4 thickness[mm]
0.5
0.3
Note: The figures in this table are based on contemporary building practice and will be satisfactory where the
roofs form part of the lightning protection system. However, damage by way of puncturing may occur with a direct
arc-connected strike.
Table 7.5 Recommended fixing centres for conductors
Arrangement 750
500
1000
500
1000
Fixing centres [mm]
s ~
Note: This table does not apply to built-in type fixings which may require special consideration.
7.15 FORM AND SIZE
7.15.1 Air Termination
(1) Vertical air tenninations shall be made of solid or tubular rods.
(2) Horizontal air terminations shall be made of solid conductor, strips or cables.

7.15.2 Conductors
(1) Conductors shall be in the form of multiple strand cables, single wires, rods, or flat strips.
7.15.3 Earth Termination
(1) Earth termination shall be made of rods plates or ,stranded cables.
7.15.4 Minimum Dimension
(1) The component part of lightning protection system shall have dimensions not less than those
given in Tables 7.3 and 7.4.
7.16 AIR TERMINATION
7.16.1 General
(1) Ajr termination networks shall be provided for all parts of a structure that are likely to be
damaged by direct lightning Flashes.
Note: Air networks may consist of vertical or horizontal conductors or combination or both. Various forms of air
terminations are shown in Figures 7.7 through 7.15.
7.16.2 Support
-
(1) Vertical air terminals shall be secured against overturning either by attachment to the object
to be protected or by means of braces which shall be permanently and rigidly attached to the
building.
7.16.3 Metallic Projections
(1) All metallic projections on or above the main surface of the roof which are connected,
intentionally or fortuitously, to the general mass of the earth shall be bonded to and form part
of the air termination network (see Figures 7.4 and 7.5).

ELECTRICAL INSTALLA TlON OF BUILDINGS
7.16.4 Metallic Materials
(1) Metallic coping, roof coverings, hand rails, window washing equipment and metallic screens
around play areas shall be considered for inclusion as part of the air termination network (see
Figures 7.4, 7.5 and 7.6).
7.16.5 Structure within Zone of Protection
(1) Air termination shall not be required for those parts of a structure located within a zone of
protection.
(2) If portions of a structure vary considerably in height, any necessary air termination or air
termination network for the lower portions shall be joineQ to the down conductors of the taller
portions in addition tJt> being joined to their own down conductor.
7.16.6 Air Termination on Roof
(1) One roof air termination 'shall be placed or. ridges of a roof and around the perimeter of the
roof.
7.16.7 Air Termination on Reinforced Concrete Structure
(1) If the reinforcing bars are used as down conductors, the air termination shall be connected
to the reinforced bars in the number of positions required for down conductors.
7.17 DOWNCONDUCTOR
7.17.1 General
(1) A down conductor shall provide a low impedance path from air termination to earth
termination so that the lightning current can be safely conducted to earth.
Note: In addition to the various types of down conductors; i.e., strips, rods, reinforcing bars and structural steel
stanchions, etc any good conductor which may form part of the building structure can be included provided
that it is appropriately jointed to the air and earth terminations.
--- ----------
SECTION'?': EARTHING, BONDING AND liGHTENING PROTECTION
7.17.2 Routing
Down conductors shall follow the most direct path possible between air and earth termination
networks. The conductors shall be arranged as evenly as practicable around the outside walls
of .the structure (see Figure 7.1 7).
7.17.3 Recommended Number
(I) At least two down conductors shall be provided on any kind of structure.
(1) Each down conductor located in a runway, school play ground, or other similar·location shall·
be guarded against mechanical damage or displacement.
(2) The down conductor shall be protected for a minimum distance of 1.8m above grade level.
7.17.5 Corrosive Soil
(1) A down conductor entering cOITosive soil shall be protected against cOITosion for not less
. than 91S.0mm above grade level and for entire length below grade level.
7.17.6 External Routes Not Available
(I) When the provision of suitable routes for down conductors is impossible, ego buildings of
cantilever construction from first floor upwards (see Figure 7.18), down conductors shall not
follow the outside contours of the buildings.
(2) In cases such as (1) above, down conductors may be housed in an air space provided by
non-metallic, non-combustible internal duct and taken straight down to ground.
Note: Any suitable covered recess not smaller than 76.0mm x 13.0mm or any suitable service duct running the full
height of the building may be used for this purpose provided it does not contain an unarmored or non-metal.
sheathed service cable.
(3) In case where an unrestricted duct is used, seals at each floor level may be required for fire
protection.
(4) Where p()ssible, access to the interior of the duct shall be available.

••
7.17.7 Lift Shafts
(1) Lift shafts shall not be used for fixing down conductor.
7.17.8 Re-entrant Loops
(1) When a large re-entrant loops [s~e Figure 7.18 (b)] cannot be avoided, the conductor shall
pass through holes as shown in Figure 7.18 (c).
7.17.9 Sharp Bends
(1) No bend of a conductor shall fonn an included angle of less than 90° or have a radius of
bend less than 203.0mm (see Figure 7.16).
7.17.10 Bonding to Prevent Side Flashing
(1) Any metal in or fonning part of the structure or any building services having metallic parts
by design or fortuitously and in contact with general mass of the earth shall be either isolated
from or bonded to the down conductor.
Note: Unless extra bonding is required, items already in metallic contact with the lightning protection system,
directly or indirectly, through permanent and reliable metal-to-metal joints do not require additional bonding
conductors.
7.17.11 Bonds
7.17.11.1 General
(1) Since bonds have to join a variety of metallic parts of different shapes and composition,
careful attention shall be given to .the metals involved; i.e, that of the bond and of the items
being bonded.
7.17.11.2 Mechanical and electrical requirements
(1) A bond shall be mechanically and electrically effective and protected from corrosion and
erosion by the operating environment.

7.17.11.3 External metal
(1) External metal on or forming part of a structure shall be bonded to the lightning protection
system with a main-sized conductor.
7.17.11.4 Internal metal
(1) Internal metal bonds may be reduced in size; but shall not be smaller than 35.0mm2 copper
or its equivalent.
7.17.11.5 Provision for bonding of future equipment
(1) In all buildings, at each fldor level, provision shall be mad~ for bonding futijre machinery
or equipment to the lightning protection system; i.e, by connection to metallic gas, water,
drainage or similar services.
7.17.11.6 Joints
(1) Joints shall:
a) be as few as possible;
b) be mechanically and electrically effective; .
c) be protected against corrosion or erosion from the elements of the environment; and
d) present an adequate contact area.
Note: Contact surface shall fIrst be cleaned and then inhibited from oxidation with a suitable non-corrosive
compound.
(2) With overlap joints, the o,rerlap shall not be less than 20.0mm for all types of conductors.
7.17.12 Test Points
(1) Earth down conductor shall be provided with a test joint in such a position that, whilst not
inviting unauthorized interference, it is convenient for test (see Figure 7.25 for typical test
joints),
Note: Plates indicating the position, number and type of earth electrodes should be fItted above each test point.

'E~eCTRICAL INSTALLATION QF BUILDINGS
1.18 EARmTERMlNATION
1.18.1 Termination
(1) Each down conductor !thall terminate at an earth electrode.
7.18.2. Re$istanee to Earth
(l) Each earth electrode shall have a resistance (in ohm) not. exc~ding the product given by 10
times ti.N number
. Qf earth eleotrodes to be provided
. .
(2) The whole of the earth termination network shall have a combined resistance to earthn<;>t
exceeding 1Q ohm without taking account of any bonding to other services.
7.18..3 Eartll El~trodea
7.18.3.1 General
(l)Earth eleotrodes shall oonsist of metal rods~ tubes Of strips or a combinatiol.l of these Or
natural earths such as piles and foundatiol.ls (see Figure 7.20).
7.18.3.1 Earth rod cmmection
(1) Earth rod connections shall be made by welding, bracing or clamping.
(2) Clamps shall be secured with at least two bolts or screw caps and shall make Contact with
the earth rod for at least 380.0mm.
7.18.4 Conn~tion Point
(1) The point of connectiol.l of the earth termination network shall be removable and easily
accessible fr"Om above~earth to facilitate inspectiol.l, testing and maintenance of the Ughtnil.lg
protection system.
(2) If below ground, the point of COnl.lectionshall preferably be housed in a purpose"built

...
mspectlon h ber.
pIt or c.am
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODe STANDARD EBCS ..10 1995 190

.", .,.,._ .._.•
SECTION
B' __
1: EARTHING,
'" •••••• 'n~·'_ •.· •• __ .·.~u
BONDING
__ .•. _·. __
ANDL1GHTEN1NG
". __ .•• __ , ,_."
PROTECTION
•• '_."_"_'_'"
7.18.4.1 Deep moist clay soil
(1) 'Earthing rod ,shall extend vertically not less than 3J)m into theeatth.
(2) The ground shall be compacted and m:ade tight against the full leltgth of thecond:uctrrr or
earth rod (see Figure 7.19).
1.18.4.2 Sandy or ,gravely soil
to In sand or gravel, two or more 'earth rods at not less than 3.0m :spacings 'shall be driven
vertically to a minimum depth of 3.0m below grade (see Figure 7.21).
7.18.4.3 Shallow top soil
(1) if bedrock is neat the surface, the conductor shan be laid in trenclres extending away from
the building at each down conductor.
(1) Trenches in (1) above ::shallat least be:
a) 3.7mlong and 610,Omm deep in day soi~

b) 703m long and 610.0mffi deep in slll1dy Of gravely ~oi1-.
(3) If these methods should prove impracticablej the lightning ptoteetloncahlemay be :laid
directly on the bedrock with a m1nimumdistance of 610J)mm from the fomid-ation 'C)r'exterior
footing and termin'iltehy a:ttachrn:ent to a buried copper earth platea't ltlast O.:8mmthic'kand
having amlnimufil surface area of 'O.18m2 •
1.18.4.4 Soilless than O.3m deep
(I) If soil is less than O.3m in depth, down conductors shall beconhected to a 1000p conductot
installed in a trench or in rock :ctevlces around thestrucmre.
(2) '(1) The 100p conductor shall not be less than the equivalent of :amainsize lightning
conductor.
191 EBCS-10 1:995 'ETH10PtANB'UILD1NG OODe -STANOA'AO

.ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF BUILDINGS
,
{ii) Optional earth plates may be attached to the loop conductor to enhance its earth
contact, where the measured earthing resistance is found to be high to provide
effective earthing (see Figure 7.22).
7.18.4.5 Earth electrode seal for use within a tanked structure
(1) When earth terminations in built-up areas pass through a tanked structure, a seal similar to
that shown in Figure 7.23 shall be used.
7.18.4.6 Corrosion
(1) Because of the harmful corrosion which is likely to result, coke breeze shall not be allowed
to be in contact with copper electrodes and salting of the ground in the vicinity of any earth
electrode is not recommended.
7.19 COMMON EARTHING
7.19.1 Common Earth Potential
(1) All earthing mediums in or on a structure shall be interconnected to provide a common earth
potential.
(2) The Provision in (1) above shall include lightning protection, electric service, telephone and
antenna system earths as well as underground metallic piping systems; main size lightning
conductors shall be used for interconnecting these earthing systems to the lightning protection
system.
7.19.2 Common Earth Bonding
(1) If electric, teiephone, or other systems are earthed to a common earthing terminal (see
Figure 7.24), one connection from the lightning protection system to the terminal is required.
(2) If the service systems are earthed to a metallic WlJ,terpipe; only one connection to the
lightning system is required provided that the water pipe is electrically continuous qetween all
systems.

(3) If the water pipe in (2) above is not continuous, the non-conductive sections shall be bridged
withmain size conductors, or the connection shall be made at a point where electrical continuity
is assured.
7.20 USE OF REINFORCING BARS FOR EARTHING IN CONCRETE STRUCTURES
7.20.1 General
(1) Detail on how to use concrete reinforcing bars shall be worked out at the design stage before
building construction begins (see Clause B.6, Annex B).
7.20.2 Electrical (;;ontinuity
(1) Electrical continuity of the reinforcement shall be ensured.
(2) The following precautions are, however, recommended:
a) Good contact between reinforcing bars should be ensured; i.e, by fixing bars with tying
WIres.
b) Ties shall be provided for both vertical to vertical and horizontal to vertical bars.
7.20.3 Prestressed Concrete Members
(1) Lightning protection conductors shall not be connected to prestressed concrete columns,
beams or braces where the wires or strands are_ not linked and, therefore, not electrically
continuous.
7.20.4 Precast Concrete Members
(1) In the case of precast reinforced concrete columns, beams or braces, the reinforcement may
be used as a conductor if the individual elements of reinforcement are bonded together and
electrical continuity is ensured.

7..-21 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION
7~21.1 Gene..,.1
(:1) Thestrocturalsteelfr{l1llework ofa buitding may be used as the main conductor of ,a

lightning protectiOIi system if it is either electrically continuous or made so.
1.21.2 Air Termination
(I) Air termination shall be bonded directly lothe steel framework or by conductors leading
through the ridges, roof, or coping walls, or connected together with a conductor on the exterior
of the building that is bonded to the steel framework.
(2) If <such a conductor in (1) above is employed, it shall be bonded to the framework ~t
intervals not more than 3.0m.
7.21.3 Connection
{l) COMe-ctio-n shall be made on cleaned areas ofthe steel work by use of bonding plates with
pressure 'cable connectors ,lravingasurface 'contact ;areaof not le-ssthan 5200J~mm~; ~ol.ted,
welded, or brazed securely to the steel S0as to maintainelectricalcontinulty.
7·.21.4 Earth'ing
(1) £afthing connections :shall be made ,at approximately 'every other 'sreel column around the
:perimeter and shaU not average more than n.Oma;part.
(2) The earthing conductor shall be connected to steel columns using bonding plates (s'ee 7 :21.3).
(3) The bonding plate shan be bolted or welded securely to a cleaned 'area of the column .at the
lowest 'available point (see Figure 7.26).
7.21.5 Interconnection
'-....
(l) Metal bodies that are required to be bonded need not be'separately bonded if they are
electrically continuous with the lightning protection system through the steel framework.
ETHIOPIAN BUILDINGCOD~ STANDARD EBCS-10 1995 1'94

(al (b) leI
Ie)
(d)
(QI
Note: i) Lightning conductor fixings should be purpose-made for each size of strip; dimension a in Figure (e)
should be equal to the thickness of the strip and should be equal to the width plus 1.3mm a for
expansion. Conductors of circular section should he similarly· treated.
ii) All fixings should be securely attached to the structure; mortar joints should not be used.
Figure 7.1 Typical design for lightning conductor fixings

HC
(
\
/ --/\/ I
--- GL~///////////// / /' ../'"II I.\ I
I \ I
He
.•..•.•.••
/
ZP
\ GL
0\
/'".•.........
lbl Horllonttl tlr t.rmlnttlon
Ilvtl
tt ground
" --- prottctlon •.•.•....••
PI.n vl.w
01 lont 01
/ ,.- - .......•••.•...
-"'"
'"
/ ZP ZP \
{ vC vC \
1"11" view \ o 0 J
protection
.t ground
01 Ion. 01 .
,...,
> <
{ o
ve
o
ve
,
\ /
--
Icl Four vortlcol conductors showing protlctlVl .ngl ••
.nd •• socltted Ion •• 01 protection.
~-
\ ZP ZP /
"-.. . ../".... ./
Figure 7.2 Protective angles and zones of protection for various forms of air termination·

Figure7.3 Typical forms of vertical air termi~ations
197 EBCS-10 1995 ETHIOPIAN BUILDINGCODI; STANDARD

2 Rod holdliitl
€==
.CEP~:
'Q
u
13
!~1Air tormlnll KIY

.~
3 Rod coupling
10-1
4---i1
Earth
13~t3
4 D_n conductor
a Horlzontl' conductor
a Tilt lolnt
-$-
7 Elnh Ilectrodl
6Ql Ib6.
6
• EII'th tod 'A' cllmp
7
9 Rod hOUllnl
III Chimney. '"II thin 1.5 m dlomettr
It top.ond 20 m hil"
10 Cond"ctor clip
11 cOronll bind
12 Bond to CI" 'ron cap II
.'tornatl •• to coronll bind 1111.
(bl 60 m bricl(ltlck 13 Junction cllmp
Note This figure, does not apply to reinforced concrete chimneys where the reinforcing bars can be used as down
conductors
Figure 7.4 Examples of lightning protection systems for brick chimneys

Bimetellic joint Galvanized

steel roof
Reinforced concrete
Ilructure with parapet, Bonds to
Ilone coping and steelwork
non-conducting roof
Reinforced
concrete structure,
PVC coping with
Bond to metal conducting roof
suspended ceiling
One reinforcing ber shown for clarity
Detail
showing
item 4
Key 1 Handrail bond
2 Reinforcing bond
3 Coping bond
4· Non-ferrous bonding point (built-in)
Figure 7.5 Examples of air terminations and down conductors using handrails, metal copings and
reinforcingbars.
199 EBCS-10 1995 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING ,CODE STANDARD

___ Bolted joint

connecti on 2 •• M 8
Beam
Note: Minimum dimensions when a metallic roof covering is used as part of the air termination network are as
follows:
IO.5mm zinc O.7mm

galvanized steel
O.3mm lead 2.0mm
copper
aluminium O.7mm
Figure 7.6 Air termination for flat roof sbowing connection to standing seamjoint when
a metallic roof is used as part of tbe air termination network

SECTION 7: EARTHING, BONDING AND LIGHTENING PROTECTION '
HC ,
/:s:j
Ie) Elevation .howing protective .ngle
l~",
'"
"
HC \
I II
I ,
HC
. II I
HC
'Oml mall.l
L 20m /
He
/
___ ZP_ --_/
Ib) Plan .howlng zone of protection at ground level
Ic) Gen.rel .rrangement
]figure 7.7 Air terminations for a flat roof

Note: i) If S> 10+ 2H, additional longitudinal conductors are required so that the distance between conduc~rs
does not exceed lO:Om.
ii) If the length of the roof exceeds 20.0m, additional transverse conductors are required.
iii) Down conductors are omitted for clarity.
Figure 7.8 Air terminations for large areas of roof various profiles
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD EBCS-1 0 19~5 202

Test Test Test

joint· joint .....••.. joint
DC DC
'" DC
I
I
I
I 16 m
I 20 m
I
I
I
I 16 m
16 m
DeL
(1) (2) (3)
Note: The protective angle provided by the ridge conductor in each case is as follows:
(i) protective angle up to 45° : ridge conductor is sufficient with connection to metallic gutters; number of
down conductors=72/20=3.6 (say4).
(ii) protective angle over 45~: air termination mesh (maximum IO.Om x (IO+2H)); ridge and eaves
conductors provide approximate roof mesh 6.0m x lQ.Om;number of down conductors=40/20=2.
(iii) situation as for (ii) but metallic gutters used in lieu of eaves conductor; number of down conductors
=64/20=3.2 (say4).
(a) Air terminations'an" down conductors
Vertical air
terminatinn
Conductor 'or
strip rOd or
metallic gulter
Rfdge conductor
D.t.1I
fixed below tile
-'e~el (see detail)
Key: Conceald conducto~ O.3m high bar vertical rods.

(b) Air terminations below roof covering
Figure 7.9 Air terminations and concealed conductors for buildings less 20.0m high with
stopping roofs
203 EBCS-10 1995 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING QODE STANDARD

, "-
'.....-
,.. ,,- ,,-
View from B
-Join down conductor. and horizontal

conductors on lower parapet.
Section A·A
/I -. -#---r
Il-oc
II DC
A
112
.. 6m .1
12 m
I
[J
fa Dc"1
t [J I Hell II
Perimeter ••24 + 24 + 12 + 12 •• 72 m •
Number of down conducton rel.1\Iired
72/20 ••4.
Note: i) An.air tennination along the outer perimeter of the roof is required and no part should be more than
5.0m from the nearest horizontal conductor, except that an additional 1.0m may be allowed for each
metre by which the part to be protected is below the nearest conductor.
ii) Horizontal conductors are not necessary on the parapets of the light well; a zone of protection of 60· is
provided by the two adjacent horizontal conductors for structures less than 20.0m high. This principle
does not apply to taller structures.
Figure 7.10 Air terminations for flat roofs at different levels

?ECTION 7: EARTHING, BOND1NG AND LIGHTENING PROTECTION
::[ OM' El-

I ... DC 60 m DC •.../
Note: i) Horizontal air tennination conductors should be jointed at the interconnections.
ii) Where PVC covered horizontal air tennination conductors are used, bare vertical rods O.3m high should
be fixed at each intersection and at intennediate positions along the horizontal conductors spaced no
more than 10 apart.
Figure 7.11 Air terminations and down conductors for flat roof buildings where the air
termination conductors have a PVC oversheath
Note: The air tennination network for a tan reinforced concrete or steel framed structure should be as fonows:
(a) Horizontal conductors on roofs from a IO.Om x 20.0m network.
(b) There are bonds to steelwork at corners, at 20.0m intervals around the periphery and on the tower O.5m
above the lower roof level.
(c) Key bonding to the building steelwork.
Figure 7.12 Air terminations for tall conducting structures

Roof conductor
*
represents a bond to roof steelwork.
Note: i) The horizontal conductor mesh size should be 5.0m x 1O.Om or smaller, according to the risk.
ii) For clarity, down conductors are omitted.
Figure 7.13 Air termination network with horizontal conductors for structure with
explosive or highlYJlammable contents

Sm
Fl't n,:p conductor f.lt.n.d

to plnp.t will
,
9,I, ,I
,I!
.9
9t
Ii, ,
I9
,I, I
I' -.
Koy
~ on metal roofs, these conductors may be omitted.
1 Air termination 7 Eaves conductor

2 Down conductor 8 Test point
3 Bonds to holding dowp rod 9 Earth electrode
4 Horizontal conductor 10 Main earthing terminal of Electrical installation
5 Vertical conductor 11 Bond to bell-frame
6 Ridge conductor 12 Peripheral conductor
Note: i) The air termination network should have a 1O.Oll} x 20.0m mesh. For structures below 20.0m hight, there
should be down conductors every 20.0m of periphery and for structures over 20.0m high, every 10.0m
of periphery; horizontal conductors should be every 20.0m from the top.
ii) Metal roofs may be suitable as air terminations (see Table 7.5 and Figure 7.17).
iii) On shingle spires, metallic soakers and gullies should be bonded at the top and bottom.
Figure 7.14 Church towers and spires

Suspended air termination
Mast See note 2
See ,note 2 See note 2

Protected building
~Earth electrode~
lat Elevation
- Suspended air termination
Suspended air termination
Protect.ed building
(b} Plan
Kay
- - - - Zones of protection It m.st\
\ --- x -- Zones of protection It

+\ maximum sag of
'\ leri.l conductor
:'\\
'II- \
Protected
building \
\
\
(el End .I ••.• llon showing zones 01 prote<:tlon
Note: i) Where two or more suspended horizontal conductors are employed, a protective angle of 45° may be
used in the space bounded by the conductors. Elsewhere, the protective angle is limited to 30°.
ii) To prevent flashover between mast/conductor and protected building, the minimum clearance distance
has to be 2.0m or as under above governed by whichever is the greater. This clearance has to be as
above under maximum sag conditions
Figure 7.15 Air termination with twin suspended horizontal conductors & zone of
protection for structure with explosive or highly flammable contents

R •• RilclillS of bolnd.
8 inchus (203 mOll minimlim.
Figure 7.16 Sharp bends

•• •
•• • ••
i
L
-----. .••
• Itl·
• ,I.• • N
•
•
:LJ=
1.1 11/
••
•• •
ldl
t T3
Note: i) The down conductors may be natural part of the building framework or added strips or rods on external
faces.
ii) On structures exceeding 20.0m in height, down conductors should be spaced at not more than 1O.Om
apart.
Figure 7.17 Pattern of down conductors for various forms of tall building
l ~
ad maximum Exceeding ad
, d" i
"~
I
(a Permissible arrangement (bl Arrangamant that is not permissible
permissible
Not --tII ~Permisslble
I
t
I
lcl Permissible melhod of taking conductor ldl Routlli for, down conductor" in a building
through a pllrapat wall with cantilevlIrtld uppllr lIoon
Figure 7.18 Re-entrant loops

ELECTRICAL. INSTALLATION OF BUILDINGS
A= o.6~m mini~um
t
B= 3.0P m mini~Um
.
Figure 7.19 Earthtng in ~oiBt
Clay ·~oil.
Figure 7.19 Earthing in moist clay soil
EBCS-10 1995 212

Ai,. termination bonded
to steel reinforcing or
Air termination on roof
steel frome of building
Down conductors
lin these caSes
steel rei,. forc ing
or steel frame
of building I
Ring earth electrod~

below ground level
to improve earthing(~,
.•....J
•...
1111
IJJ •...•...
_~ ..•...
" ./
....
~;.,/
, ./
'I
11l
"
<~) Bonds to lift installations

at top and bottom of
I
continuous rigid metal
I structure only
Ground level
I
~ Earth electrode
NOTE. Air tennination mesh should be not •. eat•. tun 10 m X 20 m. Down conductors should be not more tNn 10 m ~art.
Fig ••.• 7.20 Ligbtning protedio. system ror tall b.ildings (over 20.0m bigb) sbowing air termi.atinns. down cond.cto •.••bonds to projectinns above roor
ternate configuration
A =10.610 mminimum
a = 13.00 m minimum
Figure 7.21 Earthing in sandy or gravely soil
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD EBCS-10 1'995 214

,/ ,/
--<-
'",,-
Earth
'''-
plate .
Loop conductor
Figure 7.22 Earthing in soilless than O.3m deep

..
~ 0'
. 0
•
, .0 o ",
."
" 0
. 0:. b
Concrete 0,,' o
, '
o . 0 • ,
.. ..
,~' , , .
• D ,0
. ,
b • " ,P ,
,~
.'0
,0
1ft}!..-~/;~,??-.~/.;?·:~~~,~:';:~:i'·"
. ~'.'" ,4 "-' :*:1.'
" ., 1I ': 0111 0: ,' 0, .'
Asphalt
Asphalt /"
Concrete
.0 ?, 'n
. 6' :. <:>
.'"
Figure 7.23 Example of an earth electrode seal for use within a tanked structure
~
SECTION 7: 'EARTHING, BONDING AND LIGHTENING PROTECTION
I,
ExterMl down
conductor..-..-
provfde sea ed tube
For Test
cavityJolallS
nt~
Lightning protection
earth termination netv~ " "
Electr~city cable ,,.
Water , ...-, t k I \0" ( •••• ' \ ... 11,.0: ,
Gas \ t 1#' ••••• (- , I •••

' •• \
,, ,,.
l' J',.,'"
.'
..i- ,,~..,.....
,,,.., . ,.. I \~
Figure 7.24 Diagram showing bonding to services(gas, water and electricity)
NOTE. Corrosion inhibitor to be used on all
Figure 7.25 Testing joints

Bonding plate with a

minimum contact area
'of 52 sq. mm
A :::O.61m mini mum

B = 3.00 m minimum
Figure 7.26 Earthing connection on structural framing

ANNEX A (INFORMA11VE)
SYSTEM DESIGN
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
The structure or, if it has not been built, the drawings and specifications should be examined
taking into account the recommendations of this Section.
In the case of structures having no suitable metallic members, it is important to consider t~

positioning of all the component parts of a lightning protection system so that they perform their
function without detracting from the appearance of the structure.
Modern buildings use metal extensively in their structure and there is considerable benefit in
utilizing such metal parts to maximize the number of parallel con~ucting paths. Often the
lightning protection will be improved, worthwhile cost savings may result and the aesthetic
appearance of the structure preserved. However, it should be borne in mind that a lightning
strike to such a metal part, especially if it is beneath the surface, may damage the covering and
cause masonry to fall. This'risk can be reduced, but not eliminated, by a surface-mounted
lightning protection system.
Examples of metal parts which should be incorporated into lightning protection systems are steel
frames, concrete reinforcing bars, metal in or on a roof, window rails and handrails. Some metal
within a structure may be used as a component of the lightning protection system; for example, .
sheet piling being in contact with the general mass of earth, may be used as an earth electrode
and is unlikely to be improved upon by the addition of rods or tapes.
The whole structure should be provided with a fully interconnected lightening protection system;
i.e., no part of the structure should be protected in isolation.

ANNEX B (CONSULTATION)
B.t GENERAL
Consultation should take place between the designer of the lightning protection s'ystem and the
interested parties indicated in Clauses B.2 through B.6 before and during all stages of design.
B.2 ARcmTECT / ENGINEER
As far as practicable, the following should be detennined:
a) Routing of ,illl conductors.
b) General areas available for earth tennination networks and reference earth electrodes.
c) Materials(s) for conductor.
d) Extent of the work and the division of responsibility for primary fixings to the
structure, especially those affecting the water-tightness of the fabric, chiefly roofing.
e) Materials(s) to be used in the structure, especially for any continuous metal, e.g.
stanchions or reinforcing.
f) Use to which the structure is to be put.
g) Details of all metallic service pipes, rain-water system, rails and the like entering or
leaving the structure or with the structure which may require bonding to the lightning
protection system.
h) Extent of any buried services which could affect the siting of the earth tennination
network(s).
i) Details of any equipment, apparatus, plant or the like to be installed within or near
the building and which require bonding to the lightning protection system.

B.3 PUBLIC UTILITIES
Agreement should be reached on the bonding of services to the lightning protection system.
Because of the introduction of new materials and practices, reliance should not be placed on
agreements reached for other structures.
B.4 FIRE AND SAFETY OFFICERS
Agreement should be reached on:
a) the need for a lightning protection system on structures containing flammable or

explosive materials;
b) routes and materials(s) for construction of ducts and sealing at floors if internal
conductor are being considered;
c) the method of lightning protection to be adopted in the unlikely event of a structure

having a flammable roof.
B.5 TELEVISION AND RADIO INSTALLERS
Agreement should be reached on the need to bond antenna supports and screens of cables to the
lightning protection system.
B.6 BUILDER
Agreement should be reached on:
a) the form, positions and numbers of primary fixings to be provided by the builder;
b) any fixings provided by the lightning protection system contractor to be installed by

the builder;
c) the positions of conductor to be placed beneath the structure;
d) whether any components of the lightning protection system are to be used during the
construction phase, e.g. the permanent earth termination network could be used for
earthing cranes, railway line, scaffolding, hoists and the like during construction;

e) for steel framed structures, the numbers and positions of stanchions and the form of
fixing to be made for the connection of earth terminations;
f) whether metallic roof covering, where used, are suitable as part of the lightning
protection system and the method of attachment of conductor to earth;
g) the nature and location of services entering the structure above and below ground
including railway lines, crane rails, wire ropeways, conveyor systems, television and
radio antennas and their metal supports, metal flues, and flue-liners;
h) the position and number of flag-masts, roof level plant rooms (i.e., lift motor rooms,
ventilating, tanks and other salient features;
i) the construction to be employed for roofs and walls in order to determine appropriate
methods of fixing conductor, specifically with a view to maintaining the
weather-tightness of the structure;
j) possible penetration of a waterproofing membrane where earth terminations have to

be sited beneath the structure, especially in 'urban' situations and in confined spac.~s
on industrial sites;
Note: The same general consideration applies to the reference earth electrode for use in initial and
periodic testing.
k) the provision of holes through the structures, parapets, cornices, etc to allow for the
free passage of the down conductor;
I) the provision of bonding connections to a sted frame, reinforcement bars and other
metal;
m) the most suitable choice of metal for the conductor taking account of corrosion,
especially at bimetallic contacts;
n) the accessibility of test joints, protection by non-metallic casings from mechanical

damage or pilferage, lowering of flag-masts or other removable objects, facilities for
periodic inspection, especially on chimneys;
0) the preparation of a drawing incorporating the above details and showing the positions
of all conductors and of the main components.

SECTION 8
WIRING METHODS
8.1 SCOPE
(1) This Section applies to all wiring installation operating at 0.6/1.0kV or less except for:
(a) conductors which form an integral part of factory built equipment;

(b) communication circuit, unless otherwise specified in Section 23;
(c) Class 2 circuits, unless otherwise specified in Section 10;
(d) community antenna distribution, radio and television installations, unless otherwise
specified in Section 24;
(e) optical fiber cables.
8.2 NORMATIVE REFERENCE
(1) The following references contain provisions which, through reference in .this text, constitute
(a) C22.1:1992 Canadian Electrical Code Part I, Safety Standard for Electrical
Installation, Sixteenth Edition
(b) BS 767:1992 The electricians Guide to the 16th Edition of the lEE Wiring
Regulations, Second Edition, 1993
8.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
8.3.1 Methods of Installation
(1) The methods of installation of wiring systems shall be as shown in Annex A.
. ETHIOPIAN BUlLDING CODE STANDARD EBCS-l0 1995 223

(2) The Provisions in (1) above notwithstanding, the use of another method is not precluded
provided that compliance with this Code is maintained
(3) A bare live conductor shall be installed on insulators.
(4) Non-sheathed cables for fixed wiring shall be enclosed in conduits, ducting or trunking;
however, this provision does not apply to a protective conductor.
8.3.2 Wiring in Ducts and Plenum Chambers
(1) No electrical equipment, unless specifically approved for the purpose, shall be installed in
ducts used to transport dust, loose stock, or flammable vapours.
(2) No electrical equipment, unless specifically approved for the purpose, shall be installed in
any duct used for vapour removal or for ventilation of commercial-type cooking equipment.
8.3.3 Underground Installations
(1) Direct buried conductors, cables, or raceways shall be installed to meet the minimum c?ver
requirements shown in Table 8.1.
Table 8.1 Minimum cover requirementst for direct buried

conductors, cables or raceways
750.0Vor Non-vehicular area.
900.
1000
600
750 Ie••
Vehicular area.
450
600 Minimum cover [mm]
Over
Over 750.0V
750.0V
armour
sheath Qr armour
Conductors or cables
Raceway
Minimum cover means the distance between the top surface of the conductor, cable, or raceway and the finished
grade.

SECTION 8: WIRING METHODS
(2) The minimum cover requirements shall be permitted to be reduced by IS0.0mm where
mechanical protection is placed in the trench over the underground installation.
(3) Mechanical protection shall consist of one of the following and, when in flat form, shall
be wide enough to extend at least SO.Omm beyond the conductor, cables, or raceways on each
side:
(a) Treated planking at least 38.0mm thick.

(b) Poured concrete at least SO.Ommthick.
(c) Concrete slabs at least SO.Omm thick.
(d) Concrete encasement at least SO.Ommthick.
(e) Other acceptable material.
(4) Raceways or cables, if located in rock, may be installed at a shallower depth entrenched into
the rock in a trench not less than IS0.0mm deep and grouted with concrete to the level of the
rock surface.
(5) Raceways may be installed directly beneath a concrete slab at grade level provided the
concrete slab is not less than a nominal 1OO.Ommin thickness, the location is adequately marked,
and the raceway will not be subject to damage during or after installations.
(6) Any form of mechanical protection which may adversely affect the conductors or cable
assemblies shall not be used.
(7) Backfill containing large rock, paving materials, cinders, large or sharply angular substances,
or corrosive material shall not be placed in an excavation where such materials may damage
cables, raceways, or other substructures prevent adequate compaction of fill, or contribute to
corrosion of cables, raceways, or other substructures.
8.3.4 Conductors in Hoistways
(1) Where conductors other than those used to fumish energy to the lift or dumbwaiter are
installed in hoistways, they shall be from mineral-insulated cable or armoured cables or be run
in rigid or flexible metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing.
(2) The cable, conduit, or tubing referred to in (1) above shall be:
(a) securely fastened to the hoistway construction;

r
(b) arranged so that terminal-outlets or junction boxes open outside the hoistway except that
pull boxes may be installed in long runs for the purpose of supporting or pulling in
conductors.
(3) (a) Main feeders for supplying power to elevators and dumbwaiters shall be installed outside
the hoistway.
(b) Only such electric wiring, raceways, and cables used directly in connection with the
elevator or dumbwaiter, including wiring for signals, for communication with the car,
for lighting, heating, air conditioning and ventilating the car, shall be permitted inside
the hoistway.
8.4 CONDUCTORS
8.4.1 Types of Conductors
(1) Conductors installed in any location shall be suitable for the condition of use as indicated
in Annex B of Section 4 for the particular location involved and with particul.ar respect ..to the
follwing
(a) moisture
(b) corrosive action
(c) temperature
(d) degree of inclosure
(e) mechanical protection.
8.4.2 Radii of Bends in Conductors
(1) The minimum internal radii of bends in conductors shall be as indicated in Table 8.2

Table 8.2 Minimum internal radii of bends in cables for fixed wiring
Type of Insulation a410.0m

3atOverall
Bending over todiameter
25.0mm
(3)factor
(2)
up
any 25.0mm
todiametre
10.0mm
Mineral-insulated cables may be bent at a minimum radius of three times the cable diameter provided that they
will only be bent once.
Note: i) The factor shown in the table is that by which the overall cable diameter must be multiplied to give the
minimum inside' radius of the bend.
ii) The figutes in brackets apply to unsheathed single-core stranded pye cables when.installed in conduit,
trunking or ducting.
8.4.3 Conductor Joints and Splices
(1) Unless made with solderless wire connectors, joints or splices in insulated conductors shall
be soldered, but they shall first be made mechanically secured.
'.
(2) Joints or splices shall be covered with an insulation equivalent to that on the conductors
being joined.
(3) Joints or splices in wires and cables shall be accessible.
(4) Splices in underground runs of cable, if required due to damage to the original installation,
may be made:
(a) in junction boxeswhich are located at least l.Om above grade and secured to buildings
or to stub poles and suitably protected from mechanical damage;
(b) notwithstanding the requirements in (3) above, by means of splicing devices or materials
(kits) acceptable for direct earth burial.

,
I
8.4.4 Supporting of Conductors
(1) Conductors shall be supported so that no injurious strain is imposed on the terminals of any
electrical apparatus or devices or on joints or taps. Table 8.3 shows guidance on methods of
support.
Table 8.3 Spacing of supports for cables in accessible position
Horizontal
Vertical
Vertical
550
1500
450
800
400
900
600
2000
121)0
I
1- 250
400
350
300
MBximum sp,cing of clips [mm]
Horizontal
I: Min",f.insul,tBd c,bllS I ShllthBd c,bllS
~
Note: For the spacing of supports for cables of overall diameter exceeding 40.0mm. and for single-core cables
having conductors of cross-sectional area 300.0mm2 and larger, the manufacturer's recommendations
should be observed. '.
8.5 OPEN WIRING
8.5.1 Open and Clipped Direct
.(L) Sheathed cables clipped direct to or lying on non-metallic surface shall be installed in
accordance with Installation Method 1 (see Annex A).
8.5.2 Spacing of Conductors
(1) Spacing between conductors and adjacent surfaces shall be as indicated in Installation
Methods 12 and 13 (see Annex A).
(2) In all locations, a separation of at least 25.0mm shall be maintained between conductors and
adjacent metal piping or conducting materials.

8.5.3 Conductor Supports
(1) Conductors shall be supported rigidly on noncombustible, absorption resisting insulators.
(2) Conductors supported on solid knobs shall be securely tied thereto by tie wires having
insulation of the same type as that on the conductors which they secure.
8.5.4 Spacing of Supports
(1) Sheathed and / or armoured cables installed in accessible positions and supported by clips
shall not exceed the appropriate spacing value stated in Table 8.3.
8.6 EXPOSED WIRING ON EXTERIOR OF BUILDINGS AND BETWEEN

BUILDINGS ON THE SAME PREMISES
8.6.1 Location of Conductors
(I) Where conductors are supported on or in close proximity to the exterior surfaces of
buildings, they shall be installed and protected so that they shall not be hazardous to persons or
be exposed to mechani<;:al injury and they shall not, without special permission, be located at a
height less than 4.5m from the ground.
8.6.2 Clearance of Conductors
(1) Conductors which pass over roofs shall be located or guarded so that they cannot be reached
by a person standing on a fire escape, flat rooI, or other portion of a building.
(2) Such conductors in (1) above shall at least be 2.5m above the highest point of a flat roof or
a roof that can be readily walked upon and at least 1.0m above peaked roofs or the highest point
of such roofs that can be readily walked upon; however, by special permission, they may be
located less than 2.5m, but not less than 2.0m, .above the highest point of a flat roof or roofs so
that the latter can be readily walked upon.
8.6.3 Power Supply Conductors
(1) The conductors of a power supply system attached to the exterior surfaces of buildings shall
be at least 300.0mm from the conductors of a ~ommunication system unless one system is in
conduit or is permanently separated from other systems.
,,
"
.~
~ .

8.7 BARE BUS BARS AND RISERS
(1) Bare conductors shall not be used as main risers or feeders in buildings unless, special
permission is obtained.
(2) Special permission shall not be granted unless:
(a) the building is of noncombustible construction;

(b) the conductors are placed in a chase, channel, or shaft located or guarded so that the
conductors are inaccessible;
(c) the premises do not constitute a hazardous location;
(d) suitable cut-offs to protect against the vertical spread of fire are provided where floors
are pierced;
(e) the mechanical and electrical features of the installation and the conductor supports are
appropriate to the operating and maintenance conditions likely to occur, the following
requirements being used in the case of bus bars rated l200.0A or less:
Note: i) Where flat bus bars 6.25mm or less in thickness are used, the continuous current rating shall not
exceed 1.6A/mm2 of cross-sectional area of copper bus bar or 1.12A/mm2 in the case of aluminium
bus bars.
ii) Bus bar supports shall be spaced not more than 750.0mm apart, with minimum clearance across
insulating surface between bars of opposites polarity of not less than 50.0mm, and 25.0mm between
bus bars and any earthed surface.
8.8 INSTALLATION OF BOXES, CABINETS, OUTLETS AND TERMINAL

FITTINGS
8.8.1 Number of Outlets per Circuit
(1) There shall be no more than 12 outlets on any 2-wire branch circuit except as permitted by
other Sections of this Code.
(2) Such outlets in (1) above shall be considered to be rated at not less than 1.0A per outlet
except as permitted by (3) below.
(3) Where the connected load is known, the number of outlets may exceed 12 provided the load
current does not exceed 80% of the rating of the overcurrent device protecting the circuit.

8.8.2 Outlet Boxes
(1) A box or an equivalent device shall be installed at every point of outlet, switch or junction
of conduit and at every point of outlet and switch of concealed kllob-and-tube work.
(2) Nonmetallic outlet boxes shall not be used in wiring methods using metal raceways,
armoured or metal sheathed cable, except where the boxes are provided with bonding connection
between all conductor entry openings.
(3) The box shall be provided with a cover or a fixture canopy.
(4) At least 150.0mm of free conductor shall be left at each outlet for making of joints 'or
connection of fixtures unless the conductors are intended to loop through lamp holders, socket
outlets, or similar devices without joints.
(5) Ceiling outlet boxes in concrete slab construction shall have knockouts spaced above the free
or lower edge of the boxes a distance of at least twice the diameter of the steel reinforcing bars
so that conduit entering the knockouts shall clear the bars without offsetting.
(6) Boxes and fittings shall be firmly secured to studs, joists or similar fixed structural units.
8.8.3 Conductors in Boxes
(1) Boxes shall be of sufficient size to provide usable space for all insulated conductors
contained in the box.
(2) Conductors which are connected to different power or distribution transformers or other
different sources of voltage shall not be installed in the same box, cabinet or fitting.
8.8.4 Terminal Fittings
(1) Where conductors are run from the ends of conduit, armoured cable surface raceways or non
metallic sheathed cable to appliances or open wiring installation, an outlet fitting or terminal
fitting may be used instead of the box required in Clause 8.8.2, and the conductors shall be run
without splice, tap or joint within the fitting.
(2) The fittings in (1) above shall have a separately bushed hole for each conductor.
(3) The fittings in (1) above shall not be used at outlets for fixtures.

8.9 CABLES, CONDUCTORS AND WIRING METHODS
(1) Every cable operating at low voltage shaH be selected in accordance with Section 4 of this
Code.
(2) The method of installation of cables and conductors shall be subject to the provision of
Clause 8.3.1.
1232 E13cs-10 1995 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

ANNEX A (NORMATIVE)
SCHEDULE OF METHODS OF INSTALLATION OF
CABLES
Note: i) The methods of installation distinguished by bold type are reference methods for which the current-
carrying capacity given in Annex B, Tables B.I through B.45, Section 4, have been determined.
ii) For the other methods, an indication is given of the appropriate reference method having values of
current-carrying capacity which can safely be applied.
Installation 2 3
for 4determining
method Appropriate current-carrying
Reference Method capacity
s
Open and clipped direct:
Sheathed
on a non-metallic
cables clipped
surface'.direct to or lying : ~
Cables embedded direct in building materials:
11~ J~ Method 1
Sheathed cables embedded directly in

masonry, brickwork, concrete; plaster or Method 1
2
the like (otHer than thermally insulating
materials)
In conduit:
Single-core non-sheathed cables in

metallic or non-metallic conduit on a wall
3 Method 3
or ceiling
Single-core non-sheathed cables in

metallic or non-metallic conduit in a
thermally insulating wall or above a Method 4
4
thermally insulating ceiling, the conduit
b~ing in contact with a thermally
conductive surface on one sidet
Multicore cables having non-metallic

5 sheath, in metallic or non-metallic conduit Method 3
on a wall or ceiling.
tThe wall is assumed to consist of an outer weatherproof skin, thermal insulation and an inner skin of a plaster board
or a wood-like material having a thermal conductance not less than IOw/m2K. The conduit is fixed so as to be close
to, but not necessarily touching, the inner skin. Heat from the cables is assumed to escape through the inner skin
only.

Installation method Appropriate Reference

Examples
Method for determining
Number Description current-carrying capacity
2 3 4
Sheathed cables in conduit in a

6 thermally insulating wall etc. Method 4
(otherwise as Reference Method
4) lc:Q
Cables in conduit embedded in
masonry, brickwork, concrete, Method 3
7
p
plaster or the like (other than
thermally insulating materials)
..
In trunking:
8 Cables in trunking on a wall or

suspended in the air
- --'-, , . Method 3
Cables in flush floor trunking Method 3

9
10 Single-core cable in skirting Method 3

trunking
On trays:
11 Sheathed cables on a perforated
cable tray, bunched and
unenclosed. A perforated cable Method 11
tray is considered as a tray in
which the holes occupy at least
30% of the surface area
In free air, on cleats, brackets or a ladder
Sh••athed single-core cables in

free air (any supporting
metalwork ';'Ider the cables
occupying less than 10% of the
plan area): Two or thr'le cables
vertically one above the other,
minimum distance between
cable surfaces equal tc, the
overall cable diameter (D.);
12 distance from the wall not less Method 12
than 0.50•.
Two or three cables horizontally,

with spacings as above three
cables in trefoil, distance
between wall and surface of
nearest cable 0.50. or nearest
cables 0.750.

SECTION 8: WIRIN.G METHODS

Examples Method for determining
Number Description current-carrying capacity
2 3 4
In free air, on cleats, brackets or a ladder

13 Sheathed multicore cables on ladder
or brackets, separation greater than ~ (~[
20. Sheathed multicore cables in
free air distance between wall and Method 13
cable surface not less than 0.3D.Any
supporting metalwork under the
cables occupying less than 10%the
plan area
14 Cables suspended from or Method 12 or 13, as
incorporating a catenary wire appropriate
-----------
Cables in building voids:
Sheathed cables installed directly in

a thermally insulating wall or above
15 a thermally insulating ceiling, the Method 4
cable being In contact with a
thermally conductive surface on one
side (otherwise as Ref Method No 4) ~
(
\
Sheathed cables In ducts or voids Method 4

formed by the building structure, Where the cable has a
other than thermally insulating diameter D. or a
materials perimeter not greater
than 200.
Method 3
Where the duct has
either a diameter
greater than 50. or a
perimeter greater than
200.
16 Notes:
--i-) Where the perimeter
is greater than 600.,
installation Methods
18 to 20, as
appropriate, should be
used.
Ii) D. is the overall

cable diameter; for
groups of cables D. is
the sum of the cable
diameters.

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF BUllDtNGS

Method for determining
Examples.
current-carrying
Number I Description capacity
2 3 4
Cable In trenches:
Cables supported on the wall

of an open or ventilated trench, Method 12 or 13, as
17 with spacin~as indicated for
Reference Method 12 or 13 as appropriate
appropriate
Cables in enclosed trench Two single-core cables with
450.0mm wide by 300.0mm surfaces separated by a
deep (minimum dimensions) minimum of one cable
including 100.0mmcover diameter.
Three single-core cables in Method 18. Use rating
18 trefoil and touching factors in Table A.3,
a ~ ~ ~ Section 4.
throughout.
~ n~r;p
_.LL ~
F/. /L / ///~ //'r;
?;,#l
Multicore cables or groups
of single-core cables with
a------t surfaces minimum of
0-9/),/9/~ 50.0mm
Cables in enclosed trench Single-core cables arranged

450.0mm wide by 600.0mm in flat groups of two or three
deep (minimum dimensions) on the vertical
including 100.0mmcover trench wall with surfaces
separated by one diameter
with a minimum distance' of Method 19. Use rating
19 50.0mm between groups. factors in Table A.3,
Section 4;
Multicore cables installed
with surfaces separated by a
minimum! of 75.0mm. All
cables spaced at least
25.0mmfrom the trench wall
Cables in enclosed trench Single-core cables arranged

600.0mm wide by 760.0mm in groups of two or three in
deep (minimum dimensions) flat formation with the
including 100.0mmcover surfaces separated by one
diameter or intrefoil
formation with cables
touching. Method 20. Use rating
20 ~ V factors in Table A.3,
;;]0 0 o~
Groups separated by a Section 4.
~o 0 o~
minimum! of 75.0mm either
~o 0 ov.:
horizontally or vertically.
/ ////////,
~o 0 o~
All cables spaced at least

25.0mmfrom the trench wall.
! Larger spacing to be used where practicable.
236 EBCS-10 1995 ETHIOPIAN BUilDING CODE STANDARD

SECTION 9
PROTECTION AND CONTROL
9.1 SCOPE
(1) This Section covers the protection and control of electrical circuits and apparatus installed
in accordance with the requirements of this Code.
(I) The following references contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute
(a) C22.1:1992 Canadian Electrical Code Part I, Safety Standard for Electrical
Installation, Sixteenth Edition.
(b) BS 7671:1992 Requirements for Electrical Installation,IEE . Wiring

Regulations, Sixteenth Edition.
9.3.1 Protective and Control Devices
(1) Every electrical apparatus and unearthed conductors shall be protected by one or more
devices as may be necessary for automatic and/or manual interruption of the supply in the event
of any fault and shall be provided with:
(a) protection against fault current to break any fault current in a circuit before such current
causes danger due to thermal or mechanical effects produced in those conductors or the
associated connection;
(b) protection against overload current to break any such current flowing in the circuit
conductors before such a current causes a temperature rise detrimental to insulation,
joints, termination or the surroundings of the conductors;

(c) protection against under-voltage which when necessary will open the circuit, where a
reduction in voltage, or loss and subsequent restoration of voltage could cause danger;
(d) manually-operable control device which will safely disconnect all unearthed conductors
of the circuit at the point of supply simultaneously; and
(e) protection against earth fault in accordance with Clause 9.4.2.
9.3.2 Types and Ratings of Protective and Control Devices
(1) Circuit breakers, fuses, and switches shall be of type and ratings acceptable to the department
in charge of inspection.
(2) Overcurrent protective devices shall ensure safe operation and shall have interrupting
capacity sufficient for the voltage employed and for the anticipated fault current which mllst be
interrupted.
9.4 PROTECTIVE DEVICES
9.4.1 Overcurrent Devices
(1) Each unearthed conductor shall be protected by an overcurrent device at the point w.?ere it
receives its supply of current and at each point where the size of conductor is decreased, except
that such protection may be omitted where:
(a) the overcurrent device in a larger conductor properly protects the smaller conductor;
(b) the smaller conductor is not over 3.0m long and does not extend beyond the switchboard,
panel board, control device which it supplies; or
(c) the smaller conductor has an ampacity not less than one-third that of the larger conductor
from which it is supplied.
(2) The rating or setting of overcurrent devices shall not exceed the allowable ampacity of the
conductors which they protect except:
(a) where a fuse or circuit breaker having a rating or setting of the same value as the
ampacity of the conductor is not available, the ratings or settings given in Table 9.1 may
be used;
(b) in case of equipment wire, flexible cord, and tinsel cord, which will be considered as
being protected by 16.0A overcurrent devices; or
(c) as provided for by other Clauses of this Code.

SECTION 9: PROTECTION AND CONTROL
(3) Overcurrent devices shall be enclosed in cutout boxes or cabinets unless they form a part of
an approved assembly which affords equivalent protection, or unless mounted on switchboards,
paneboards, or controllers located in room or enclosures free from easily ignitible material and
dampness, and accessible only to authorized persons.
(4) Overcurrent devices shall not be connected in parallel in circuits of 1000.OV or less unless
otherwise they are factory-assembled in parallel as a single unit.
9.4.2 Earth-Fault Protection
(1) Earth-fault protection shall be provided to de-energize all normally earthed conductors of a
faulted circuit in the event of an earth fault in those conductors as follows:
(a) in solidly earthed circuits rated more than 230.0V-to-earth, less than 1000.OV phase-to-
phase and 1000.OA or more; and
(b) in solidly earthed circuits rated 230.0V-to-earth or less and 2000.0A or more.
(2) The maximum setting of the earth-fault protection shall be l200.0A and the maximum time
-
delay shall be 1.Os for earth fault currents equal to or greater than ~3000.0A.
(3) The ampere rating of the circuits referred to in (1) above shall be considered to be:
(a) the rating of the largest fuse that Can be installed in a fusible disconnecting device;
(b) the highest trip setting for which the actual overcurrent device installed in a circuit
breaker is rated or can be adjusted; or
,)c) the ampacity of the main. conductor feeding the devices in cases where no main
disconnecting device is provided. '
(4) Earth-fault protection shall be provided by,:
v(a) an overcurrent devic~ which incorporates earth-fault protection; 1)/

v(b) earth-fault trippi.ng system.comprising a senso~ or sensors, relay and auxiliary tripping
mechanism; or
./( c) other appropriate means.
J..
9.5 FUSES
(1) Only fuses and fuse holders of proper rating shall be used, and no bridging or short
circuiting of either component shall be permitted.
(2) Where plug fuses are used in branch circuits, they shall be of such a type and so installed
that they are non-interchangeable with a fuse of larger rating.
(3) A fuse having a fuse link which is likely to ·be removed or replaced while the supply is
connected shall be of a type such that it can be removed or replaced without danger.
9.6 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
(1) Circuit breakers shall be of the trip-free type.
(2) Indication shall be provided at the circuit breaker and at the point of operation to show
whether the circuit breaker is open or closed.
(3) Circuit breakers shall open the circuit in all unearthed conductors by the manual operation
of a single handle and by the action of overcurrent.
(4) Circuit breakers shall be of such design that any alteration by the user of either the tripping
current or the time will be difficult.
(5) 'circuit breakers shall be equipped with tripping elements as specified in Table 9.2.
9.7 CONTROL DEVICES
(1) Control devices shall have'ratings suitable for the connected load of the circuits which they
control and, with the exception of isolating switches, shall be capable of safely establishing and
interrupting such loads.
(2) Control devices used in combination with overcurrent devices or overload devices for the
control of circuits or apparatus shall be connected so that the overcurrent or overload devices
will be dead when the control device is in the open position, except where this is impracticable.
(3) Control devices, with the exception of isolating switches, shall be readily accessible.

(4) Control devices, unless located or guarded so as to render them inaccessible to unauthorized
persons and to prevent fire hazards, shall have all current-carrying parts in enclosures of metal
or other fire-resisting material.
(5) Where electrical equipment is supplied by two or more different transformers or other
sources of voltage, then:
(a) a single disconnecting mean~, which will effectively isolate all unearthed conductor
supplying the equipment, shall be provided integral with or adjacent to the equipment;
or
(b) each supply circuit shall be provided with a disconnecting means integral with or
adjacent to the equipment, and the disconnecting means shall be grouped together.
9.8 SWITCHES
(1) Single-throw knife switches shall be mounted with their bases in a vertical plane so that
gravitational force will not tend to close them.
(2) (a) Double-throw knife switches may be mounted so that the throw will be either vertical
or horizontal.
(b) If the throw in (1) above is vertical, a positive locking device or stop shall be provided
to ensure that the blades remain in the open position when so set unless it is not intended
that the switch be left in the open position.
(3) Manual single-throw switches, circuit breakers, or magnetic switches, shall be connected so
that the bases or moving contacts will be dead when the device is in the open position except
when other conditions make this requirement unnecessary. '
9.9 PROTECTION AND CONTROL OF MISCELLANEOUS APPARATUS

.
(1) Socket outlets shall not be connected to a branch circuit having overcurrent protection rated
or set at more than the ampere rating of the socket outlets except as permitted by other Sections
of this Code.
(2) Portable appliances need not be equipped with additional control devices where the
appliances are:
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD EBCS~10 1995 241

(a) mted at not more than 1500.0W; and

(b) provided with cord connectors, attachment plugs or other means by which they can be
disconnected readily from the circuits.
(3) Where switches are used to control an outlet or outlets from more than one point, the
switches shall be wired and connected so that the earthed conductor runs directly to the outlet
or outlets controlled by the switches.
(4) Except for panel boards where more than 90% of the overcurrent devices supply feeders or
motor branch circuits, every panel board shall be protected on the supply side by overcurrent
devices having a rating not greater than that of the panel board.
(5) Transfer equipment for standby power systems shall prevent the inadvertent interconnection
of normal and standby sources of supply in any operation of the transfer equipment.

Table 9.1 Rating or setting of overcurrent devices protecting conductors

(For general use where not otherwise specifically provided for)
Ampacity of 63
80
40
100
16
20125
350
400
450
32
400
600
25
32
50
100
200
110
150
175
225
250
300
500
600
200
16
50
2
40
63
100
150
175
250
500
Circuit 0breaker
Rating or setting permitted
Fuse [A]

Table 9.2 Overcurrent trip coils for circuit breakers a~d overload devices for protecting motors
in
oneany
one ininconductor
each except
each phase,
phase toa neutral
not For neutral
conductor
circuit or
be 2-wire
3-wire,
5-wire,
4-wire,
System 2
a.c. earthedtt
32-phase
conductor
earthed
or
1-phase
3-phase
devices
4--wire,2-phase
protection Kind
d.c.,
a.c.
t2-phase
1-phase
cqpnected
3-phaseconductor
a.c.,
a.c.
such
a.c., of
unearthed
or motor
unearthed
d.c.
d.c.,
with
a.c.
in
or
as any
trip or
with
d.c.
earthed
unearthed or
withwith Number
oneForormotor
earthed
neutral
coils neutral
conductor
relays, and location of overload
overload protection
1
2-trip coils, one in each outside
arthed 4-trip coils, one in each unearthed
t This will not preclude the use of other arangements which will provide equivalent protection.
tt This will not prevent the use of one single-pole circuit breaker in each conductor for the protection. of an unearthed 2-wire circuit.
SECTION 10
CLASS 1 AND CLASS 2 CIRCUITS
10.1 SCOPE
(1) This Section covers remote-control, signalling and power-limited circuits that are not integral
parts of a device or an appliance.
(2) This Section does not apply to communication circuits that are dealt with in Section 23.
Note: The circuits described in this Section are characterized by usage and power limitation which differentiate
them from electric light and power circuits and, therefore, alternative requirements to'those of other relevant
Sections of this Code with regard to minimum wire sizes, de-rating factors, overcurient protection, insulation
requirements, wiring method, and material are deemed necessary.
(a) NFP A70/NEC: 1986 National Fire Protection Association! American National Electrical
Code, 1987 Edition.
(b) C22.I:1992 Canadian Electrical Code Part I,Safety Standard for Electrical
10.3 CLASSIFICATION
10.3.1 General
{i) CirCUItscovered by this Section are those portion of the wiring system between the load side
of the overcurrent device or the power-limited supply and all connected equipment, and shall be
Class 1 or Class 2 as defmed below:
(a) Class 1 - Circuits which are supplied from sources having limitation in accordance
with Clause 10.4.1.

(b) Class 2 - Circuits which are supplied from sources having limitation in accordance
with Clause '10.5.1.
10.3.2 Class 1 Extra-Low-Voltage Power Circuits
(1) Circuits which are neither remote-control circuits nor signal circuits, but which operate at
not more than 30.0V where the current is not limited in accordance with Clause 10.5.1 and
which are supplied from a transformer or other device restricted in its rated output to 1000. OVA
shall be clasefied as extra-low-voltage power circuits and shall be considered to be Class 1
circuits.
10.3.3 Class 2 Low-Energy Power Circuits
(1) Circuits which are neither remote-control circuits nor signal circuits but in which the current
is limited in accordance with Clause 10.5.1 shall be clasified as low-energy power circuits and
shall be considered to be Class 2 circuits.
10.3.4 Hazardous Location
(1) Where the circuits or apparatus within the scope of this Section are installed in hazardous
locations, they shall also comply with the applicable Clauses of Section 12.
10.3.5 Circuits to Safety Control Devices
(1) Where the failure to operate a remote-control circuit to a safety control device v rill introduce
a direct fire or life hazard, the remote-control circuits shall be deemed to be a Class 1 circuit.
10.3.6 Circuits in Communication Cables
(1) Class 1 circuits shall not be run in the same cable with communication circuits.
(2) Class 2 remote-control and Signal Circuits or parts thereof which use conductor in a cable
assembly with other conductors forming parts of communication circuits are, for the purpose of
this Code, deemed to be communication circuits and shall conform to the req~irements of
applicable Clauses of Section 23.
•
SECTION 10: CLASS 1 AND CLASS 2 CIRCUITS ----
10.4 CLASS 1 CIRCUITS
10.4.1 Limitation of Class 1 Circuits
(1) Class 1 extra-low-voltage power circuits shall be supplied from a source having a rated
output of not more than 30.0V and 1OOO.OV A.
(2) Class I remote-control and signal ~ircuits shall be supplied by a source not exceeding
600.0V.
10.4.2 Methods of Installation for Class 1 Circuits
(1) The equipment and conductor of Class I circuits shall be installed in acc?rdance with the
requirements of other appropriate Sections of this Code, except as provided in\Clauses 10.4.5
through 10.4.10.
10.4.3 Overcurrent Protection of Class 1 Circuits
(1) Conductors of Class 1 circuits shall be protected against overcurrent in accordance with
Section 9 of this Code, except:
(a) where other Clauses of this Code specifically permit or require other overcurrent.
protection; or
(b) where the conductors are of 1.0mm2 copper and extend beyond tIle equipment enclosure,
they shall be protected by overcurrent devices rated at a maximum of 5.0A and 10.0A,
respectively.
(2) Where overcurrent protection is. installed at the secondary terminals of the transformer and
the transformer is suitably enclosed, no overcurrent protection is required on the primary side
othttr than the normal overeurrent protection of the branch circuit supplying the transformer.
10.4.4 Location of Overcurrent Devices in ClfSs 1 Circuits
(1) In Class 1 circuits, the overcurrent devices shall be located at the point where the conductor
to be protected receives its. supply.
(2) The overcurrent device may be an integral part of the power supply.

10.4.5 Class 1 Extra-Low-Voltage Power OrclIit Sources Including Transformers
(1) To comply with the 1OOO.OV

A limitation, Class 1 extra-low-voltage power circuit sources
including transformers shall not exceed'a maximum power output of 2500.0V A; and the product
of the maximum current and maximum voltage shall not exceed lOOOO.OV A with the overcurrent
protection by-passed.
10.4.6 Conductor Material and Sizes
(1) Copper conductors smaller than 2.5mm2 may be used in Class 1 circuits if:
~
(a) installed in a raceway;
(b) installed in a cable assembly; or
(c) within a flexible cord in accordance with Section 4.6.
(2) Subject to the conditions specified in (1) above, conductors shall not be smaller than:
a) 1.5mm2 for individual conductors pulled in raceways;

b) 1.0mm2 for individual conductors laid in raceways, and
c) 1.0mm2 for an integral assembly of two or more conductors.
10.4.7 Insulated Conductors for Class 1 Wiring
(1) Where conductors larger than 1.5mm2 copper are used in a Class 1 circuit, they shall be of
any type shown in Annex B of Section 4.
(2) Where conductor of 1.0mm2 or 1.5mm2 copper are used in a Class 1 circuit, they shall be
equipment wire of the type suitable for such use as shown in Annex B of Section 4.
10.4.8 Conductors of Different Circuits in the Same Enclosure, Cable, or Raceway
(1) Different Class 1 circuits shall be permitted to occupy the same enclosure, cable or raceway
without regard to whether the individual circuits are alternating current or direct current,
provided all conductors are insulated for the maximum voltage of any conductor in the
enclosure, cable or raceway.
(2) Power supply conductors and Class 1 circuit conc'uctors shall not be permitted in the same
enclosure, cable, or raceway except when connected to the same equipment; and all conductors
are insulated for the maximum voltage of any conductor in the enclosure, cable, or raceway.

SECTION 10: CLASS 1 AND CLASS 2 CIRCUITS
10.4.9 Mechanical Protection of Remote-Control Circuits
(1) Where mechanical damage to a remote-control circuit would result in a hazardous condition
all conductors of such remote-control circuits shall be installed in conduits, electrical metallic
tubing, or be otherwise suitably protected from mechanical injury or other injurious condition
such as moisture, excessive heat or corrosive action.
lO.4.10 Class 1 Circuits Extending Aerially beyond a Building
(I) Class 1 circuits which extend aerially beyond a building shall comply with the requirement
of Section 8.6.
10.5 CLASS 2 CIRCUITS
10.5.1 Limitations of Class 2 Circuits
(1) Class 2 circuits, depending upon the voltage, shall have currents limited as follows:
a) 0 to 20. OV: Circuits in which the open-circuit voltage does not exceed 20.0V shall have
overcurrent protection rated at not more than 5.0A except that overcurrent protection·.
shall not be required where the current is supplied from:
i) primary batteries which, under short circuit, will not supply a current exceeding
7.5A after 1.0min;
ii) a Class 2 circuit transformer;
iii) a device having characteristics which will limit the current under normal operating
conditions or under fault conditions to a value not exceeding 5.0A; or
iv) a device having a Class 2 output.
b) Over 20.0V but not exceeding 30.0V: Circuits in which the open-circuit voltage exceeds
20.0V, but does not exceed 30.0V, shall have an overcurrent protection rating not
exceeding lOON amperes, where V is the open-circuit voltage, except that the,
overcurrent protection shall not be required where the current is supplied from:
i) primary batteries which under short circuit will not supply a current exceeding 5.0A
after 1.0min;
ii) a C;:lass2 circuit transformer;
iii) a device having characteristics which will limit the current under normal operating
conditions or under fault conditions to a value not exceeding lOON amperes, where
V is the open-circuit voltage; or
iv) a device having a Class 2 output.
c) Over 30. OJ' but not exceeding 60.0.,,: Circuits in which the open circuit voltage exceeds
30.0V. but does not exceed 60.0V, shall have an.,overeurrent protection rating not
exceeding lOON ampers, where V is the open-circuit voltage, except that the overcurrent
pro~ection shall not be required where the current is supplied from:
i) a Class 2 circuit transformer; or

ii) a device having characteristics which will limit the current under normal operating
conditions or under fault conditions to a value not exceeding lOON amperes, where
V is the open-circuit voltage.
d) Over 60.0'" but not exceeding J 50.0.,,: Circuits in which the open-circuit voltage exceeds
60.0V, but does not exceed ISO.OV, shall have an overcurrent protection rating not
exceeding lOON amperes, where V is the open-circuit voltage, and, in addition, shall be
equipped with current-limiting means other than overcurrent protection, which will limit
the current, either under normal operating conditions or under fault conditions, to a value
not exceeding lOON amperes, where V is the open-circuit voltage.
(2) Transformer devices supplying Class 2 circuits shall be restricted in their rated output to not
exceeding I OO.OVA.
(3) A device having energy-limiting characteristics may consist of a series resistors of suitable
rating or other similar device.
(4) A Class 2 power supply shall not be connected in series or parallel with another Class 2
power source.
10.5.2 Methods ofInstallation on Supply Side of Overcurrent Protection or Transformers

or Other Devices for Class 2 Circuits
(1) In Class 2 circuits, the coriductors and equipment on the supply side of overcurrent
protectidh, transformers, or current-limiting devices shall be installed in accordance with the
requirements of other appropriate Sections of this Code.
10.5.3 Marking
(1) A Class 2 power supply unit shall have permanent markings which shall be readily visible
after installation to indicate the class of supply and its electrical rating.
10.5.4 Overcurrent Protection for Class 2 Circuits
(1) Overcurrent protection of different ratings shall not be of an interchangeable type.

(2) The overcurrent protection may be an integral part of a transformer or other power-supply
device.
10.5.5 Location of Overcurrent Devices
(1) Overcurrent devices shall be located at the point where the conductor to be protected receives
its supply.
10.5.6 Conductors for Class 2 Circuit Wiring
(1) Conduct<;.}[Sfor use in Class 2 circuits shall be of the type suitable for the application as
indicated in Annex B, Section 4.
(2) The maximum allowable current shall be as listed in Annex B, Section 4, for sizes 1.5mm2
and smaller, but in no case shall it exceed the current limitations of Clause 10.5.1.
10.5.7 Separation of Class 2 Circuit Conductors from Other Circuits
(1) Conductors of Class 2 circuits shall be separated at least 50.0mm from insulated conductors
of electric lighting, power or Class 1 circuits operating at 380.0Y or less, and shall be separated
at least 600.0mm from any insulated conductors of electric lighting, power or Class 1 circuits
operating at more than 380.0Y unless for both conditions effective separation is afford by use
of:
a) metal raceways for the Class 2 circuits or for the dectric lighting, power and Class 1
circuits subject to the metal raceway being bonded to earth;
b) metal sheathed or armoured cable for the electric lighting, power and Class 1 circuit
conductors subject to the sheath or armour being bonded to earth;
c) nonmetallic sheathed cable for the electric lighting, power and Class I circuits operating
at 380.0Y or less; or
d) nonmetallic conduit, electrical nonmetallic tubing, insulated tubing or equivalent, in
addition to the insulation on the Class 2 circuit conductors or the electric lighting, power
and Class 1 circuit conductors.
(2) Where the electric lighting or power conductors are bare, all Class 2 circuit conductors in
the same room or space shall be enclosed in a metal raceway that is bonded to earth and 110
opening, such as an outlet box, may be located within 2.0m of the bare conductors if up to and
including 15.0kY or within 3.0m of bare conductors above 15.0kY.
(3) Unless the conductors of the Class 2 circuits are separated from the conductors of electric
. lighting, power and_Class 1 circuits by an acceptable barrier, the conductors in Class 2 circuits
ETHIOPIAN BUlLDING CODE STANDARD EBCS-10 1995 251

shall not be placed in any raceway, compartment, outlet box, junction box or similar fitting with
the conductor of electric lighting, power or Class I circuits.
10.5.8 Conductors of Different Class 2 Circuits in the Same Cable, Enclosure, or Raceway
0) Conductors of two or more Class 2 circuits shall be permitted within the same cable,
enclosure or raceway provided all conductors in the cable, enclosure, or raceway are insulated
for the maximum voltage of any conductor.
10.5.9 Penetration of a Fire Separation
(1) Conductors of a Class 2 circuit extending through a fire separation shall be so installed as
to limit fire spread.
10.5.10 Conductors in Vertical Shafts and Hoistways
(1) Class 2 conductors mld cable installed in a vertical shaft or hoistway shall comply with the
requirements of Section 18.
10.5.11 Class 2 Conductors and Equipment in Ducts and Plenum Chambers
(1) Class 2 conductors and equipment shall not be placed in ducts or plenum chambers except
as permitted by Clause 8.3.2.
10.5.12 Equipment Located on the Load Sic;leof Overcurrent Protection, Transformers, or

Current-Limiting Devices for Class 2 Circuits
(1) Equipment located on the load side of overcurrent protection, transformers, or current-
limiting devices for Class 2 circuits shall comply with the following:
a) For Class 2 circuits operating at 30.0V or less, alternating current or direct current, it
shall be acceptable for the particular application.
b) For Class 2 circuits operating at more than 30.0V, alternating current or direct current,
it shall be arranged so that no live parts are accessible to unauthorized persons.
(2) Notwithstanding the provisions of (Ia) above, lighting fixtures and thermostats incorporating
heat anticipators, located on the load side of overcurrent protection, Class 2 transformers, or
current-limiting devices shall be approved when connected to Class 2 circuits operating at 30.0V
or less.

10.5.13 Class 2 Circuits Extending Beyond a Building
(1) Where Class 2 circuits extend beyond a building and are run in such a manner as to be
subjected to accidental contact with lighting or power conductors operating at a voltage
exceeding 380.0V between conductors of the Class 2 circuits, they shall also meet the
10.5.14 Underground Installations
(1) Underground installations of Class 2 circuits shall be installed in accordance with

Clause 8.3.3.
(2) Direct buried Class 2 circuits shall maintain a minimum horizontal separation of 300.0mrrl
from other underground systems except when installed in accordance with (3) below.
(3) Direct buried Class 2 circuits may be placed at random separation in a common trench with
power circuits which are for the sole purpose of supplying power to the Class 2 circuits provided
that the Class 2 circuit is in a metal sheathed' cable, with sheath bonded to earth, the power
circuit operates at 750.0V or less, and all conductors are insulated for the maximum voltage of
any conductor in the trench.

SECTION 1
INSTALLATION rECTRICAL
'UIPMENT
11.1 SCOPE
(1) This Section applies to the installation of the following electric equipment:
a) Heating and cooking.

b) Submersible pump.
c) Motors and associated circuits.
d) Air conditioning.
e) Refrigerating.
f) Storage batteries.
(a) NFP A 70/NEC: 1986 National Fire Protection Association! American National
Electrical Code, 1987 Edition.
(b) C22.1: 1990 Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, Safety Standard for Electrical
11.3 GENERAL
../
11.3.1 Fusible Equipment
(1) Fusible equipment shall employ low-melting-point fuses when connected to conductors
whose ampacity is based on Annex B of Section 4, unless equipment using other types of fuses
is marked as being suitable for such use.

SECTION 11: INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
11.3.2 Connection to Identified Terminals or Leads
(1) Wherever a device having an identified terminal or leads is connected in a circuit having
identified conductors, the identified conductors shall be connected to the identified terminal or
lead.
11.3.3 Equipment over Combustible Surfaces
(1) Where there is a combustible surface directly under stationary or fixed electrical equipmentl
that surface shall be covered with a steel plate at least 1.6mm thick and which shall extend at
least 150.0mm beyond the equipment on all sides, if:
a) the equipment is marked to require such protection; or

b) the equipment is open on the bottom.
11.3.4 Installation of Ventilated Enclosures
(1) Yentilated enclosures shall be installed in such a manner that ventilation is not restricted.
11.3.5 Outdoor Installations
(1) Outdoor installations of apparatus, unless"housed in suitable enclosures, shall be surrounded

by suitable fences.
(2) Outdoor equipment shall be bonded to ~arth in an acceptable manner.
11.4 ELECTRIC HEATING AND COOKING APPLIANCES
11.4.1 Location of Non-Portable Appliances
(1) Non-portable electric heating and cooking appliances shall be installed so that the danger
of igniting nearby combustible materials is reduced to a minimum.
11.4.2 Rating of Portable Appliances
(2) The input to portable electric heating and cooking appliance for use on nominal 230.0Y
branch circuits protected by overcurrent devices rated or set at not more than 16.0A shall not
exceed 1500.0W at 230.0Y.

11.4.3 Appliance Exceeding 1500.0W
(1) Every electric· heating and cooking appliance rated at more than 1500.0W shall be supplied
. from a branch circuit used solely for one appliance except that more than one appliance.may be
connected to a single-branch circuit provided that following is used:
a) A multiple-throw, manually-operated device that will permit only one such appliance to
be energized at one time; or
b) An automatic device that will limit the total load to a value that will not cause operation
of the overcurrent device protecting the branch circuit.
(2) Every electric heating and cooking appliance rated at more than 1500.0W shall be controlled
by an indicating switch which may be in the circuit or on the appliance except that:
a) if the rating of the appliance does not exceed 32.0A, an attachment plug and socket
outlet may be used instead of a switch; and
b) if the appliance has more than one individual heating element each controlled by a
switch, no main switch need be provided.
Note: For the purposed of this Clause, two or more separate built-in cooking units, together with their overcurrent
devices, ar~ considered as one appliance.
11.5 HEATING EQUIPMENT
(1) All electric power for heating and associated equipment operating in connection therewith
shall be obtained from a single-branch circuit which shall be used for no other purpose.
(2) A suitable disconnecting means shall be provided for the feeder or branch circuit.
11.6 SUBMERSmLE PUMPS
(1) Power supply conductors or cables run from well-head to the pump (deep well submersible
pump) shall be:
a) rubber (thermoset) insulated cable, thermoplastic-insulated cable, single conductors or

• twisted assemblies of this types; or
b) extra-hard usage type, or the equivalent portable cable.

(2) The area around the submersible pump installed in lakes, rivers and streams shall be
protected from access by the public by fencing, cribbing or isolation and so marked.
11.7 MOTORS AND ASSOCIATED CIRCUITS
11.7.1 Wiring Methods and Conductors
11.7.1.1 Stationary motors
(1) The wiring method for stationary motors shall be in accordance with the applicable
11.7.1.2 Portable Motors
(1) Connections to portable motots shall be permitted with flexible cord which shall have a
serviceability not less than that of extra-hard usage cord unless the motor forms part of a
motor-operated device.
11.7.1.3 Motor supply conductor insulation, temperature rating, and ampacity
(1) Supply conductors to a motor connection box shall have an insulation temperature ratings
equivalent to or greater than those provided in Table 11.1 unless the motor is marked otherwise
and their ampacity based on a 75°C conductor insulation rating when 90°C wire is used as circuit
conductors to the motor.
(2) Where Table 11.1 requires insulation temperature ratings in exc~ss of 75°C, the motor
supply conductors shall not be less than 1.2m long and shall terminate in a location not less
than 600.0mm from any part of the motor except that, for motors rated 100.0hp or larger, their
terminations shall be not less than 1.2m from any part of the motor.
(3) For ambients higher than 30°C, the supply conductor insulation rating shall be increased at
least by the difference between the ambient and 30°C.
11.7.1.4 Conductors to individual motors
(1) The conductors of a branch circuit supplying a continuous-duty motor shall have an
ampacity not less than 125% of the full-load current rating of the motor.

(2) The conductors of a branch circuit supplying a non-continuous-duty motor shall have an
ampacity not less than the current value obtained by multiplying the full-load current rating of
the motor by the applicable percentage given in Table 11.2 for the duty involved.
(3) Notwithstanding the Provisions of (1) above, conductor ampacities shall be permitted to be
selected from Table 11.5 using the full-load current rating for a continuous duty motor.
(4) Tap conductors supplying individual motors from a single set of branch circuit overcurrent
device supplying two or more motors shall have an ampacity of at least equal to that of the
branch circuit conductors except that where the tap conductors do not exceed 7.5m in length,
they shall be permitted to be sized in accordance with (1) or (2) above provided the ampacity
so determined is not less than % of the ampacity of the branch circuit conductors.
11.7.1.5 Conductors - two or more motors
(1) Conductors supplying a group of two or more motors shall have an ampacity equal to or
exceeding:
(a) 125% of the full-load current rating of the motor having the largest full load clllTCnt
rating plus the full load current ratings of all the other motors in the group where all
motors' in the group are continuous-duty motors;
(b) the total of the calculated currents determined in accordance with (a) above for each
motor where all motors in the group are non-continuous-duty motors; or
(c) the total of the following where the group consists of two or more motors of both
continuous and non-continuous-duty types:
i) 125% of the current of the continuous-duty motor having the largest full load
current rating;
(ii) the full-load current ratings of all other continuous duty motors; and
(iii) the calculated current determined in accordance with (2) below for the non-
continuous duty motors.
(2) Where the circuitry is so interlocked as to prevent all motors of the group from running at
the same time, the siLe of the conductors feeding the group shall be permitted to be determined
for the motor, or group of motors operating at the same time, having the largest rating selected
as determined in (1) above.

(3) Demand factors shall be permitted to be applied if the character of the motor loading
justifies reduction of the' ampacity of the conductor to less than the ampacity specified in (1)
above provided that:
(a) the conductors have sufficient ampacity for the maximum demand load; and
(b) the rating or setting of the overcurrent devices protecting them is in accordance with
11.7.2.3(4) below.
11.7.1.6 Feeder conductors
(l) Where a feeder supplies both motor loads and other loads, the ampacity of the conductors
shall be calculated in accordance with 11.7.1.4 and 11.7.1.5 plus the requirements of the other
loads.
(2) The ampacity of a tap from a feeder to a single set of overcurrent devices protecting a motor
branch circuit shall not be less than that of the feeder, except that the ampacity of the tap shaH
be permitted to be calculated in accordance with 11.7.1.4 and 11.7.1.5 if the tap:
(a) does not exceed 3.0m in length and is enclosed in metal; or

(b) does not exceed 7.5m in length, has an ampacity not less than Y3 that of the feeder
and is suitably protected from mechanical damage.
11.7.1.7 Secondary conductors
(1) Conductors connecting the secondaries of wound rotor motors to their controllers shall have
ampacities not less than:
(a) 125% of the rated full load secondary current for continuous-duty motors; or
(b) the percentage of rated full lmid specified in Table 11.2 for non-continuous-duty
motors.
(2) Ampacities of conductors connecting secondary resistors'to t_heircontrollers shall not be less
than that determine<i by applying the appropriate percentage in Table 11.3 to the maximum
current which the devices are required to carry.

,-
11.7.2 Overcurrent Protection
11.7.2.1 Branch circuit overcurrent protection
(1) Each unearthed conductor of a motor branch circuit shall be protected by an overcurrent
device complying with the following:
(a) A branch circuit supplying a single motor shall be protected, except as permitted by (c)
below, by using an overcurrent device of rating not to exceed the values in Table 11.4
using the rated full load current of the motor;
(b) notwithstanding (a) above, Table 11.5 shall be permitted to be used to select the size
of overcurrent devices required for a motor where the full load current rating of the
motor is shown in the Table;
(c) instantaneous trip (magnetic only) circuit interrupters shall be permitted where applied
in accordance with 11.7.2.5;
(d) where the overcurrent devices as determined in (a) above will not permit the motor to
start, the rating or setting of the overcurrent device shall be permitted to be increased
as follows:
(i) A non-timedelay fuse:

- not in excess of 400% of the motor full load current for fuses rated up to
600.0A; or
- not in excess of 300% of the motor full load current for fuses rated 601 to 6000
A; or
(ii) A timedelay fuse to a maximum of 225% of the motor full load current; and
(e) for a branch circuit supplying two or more motors, the rating or setting of the
overcurrent device shall not exceed the maximum value permitted by 11.7.2.4.
11.7.2.2 Overcurrent protection marked on equipment
(1) Where the characteristics and rating or setting of a branch circuit protective device are
specified in the marking of motor CGntrol equipment, they shall not be exceeded,
notwithstanding any greater rating or setting permitted by 11.7.2.1.

SECTION 11: INSTALlATION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
11.7.2.3 Feeder ovt'rcurrent protection
(1) For a feeder supplying motor branch circuits only, the rating or setting of the feeder
overcurrent deviee shall not exceed a maximum value calculated by determining the maximum
rating or setting of the overcurrent device pem.itted by 11.7.2.1 for that motor which is
permitted the highest rated overcurrent devices of any motor supplied by the feeder, and adding
thereto the sum of the full load current ratings of all other motors which will be in operation at
the same time.
(2) (i) Where a feeder supplies a group of motors, two or more of which are required to start
simultaneously, and the feeder overcurrent devices as set in accordance with (1) above
are not sufficient to allow the motors to start, the rating or setting of the feeder
overcurrent devices shall be permitted to be increased as necessary to a maximum.
(ii) Notwithstanding the Provisions of (i) above, the permitted increase shall not exceed
the rating permitted for a single motor having a full load current rating not less than
the sum of the full load current ratings of the greatest number of motors which start
simultaneously, provided this value does not exceed 300% of the' ampacity of the
feeder conductors.
(3) Where a feeder supplies one or more motor branch circuits together with other loads, the
required overcurrent protection shall be determined by calculating the overcurrent protection
required for the motor .circuits and adding thereto the requirements of the other loads supplied
by the feeder.
(4) Where a demand factor has been applied as permitted in 11.7.1.5(3b), the rating or setting
of the overcurrent devices(s) pfotecting a feeder shall not exceed the ampacity of the feeder,
except as permitted by applicable Clauses of Section 8.
11.7.2.4 GrfJuping of motors on a single branch circuit
(1) Two or more motors shall be pennitted to be grouped under the protection of a single set
of branch circuit overcyrrent devices having a rating or setting calculated in accordance with
11.7.2.3(1) provided that the protection conforms to one of the following:
(a) The ratings or settings of the overcurrent devices do not exceed 16.0A; or
(b) Protection is provided for the control equipment of the motors by having the branch
circuit overcurrent devices rated or set at:

ELECTRICAL iNSTALLATION OF BUILDINGS
(i) values not in excess of those marked on the control equipment for the lowest rated
motor of the group, as suitable for the protection of that control equipment; or
(ii) in the absence of such markings, values not in excess of 400% of the full-load
current of the lowest rated motor.
(c) The motors are used on a machine tool or woodworking machine; and
(i) the control equipment is arranged so that all contacts which open the motor's
primary circuits are in enclosures, either forming part of the machine base or for
separate mounting, having a wall thickness not less than 1.69mm for steel,
2.40mm for malleable cast iron, or 6.30mm for other cast metal, having hinged
doors with substantial catches, and having no openings to the floor or the
foundation on which the machine rests; and
(ii) the ratings or settings of the overcurrent devices do not exceed 200.0A at 230.0V
or less, or 100.0A at voltages from p1.0V to 750.0V.
(d) All the motors are operated by a single controller.
11.7.2.5 Instantaneous-trip cirettit interrupters
(1) Instantaneous trip circuit interrupters, when used for branch circuit protection, shall be:
(a) part of a combination motor starter or controller that also provides overload protection;
and
(b) rated or adjusted, for an a.c. motor, to trip at not more than 1300% of the motor full-
load current or at not more than 215% of the motor locked rotor current, where given,
except that ratings or settings for trip current need not be less than 16.0A; or
(c) rated or adjusted, for a d.c. motor rated at 50.0hp or less, to trip at not more than 250%
of the motor full load current, or for a d.c. motor rated at more than 50.0hp, to trip at
not more than 200% of the motor full-load current.
11.7.3 Overload and Overheating Protection
11.7.3.1 Overload protection requited
(1) The branch circuit conductors and control equipment of each motor shall have overload
protection, except as permitted by 11.7.3.5

11.7.3.2 Types of overload protection
(1) Overload devices shall be either:
(a) a separate overload device which is responsive to motor current and which shall be
permitted to combine the function of overload and overcurrent protection if it is capable
of protecting the circuit and motor under both overload and short circuit conditions,
(b) a protective device, integral with the motor and responsive to motor current and
temperature, provided such device will protect the circuit conductors and control
equipment as well as the motor.
(2) Fuses used as separate overload protection of motors shall be timedelay fuses.
11.7.3.3 Number and location of overload devices
(1) The number and location of current-responsive devices shall be:
(a) if fuses are used, one in each unearthed conductor; or

(b) as specified in Table 9.1, Section 9, if devices other than fuses are used.
(2) Except by special permission, where current-responsive devices are used for the overload
protection of 3-phase motors, such devices shall comprise of three current-responsive elements
which shall be:
(a) connected directly in the motor circujt conductors as required by (1) above; or
(b) fed by two or three current transformers so connected that all 3-phases will be protect~d.
11.7.3.4 Rating or trip selection of overload devices
(1) Overload devices responsive to motor current shall be rated or selected to trip at not more
than the following:
(a) 125% of the full-load current rating of a motor having a marked service factor of 1.15
or greater; or
(b) 115% of the full-load current rating of a motor which does not have a marked service
factor or where the marked service factor is less than 1.15.

(2) Notwithstanding the Provisions of (1) above, Table 11.5 shall be applicable to determine
the type of the overcurrent device required for motors having a service factor of 1.15 or greater
where the full-load current rating of the motor is listed in the Table.
(3) Where a motor overload device is so connected that it does not carry the total current
designated on the motor nameplate, such as for wye-delta starting, the percentage of motor
nameplate current applying to the selection or setting of the overload device shall be clearly
marked on the motor starter or shown in the motor starter manufacturers overload selection table.
11.7.3.5 Overload protection not required
(1) Overload protection shall not be required for motors complying with any of the following:
(a) A manually started motor rated at 1.0hp or less that is continuously attended while in
operation, which is on a branch circuit having overcurrent protection rated or set at not
more than 16.0A or on an individual branch circuit having overcurrent protection as
required by Table 11.5 if it may be readily determined from the starting location that
the motor is running.
(b) A motor constructed so that it cannot be overloaded.
(c) A motor whose operating requirements are such that it is impracticable to obtain proper
overload protection.
(d) An automatically startable motor having a rating of 1.0hp or less forming part of an
assembly equipped with other safety controls that protect the motor from damage due
to stalled-rotor current and on which a nameplate, so located as to be visible after
installation, indicates that such protection features are provided.
11.7.3.6 Shunting of overload protection during starting
(1) Overload protection shall be permitted to be shunted or cutout ofa circuit during the starting
period, provided that the device by which the protection is shunted or cutout cannot be left in
the starting position and that the overcurrent device is in the motor circuit during the starting
period.
11.7.3.7 Automatic restarting after overload
(]) Where automatic restarting of a motor after a shut down on overload could cause injury to
persons, the overload or overheating devices protecting the motor shall be so arranged that
automatic restarting cannot occur.

11.7.3.8 Overheating protection required
(I) Each motor shall be provided with means of overheating protection except as permitted by
11.7.3.10.
11.7.3.9 Types of overheating protection
(I) Overheating protection, where required by 11.7.3.8, shall be provided by devices integral
with the motor and responsive to both motor current and temperature or to motor temperature
only, and shall be arranged to cut off power to the motor or, by spacial permission, to activate
a warning signal when the temperature exceeds the safe limit for the motor.
(2) Motors with inherent overheating protection acceptable under (l) above shall be marked to
indicate that they are thermally protected or impedance protected.
11.7.3.10 Overheating protection not required
(1) Overheating protection shall not be required:
(a) where the motor circuit requires no overload protection under 11.7.3.5; or
- (b) where overload protective devices required by 11.7.3.2 adequately protect the motor
against overheating due to excess current and the motor is in a location where:
(i) ambient temperatures are not more than 100e higher than those at the location of
the overload devices; and
Oi) dust or other conditions will not interfere with the normal dissipation of heat from
the motor.
11.7.4 Undervoltage Protection
11.7.4.1 Undervolatge protection required for motors
(1) Motors shall be disconnected from the source of supply in case of low voltage by one of
the following means unless it is evident that no hazard will be incurred through lack of such
disconnection:

(a) A motor control device shall provide low-voltage protection when automatic restarting
is liable to create a hazard.
(b) The motor control device shall provide low-voltage release when it is necessary or
desirable that a motor stops on failure or reduction of voltage and automatically restart
on return of voltage.
11.7.4.2 Undervoltage protection on feeders or branch circuits
(1) The protection specified in 11.7.4.1 shall be permitted to be applied to a feeder or branch
circuit supplying a group of motors, in which case the individual motors need not. be so
protected, provided the means for manually resetting a low-voltage protective device shall be
within sight of all machines supplied by a feeder or branch circuit and so located that the
operator can visually assure himself that safe re-energization of the feeder or branch circuit is
possible.
11.7.5 Control
11.7.5.1 Control required
(1) Except as permitted by (3) below, each motor shall be provided with a motor starter or
controller for starting and stopping it and having a rating, in horsepower, not less than the rating
of the motor it serv~s.
(2) A motor controller need not open the circuit in all unearthed conductors to a motor unless
it also serves as a disconnecting means.
(3) The motor starter or controller specified in (1) above shall not be required for motors
applied as follows:
(a) A singlephase portable motor rated at Y3hp or less, connected by means of a socket
outlet and attachment plug rated not in excess of 16.0A, 230.0V.
(b) A motor controlled by a manually operated general-use switch having an ampere rating
not less than 125% of the full load current rating of the motor.
(c) A two-wire potable a.c. or d.c. motor having a rating not in excess of Y3hp, 230.0V
controlled by a horsepower rated singlepole motor switch.

11.7.5.2 Control location
(1) A motor controlled manually, either directly or by a remote control ofa motor starter, shall
have the means of operation by the controller so located:
(a) that safe operation of the motor and the machinery driven by it is assured, or the motor
and the machinery shall be guarded or enclosed so as to prevent accidents due to contact
of persons with live or moving parts; or
(b) where compliance with (a) above is not practicable because of the type, size or location
of the motor or machinery and its parts, devices shall be provided at each point where
the danger of accidents exists whereby the machine or parts of the machine may be
stopped in an emergency.
11.7.5.3 Starters having different starting and running positions
(1) Manual motor starters having different starting and running positions shall be constructed
so that they cannot remain in the starting position.
(2) Magnetic motor starters having different starting and running positions shall be constructed
so that they cannot remain in the starting position under normal operating conditions.
11.7.5.4 Earthed control circuit
(I) When power for a control circuit for a.motor controller is obtained conductively from an
earthed system, the control circuit shall be so arranged that an accidental earth in the wiring
from the controller to any remote or signal device will not:
(a) start the motor; or

(b) prevent the stopping of the motor by the normal operation of any control or safety
device in the control circuit.
11.7.6 Disconnecting Means
(1) Except as permitted by (2) and (3) below, separate disconnecting means shall be provided
for:
(a) each motor branch circuit,
(b) each motor starter or controller, and
(c) each motor.

(2) A single disconnecting means shall be pennitted to serve more than one of the functions
described in (1) above.
(3) A single disconnecting means shall be pennitted to serve two or more motors and their
associated starting and control equipment grouped on a single branch circuit.
(4) Disconnecting means or the means for operating them shall readily be accessible.
11.8 AIR CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATING EQUIPMENT
11.8.1 General
(1) The provisions of Section 11.7 for overload, overheating and control of motors shall apply
to electric motor driving air conditioning and refrigerating equipment.
11.8.2 Branch Circuit
(1) A room air conditioner s.hall be considered as a single motor unit in detennining its branch-
circuit requirements when all the following conditions are met:
(a) It is cord-and-attachment plug-connected.

(b) Its rating is not more than 40.0A and 230.0V single phase.
(c) Total rated-load current is shown on the room air-conditioner nameplate rather than
individual motor currents.
(d) The rating of the branch-circuit, short-circuit and earth-fault protective device does not
exceed the ampacity of the branch-circuit conductors or the rating of the socket outlet,
whichever is smaller. t.
(2) The total marked rating of a cord-and-attachment plug-connected room air conditioner shall
not exceed 80% of the rating of a branch circuit where no other loads are supplied.
(3) The total marked rating of a cord-and-attachment plug-connected room air conditioner shall
not exceed 50% of the rating of a branch circuit where lighting units or other appliances are also
supplied.

(1) An attachment plug and socket outlet are permitted to serve as disconnecting means for a
single-phase room air conditioner rated 230.0Y or less if:
(a) the manual controls on the room air conditioner are readily accessible and located within
2.0m of the floor; or
(b) an approved, manually operable switch is installed in a readily accessible location within
sight from the room air conditioner.
11.8.4 Supply Cords
(1) Where a flexible cord is used to supply a room air conditioner, the length of such cord shall
not exceed 2.0m for a nominal 230.0Y rating.
11.9 STORAGE BATTERIES
11.9.1 Location of Storage Batteries
(I) Batteries with exposed live parts shall be kept in a room or an enclosure accessible only to
authorized personnel.
11.9.2 Ventilation of Battery Rooms or Areas
(I) Storage, battery rooms or areas shall be adequately ventilated.
(2) Storage batteries shall not be subjected to ambient temperatures greater than 4SoC or less
than the freezi~g point of the electrolyte.
11.9.3 Battery Vents
(1) Yented cells shall be equipped with flame arresters.
(2) Sealed cells shall be equipped with pressure-release vents.
11.9.4 Battery In~tallation
(1) Battery trays, racks and other surfaces on which batteries are mounted shall be:
a) level,
b) protected against corrosion from the battery electrolyte,

c) covered with an insulating material having a dialectic strength of at least 1500.0V,

d) of sufficient strength to carry the weight of the battery, and
e) designed to withstand vibration and sway, where appropriate.
(2) Battery cells shall be spaced a minimum of IO.Omm apart.
(3) Battery cells having conductive containers shall be installed on non-conductive surfaces.
(4) Sealed cells and multi-compartment sealed batteries having conductive containers shall have
an insulating support if a voltage is present between the container and earth.
(5) Cells and multi-compartment vented stage batteries, with covers sealed to containers of non-
conductive, heat resistant material, shall not require additional insulating support.
(6) Batteries having a nominal voltage greater than 230.0V and with cells in rubber or
composition containers shall be sectionalized into groups of 230.0V or less.
11.9.5 Wiring
(l) The installation of wiring and equipment in a battery room shall be in accordance with the
requirements of a dry location.
(2) The wiring between cells and batteries and between the batteries and other electrical
equipment shall be:
a) bare conductors which shall not be tapped;

b) open wiring;
c) a jacket flexible cord;
d) mineral-insulated cable provided it is adequately protected against corrosion where it
may be in direct contact with acid or.' acid spray; or
e) aluminium-sheathed cable provided that it has a suitable corrosion-resistant protection,
where necessary.
(3) Where wiring is installed in rigid conduit or electrical metallic tubing:
a) the conduit or tubing shall be of corrosion-resistant material suitably protected from

corrosion;
b) the end of the raceway shall be tightly sealed with sealing compound, rubber tape, or
other acceptable material, to resist the entrance of electrolyte by spray or creeping;

c) the conductor shall issue from the raceway through a substantial glazed insulating
bushing;
d) at least 300.0mm of the conductor shall be free from the raceway where connected to
a cell terminal; and
e) the raceway exit shall be at least 300.0mm above the highest cell terminal to reduce the
electrolyte creepage or spillage entering the raceway.
Table 11.1 Minimum temperature rating for the insulation of motor supply conductor [0C]
(Based on ambient temp.erature of 30°C)
H75
B
F
90
90
110
110 75 Insulation class rating
A
ventilated
Table 11.2 Conductor sizes for motors for different service requirements
60-
rating
-
85
120
95
140
150
90
200 minute 85Percentage
110 110 of nameplate 30-and
current rating of
eg ousminute
Continu
rating
Operating
turntables,
Freight motor
etc.valves,
Rolls, ore-and raising' or lowering
coal-handling
Intermittent
Varyng
Periodicduty duty and passenger elevators,
duty

,....
TABLE 11.3 Conductor sizes in the secondaryCircuits of motors
Carrying capacity of
I conductors In percent of
Resistor duty classification Duty cycles
full-load secondary
circuit
Light staring duty 5 see on 75 see off 35

Heavy starting duty 10 see on 70 see off 45
Extra heavy starting duty 15 see on 75 see off 55
Light intermittent duty 15 see on 45 see off 65
I' Medium intermittent duty 15 see on 30 see of 75
Heavy intermittent duty 15 see on 15 see off 90
II Continuous duty Continuous Duty 110
Table 11.4 Rating or setting of overcurrent devices for the protection of motor branch circuits
(Except as permitted in Table 11.5 where 16-A overcurrent protection for motor branch circuit conductors exceeds
the values specified in here)
Per cent of full-load current
. Maximum fuse rating Maximum

Type of Motor settlngJlme-
Tlmedela Non- limit type
y fuses tlmedelay circuit breaker
Alternating Current
Single-phase all types 175 300 250
Squirrel-cage and synchronous:

Full-voltage, resistor and reactor
Staring 175 300 250
Auto-Transformer starting:
Not more than 30.0A 175 250 200
More than 30.0A 175 200 200
I'i
Wound rotor 150 150 150
Direct Current 150 150 150
Note: (i) The ratings of fuses for the protection of motor branch circuits as given in Table 11.5 are based upon
fuse ratings appearing in the Table above, which also specifies the maximum settings of circuit
breakers for the protection of motor branch circuits.
(H) Synchronous motors of the low-torque, low-speed type (usually 450.0rpm, or lower) such as are
used to drive reciprocating compressors, pumps, etc., and which start up unloaded, do not require
a fuse rating or circuit breaker setting in excess of 200% of full-load current.
(Hi) For the use of instantaneous trip (magnetic only) circuit interrupters in motor branch circuits, see
11.7.2.5.
l
Table 11.5 Sizes of conductors, fuse ratings, and circuit breaker settings for motor overload protection and motor circuit overcurrent protection
(This Table is based on Table 11.4 and a room temperature of 30°C).
I breaker
Breaker
breaker
Non-time
Non-timeMaximum Starting)
Fuses
20
30
25
20
40
35
15
20
delay conductor
5.00
1.25
15
2.50
15
1513.75
2018.75
2017.50
15
15 1.125
13.75
1'516.25
12.50
10.00
15.00
11.25
12.50
13.75
15.00
1.25
30
45
25
40
10.00
6.251.125
2.25
17.50
7.507
8.758
7.50
8.75
20
25 rating
925 ofofof
allowable
fuses Maximum
Timedela
Time
overload
devices
18.75
3.75
6.25
5.00
16.2517.5
10
1
15
4.5
3.5
5.6
Minimum
ampacity
yy"O"
"0""0"
setting
2.25
delay Overload d.c.
delay Starting) or wound
protection
squirrel
Single rotor
for cage
phase,
Overcurrent a.c.
and
all synchronous
Type types and
for motor
protection circuitsallowable
maximum [A] rating of fuses and
15 fuses
Circuit (Full
.F·5
Circuit Reactor
voltage, Resistor and
(Autotransformer
Squirrel and Maximum
Star-Delta allowable setting of circuit breakers of the time-limited
cage and Synchronous
Fuses motor [A]
Table 11.5 Sizes of conductors, fuse ratings, alld circuit breaker settings for motor overload protection and motor circuit overcurrent protection (conte' d)
100 Non-time
40II ..II delaydelay
Non-time
fuses
rating (Autotransformer and Star-Delta
100
70
60
40
45
50
50
70
40
30
60
30 50.0
21.25
22.50
80
30.0
32.5
30.0
32.5
5045.0
4040.0
4037.5
70
80
60
35
25 125
110
100
23.75
90
47.5
45.0
42.5
40.0
37.5
35.0
47.5
42.5
35.0
60
25.00
60
27.5
27.5
20.00
20.00
50
Timedela
Time
Fuses
yy"O"
"0" 20 of of
allowable
50.0 50
overload
devices
fuses Minimum
conductor
30
45
40
35
25
25
17.5
Maximum
"0"
ampacityof fuses Overload d.c. or wound
protection rotor
forcage a.c.
) and
23.75
20
25.00 I setting
(Full Reactor
Circuit
Circuit
breaker
Circuit
Breaker
breaker voltage, Starting)
Resistor
Squirrel
Overcurrent
Maximum
and cage squirrel
Single
and Synchronous
protection
allowable
phase. Type
all for andmaximum
setting
motor
synchronous
types circuitallowable
ofcircuits breakers
[A] rating
of the oftime-limited
Starting)
fuses and
Fuses 50
Table 11.5 Sizes of conductors, fuse ratings, and circuit breaker settings for motor overload protection and motor circuit overcurrent protection (conte'd)
Non-time
delay Starting)
(Autotransformer and
Fuses
fuses
Timedela
70
100
'175
100
125
60
125 Time
200
77.5
7072.5
110
100
7067.5
1-00
150
70
200
80
90
175
125
110
150
90
80
70
175
100.0
225
250
175
150
125
75.0
77.5
8
65.0
62.5
87.5
9
97.5
250
100.0
60.0
57.5
55.0
52.5
67.5
65.0
62.5
82.5
60.0
57.5
55.0
70.0
72.5
75.0
80.0
85.0
87.5
90.0
92.5
97.5
52.5
95.0
7070.0
delay"D"
yy"D"0.0
2.5
5.0
"D".7
6
8Maximum
Non-time
9rating
60
500 ofof
allowable
overload
devices
conductor
Maximum
Minimum
90
setting
ampacityof fuses Starting)
fuses
Reactor
(Full voltage, Overload
Resistor d.c.
and for Star-Delta
or Maximum
wound
protection
Single
squirrel rotor
phase,
cage
Overcurrent a.c.
all synchronous
and
allowable types
protection
Type and
setting
for maximum
motorofcircuits
circuitallowable
breakers
[A] rating
fuses and
breaker
breaker
Breaker
Circuit
Circuit Squirrel cage and Synchronous
Fuses
Non-time
delay Starting)
(Autotransformer and
350
225
225
300
200
250
300
125
150
175
200
225
150
175
125
200
150
1751
450
169.0
175.0
75.0
69.0
107.5
105.0
102.5
110.0
112.5
115.0
117.5
120.0
122.5
400
250
102.5
350 Maximum
Non-time
87.5
175
rating
187.5
181.5
105.0
162.5
125.0
137.5
150.0
107.5
110.0
112.5
115.0
117.5
131.5
120.0
122.5
156.5
144.0
25.0
37.5
56.5
44.0
Timedela
Time
yy"D" 90 of of
allowable
overload
fuses
Fuses81.5
conductor
Minimum
150
50.0
100
110
125
devices
300Maximum
31.5
62.5
setting
delay"D"
"D"
ampacltyof fuses
fuses Overload d.c. or wound
protection for Star-Delta
rotor a.c.
~50
Breaker Reactor Starting)
(Full voltage,
breaker
breaker
Circuit
Circuit Resistor andcage Maximum
Squirrel
Overcurrent
squirrel
Single allowable
cage
phase,
and Synchronous
Type
protection
and for
setting
motor
all synchronous
types maximum
and of circuits
circuit allowable
breakers
[A] rating
fuses and
Fuses
Table 11.5 Sizes of conductors, fuse ratings, and circuit breaker settings· for motor overload protection and motor circuit overcurrent protection (conte'd)
Non-time
400
450 delay
Non-time Maximum
-Maximum (Autotransformer
Starting)
Overlo::.ld protectionand
forStar-Delta
fuses
Fuses
225
250
300
250
250
350
450
400
600500
500
600
500
300
300
350
500
350 200
206
219
225
238
231
244
delay"D"194
250
263
200
194
206
213
219
225
231
244
238
250
263
275
275
313
313
288
288
300
300
limedela
lime
213
yy"D"
"D" 200
225rating
allowable
overload
devices
conductor
Minimum
175
250
300
setting
ampacltyof ofof
fuses Starting)
fuses d.c. or Maximum
wound
squirrel
Single rotor
cage
Overcurrent
phase,a.c.
andall synchronous
allowable
Type
protection
types
for
setting
motor
and
maximum
ofcircuits
circuitallowable
breakers
[A] rating
fuses and
breaker
breaker
Breaker
Circuit
Circuit(Full Reactor
voltage. Resistor and
Squirrel cage and Synchronous
Fuses
---Non-time
----
~
-400425
-delay
Non-time
'- (Autotransformer
Starting) and
500
600
500
600
'400Fuses
fuses
350336
500450
500475
500500
600
450
600
400
500
delay.
~OO500 -overload
yy''O"-325
Time
400375'·
400400 3625
625
325
350
363
375
400
425
450
475
500
550
600
600
350
575
5~5
"0. 600
63
450
300
350
400
575
500
336
525
550 Maximum
ratingFuses
conductor
Tlmedela Maximum
allowable
Minimum
devices
setting
ampacltyof ofof
fuses
fuses Overload
(Full Reactor
"0"
voltage, Starting)
d.c.
protection
Resistor and for Star-Delta
or Maximum
wound rotor
Overcurrent
squirrel
Single cage
phas~, a.c.
protection
and maximum
all synchronous
Type
allowable types
for and
motor
setting circuitallowable
ofcircuits [A]
breakers rating
fuses and
breaker
Breaker
breaker
Circuit
Circuit Squirrel cage and Synchronous
SECTION 12
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
12.1 SCOPE
(1) This Section applies to hazardous locations in which electrical equipment and wiring
are subject to the conditions classified as follows:
(a) Class I locations in which flammable gases or vapours are or may be present in
the air in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitible mixtures;
(b) Class II location which are hazardous because ofthe presence of combustible or
electr.ically conductive dusts; and
(c) Class III locations which are hazardous because of the presence· of easily ignitible
fibres or flyings, but in which such fibres or flyings are not likely to be in
suspension in the air in quantities sufficient to produce ignitible mixtures.
(l) The following reference contains provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute
(a) C22.1:1990 Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, Safety Standard for Electrical
12.3 CLASSIFICATION
12.3.1 Division of Class I Locations
(1) Class I locations shall be divided into two divisions as follows:
(a) Division 1, comprising Class I locations in which:

i) hazardous concentration of flammable gases or vapours may exist continuously,

intermittently, or periodically under normal operating conditions;
ii) hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or vapours may exist frequently
because of repair or maintenance operation or because of leakage; or
iii) equipment is operated or processes are carried on, of such a nature that
breakdown or faulty operation thereof could result in the release of hazardous
concentrations of flammable gases or vapours and simultaneous failure of
electrical equipment.
(b) I
Division 2, comprising Class locations in which:
(i) flammable volatile liquids, flammable gases or vapours are handled, processed,
or used, but in which the liquids, gases, or vapours are normally confined
within
\ closed containers or closed systems from which they can escape only as
a result of accidental rapture or breakdown of the containers or systems or the
abnormal operation of the equipment by which the liquids or gases are
handled, processed, or used; or
(ii) hazardous concentration of gasses or vapours are normally prevented by
positive mechanical ventilation, bu.twhich may become hazardous as the r~sult
of failure or abnormal operation of the ventilating equipment; or
(iii) the IQcation is adjacent to a Class I, Division 1 location, from which a
hazardous ~ncentration of gas~es or vapours could be communicated, unless
such communication is prevented by adequate positive-pressure' ventilation
from a source of clean air, and effective safeguards against ventilation failure
are provided.
12~3.2 Division of Class II Locations
(1) Class II locations shall be divided into two divisions as follows:

a) Division 1 comprising Class IIlocations in which:
i) combustible dust is or may be ih suspension in air continuously, intermittently,
or periodically under normal oeperating conditions in quantities sufficient to
produce explosive or ignitible mixtures;
ii)".the normal or abnormal operation or the failure of equipment or apparatus might
cause explosive or ignitible mixtures to be produced in, or in dangerous proximity
to, 'electrical equipment or apparatus; or

SECTION 12: HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
iii dusts having the property of conducting electricity may be present.
b) Division 2, comprising Class.II locations in which combustiBle dusts are not normally
in suspension in air or likely to be thrown into suspension by the normal or
abnormal operation or the failure of equipment or apparatus in quantities sufficient
to produce explosive or ignitible mixtures, but in which:
i) deposits or accumulations of dust may be sufficient to interfere with the safe

dissipation of heat from electrical equipment or apparatus; or
ii) deposits or accumulations of dust on, in or near electrical equipment may be
ignited by arcs, sparks, or burning material from the electrical·equipment.
12.3.3 Division of Class III Locations
(1) Class III locations shall be divided into two divisions as follows:
a) Division 1, comprising Class III locations in which readily ignitible fibr~s or

materials producing combustible flyings are handled, manufactured, or used.
b) .Division 2, comprising Class III locations in which readily ignitible fibres other fhan
those in process of maI}.ufactureare stored or handled.
12.4.1 Electrical Equipment
(1) Where electrical equipment is required by this Section to be approved for the class of
location, it shall also be approved for the specific gas, vapour, or dust that will be present.
(2) Such approval in (1) may be indicated by one or more of the following atmospheric-
gI:oup designations which have been established for the purpose of testing and approval:
a) Group A, comprising atmospheres containing acetylene;

b) Group B, comprising atmospheres containing butadiene, ethylene oxide, hydrogen
(or gasses or vapours equivalent in hazard to hydrogen, such as manufactured gas),
or propylene oxide;
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE SifANDARD EBCS-10 1995 281

c) Group C, comprising atmospheres containing acetaldehyde, cyclopropane, dlethyl

.ether, ethylene, or unsymmetrical dimenthyl hydrazine (UDMH), or other gases or
vapours of equivalent hazard;
d) Group D, comprising atmospheres containing acetone, acrylonitrile, alcohol,
ammonia, benzine, benzol, ethylene dichloride, gasoline, hexane, isoprene, lacquer
solvent vapours, naphtha, natural gas, propane, propylene styrene, vinyl acetate, vinyl
chloride, xylenes, or other gases or vapours or equivalent hazard;
e) Group E, comprising atmospheres containing metal dust, including aluminum,
magnesium, and their commercial alloys, and other metals of similarly hazardous
character istics;
f) Group F, comprising atmospheres containing carbon black, coal or coke dust;
g) Group G, comprising atmospheres containing flour, starch or grain dust, and other
dusts of similarly hazardous characteristics.
12.4.2 Marking
(1) Electrical, equipment approved for use in hazardous locations shall be marked to
indicate the class and for Classes I and II locations the group, or the specific gas, vapour
or dust for which the equipment has been approved .
•
(2) Electrical equipment approved for use in Class I hazardous locations may be tJ1arked
with:
a) the maximum external temperature, or

b) one of the following temperature codes in Table 12.1 to indicate the maximum
external temperature:,
Table 12.1 Temperature codes to indicate the maximum external temperature
Temperature T6
T3A
T4
T3C
T5
T4A
T38 Max.
Max. external
external
100
200
85
180
165
160
135
120
215
230
450
300
280
260
Temperature
oode
temperature
temperature [0C]
[0C]
.
SECTION 1 H RDOUS LOCATIONS
(3) If no maximum external temperature marking is shown on Class I equipment approved

for the class and group, the equipment, if of the heat-producing type (which excludes
junction boxes, conduit fittings, etc), shall be considered as having the following maximum
external temperature:
Group A - 28O"C
Group B - 28O"C
Group C - 160"C
Group D - 215°C
(4) Equipment approved for Class I, Division 2 only shall be so marked.
(5) slectrical equipment approved for operation at ambient temperatures exceeding 40"C
shall, in addition to the marking specified in 12.4.2 be marked with the maximum ambient
temperature for which the equipment is approved, and the maximum external temperature
of the equipment as referred to in (2) and (3) above.
12.4.3 Non-Essential Electrical Equipment
(1) No electrical equipment shall be used in a hazardous location unless it is essential to

the processes being carried on therein.
(2) Service equipment, panelboards, switchboards, and similar electrical equipment shall,
'where practicable, be located in rooms or sections of the building in which hazardous
conditions do not exist.
12.4.4 Equipment Rooms
(1) Where walls, partitions, floors or ceilings are used to form hazard-free rooms or
sections, they shall be:
a) of substantial construction;
b) built of or lined with noncombustible material; and
c) such as to ensure that the roo~ or section will remain free from hazards.

(2) Where a non-hazardous location within a building communicateS with a Class I,

Division 2 location, a Class II location, or a Class ill
location, the locations shall be
separated by close-fittings, self-closing,.approved fire doors.
12.4.5 Cable Trays
(1) Cable trays shall not be used to support cables in hazardous locations except where:
a) the type of cable is approved iil Clauses of this Section for use in the particular
hazardous location; and
b) there can be no hazardous accumulation of combustible process dust or fibre in or
upon the cable; the cable tray or the supports.
12.5 CLASS I WCATION
12.5.1 Installations in Class I, Divisiop 1 Locations
12.5.1.1 Transformers and capacitors
(1) Transformers and electrical capacitors which contain a combustible liquid that will burn
shall be installed in electrical equipment vaults in accordance with applicable Clauses of
Section 11.
12.5.1.2 Meiers, instruments and relays
(1) Where practicable, meters, instruments and relays, including kilowatt-hour meters,
instrument transformers and resistors, rectifiers and thermionic tubes shall be located
outside the hazardous locations.
(2) Where it is not practicable to install meters, instruments, and relays outside Class I,
Division 1 locations, they shall be approved for Class I locations.
12.5.1.3 Switches, motor controllers, circuit breakers and fuses
(1' Switches, motor controllers, circuit breakers and fuses, including push buttons, relays,
and similar devices shall be provided with enclosures; the enclosure in each case, together
with the enclosed apparatus, shall be approved as a complete assembly for use in Class I
locations.

12.5.1.4 Motors and generators
(1) Motors, generators and other rotating electrical machines shall be approved for Class
I locations.
12.5.1.5 Wiring methods
(1) The wiring method shall be threaded rigid-metal conduit or cables approved for
hazardous locations with associated cable glands approved for the particular hazardous
location.
(2) All boxes, fittings, and joints shall be threaded for connection to conduit or cable
glands, and shall be explosion-proof with boxes and fittings approved for Class I locations.
(3) Threaded joints shall have at least five full threads fully engaged and running threads
shall not be' used.
(4) Cables shall be installed and supported in a manner to avoid tensile stress at the cable •
glands.
(5) Where it is necessary to use flexible connections at motor terminals and similar places,
flexible fittings of the explosion-proof type and approved for the location shall be used.
(6) Seals shall be provided in conduit or cable systems to prevent the passage of gases,
vapours, or flames from one portion of the electrical installation to another through the
system.
12.5.1.6 Lighting fixtures
(1) Fixtures for fixed and portable lighting shall be approved as complete assemblies for
Class I locations and shall be clearly marked to indicate the maximum wattage of lamps for
which they are approved.
(2) Boxes, box assemblies or fittings used for the support of lightiRg fixtures shall be
approved for the purpose and for Class I locations.

12.5.2 Installations in Class I, Division 2 Locations
(1) The wiring method shall be:
a) threaded metal conduit; or

b) cables approved for hazardous locations with associated cable glands approved for
the particular hazardous location.
\
(2) Cable shall be installed and supported in a manner to avoid tensile stress at the cable
glands.
(3) Where it is necessary to use flexible connection at motor terminals and similar places,
flexible metal conduit may be used.
(4) Boxes, fittings and joints need not be explosion-proof.
(5) Seals shall be provided in conduit or cable systems to prevent the passage o(gases,
vapours, or flames through the system from one portion of the electrical installation to
another.
(1) Motors, generators, and other rotating electrical machines, in which are incorpor~ted
arcing or spark-producing components or integral resistance devices, shall be approved for
Class I, Division 2 locations unless the arcing or spark-producing components or integral
resistance devices are provided with enclosures approved for Class I locations.
(2) Motors, generators, and other rotating electrical machines which do not incorporate
arcing or spark producing components or integral resistance devices may be of the open or
non-explosion-proof type.
(1) Fixed lighting shall be:
a) protected from physical damage by acceptable guards or by location;

b) approved as complete assemblies for Class I, Division 2 locations and shall be clearly
marked to indicate the maximum wattage, voltage, and specific type designations
of the lamps for which they are approved.
(2) Pendent fixtures shall be suspended by threaded rigid conduit systems or by other
approved means.
(3) Starting and control equipment for electric-discharge lighting equipment shall be
pr0v.ided with enclosures approved for the location.
12.6 CLASS II LOCATION
12.6.1 Installations in Class II, Division 1 Locations
(1) Transformers and electrical capacitors which contain a combustible liquid shall be
installed in electrical equipment vaults in accordance with applicable Clauses of Section 11,.
12.6.1.2 Switches, conJroUers,circuit breakers and fuses
(1) Switches, motor controllers, circuit breakers and fuses, including push buttons, relays,
and similar devices, shall be provided with a dust-tight enclosure approved for Class II
locations.
(1) Motors, generators and other rotating electrical machines shall be approved for Class
n locations.
(1) The wiring method shall be threaded rigid metal conduit or cables approved for
location.
(2) Boxes, fittings and joints shall be threaded for connection to conduit or cable glands
and boxes and fittings shall be approved for Class II locations.

(3) Cables shall be installed and supported in a manner to avoid tensile stress at the cable
, glands.
(4) Where flexible connections are necessary, they shall be provided by:
a) flexible connection fittings approved for the location;

b) liquid-tight flexible metal conduit with fittings approved for the location; or
c) extra-hard-usage flexible cord and provided with cable glands approved for the
location.
(5) Where flexible connections are subject to oil or corrosive conditions, the insulation of
the conductors shall be of type approved for the condition or shall be protected by means
ofa suitable sheath.
(6) Where a raceway provides communication between enclosures one of which is required
to be dust-tight and the other not, the entrance of dust into the dust enclosure through the
raceway shall be prevented by:
a) a permanent and effective seal;

b) a horizontal section not less than 3.0m long in the raceway; or
c) a vertical section of raceway not less than 105mlong and extending downward with
.the dust· tight enclosure.
12.6.1.5 Lightingfixtures
(1) Fixtures for fixed and portable lighting shall be approved as complete assemblies for
II
Class locations and shall be clearly marked to indicate the maximum wattage of lamps
for which they are approved.
(2) Pendent fixtures shall be suspended by threaded rigid conduit stems or chains with
approved fittings or by other approved means which shall not include a flexible cord as the
supporting medium, and threaded joints shall be provided with set screws or other effective
means to prevent loosening.
(3) Boxes, box assemblies or fittings used for the support of lighting fIxtures shall be
approved for the purpose.

12.6.2 Installation in Class II, Division 2 Locations
(1) Transformers and electrical capacitors which contain a combustible liquid shall be
installed in electrical equipment vaults in accordance with applicable clauses of Sections 11.
12.6.2.2 Switches, controUers, circuit 'breakers and fuses
(1) In locations where dust from magnesium, aluminum, aluminum bronze powders, or
other metals of similar hazardous characteristics may be present, switches, motor
controllers, circuit breakers, and fuses shall have dust-tight enclosures approved for such
locations.
(1) Motors, generators and other rotating electrical machinery shall be:
a) approved for Class II, or Class II Division 2 locations;

b) ordinary, totally enclosed pipe-ventilated or totally enclosed fan-cooled and subject
to the following:
i) be equipped with integral overheating protection in accordance with 11.7.3.8

ii) if drain holes or other openings are provided they shall be closed with threaded
plugs.
(1) The wiring method shall be:
a) threaded metal conduit; or

b) cables approved for hazardous locations with associated cable glands approved for
the particular hazardous location.
(2) Cables shail be installed and supported in a manner to avoid tensile stress at the cable
glands.

(1) Fixed lighting shall:
a) be protected from physical damage by acceptable guards or by location;

b) provide enclosures for lamp and lampholders which shall be designed to minimize
the deposit of dust on lamps and to prevent the escape of sparks, burning material,
or hot metal;
c) be clearly marked to indicate the maximum wattage of lamps for which they may be
used without exceeding a maximum exposed surface temperature of 165°C under
normal conditions or use.
(2) Pendent fixtures shall be suspended by threaded rigid conduit stems or chains with
appro.ved fittings, or by other approved means, which shall not include flexible cord as the
supporting medium.
(3) Boxes, box assemblies or fittings used for the support of lighting fixtures shall be
approved for that purpose.
(4) Starting and control equipment for mercury-vapour and fluorescent lamps shall conform
to the requirment of 12.6.2.2.
12.7 CLASS III LOCATIONS
12.7.1 Installations in Class III, Division 1 Locations
(1) Transformers and capacitors shall conform to the requirement of 12.6.2.1
12.7.1.2 Switches, cntrollers, circuit beakers and fuses
(1) Switches, motor controllers, circuit breakers and fuses, including push buttons, relay~
and similar devices, shall be provided with tight enclosures designed to minimize entrance
of fibres and flyings, and which shall:
a) be equipped with telescoping or close fitting covers, or with other effective means
to prevent escape of sparks or burning material; and

b) have no openings, such as holes for attachment screws, through which, after
installation, sparks or burning material might escape, or through which exterior
accumulations of fibres or flyings or adjacent combustible material might be ignited.
(1) Except as provided in (2) below, motors, generators and other rotating electrical machinery
shall be:
a) totally enclosed non-ventilated,

b) totally enclosed pipe-ventilated,
c) totally enclosed fan-cooled.
(2) Where only moderate accumulations of lint and flyings are likely to collect on or in the
vicinityof a rotating electrical machine and the machine is readily accessible for routine
cleaning and maintenance, there may be installed in the location:
a) standard open-type machines without sliding contacts, centrifugal, or other types of

switching mechanism, including motor overload devices;
b) standard open-type machines which have contacts, switching mechanisms, or
resistance devices enclosed within tight housings without ventilating or other
opemngs; or
c) self-cleaning textile motors of the squirrel-cage type.
(3) Motors, generators and other rotating electrical machinery of the partially enclosed or
splash-proof type shall not be installed in Class III locations.
(1) The wiring method shall be threaded rigid metal conduit or cables approved for
location.
(2) Boxes and fittings in which taps, joints or terminal connections are made shall:
a) be provided with telescoping or close fitting covers, or other effective means to

prevent the escape of sparks or burning material; and

b) have no openings, such as holes for attachment screws, through which after
installation, sparks or burning material might escape, or through which adjacent
combustible material might be ignited.
(3) Cables shall be installed and supported in a manner to avoid tensile stress at the cable
glands.
(4) Where it is necessary to use flexible connections, the provisions of 12.6.1.4(4) and
12.6.1.4(5) shall apply.
(1) Fixed lighting shall:
a) provide enclosures, for lamps and lampholders, which shall be designed to minimize
entrance of fibres and flying objects and to prevent the escape of sparks, burning
material, or hot metal;
b) be clearly marked to indicate the maximum wattage lamp which may be used •
without exceeding a maximum exposed surface temperature of 165°C under Rormal
conditions of use.
(2) Lighting fixtures which may ~e exposed to phystcal damage shall be protected by a
suitable guard.
(3) Pendent fixtures shall comply with the requirments of 12.6.2.5(2).
(4) Boxes, box assemblies or fittings used for the support of lighting fixtures shall be
approved for that purpose.
12.7.1.6 Storage-batterycharging equipment
(1) Storage battery charging equipment shall be located in a separate room built or lined
with substantial noncombustible materials so constructed as to adequately exclude flyings
or lint, and shall be well ventilated.

12.7.2 Installations in Class III, Division2 Locations
(1) Transformers and capacitors shall conform to the requirement of 12.6.2.1.
12.7.2.2 Wiring method
(1) The wiring method in Class III, Division 2 locations shall conform to 12.7.1.4 except
that in sections, compartments or areas used solely for storage and containing no
machinery, open wiring on insulators, in accordance with applicable Clauses of Section 8,
may be used, provided that, where conductors are installed elsewhere other than in roof
spaces and remote from physical damage, they shall be protected by running board not less
than 19.0mm thick or other acceptable means.
12.7.2.3 Switches, controllers, circuit breaker.t and fuses
(1) Switches, motor controllers, circuit breakers, and fuses shall conform to the requirement
of 12.7.1:2.
(1) Motors, generators, and other rotating electrical machinery shall be:.
a) totally enclosed non-ventilated;

b) totally enclosed pipe-ventilated; or
c) totally enclosed fan-cooled.
(2) Motors, generators or other rotating electrical machinery of the partially enclosed
or splashproof type shall not be iI)Stalledin Class III locations.

SECTION 13
FlAMMABLE UQUID DISPENSING AND
SERVICE STATIONS, GARAGES,
BULK STORAGE PlANTS, FINISIllNG
PROCESSES AND AIRCRAFf HANGARS
13.1 SCOPE
(1) This Section applies to electrical apparatus and wiring installed in the following
facilities:
a) Gasoline dispensing and service stations, and other locations where gasoline or other
similar volatile flammable liquids are dispensed or transferred to fuel tanks of self-
propelled vehicles.
b) Commercial garages, repair houses and storage where service and repair operations
of vehicles of the type described in (a) above are carried out and in which more
than three such vehicles are, or may be, stored at anyone time.
c) Residential storage garages in which not more than three vehicles of the type
described in (a) above are, or may be, stored, but which will not normally be used
for service or repair operations.
d) Bulk storage plants where gasoline or other similar volatile flammable liquids are
stored in tanks having an aggregate capacity of one-car-Ioad or more, and from
which such products are distributed (usually by tank truck).
e) Finishing processes where paints, lacquers or other flammable finishes are regularly
or frequently applied by spraying, dipping, brushing or by other means, and where
volatile flammable solvents or thinners are used or where readily ignitible deposits
or residues from such paints, lacquers, or finishes may occur.
294 EBCS-10 1995 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STAN'DARD

SECTION 13: FLAMMABLE LIQUID DISPENSING AND OTHER FACILITIES
t) Aircraft hangars used for storage or servicing of aircraft in which gasoline jet fuels,
or other volatile flammable liquids, or flammable gases, are used; but shall not
include those locations used exclusivelyfor aircrafts that have never contained such
liquids or gases, or which have been drained and properly purged.
(a) C22.1:1990 Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1 Safety Standard for

(b) NEC Handbook:1981 National Electrical Code Handbook, Based on the

1981 (NEC), Seventeenth Edition.
13.3 GASOLINE DISPENSING AND SERVICE STATIONS
13.3.1 Hazardous Areas
(1) The space within a d~penser enclosure upto 1.2m vertically above its base including the
space below· the dispenser which may contain electrical wiring and equipment shall be
e<;>nsideredto be Class I, Division 1 location.
(2) The space within a nozzle boot of a dispenser shall be considered to be a Class I
Division 1 location.
(3) The space within 450.0mm horizontally from the Division 1 location within the
dispenser enclosure as specified in (1) aoove shaU be considered to be a Class I, Division
1 location.
(4) In an outside location, any area beyond the Class I, Division 1 area within 6.0m
horizontally from the exterior enclosure of any dispenser shall be considered a Class I,
Division 2 location, which will extend to a level 4~O.Ommabove driveway or ground level.

(5) In an outside location, any area beyond the Class I, Division 1 location and within 3.0m
horizontally from any tank fillpipe shall be considered a Class I, Division 2 'location which
shall extend upward to a level 450.0mm above driveway or ground level.
(6) Electrical wiring and equipment, any portion of which is below the surface of areas
defined as Class I, Division 1 or Division 2 in (1), (3), (4) or (5) above shall be considered
to be within Class I, Division 1 location which shall extend at least to the point of
emergence above grade.
(7) Areas within the vicinity of tank ventpipes shall be classified as follows:
a) The spherical volume within a 900.0mm radius from point of discharge of any tank
ventpipe shall be considered a Class I, Division 1 location and the volume between
the 900.0mm to 1.5m radius from point of discharge of a vent shall be considered
a Class I, Division 2 location.
b) For any vent that does not discharge upward, the cylindrical volume below both the
Division 1 and Division 2 locations extending to the ground shall be considered as
Class I, Division 2 location.
c) The hazardous area shall not be. considered to extend beyond an unpierced wall.
(8) Areas within lubrication rooms shall be classified as follows:
a) The area within any pit or space below grade or floor level shall be considered a
Class I, Division 1 location unless the pit or space is beyond the hazardous areas
specified in (4), (5), (6), (7) above in which case the pit or space shall be considered
a Class I Division 2 location.
b) The area within the entire lubrication room up to 50.0mm above the floor or grade,
whichever is the higher, and the area within 900.0mm measured in any direction
from the dispensing point of a hand-operated unit dispensing volatile flammable
liquids shall be considered a Class I, Division 2 location.
13.3.2 Wiring and Equipment within Hazardous Areas
(1) Electrical wiring and equipment within the hazardous areas defined in Clause 13.3.1
shall conform to the requirements of Section 12.

(2) Where dispensers are supplied by rigid metal conduit, flexible fittings of the explosion-
proof type approved for the location shall be used between the conduit and the junction box
of the dispenser in addition to any sealing fittings and unions that may be required pursuant
to the provisions of Section 12.
(3) Each circuit leading to or through a dispensing pump shall be provided with a switching
means which will disconnect simultaneously from the source of supply all unearthed
conductors of the circuit.
(4) All non-current-carrying metal parts of dispensing pumps, metal raceways and other
electrical equipment shall be bonded to earth in accordance with Section 7 of this Code.
13.3.3 Wiring and Equipment above Hazardous Areas
(1) Wiring and equipment above hazardous areas· shall meet the requirements and
provisions of Clauses 13.4.3 and 13.4.4 of this Section.
13.4 COMMERCIAL GARAGES, REPAIRS AND STORAGE
(1) For each floor at or above grade, the entire area up to a level 50.0mm above the floor
shallbe considered to be a Class I, Division 2 location.
(2) For each floor below grade, the entire area up to a level 50.0mm above the bottom of
outside doors or other openings which are at or above grade level shall be considered to
be a Class I, Division 2 location except that, where adequate mechanical ventilation is
provided,the hazardous location shall extend up to a level of only 50.0mm above each such
floor.
(3) Any pit or depression below floor level shall be considered to be a Class I, Division 2
locationwhich shall extend up to the floor level.
(4) Adjacent areas in which hazardous vapours are not likely to be released such as
stockrooms, switchboard rooms, and other similar locations having floors elevated at least
50.0mmabove the adjacent garage floor, or separated therefrom by tight curbs or partitions
at least 50.0mm high, shall not be classified as hazardous.

13.4.2 Wiring and Equipm~nt in Hazardous Areas
(1) Within hazardous areas as defined in Clause 13.4.1, wiring and equipment shall
conform to the requirements of applicable Clauses of Section 12.
13.4.3 Wiring above Hazardous Areas
(1) All fixed wiring above hazardous areas shall be carried out in accordance with the
provisions of Section 8 and suitable for the type of building and occupancy.
(2) For pendants, flexible cord of the hard-usage type shall be employed.
(3) For connection of portable lamps, portable motors, or other portable utilization
equipment, flexible cord of the hard-usage type shall be used.
13.4.4 Equipment above Hazardous Areas
(1) Fixed equipment which is less than 3.6m above the floor level and which may produce
arcs, sparks, or partiCles of hot metal such as cutouts, switches, charging panels, generators,
motors or other equipment (excluding socket outlets, lamps and lampholders) having make-
and-break or sliding contacts, shall be of the totally enclosed type or so constructed as to
prevent escape of sparks or hot metal particles.
(2) Lamps and lampholders for fixed lighting and that are located over lanes through which
vehicles are commonly driven or which may otherwise be exposed to physical damage shall
be located not less than 3.6m above floor level unless of totally enclosed type or so
constructed as to prevent escape of sparks or hot metal particles.
13.5 RESIDENTIAL STORAGE GARAGES
13.5.1 Non-Hazardous Location
(1) Where the lowest floor is at or above adjacent grade or driveway level, and where there
is at least one outside door at or below floor level, the garage area shall not be classified
as a hazardous location.

13.5.2 Hazardous Location
(1) Where the lowest floor is below adjacent grade or driveway level, the following shall
apply:
a) The entire area of the garage or of any enclosed space which includes the garage
shall be classified as a Class I, Division 2 location and will extend up to a level
50.0mm above the garage floor.
b) Adjacent areas in which hazardous vapours or gases are not likely to be released,
and having floors elevated at least 50.0mm above the garage floor, or separated
therefrom by tight curbs or partitions at least 50.0mm high shall not be classified as
hazardous.
13.5.3 Wiring
(1) Wiring above the hazardous locations shall conform to the provisions of Section 8.
(2) Wiring in the hazardous location shall conform to the provisions of Section 12.
13.6 BULK STORAGE PLANTS
(1) Neas containing pumps, bleeders, withdrawal fittings, metres and similar devices wliich
are located in pipelines handling flammable liquids under pressure shall be classified and
comply with the following:
a) Ventilated indoor areas shall be considered as Class I, Division 2 locations within

a 15m distance extending in all directions from the exterior surface of such devices
as well as 7.5m horizontally from any surface of these devices and extending upwards
to 900.0mm above floor or grade level, provided that:
i) design of the ventilation systems takes into account the relatively high relative
density of the vapours;
ii) where openings are used in outside walls, they are of adequate size and located
at floor level unobstructed except by louvres or coarse screens; and

iii) where natural ventilation is inadequate, mechanical ventilation is provided.
b) Indoor areas not ventilated in accordance with (a) above shall be considered
Class I, Division 1 locations within a 15m distance extending in all directions from
the exterior surface of such devices as well as 7.5m horizontally from any surface of
the device and extending upward 900.0mm above floor or grade level.
c) Outdoor area shall be considered as Class I,_Division 2 locations within a 900.0mm

distance extending in all directions from the exterior surface of such devices as well
as up to 450.0mm above grade level within 3.0m horizontally from any surface of the
devices.
(2) Areas where flammable liquids are transferred shall be classified as follows:
a) In outdoor areas or where positive and reliable mechanical ventilation is provided

in indoor areas in which flammable liquids are transferred to individual containers,
such areas shall be considered a Class I, Division 1 locations within 900.0mm of the
vent or fill opening extending in all directions and a Class I, Division 2 location
within the area extending between a 900.0mm and 15m radius from the vent or fill ~
opening extending in all directions, and including the area within a horizontal radius
of 3.0m from the vent or fill opening and extending to a height of 450.0mm above
floor or grade levels.
b) Where positive and reliable mechanical ventilation is not provided in indoor areas
in which flammable liquids are transferred to individual containers, such areas shall
be considered to be a Class I, Division 1 location.
(3) Areas in outside locations where loading and unloading of tank vehicles and tank cars
take place shall be classified as follows:
a) The area extending 900.0mm in all'directions from the dome (when loading through
an open dome) or from the vent (when loading through a closed dome with
atmospheric venting) shall be considered a Class I, Division 1 location.
b) The area extending between a 900.0mm and a 15m radius from the dome (when
loading through an open dome) or from ,the vent (when loading through a closed
dome with atmospheric venting) shall be considered a Class I, Division 2 location.

c) The area extending within 900.0mm in all directions from a fixed connection used
in bottom loading or unloading, loading through a closed dome with atmospheric
venting, or loading through a closed dome with a vapour recovery system shall be
considered a Class I, Division 2 location except that, in the case of bottom loading
or unloading, this classification shall also be applied to the area within a 3.0m radius
from point of connection and extending 450.0mm above grade.
(4) Area within the vicinity of above-ground tanks shall be classified as follows:
a) The area above the roof and within the shell of a floating-roof type tank shall be
considered a Class I, Division 1 location.
b) For all type of above-ground tanks:
i) the area within 3.0m from the shell ends, and roof of other' than a floating-roof
shall be considered a Class I, division 2 location; and
ii) where dikes are provided, the area inside the dike and extending upwards to the
top of the dike shall be considered to be a Class I, Division 2 location.
c) The area within 105m of vent opening and extending in all directions shall be
considered a Class I, Division 1 location.
d) The area between 105mand 3.0m of a vent opening and extending in all directions
shall be considered a Class I, Division 2 location.
(5) Pits and depressions shall be classified as follows:
a) Any pit or depression, any part of which lies within a Division 1 or Division 2
location, unless provided'with positive and reliable mechanical ventilation, shall be
considered a,Class I, Division 1 location.
b) Any such areas as in (a) above, when provided with positive and reliable mechanical
ventilation, shall be considered a Class I, Division 2 location.
c) Any pit or depression not within a Division 1 or Division 2 location as defined

herein, but which contains piping, valves, or fittings shall be considered a Class I,
Division 2 location.
(6) Garages in which tank vehicles are stored or repaired shall be considered to be a Class
I, Division 2 location up to 450.0mm above floor or grade level.

(7) Buildings such as office buildings, boiler rooms, etc which are outside the limits of
hazardous areas as defined herein and which are not used for handling or storing volatile
flammable liquids or containers for such liquids shall not be considered to be hazardous
locations.
13.6.2 Wiring and Equipment in Hazardous Areas
(1) All electrical wiring and equipment in hazardous areas defined in Clause 13.6.1 shall
conform to the requirements of Section 12.
(1) Wiring installed above a hazardous location shall conform. to the requirements of
Section 8 and be suitable for the type of buildings and occupancy.
(2) Fixed equipment which may produce arcs, sparks or particles of hot metal, such as
lamps and lampholders, cutouts, switches, socket outlets, motors or other equipment having
make-and-break or sliding contacts, shall be of the totally enclosed type or so constructed
as to prevent the escape of sparks or hot metal particles.
(3) Portable lamps or utilization equipment and the flexible cords supplying them shall
conform to the requirements of Section 12 for the class of location above which they are
connected or used.
(4). All non-current-carrying metal parts of equipment and raceways shall be bonded to
earth in accordance with Part I of Section 7 of this Code.
13.7 FINISlllNG PROCESSES
13.7.1 Hazardous Locations
(1) The following areas shall be considered to be Class I, Division 1 locations:
a) The interiors of spray booths and their exhaust ducts.
b) All space within 6.0m horizontally in any direction, and extending to a height of
900.0mm above the goods to be painted, from spraying operations that are more
extensive than touch-up spraying and not conducted within the spray booth.

c) All space within 6.0m horizontally in any direction from dip tanks and their drain
boards, such space extending to a height of 900.0mm above the dip tank and drain
board.
d) All other spaces where hazardous concentrations of flammable vapours are likely to
occur.
(2) For spraying operations within an open face spray booth, the extent of the Class I,
Division 2 hazardous location shall be not less than the following:
a) Where the ventilation system is interlocked with the spraying equipment so as to

make the spraying equipment inoperable when the ventilation system is I}ot in
operation, the space shall extend at least 105m from the open face of the spray
booth.
b) Where the ventilation system is not interlocked with the spraying equipment so as
to make the spraying equipment inoperable when the ventilation system is not in
operation, the space shall extend at least 3.0m from the open face or front of the
.spray booth.
(3) All space within the room, but beyond the limits for Class I, Division 1 location as
classified in (1) above for extensive open spraying; for dip tanks and drain boards and for
other hazardous operations, shall be considered to be Class I, Division 2 location.
(4) Adjacent areas which area cut off from the defined hazardous area by tight partitions
without communicating openings, and wi~hinwhich hazardous vapours are not likely to be
released, shall be classified as non-hazardous.
(5) Drying and baking areas provided with positive mechanical ventilation to prevent
formation of flammable concentration of vapours and provided with effective interlocks to
de-energize all electrical equipment not approved for Class I locations, in case the
ventilating equipment is inoperative, may be classified as non-hazardous.
(6) Notwithstanding the requirements of (lb) above, where adequate mechanical ventilation
with effective interlocks is provided at floor level:
a) the space within 900.0mm horizontally in any direction from the goods to be painted
and such space extending to a height of 900.0mm above the goods to be painted
shall be considered a Class I, Division 1 location; and

,
b) all space between a 900.0mm and 105mdistance above the goods to be painted and
all space within 6.0m horizontally in any direction beyond the limits for Class I,
Division 1 location shall be considered a Class I, Division 2 location.
(7) Notwithstanding the requirements of (2) above where a baffle of sheet metal of not less
than 1.25mm is installed vertically above the front face of an open-face spray booth to a
height of 900.0mm or to the ceiling, whichever is lower and extending back on the side
edges for a distance of 105m,the space behind this baffle shall be considered to be a non-
hazardous location.
(1) All electrical wiring and equipment within the hazardous areas as defined In
Clause 13.7.1 shall conform to the requirements of Section 12.
(2) .Unless specifically approved for both readily ignitable deposits and flammable vapour
location, no electrical equipment shall be installed or used where it may be subject to a
hazardous accumulation of readily ignitable deposits or residue.
(3) Illumination of readily ignitable area through panels of glass or other tr~nsparent or
translucent materials is permissible only where:
a) fixed lighting units are used as the source of illumination;

b) the panel is noncombustible and effectively isolates the hazardous area from the
area in which the lighting unit is located;
c) the lighting unit is acceptable for its specific location;
d) the panel is of a material or is so protected that breakage will be unlikely;
e) the arrangement is such that normal accumulation of hazardous residue on the
surface of the panel will not be raised to a dangerous temperature by radiation or
conduction from the source of illumination.
(4) Portable electric lamps or other utilization equipment shall:
a) not be used within a hazardous area during operation of the finishing process;
b) be of a type specifically approved for Class I locations when used during cleaning
or repairing operations.
(5) Notwithstanding the requirements of (2) above:

a) totally enclosed and gasketted lighting may be used on the ceiling of a spray room
where adequate and positive mechanical ventilation is provided; and
b) infra-red paint-drying units may be utilized in a spray room if the controls are
interlocked with those of the spraying equipment such that both operations cannot
be performed simultaneol,lsly;and if portable, the paint and the drying unit shall not
be brought into the spray room until the spraying operations have ceased.
(1) All fixed wiring above hazardous area shall conform to the provisions of Section 8.
(2) Equipment which may produce arcs, sparks, or particles of hot metal, such as lamps and
lampholders for fixed lighting, cutouts, switches, receptacles, motors or other equipment
having make-and-break or sliding contacts, where installed above a hazardous area or above
an area where freshly finished goods are handled, shall be of the totally enclosed type or
so constructed as to prevent the escape of sparks or hot metal particles.
(3) All metal raceways and all non-current-carrying metal portions of fixed or porta~le
equipment, regardless of voltage, shall be bonded to earth in accordance with ,Part I of
Section 7 of this Code.'
13.8 AIRCRAFf HANGARS
(1) Any pit or depression below the level of the hangar floor shall be considered to be a
Class I, Division 1 location which shall extend up to the floor level.
(2) The entire area of the hangar, including any adjacent and communication areas ~ot
suitably cut off from the hangar shall be considered to be Class I, Division 2 location up to
a level 450.0mm above the floor.
(3) The area within 105m horizontally from aircraft power plants, aircraft fuel tanks, or
aircraft structures containing fuel shall be considered to be a Class I, Division 2 location
which shall extend upward from the floor to a level1.5m above the upper surface of wings
and of engine enclosures.

'ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF BUILDINGS
(4) Adjacent area in which hazardous vapours are not likely to be released, such as stock
rooms, electrical control rooms, and other similar locations, may be classified as non-
hazardous when adequately ventilated and when effectively cut off from the hangar itself
in accordance with the provisions of Section 12.
(1) All fixed and portable wiring and equipment which is or may be installed or operated
within any of the hazardous locations defined in Clause 13.8.1 shall conform to the
(2) All wiring installation in or under the hangar floor shall conform to the requirements
for Class I, Division 1 locations.
(3) Wiring systems installed in pits or other spaces in or under the hangar floor shall be
provided with adequate drainage and shall not be placed in the same compartment with any
other service except piped compressed air.
(4) Attachment plugs and socket outlets in hazardous locations shall be explosion-proof?r
shall be so designed that they cannot be energized while the connections are being made
or broken.
13.8.3 Wiring Not within Hazardous Area
(1) All fixed wiring in a hanger not within'a hazardous area as defined in Clause 13.8.1
shall be installed in metal raceways or shall be armoured cable, Type MI (Mineral-
Insulated) cable, or aluminium sheathed cable, except that wiring in a non-hazardous
location as set out in 13.8.1(4) may be of any type recognized in Section 8 as suitable for
the type of building and the occupancy.
(2) For pendants, flexible cord of the hard-usage type and containing a separate bonding
conductor shall be used.
(3) For portable utilization equipment and lamps, flexible cord approved for hard usage
and containing a separate bonding conductor shall be used.
(4) Suitable means shall be provided for maintaining continuity and adequacy of bonding
between the fixed wiring system and the non-current-carrying metal portions of pendant
fixtures, portable lamps and other portable utilization equipment.
306 EBCS-10 1995 ETHI9PIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

13.8.4 Equipment Not within Hazardous Areas
(1) In locations other than those described in Clause 13.8.1, equipment which is less than
3.0m above wings and engine enclosures of aircraft and which may produce arcs, sparks, or
particles of hot metal, such as lamps and lanipholders for fixed lighting, cutouts, switches,
socket outlets, charging panels, generators, motors or other equipment having make-and-
break or sliding contacts, shall be of totally-enclosed type or· so constructed as to prevent
escape of sparks or hot metal particles, except that equipment in areas described in
13.8.1(4) may be of general purpose type.
(2) Lampholders of metal-shell-fibre-lined types shall not be used for fixed lighting.

SECTION 14
PATIENT CARE AREAS
14.1 SCOPE
(1) This Section of the Code applies to the installation of electrical wiring and equipment
within patient care areas of hospitals and those portions of the ele~trical systems of
hospitals designated as essential electrical systems.
(l) The following references contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute
provisions of the Ethiopian Building Code S~dard on Electrical Installation of Buildings: .
a) C22.1:1990 Ganadian Electrical Code, Part I, Safety Standard for

b) NEC (Handbook):1991 National Electrical Code Handbook, Based on the .1991

(NEC), Seventeenth Edition.
14.3· DEFI~ITIONS
(1) For the purpose of this Section, in addition to the terms defined in Section 1, the
following definitions shall apply:
anaesthetizing location any area of a health care facility where the induction and
maintenance of..general anaesthesia are routinely carried out in
the course of the examination or treatment of patients.
appUed part the part or parts of medical electrical' equipment including the
patient leads which come intentionally into contact 'Wi.,ththe
patient to be examined or treated.

SECTION 14: PATIENT CARE AREAS
body contact an intentional contact at the skin surface or internally, bur not
directly to the heart.
cardiac contact an intentional contact directly to the heart by means of an

invasive procedure.
casual contact contact by voluntary action with a device that has no applied
part. and is not intended to be connected to a patient.
critical care area a patient care area in which anaesthetics are administered, or in
which cardiac contact between a patient and medical electrical
equipment is frequent or normal.
delayed vital branch that portion of an essential electrical" system'in which the
circuits require power restoration within 2.0min.
emergency supply one or more in-house generators of electricity intended to be

available in the event of a failure of all other supplies and
capable of supplying all the essential loads.
essential electrical system an electrical system which has the capability of restoring and
sustaining a supply of electrical energy to specified loads in the
event of a loss of the normal supply of energy.
hazard index for a given set of conditions in an isolated power system, the
current, expressed in milliamperes and consisting of resistive
and capacitive leakage and fault currents, that would flow
through low impendence if the low impendence were to be
connected between either isolated conductor and ground.
hospital an institution, so designated by Ethiopian Ministry of Health,

where patients are accommodated on the basis of medical need
and are provided with continuing medical care and supporting
diagnostic and therapeutic services.
intermediate care area a patient care area in which body contact between a patient and
medical electrical equipment is frequent or normal.

isolated system an electrical distributi.on system in which no circui.tconductor is

connected directly to earth.
line isolation monitor a device which measures and displays the total hazard index on
an isolated electrical system, and provides warning when the
index reaches a preset limit.
normal supply the main electrical supply into a building or building complex,
and may consist of one or more consumer services capable of
supplying all loads in the building complex.
patient a person undergoing medical investigation or treatment.
patient care area an area intended primarily for the prqvision of diagnosis,
therapy, or care.
patient care location a zone in a patient care area which has been pre-selected for
the accommodation of a patient bed, table, or other supporting
mechanism, and for the accommodation of equipmentlnvolved
in patient treatment, and which includes the space within the
room 1.5m beyond the perimeter of the bed in its normal
location and to within 203m of the floor.
patient car~ location bonding point a common bus at a patient care location, that is
bonded to earth, and that serves as a common point
t6 which equipment and other bonding connections
can be made by means of a group of-jacks.
permanently connected equipment equipment that is electrically connected to the supply

be' means of connectors that can be accessed,
loosened or tightened only with the aid of a tool.
total hazard index the hazard index of a given isolated system with all appliances,
including the line isolation monitor, connected.
vital branch that portion of an essential electrical system in which the

circuits require power restoration within 10.0s.

14.4 CIRCUITS IN BASIC CARE AREAS
(1) The·branch circuits supplying socket outlets and permanently connected equipment in
basic care areas shall be supplied from an earthed distribution system.
(2) A branch circuit which supplies socket outlets or permanently connected medical
electrical equipment within a patient care location shall only supply loads within such
location.
(3) All branch circuits for a patient care location shall be supplied from a single
panelboard, except branch circuits intended to be part of an essential electrical 'system,
which shall then be permitted to be supplied from two panelboards, one of which is part
of the essential system.
14.4.2 Bonding to Earth in Basic Care Areas
(1) Bonding conductors shall be insulated unless they are:
a) installed in nonmetallic conduit; or

b) incorporated into a cable assembly in such a manner that contact between any
metal shield or armour, if it is present, and a bare bonding conductor is not
possible.'
(2) All socket outlets and other permanently connected equipment shall be bonded to earth
by copper equipment bonding conductors, sized not smaller than the minimum size required
for circuit conductors and, except as permitted by the supplying authority, run with the
circuitconductors in accordance with the following:
a) Each multi-wire branch circuit shall be provided with its own equipment bonding
conductor.
b) Except as permitted by (c) and (d) below, each 2-wire branch circuit supplying- a
socket outlet at a patient care location shall be provided with its own equipment
bonding conductor.
c) When the socket outlets at a patient care location are supplied from two 2-wire
branch circuits in the same raceway, a single equipment bonding conductor shall be
- permitted to be shared by the two circuits.

d) When socket outlet intended for a pair of adjacent patient care locations are
supplied by three 2-wire branch circuits and one of the circuits is intended to be
shared by both patient care locations, the three circuits shall be permitted to share
two equipment bonding conductors.
(3) Equipment bonding conductors required by (2) and (5) below shall terminate either at
the panelboard supplying the branch circuits to the patient care location from which they
arise or on an earthing bus which is bonded to that panelboard.
(4) Each item of 3-phase equipment shall be bonded to earth with an equipment bonding
conductor which is:
a) sized in accordance with Part I of Section 7 of this Code, but in no case smaller than
4.0mm2; and
b) connected to its own terminal at the equipment and the panelboard.
,
(5) Exposed non-curr9nt-carrying metal parts of communication, radio or television
equipment, other than telephone sets, at a patient care location, if they could become
energized, shall be bonded to earth by:
a) connection to the bonding screw in the communication section of a buried and

ganged metal outlet box, serv~ng a patient care location; or
b) connection to an equipment bonding conductor or earthing bus for that patient care
location as identified in (3) above.
14.4.3 Socket Outlets in Basic-Care Areas
(1) Socket outlets intended for a given patient-care location shall be located so as to
minimize the likelihood of their inadvertent use for a patient-care location for which they
are not intended.
(2) Socket outlets which are located in areas that are routinely cleaned using liquids which
normally splash against the walls shall be installed not less than 300.0mm above the floor.
(3) Socket outlets located in bathrooms or washrooms within a patient care area shallbe
located:
a) adjacent to the wash basin, and
b) outside of any bathtub enclosure or shower stall.

(4) Socket outlets which are located adjacent to a washbasin in a patient care area shall be
protected by an earth fault circuit interrupter of the Class At type.
14.5 CIRCUITS IN INTERMEDIATE AND CRITICAL-CARE AREAS
(1) The branch circuits supplying spcket outlets and other permanently connected
equipment in intermediate or critical care areas. shall be supplied from either an earth
system meeting the requirements of Section 14.4 or an isolated system meeting the
requirements of Section 14.6, except that all branch circuits, other than those supplying
multiphase equipment, shall be 2-wire circuits.
14.5.2 Bonding to Earth in Intermediate and Critical-Care Areas
(1) Bonding to earth in intermediate and critical care areas shall conform to Clause 14.4.2
whether the supply is derived from an earthed or an isolated system.
(2) If a patient-care-Iocation bonding point is provided, it shall be bonded to the

panelboard serving the patient-care location with which it is associated by either:
a) a bonding jumper connecting it to the bonding terminal in an enclosure which

accommodates the bonding point along with socket outlets for a patient care
location; or
b) a copper conductor which is installed for that specific purpose, and is run in the
same raceway as the equipmen.t bonding conductors serving that patient care
location.
14.5.3 Receptacles in Intermediate and Critical Care Areas
(1) Socket outlets in intermediate and critical care areas shall:
a) meet the requirements of Clause 14.4.3; and

b) where supplied from an isolated system, be so identified.
t For definition of Class A earth-fault circuit interrupter, refer to Clause A.2, Annex A, Section 25.

•
14.6 ISOLATED SYSTEMS
14.6.1 Sources of Supply
(1) The means of supply to an isolated system shall be:

,
a) the secondary of one or more isolating transformers h*ing no direct electrical
connection between primary and secondary windings,
b) a motor-generator set, or
c) a suitably isolated, battery-powered inverter supply.
(2) Where more than one single-phase isolated pow~r system serves a single location, the
earthing busses of all of these systems shall be bonded together with a copper bonding
conductor:
a) having a total impedance not greater than O.2ohm, and

b) sized not smaller than that permitted in Part I of section 7 of this Code.
14.6.2 Single-Phase Isolated Circuits
(1) Isolated circuits shall:
a) not be deliberately earthed except through the impedance of an isolation sensing

device (e.g., isolation monitor);
b) have- overcurrent devices that will open all unearthed conductors simultaneously;
c) unless prohibited by the Power Suppling Authority, be installed in non-metal
raceways.
(2) Any disconnecting means controlling an isolated circuit shall safely and simultaneously
disconnect all unearthed conductors.
(3) A single-phase isolated system shall include automatic means (a line isolation monitor),
with an indicator located where visible to persons using the system, to monitor the
impedance-to-earth of the system together with any loads connected to it.
(4) Where a single-phase isolated system is employed, it shall supply:
a) general-purpose socket outlets at:

i) a single anaesthetizing location;

ii) one or more patient care locations in a single room; or
iii) a maximum of two patient care locations in separate but adjacent rooms,
provided that the alarm indicator clearly identifies the patient care locations
affected by the fault; or
b) special purpose socket outlets at different locations or in different rooms, provided

that the system is used only for the one purpose, and is arranged so that only one
socket outlets can be energized at a time.
(5) A single-phase isolated system which supplies only a single load via a single branch
circuit shall meet the requirements of (1) through (3) above except that:
a) overcurrent devices need not be installed in the isolated circuit; and

b) the use of a line-isolation monitor shall be optional.
14.6.3 Three-Phase Isolated Systems
(1) A three-phase isolated system shall:
a) supply only permanently connected equipment; and

b) meet the requirements of Clause 14.6.1.
14.7 ESSENTIAL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
14.7.1 Circuits in Essential Electrical Systems
(1) An essential electrical system shall comprise those circuits that supply loads designated
by the hospital administration as being essential for the life safety and care of the patient,
and the effective operation of the hospital.
(2) An essential electrical system shall comprise at least a vital branch, and may also
include a delayed vital branch.
(3) The wiring of the essential electrical system shall be kept entirely independent of all
other wiring and equipment and shall not enter a ftxture, raceway, box or cabinet occupied
by other wiring except where necessary as in:
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD EBCS-10 1995 315'

a) transfer switches; and

b) emergency lighting fixtures supplied from two sources.
14.8 TRANSFER SWITCHES
(1) All transfer switches shall be acceptable to the supply authority.
(2) Automatic transfer switches used in essential electrical systems shall:
a) be electrically operated and mechanically held; and

b) include means for safe manual operation.
(3) Manual transfer switches shall conform to the following:
a) The switching means shall be mechanically held and the operation shall be by direct
manpower or by electrical remote manual control utilizing control power from the
supply to which the load is being transferred.
b) A manual transfer switch which is operated by electrical remote manual c.pntrol

shall include a means for safe manual mechanical operation.
c) Reliable mechanical interlocking (and, fn the case of a switch operated by electrical

remote manual control, electrical interlocking) to prevent interconnection of the
normal and· the emergency supplies of power shall be inherent in the design of a
manual transfer tlwitch.
d) A manual transfer switch shall include a readily visible mechanical indicator

showing the switch position.
(4) The vital and delayed vital branches shall be connected to the emergency power supply
by means of one or more automatic transfer switches.
14.9 EMERGENCY SUPPLY
(1) An emergency supply shall be one or more generator sets driven by a prime mover and
located on the hospital premises in a fire-resistant enclosure or room, and in such a manner
as to minimize the possibility of flooding and damage.

(2) The prime mover of the generating set, as specified in (1) above, shall be capable of
operating independently of supplies of water and fuel from public utilities.
(3) A fuel supply sufficient to operate the prime mover under full load for at least 24.0hrs
shall be stored on the site.

SECTION
INSTALlATION OF liGHTING EQUIPMENf
15.1 SCOPE
(1) This Section applies to installation of interior and exterior lighting equipment.
(a) C22.1:1990 Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, Safety Standard

for Electrical Installation, Sixteenth Edition.
(b) IEE:1970 The Institute of electrical Engineers, Regulations for

the Electrical Equipment of Buildings, Fourteenth
Edition, Incorporating Amendments.
(c) BS 8208:1985 British Standard, Artificial Lighting for Interior,

Part 1.
(d) BS 5649 (EN40):1978: British Standard, Lighting Columns Parts 1, 2, 4, 5,

6, and 9.
15.3 INTERIOR LIGlITING EQUIPMENT
15.3.1 General
15.3.1.1 Material
(1) Material of lamps shall confirm, as regards the type of lamp, mechanical qualities and
insulation resistance, to applicable IEC or other international standards.

SECTION 15: INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
15.3.1.2 Luminaire Construction
(1) Luminaires shall be constructed from such material and so finished that their s·afety,
performance or appearance does not deteriorate significantly during normal life when they
are operated in the condition for which they are designed.
15.3.1.3 Voltage
(1) Branch circuit voltages shall not exceed 230.0V -to-earth in dwelling units; and in other
than dwelling units, voltages shall not exceed the voltage-to-earth of nominal system 380.0V.
Note: Where 380.0V line-to-line system is used, the control switch shall be of double-pole type and the
luminaire shall be earthed.
15.3.1.4 Pro.tection
(1) Incandescent luminaires and incandescent lampholders shall not be connected to a

branch circuit protected by overcurrent devices rated at more than 16.0A; but in other than..
dwelling units, they shall be permitted to b~ connected to a branch circuit protected by
overC4rrent devices rated or set at not more than 20.0A.
(2) Tungsten halogen luminaries, incandescent moulded-base luminaries, and incandescent

moulded-base lampholders shall not be connected to branch circuit protected by
overcurrent devices rated or set at more than 40.0A.
(3) Fluorescent luminaries shall not be connected to a branch circuit protected by

overcurrent devices rated or set at more than 16.0A except for circuits supplying fluorescent
luminaries; only the rating of the overcurrent protection may exceed 16.0A, but shall not
exceed 20.0A.
(4) High intensity discharge (HID) luminaries shall not be connected to a branch circuit
protected by overcurrent devices rated or set at more than:
~ 20.0A where the input voltage to the luminaire is not more than 230.0V nominal,
but not exceeding 380.0V nominal; and
b) 16.0A where the input voltage is above 380.0V nominal.

15.3.2 Location of Lighting Equipment
15.3.2.1 Near or over combustible material
(1) Luminaries and lampholders shall be placed or guarded in such a manner as to prevent
ignition of any combustible materials.
(2) Any shade or guard used for the purpose in (1) above shall be, besides limiting the
temperature to which the combustible material may be subjected, suitable to withstand the
heat from the lamp.
15.3.2.2 Show 'windows
(1) In show windows:
a) no luminaries having exposed wiring other than a luminaire of a chain-suspension

type shall be used; and
b) no lampholders having a paper-fibber lining shall be used.
15.3.2.3 Clothes closets
(1) Luminaires installed in clothes closets:
a) shall be located on the ceiling or on the front wall above the door of the closet
unless mounted on the trim of the ,sidewalls of the doorway and approved for the
application; and
b) shall not be of pendant type.
15.3.2.4 Luminaire in damp or wet locations
(1) Luminaries in damp or wet locations shall be approved for such locations and be so
marked.
15.3.2.5 Control switch
(1) A light fitting connected to an installation by means other than a socket outlet shall be
controlled by a switch which shall be arranged to disconnect all the supply conductors.

(2) The switch required by (1) above shall be separate from lighting fitting and in a readily
accessible position subject to the provisions (3) and (5) below, where applicable.
(3) Where a switch has to be situated so as to be normally inaccessible to a person who is

using a bath or a shower, it'is admissible for the switch to be placed adjacent to the normal
access door of the room, or to be of the type operated by insulating cord.
(4) The switch or switches providing control of comprehensive lighting installation

.::omprising more than one lighting fitting in non-domestic premises may be installed in
separate rooms.
(5) Where lighting fittings are installed over readily combustible material, every light fitting
.shall be controlled by an individual wall switch.
(6) Where st~irway in a dwelling unit has risers, the lighting shall be controlled by
intermediate wall switches or their functional equivalent located at the head .and foot of the'
stairway.
15.3.3 Installation of Lighting Equipment
15.3.3.1 Live parts
(1) Luminaries, lampholders, and rosettes shall be installed so that no live part is exposed
to contact while they are in use.
(2) Where lampholders and switches have exposed accessible terminals, ,they shall not be
installed in metalluminaire canopies or in open bases of portable lamps.
15.3.3.2 Supports
(1) Every luminaire, lampholder and rosette shall be securely supported.
(2) Where a luminaire weighs more than 30.0N or exceeds 40.0cm in any dimension, it
shall not be supported by the screw shell of the lampholders.
(3) Where a non-metallic outlet box of thermoplastic material, such as, for example, P.V.C,
is used to suspend a luminaire, care shall be taken to ensure that the temperature of the
box does not exceed 600Cj and the mass suspended shall not exceed 30.0N.

(4) Where the weight of a luminaire does not exceed lOO.ON,it shall be permitted to be
supported by an outlet box that is mounted on a bar hanger.
(5) Where a luminaire weights more than lOa. ON,it shall be suspended independently of
the outlet box, or by means of an acceptable fixture hanger with integral outlet box.
15.3.3.3 Outlet boxes to be covered
(1) Every outlet box used with lighting equipment shall be provided with a cover or covered
by a luminaire canopy lampholder, rosette, or other device.
15.3.3.4 Recessed luminaries
(1) The recessed portion of every enclosure of a recessed luminaire shall be at least
12.5mm from combustible material at every point other than at a point of support.
(2) Every recessed luminaire shall be,so installed that any adjacent combustible material
is not subjected to temperature in excess of 90oe. •
(3) Recessed luminaries shall not b,e used when blanketed with thermal insulation unless
the luminaries are marked and approved for this use.
15.3.3.5 Minimum height of luminaries
(1) Where a rigid luminaire or lampholder is located at a height of less than 2.1m above
the floor and is readily accessible, the luminaire or lampholder shall be protected from
mechanical injury by a guard or by location.
15.3.3.6 Luminaire exposed to flying objects
(1) Where luminaries are installed in gymnasiums or similar locations where the lamps are
normally exposed to damage from flying objects, the lamp shall be guarded by one of the
following means:
a) metal reflectors that effectively protect the lamps,

b) metal screens,
c) enclosures of armoured glass or suitable plastic material.

15.3.3.7 Luminaire as a raceway
(1) Branch circuit conductors run through a luminaire shall be contained in a raceway
which is an integral part of the luminaire except that the conductor of a 2-wire, 3-wire, or
4-wire branch circuit supplying the luminaire may be carried through:
a) an installation of luminaries approved and marked for end-to-end assembly to form

a continuous channel; or
b) luminaries which are connected together by acceptable wiring methods.
(2) Ballasts located within luminaries shall be deemed to be sources of heat and' the
conductors supplying the l\lminaries shall:
a) have a temperature rating not less than 90°C;

b) be of type listed in:
i) Section 4, Annex :S, as being suitable for use in raceway; or

ii) Section 4, Annex B, as being suitable for use 'in accordance with this Clause,
provided that conductors are not smaller than 2.5mm2 and do not extend "
beyond the luminaries through raceway more than 2.0m long.
15.3.4 Wiring of Lighting Equipment
15.3.4.1 Wiring of luminaries
(1) AIl electrical wiring on or within -aluminaire, -beside ensuring its electrical safety, shall:
a) be neatly arranged without excess wiring;

b) be not exposed to mechanical injury;
c) be arranged so that it is not subject to temperatures above those for which it is
approved; and
d) be free from joint or tap within an arm or stem.
15.3.4.2 Colour coding
(1) Notwithstanding the requirements of Section 4 with regard to the colours used for
identifying conductors, a continuous-coloured tracer in the braid ~f individual braided
conductor shall be permitted for the supply conductors of a luminaire.

I'"
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF BUiLDINGS
15.3.4.3 Conductor cross section and insulation
(1) Luminaries shall be wired with a conductor at least O.5mm2 cross sectional area, having
insulation suitable for voltage and temperatnre to which the conductors may be subjected.
15.3.4.4 Conductor on movable parts
(1) Stranded conductors shall be used on chain-type luminaire and other movable parts of
lighting equipment.
(2) Conductors shall be arranged so that the weight of the luminaire or that of the movable
parts do.es not place undue tension on the connections.
(3) All conductors which supply movable parts of lighting equipment shall be protected
against mechanical injury.
15.3.4.5 Pendant conductors
(1) Where pendant conductors are longer than 900.0mm, they shall be twisted together.
15.3.4.6 Recessed lumina ire wiring
(1) Conductors for wiring recessed luminaire, branch circuit and tap connection shall have
insulation suitable for the temperature encountered.
(2) Branch circuit conductors shall be permitted to be run directly to the luminaire.
(3) Tap connection on' conductors shall:
a) not be smaller than 1.0mm2 copper run in a factory-installed raceway or, if raceway
is provided but not factory assembled, smaller than 2.5mm2;
b) extend at least 1S0.0mm from the raceway; and
c) be installed in a raceway extending at least 450.0mm but not more than 2.0m from
the luminaire, and terminate in an outlet box located not less than 300.0mm from
the luminaire.
(4) The outlet box referred in (3c) above shall be accessible, and if access is through the
opening for mounting the luminaire or through some other opening in the ceiling, this

opening shall be not less than 200.0mm x 200.0mm and the outlet box shall be mounted
within 350.0mm of the opening.
(5) A supply connection box forming part of an approved luminaire assembly shall be
accessible, and if access is through the opening for mounting the luminaire, the following
requirements shall be met:
a) The electrical components of the luminaire shall be capable of being extracted

through the opening for service.
b) The cover of the supply connection box shall be capable of being removed by hand
tool held below ceiling.
(6) Branch-circuit conductors shall not pass through the supply connection box forming
part of an approved luminaire assembly unless the luminaire is approved and marked for
the purpose.
15.3.4.7 Ceiling outlet box wiring
(1) Branch-circuit conductors having insulation suitable for 90°C shall be used for the
wiring of all ceiling outlet boxes on which a luminaire is, or may be, mounted; and the
ampacity of 90°C wire shall be limited to the ampacity of 60°C wire.
15.3.4.8 Wiring of show-window luminaries
(1) Where show-window luminaries are closely spaced, they shall be permitted to be
connected to c;. conductor suitable for the purpose which is listed in Annex B of Section 4
with a temperature rating of not less than 125°C.
(2) The connection of show-window luminaries to the circuit conductors shall be in a

junction box; and the box shall be maintained at a sufficient distance from the luminaire
to ensure that the circuit conductors are not subjected to temperature in excess of their
rating.

..
15.3.5 Earth"ing of Lighting Equipment
15.3.5.1 General
(1) Non-current-carrying metal parts of luminaries and associated equipment shall be

earthed in accordance with Part I of Section 7.
15.3.5.2 Lampholders
(1) Where centre-contact screw lampholders are connected to a source of supply having
an earthed neutral conductor, the outer or screwed contact shall be connected to that·
conducfor.
(2) Where lampho"lders in (1) above are used in circuits having neither pole connected with
earth or in any damp situation in which they can readily be touched by a person in contact
with or standing on earthed metal, they shall be provided with a protective shield of
insulating material or shall be placed or safeguarded so that neither the lamp cap nor the•
oute,r or screwed contact of the lampholder can inadverntly be touched when the l~mp cap
is engaged with the contact.
15.3.6 Electric-Discharge Lighting Systems Operating at 1000.0V or Less
15.3.6.1 Transformer
(1) OiHilled transformers shall not be used.
15.3.6.2 Thermal protection
(1) Luminaries which employ fluorescent lamps shall have thermally protected ballasts
except where the ballasts are of the simple reactance type.
15.3.6.3 Auxiliary equipment
(1) Reactors, capacitors, resistors, and other auxiliary equipment shall be:
a) enclosed within the liminaire,
b) enclosed within an accessible, permanently installed, metal cabinet where remote
from the luminaire, or
c) acceptable for use without an additional enclosure.

SECTION 15: INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING
- . EQUIPMENT
(2) The metaJ cabinet, if not part of the luminaire, shall be installed as close as possible
to the luminaire.
(3) Where display cases are not permanently installed, no part of a secondary circuit shall
be included in more than one case.
15;~.6.4 Control
(1) The luminaries. and lamp installations shall be CQp.trolledby a switch, circuit breaker,
or contact.or.
(2) Where a switch is used as in (1) above, it shall:
a) have a current rating of not less than twi~ the C\lfrent rating of the lamps or
transformers;
b) be a type approved with the assembly; or
c) be a manually-operated general use 380.0V a.c. switch.
15.4 OUTDOOR LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
15.4.1 General
15.4.1.1 Hazard
(1) In outdoor lighting installations, either decorative lighting or illumination of outdoor

areas, the protection of the installation and safety from shock hazard sh?-llbe the major
concern and the fire hazard of the minor or of secondary nature.
15.4.1.2 Ballast protection
(1) Luminaire which employ fluorescent lamps shall hwe thermally protected ballasts
except where the ballasts are of the simple reactance type.
15.4.1.3 Overcurrent potection
(1) Overcurrent protection shall not be provided in a high-intensity discharge luminaire or

a separate ballast box unless the combination is approved for the purpose and so marked.
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD -EBCS-10 1995 327

15.4.2 Permanent Outdoor Floodlighting Installation
15.4.2.1 General
(1) Clause 15.4.2 shall apply to permanent, outdoor installations of floodlights of 300.0W
or larger where the floodlights are mounted on poles or towers.
15.4.2.2 Service equipment
(1) Service equipment shall comply with Section 5 of this Code; and where indoor
installation is installed outdoors, it shall be installed in an acceptable weather-proof
enclosure.
15.4.2.3 Wiring methods underground
(1) Underground wiring shall be run:
a) where acceptable, in rigid steel or rigid aluminium conduit;

b) in non-metallic underground conduit;
c) as lead-sheathed armoured cable, mineral-insulated cable, or aluminium-sheathed
cable; or
d) as conductors or cable assemblies acceptable for earth burial.
(2) Conductors buried directly in the earth shall be of types suitable for use in wet
locations ..
(3) Suitable corrosion-resistant protection shall be provided for aluminIum sheathed cables
and aluminium conduits, and also for mineral-insulated cable, if used where materials
coming into contact with the cable may have a deteriorating effect on the sheath.
15.4.2.4 Wiring methods on poles
(1) All electrical equipment on a pole shall be controlled by a switch which can be locked
in the "Off' position, and each pole shall be provided with a prominent sign warning against
climbing the pole until the switch is "Off' unless all conductors and live parts other than
those used for pole-top wiring are guarded against accidental contact in one of the
following ways:

a) The conductors are run in rigid or flexible metal conduit, as in miner~l-insulated

cable, or up the centre of steel, aluminium, ot hallow concrete poles;
b) The conductors and live parts are kept at least 1.0m from the climbing ladder or
climbing step.
c) Barriers are provided between conductors or live parts, or both, and the climbing
ladder so as to prevent a likelihood of contact by the climber.
(2) Conductors running up the centre of poles shall be supported so as to prevent jnjury
to the conductors inside the pole and so as to prevent undue strain on the conductor where
they leave the pole.
(3) Where vertical conductors, cables, and earthing conductors are within 2.5m oflocations
accessible to unauthorized persons, they shall be provided with a covering which gives
acceptable mechanical protection.
(4) On wood poles, for earthing conductors from lightning arresters, the protective covering
specified in (3) above shall be of wood moulding or other insulating material giving
equivalent protection.
(5) Where there is more than one branch circuits on a pole top, the feeders shall be run
to a distribution panelboard which shall be either weather-proof or installed in a weather-
proof enclosure.
Note: The panelboard may be omitted where there are two branch circuits on a 230/380.0Y circuits with a
common neutral lineand where there are three branch circuits on a 230/380.0Y, 3-phase, 4-wire circuits.
(6) Pole-top branch circuit wiring, exclusive of leads approved with floodlights to which
they are connected, shall be run:
a) as lead-sheathed cable or rubber or thermoplastic-insulated, moisture-resistant types

of conductors installed in rigid conduit; or
b) by special permission, as insulated or uninsulated exposed wiring provided that:
i) the wiring is supported on a suitable insulator;
ii) the wiring is controlled by a switch which can be locked in the "Off' position;
and
iii) the pole is provided with a prominent sign warning against climbing it until the
switch is "Off'.

(7) There shall be no joints or splices concealed within conduit; but open taps and joints
may be made in pole-top exposed wiring provided the joint or lap is given insulation
equivalent to that on the conductors jointed.
(8) Transformers shall comply with the following:
a) If mounted on floodlight poles, all live parts shall be guarded as required by (1)
above.
b) If mounted on poles, the bottom of the transformer shall be at least 5.0m above
locations accessible to unauthorized persons.
c) If located on platforms on the ground, they shall be completely enclosed so as to
prevent access by unauthorized persons or they shall be surrounded by a protecting
fence.
(9) Switches controlling floodlights shall comply with the following:
a) A switch on the primary side of a transformer shall be capable of making and

interrupting the full-load on the transformer.
b) Switches controlling floodlights from the secondary side of a transformer shall have •
a current rating not less than 125% of the current requirements of the floodlights
they control.
c) Switches shall be capable of being operated either by remote operation or by
proper guardingwithout exposing the operator to danger of contact with live parts.
d) Switches shall be capable of being locked in the "Off' position.
(10) The secondary earthed-circuit conductor may be earthed by interconnecting to the

primary earthed circuit conductor provided that:
a) the primary is earthed at the transformers, and

b) interconnection is made at the transformer.
(11) Except for isolated metal parts such as cross bars, bolts, insulator pins, and the like,
all non-current-carrying metal parts of the electrical equipment at the pole-top shall be
bonded together and, if within reach of any earthed metal, they shall be earthed.

-
15.4.3 Exposed Wiring for Permanent Outdol.. Lighting
15.4.3.1 General
(l) Clause 15.4.3 shall apply to exposed wiring for permanent outdoor lighting other than
floodlighting where the circuits are run between buildiilgs, between poles, or between
buildings and poles.
15.4.3.2 C7olUiuctors
(1) Conductors shall be stranded copper, not less than 2.5m2, and shall be:
a) of a type suitable for exposed wiring where exposed to the weather;

b) of the rubber-insulated type suitable for exposed wiring where exposed to the
weather when lampholders of a type which puncture the insulation and make
contact with the conductors are used; or
c) of the moisture-resistant, rubber-insulated type suitable for exposed wiring where
exposed to the weather if cabled together and used with messenger cables.
15.4.3.3 Use of insulators
15.4.3.3.1 Conductors attachment
(1) Conductors shall be securely attached to insulators at each end of the run if a
messenger is not used and at the intermediate points of support, if there are any.
15.4~3.3.2Type of insulator
(1) Insulators at the ends of runs shall be of the strain type unless the conductors are
supported by messenger cables.
15.4.3.3.3 Split knobs
(1) Split knobs shall not be used.

15.4.3.3.4 Height of conductors
(1) Conductors supplying lamps in parking lots, used-car lots, drive-in establishments and
similar commercial areas shall be maintained such that the conductors or the bottom of a
lamp fed from the conductors, whichever is lower, shall have a clearance of not less than
4.0m above grade at any point in a run, except that where a driveway or through fare exists,
this clearance shall not be less than 4.0m.
15.4.3.5 Spacing from combustible material
(1) Conductors and lampholders shall be maintained at a distance not less than 1.0m from
any combustible material except for branch circuit conductors at the point of connection
to buildings or poles.
15.4.3.6 Spacing of conductors
(1) Conductors shall be separated at least 300.0mm from each other by means of insulating
spacers at intervals of not more than 4.5m unless the conductors are secured t9 and '
supported by messenger cables.
15.4.3.7 Lampholders
(1) Lampholders shall:
a) be of weatherproof types, with moulded insulating bodies;

b) be of types having either:
i) permanently attached leads; or

ii) terminals of a type which puncture the insulation and make contact with the
conductors;
c) have, when with permanently attached leads, the connection to the circuit wires
staggered where a cabled assembly is used.

15.4.3.8 Use of messenger cables
(1) Messenger cables:
a) .shall be used to support the conductors:
i) if lampholders having permanently attached leads are used, and the span·
exceeds 12.0m; and
ii) in all cases where lampholders having termination which puncture the insulation
are used;
b) shall be securely attached at each end of the run and shall be earthed.
15.4.3.9 Construction of messenger cables
(1) Messenger cables shall be of galvanized steel, copper-coated steel, or stainless steel, and
shall be of a stranded construction with no less than seven strands.
(2) The effective ultimate strength of a messenger cable shall not be less than 3 times the
calculated maximum working load and in no case shall the individual strands be less than:
a) 1.168mm in diameter in the case of galvanized or copper-coated wire; or

b) 1.112mm in diameter in the case of stainless steel wire.
15.4.3.10 Branch circuit loading and protection
(1) Branch circuits shall be protected by overcurrent devices rated at not more than 32.0A.
(2) The total load on a branch circuit shall not exceed 80% of the rating or setting of the
overcurrent devices.

ANNEX A (NORMATIVE)
LIGHTING COLUMNS
A.i TERMS IN THE FIELD OF LIGHTING COLUMNS
Lighting column a support intended to hold one or more lanterns, consisting of one
of more parts: a post, possibly an extension piece and, if necessary,
a bracket. It does not include columns for catenary lighting.
nominal height the distance between the centreline of the point of entry of the
lantern and the intended ground level for a column planted in the
ground, or the flange plate, for a column with a flange plate as
shown in Figure A.i.
Figure A.i Nominal height
334 EBCS",,101995 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

post-top columna straight column without bracket to support the lantern (post-top
lantern) directly.
column with bracket a column to support a lantern or lanterns (side-entry lanterhs) by

means of one or more brackets which are integral with, or
demou'ntable from, the column.
bracket a component used to support a lantern at a definite distance from

the axis of the lower straight portion of a single, double or multiple
form column and integral with, or demountable from, the column.
bracket projection horizontal distance from the point of entry to the lantern to a
vertical line passing through the center of the cross section of the
column at the ground level as shown in Figure A.2.
w
The shape
of the bracket
is not speCified
,in this standard
'.
Figure A.2 Bracket projection
bracket fixing the connecting part on a column for securing a separate bracket. It
may be of the same size or a different cross section from the column.
lantern fixing the connecting part on the end of a post-top column or of a bracket
for securing a lantern. It may be the end of the column or the
bracket itself or an additional part having the same or a different
cross section from the column or bracket.
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD EBCS-1:0 1'995 335

lantern fixing angle angle between the axis of the lantern fixing and the horizontal.
door opening opening in a column for access to electrical equipment.
cable entry slot opening in a column below ground for cable entry.
planting depth the length of a column below the intended ground level as shown in
Figure A.3.
J!Y'~
,,',---,,'
)
Figure A.3 Planting.depth
base plate plate below ground level fixed to a planted column sinking into the
ground and to help prevent the column overturning as shown in
Figure A.4.
Base plate
Figure A.4 Base plate
336 EBCS-10 1995 , ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

flange plate a plate with an opening for cable entry, attached rigidly to a column
which is surface mounted, to allow it to be secured to a concrete
foundation or other structures as shown in Figure AS.
)
.~.
Flange plate
Figure A.5 Flange plate
A.2 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCE
A.2.t Requirements
The dimensional requirements are specified except that the connection dimensions in
Clause A2.7 represent a recommended choice.

A.2.2 Post top columns, main dimensions (in meters)
For to.lerances for dimensions

and shape see clause 8
Nominal
...----_.
--.----_
------
---- -------.----
,_.~_.20
h...
18
15
12--
85
46
huillht
__ __
•• _ ••••• _ On_ •••••• .•...
___ .
3
10
For dimensions for door openings

! and cable entry slots see clause A 2,~
i.
·1
+ ..-- -., +.
·01 J~
Z-..r W$.I 1 r'....

:·'
For base plate For flange plate

see clause A..?.5 see clause ' Al.6
Type A1 Type A2 Type A3
For column foundation see clausE' A 2.5
·338 EBCS-to 1995 ETHIOPIAN BUILorNGCODE STANDARD

A.2.3 Columns with brackets, main dimensions (in meters)
w
Connection dimensions (see clause AZ.?)
Lantern fixing angle 5° or 15°
The shape
of the bracket
Is not specified
'\
in this standard
) For tolerances for dimensions

A ~. 8
0'----0/ and shape. see clause
h
Nomine'
helohl
Projection
wll
to18
1B52
615
0.75
1,25
2
3
For dimensions for door

opening' and cable entry
SlolS see clause A;Z.4
m~
~
Typo B1
For clause
see A1.5
base plate
Type B2 Type B3
For flange plate
see clousa AZ.t:
For column foundation see clause A2.5
11 II is recommonded Ihal w venerally should be equello. or less Ihln.1-

A.2.4 Door openings and cable entry slots (dimensions in millimetres)
--~ ~
.'\ \
),
--- /"
// ~I
I
.._----
a
-._-~---
- • b
130
1'00
120
85
100
115
75
1301)
951)
1301)
600
400 500
- 900')
600
500
300
200
6801)
6801)
@J I
F''Jwe. A2·3
Position of door4) and cable entry slot
-.-
,50
l aa I~
........
-9
a 1.01
Fl! - -:~T II '>_, aUl
.-
1=lt'H~ A2.""
Dimensions of cutout
1) Supplementary dimensions for concrete columns.

2) For metal columns only.
3) It is recommended that this dimension be approximately 600mm, but in no case shall it be less than
300mm; no maximum is specified.
4) It is recommended that the door opening is positioned parallel to the bracket on the side away from the
direction of traffic.

SECTION 15: INSTALLATION OF L' 3HTING EQUIPMENT
A.2.S Column foundation, planting depth and base plate (din .sians in rnillirnetres)
Nominal --
1700
2000
1000
600
-- -
mh 8
6
haight --
1500
1200
1500
1000
1200
1500
1200
1800
1000
300
2500
800
e1)
Planting dapth
10
18
15
12 20 <5
300 X 300
or
400 x 400
.~
Figure A2.5a Figure
1) The planting depth. e, shall be selected from the values given in the table taking into consideration the
calculations made before hand and the ground conditions.

A.2.6 Flange plate (dimensions in millimetres)
j~
t'
, I
\ )
.~
/ /
gure A 7.:-- 7 II t.J1

-
!tl
c: I
III
-'J
L...
'
figure A2.B d2
Ii
300
sll 400 r M27 33 d2
22
400
30
500
700 ,11
500 h 300
200
M18
M24
d,1) 8
400
a260
c10 min.
400 M18
d,l1 min.
m M27
,20 ,I
! M24
" 12
<20 < 5
1) These dimensions shall be checked by calculation.

SECTION 15: INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING EQUiPMENT
A2.7 Connection Dimensions for Lanterns (in millimetres)l)
~l -;t 102
/tlO
-.---
76
dlJ1 13070
250
'1
(2 )
Fiuuro A 2.',1 Figure A2·~ b
Post top !;.oterns
} 60
42
d2J1
250
-- 100
100
'2
,
Figure
Figurll AZ.IOb
Sidtl entry lantorns
r
i {,!
+ 'x •.•
cu( .. j E
-l::: •• ~"I\II .
~\'\ \."I ~I I\
.
\
\ !
Lt
1) See clause A.2.1.
2) This design does not apply to concrete columns.
3) Diameters of steel spigots should be as given in ISO 64-1974 "Steel tubes, outside diameters" for steel
tubes of the nearest size.

SECTION 16
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM AND FIRE PUMPS
16.1 SCOPE
(1) This Section describes the essentials of the fire alarm systems and applies to the
installation of local fire alarm systems and fire pumps.
a) BS - CP 1019:1972 ' The Installation and Servicing of Electrical Fire

Marm System.
b) C22.1:1990 ~anadian Electrical Code, Part 1, Safety Standard

for Electrical Installations, sixteenth Edition.
c) DIN 57833:1982 Danger Alarm Systems for Fire, Hold-up and

Intrusion, Parts 1 and 2.
d) ,Euro Standard, En 54:1976 Component of the Automatic Fire Alarm Systems,

Parts 1 and 5.
16.3 DEFINITIONS
(1) In addition to the terms defined in Section 1, the following definitions shall apply in
this Section:

SECTION 16: FIRE ALARM SYSTEM AND FIRE PUMPS
smoke particulate product of combustion generated by fire, whether

this be of smouldering or open-flame type.
sounders devices in which electric signals are converted into sound

signals.
lantern-light a glazed construction standing above the surface of a roof,

designed to admit light to the space below.
alerting facility a facility which issues the fire alarm - e.g., by means of audible
and visual signalling devices - and which is not contained in the
fire alarm control and indicting panels.
automatic fire alarm system a system which detects the occurrence of fire in its incipient
stage and immediately signals this without human intervention.
automatic fire detector a part of a fire alarm system which, either continually or at periodic
intervals, observes a suitable physical and/or chemical identifier for
detecting a fire in the monitored area.
heat detector a detector which respond to an increase in temperature.
smoke detector . a detector which responds to products of combustion and/or

pyrolysis (suspended matter) contained in the air.
flame detector a detector which responds to the radiation emitted by fire.
fire identifiers physical variables which are subject to measurable changes in the
environment of a fire in its incipient stage; e.g. rise in temperature,
smoke, flame radiation.
fire alarm signal a signal which alerts the fire fighting forces.
fire alarm system the entirety of the equipment and parts, matched for correct
interaction, used in a fire alarm system.
alarm box cdntrol room a facility from which the necessary fire fighting measures can be
initiated at all time.

false alarm a fire alann signal' caused by technical malfunctions in the fire
alann system (alann resulting from disturbance) or spurious alanns
resulting from the fire detector being "mislead".
non-automatic (manual) fire alarm devices alarm devices which can be used to initiate the
fire alann signals manually.
16.4 DESIGN CONSIDERATION
16.4.1 General
16.4.1.1 Design
(1) Fire alann systems shall be designed so that:
a) the earliest possible definite warning of fire (i.e., avoiding false alann) is given to all
personnel immediately concerned;
b) it is capable of indicating the locality of the origin of the fire alann as to facilitate the
safe evacuation of the premises and to direct fire fighters; and
c) it performs its function with great reliability.
16.4.1.2 Equipment and power supply
(1) The equipment, wiring and use of the fire alann system shall be exclusive to that system
and its power supply shall be provided independently from those for any other equipment.
16.4.1.3 Alarm signals
(1) The audible and visual alann signals shall be used solely for the fire alann purpose, and
these signals shall not reset automatically.
16.4.1.4 Location of the alarm control and indicating panel
(1) The fire alann and associated indicating panel shall be sited where they can be undet
constant observation when the premises are occupied and shall be accommodated in a room:
a) in the direct vicinity of the main entrance;
346 EBCS40 1995 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

b) that provides adequate protection against ambient influences which could impair
operations; e.g. vibration, smoke, dust, gasses, vapour, etc. produced by ma.chinery, etc;
and
c) that has room climate suitable for proper operation of the fire alarm control and
indicating panel.
16.4.1.5 Explosive or flammable atmosphere
(1) If it is necessary to install the fire alarm equipment or wiring in situation where Jhere may
be an explosive or flammable atmosphere, the applicable Clauses of Section 12 shall be
observed.
16.4.2 Circuit Design
16.4.2.1 General
(1) The design of a fire alarm circuit shall provide facilities for rapid and reliable transmission
of initiated signals when manual call points or detectors are operated and when specified faults
occur to control and indicating equipment.
16.4.2.2 Number of circuit elements
(1) For sake of reliability, the number of circuit elements in the fire alarm system on which
alarm actuation depend shall be kept to a minimum.
16.4.2.3 Transmission circuitry
(1) Any resultant signal shall be transmitted by the simplest possible circuitry to sounders and
other indicating equipment and to any equipment which is to be operated by the fire alarm
system; e,g. fire extinguishers, fire protection traps, local plant facilities, etc.
16.4.2.4 Fault signal discrimination
(1) Where chances of malfunction are high in a fire alarm system, discriminatory circuit shall
be incorporated in the system so that false alarms are identified.

16.4.2.5 Origin of call indication
(1) Except in buildings where fire can be located without delay, the fire alarm system shall
include an indication panel designed to show clearly the location of the origin of the alatm.
Note: To meet this requirement, suitable zones should be defmed throughout the building so that all the detectors
and/or manual call points in anyone zone are connected to an indicator exclusive to that zone.
16.4.3 Manual Call Points
16.4.3.1 General
(1) A manual call point shall be operated by a spring-loaded switch w~ich is held in
"non-alarm" position and protected from accidental operation by a cover usually of glass.
Breaking this glass cover releases the switch to an "alarm" position and the system starts to
operate. "1li :
16.4.3.2 Construction and requirements
(1) Manual call points shall:
a) be constructed of pressed metal, cast metal, or plastic materials so that they will not be
adversely affected' by the ambient temperature;
b) be rigid enough in construction to withstand the abuse to which they are likely to be
subjected, without deterioration or reduction in their ability to operate effectively when
required to do so;
c) have contacts that are capable of operating satisfactorily during the design life of the
installation;
d) be co loured "signal red" over at least 50% of their visible area;
e) have replaceable glass cover·; breaking the glass shall automatically operate the call
point, and shall include description'ofthe method of operation" by a concise inscription
• It is recognized that there are situations, e.g. food processing areas, where this type of call point is
unacceptable and there may be no alternative to using a suitable manual call point of the toggle-switch type with
safeguards against accidental operation.
The method of operation in an installation should be identical unless there is special reason for
variation.

including the word "FIRE" on case, or by a suitably inscribed plate behind the glass
cover; and
f) incorporate means whereby satisfactory operation may be readily and individually tested;
e.g. by opening the front by means of a special key.
16.4.3.3 Stricker
(1) A striker shall be provided adjacent to the call point to facilitate breaking the glass.
16.4.3.4 Placement
(1) Manual call points shall be:
a) so located that no person need travel more than 30.0m from any position within the
premises in order to give fire alarm; .
b) located on the exit routes and, in particular, on the floor landing of staircases and on
exits to the street; and\~
c) fixed at a height of 104m above the floor at easily. accessible, well illuminated and
conspicuous positions free from obstruction.
16.4.3.5 Manual call in automatic alarm
(1) Where manual call points are incorporated in an automatic fire alarm system, they shall be·
included in such a way that the operation qf anyone of them produces the same effects as
though fire had been detected by a fire detector in the same zone.
16.4.4 Selection of Fire Detectors
16.4.4.1 General
(1) When selecting the type of detectors, the probable development of fire in the incipient stage,
the room height, the ambient conditions and all sources of spurious alarms in the areas to be
monitored shall be taken into consideration.
Note: The task of fire detectors is to detect a fire wherever possible in its incipient stage and signal this
automatically to an emergency service.

ELECTRICAL INSTALLAT1ON OF BUILDlNGS
16.4.4.2 Detector types
(1) If development of a smoldeJ;ing fire is anticipated in the incipient stage of fire (intense
smoke generation, very little or no flame radiation), smoke detectors shall be .used.
(2) If a rapid development of the fire is anticipated as early as in the incipient stage of a fire
(intense heat generation, intense flame radiation, and generation of smoke), smoke detectors, heat
detectors, flame detectors, or combinations of the various types of fire detectors shall be used.
Note: The fact is that combustion is not always accompanied by flame and the reflected radiation effect restricts the
application of flame detectors.
(3) Jf smoke damage is anticipated as early as the incipient stage of a fire owing to )'oom
occupancy (risk to human life, materials and goods sensitive to smoke), smoke detectors shall
be used.
(4) If a very rapid development of the fire is anticipated with a high degree of probability, an
automatic extinguisher system shall be considered.
(5) If it is not possible to predict or anticipate the development of a fire in the alarm ar~~
special investigation shall be conducted to assist in selecting the particular type of required fire
alarm detectors.
16.4.5 Sitting of Detectors
16.4.5.1 Monitoring
(1) Building and installation complexes shall be monitored or covered completely and each
effectively enclosed space shall be considered separately for this purpose in accordance with the
limits of spacing for the types of detectors concerned.
Notes: i) If, for some reason a fIre alarm system is not installed throughout a building or a related series of
buildings, the criterion shall be that the system will cover all of an area having physical boundaries of
such a nature as to provide adequate fIre separation or all of an area surrounded by sufficient open
space; e.g. roads, to provide adequate fIre separation.
ii) Voids not more than 800.0mm in height need not necessarily have independent monitoring.
Hi) Small lavatories and water closets need not have independent monitoring but; may rely upon that
provided in a lobby common thereto.

16.4.5.2 Sectioned rooms
(1) Rooms divided into sections by walls, partitions or storage racks reaching 300.0mm of the
ceiling or where goods might be stacked in defined areas to a corresponding height, shall have
detectors for each section or passageway.
16.4.5.3 Flue-like openings
(1) Hoists, elevators and similar flue-like openings shall be monitored by detectors at the top.
16.4.5.4 Staircases
(1) Staircases shall be monitored by detectors on each floor.
16.4.5.5 Lantern lights
(1) Lantern lights shall be monitored by detectors.
16.4.5.6 Special monitoring
(l) Due to the requirements of the use to which any room, space, area or void is to be put or
to its structural features, installation of additional detectors shall be considered.
16.4.5.7 Height consideration
(1) Generally, the inter-relationship between the suitability of the various types of fire detectors
and room height indicated in Table 16.1 shall be observed.
16.4.6 Sitting of Heat Sensitive (point) Detectors
16.4.6.1 Position relative to ceiling
(1) Heat sensitive point detectors shall be mounted so that their heat sensitive elements are
positioned not less than 25.0mm and not more than l50.0mm below the ceiling or the underside
of the roof.

Table 16.1 Suitability of d'etectors and room height
Cat...
detectors Flame
w
Cat.
WW
RW
W
RW
W RRR detector
R 1 W
RR
R 2 Heat detectors
Cat. 3
Room height
R " Suitable w-= Unsuitable I
16.4.6.2 Limits of spacing
(1) The spacing limits indicated on Table 16.2 shall be observed in sitting detectors.
(2) Notwithstanding the requirement in (1) above, the maximum spacing between detectors
cannot apply in all directions since the area limit shall be observed, but detectors shall not be
mounted closer than 500.0mm to any outside walls, separating walls or dividing partitions.
Table 16.2 Spacing limits for sitting detectors
In15.0
In
3.5
7.5
In 10.0
corridors
corri.dors
Maximum
generalapart between
(horizontal)
centers
from dlatance
any Maximumpartitions
[m] or dividing
outside walls, (horizontal)
[m] distance
separating walls
In general
• In special buildings such as churcheli, mosques, museums and castles, it may be that detectors can only
be arranged at a great height unper certain circumstances. This will mean that an early fire warning cannot be
guaranteed. This render the use of the fire alarm less worthwhile .
•• Detectors are sub-divided into three response categories in line with the differing ceiling heights.
Sensitive detectors (e.g. detectors of response category 1) may be used for high ceiling.
352 EBCS-tO 1995 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

16.4.6.3 Ceiling
(1) Where ceilings are crossed by beams, girders or other structural features having a depth of
·500.0mm or more, at least one detector shall be installed in each "pocket" fonned between such
features, and these detectors shall not be less than 500.0mm from any beam, guider or wall.
16.4.6.4 Single truss and north- light roofs
(1) One row of detectors shall be sited along the apex of each roof or bay; these and any further
detectors needed to cover the area shall be spaced in accordance with 16.4.6.2.
16.4.6.5 Floo,' openings
(1) Detectors shall be so sited that at least one on each floor is suitably placed within 105m of
hoists, elevators, stairways, well-holes, and similar openings to the floor above.
16.4.6.6 Lantern lights
(1) Detectors fitted in lantern lights shall be protected from direct sunlight; fixed-tern perature- '.
type detectors shall be used in such location.
Note: Such locations are liable to rapid temperature variations due to combin/ltion of solar and internal heating and,
thus, ftxed-temperatere-type detectors are recommended.
16.4.6.7 Ambient temperature
(1) Where high and/or suddenly rising temperature owning to natural conditions or conditions
resulting from nonnal operation are likely, fixed-temperature detectors shall be used.
(2) The static response temperature of the detector section shall lie between lOoe and 35°C
abov.e the maximum temperature which can occur in the vicinity of the detector; and the
maximum temperature setting shall not exceed 88°e.
16.4.7 Vibration Combined with Rapid Temperature Change
(1) If detectors have to be fitted where they will be subject to shock and/or vibration and may
also experience rapid temperature changes (e.g., in covering hoist apertures), a fusible alloy
fixeQ.-temperature-type shall be used.
Note: Vibration coinciding with rising, although not dangerously rising, temperature could induce false alanns from
other types.
ETHIOPIAN BUILD1NG CODE STANDARD EBCS-10 1995353

16.4.8 Sitting of Heat-Sensitive (Line) Detectors
(1) These detectors are affected by the same phenomenon as the point detectors, and the
recommendations given in Clause 16.4.6 shall be complied with.
16.4.9 Sitting of Smoke-Sensitive Detectors
16.4.9.1 General
(1) Smoke detectors shall normally be sitted at the highest parts of the enclosed areas, and shall
be mounted so that their sensing area is not less than 25.0mm or more than 600.Omm below roof
ceiling, except as may be indicated by site tests.
16.4.9.2 Heat barrier
(1) The sitting of smoke detectors shall be arranged to take the effects of heat barrier.
Note: Wann air naturally collec~ under ceiling and in the apices of pitched roofs .. In some circumstances, this
wann air can form what is usually known as heat barrier to the products of combustion rising from fire which
is producing little change in the ambient condition. The combustion products from such a fire will spread out
below the heat barrier in the same way as they do beneath a ceiling or an apex of pitched roof.
16.4.9.3 Other factors
(1) Factors affecting the sitting, number, etc. of the smoke detectors shall be considered
carefully and the necessary measures shalL be taken.
Note: Among facts which can establish temporary or permanent conditions which have their effect on the sitting
of smoke detectors are various forms of overhead heating, air-cooled equipment, roof or ceiling of unusual
shape, lofty buildings, staircases, canteen and restaurant, plant rooms, ambient air currents.
16.4~10 Audible and Visual Alarms
16.4.10.1 General
(1) Inside a building, at least two sounders shall be installed.
(2) In case of an automatic system, an additional sounder outside the building (preferably near
five brigades access) shall be installed.

16.4.10.2 Audibility of general alarm
(1)" Alarm sounders shall satisfy the following requinnents:
a) Their type, number and location shall be such that the alarm is distinct from the
background noise in every part of the premises.
b) Their noise shall be quite distinct from any other sounders likely to be heard.
c) Alarm sounders of the same kind on a particular installation shall produce a similar
sound.
16.4.10.3 Restricted alarms
(1) Where a general alarm is undesirable (e.g. department stores, entertainment places,
hospitals), the alarm system shall be restricted to the provision of sounders out of the hearing
of the public or patients.
(2) The sounders should be supplemented by an adequate number of visual signals throughout
the premises for staff recognition only and/or by discrete special alerting facilities.
16.4.10.4 Silencing switch
(1) Silencing switches shall only be installed for transferring an alarm or fault warning to a
supervisory sounders, and shall be so arranged as to put out of service the smallest practicable
number of manual call points and detectors.
(2) The operation of a silencing switch shall neither cancel the indications of the alarm or fault
on any indicator concerned while an alarm or fault condition exists nor prevent the proper
receipt of alarms or fault warnings on any circuit other than those with which the silencing
switch is associated.
16.4.10.5 Two-stage ala,.",
(1) Where it is desired to distinguish between an alert and an evacuate signal, a two-stage alann
shall be used in which the first type of signal indicates an alert and the second type indicates a
need to evacuate the locality.

16.4.10.6 Visual alarm signals
(1) In general, visual signals shall be used to supplement audible alarms.
(2) The operation of a sounder shall not be prevented by a defect in a visual signal or
vice versa.
(3) In situations where a normal type of alarm sounder may be ineffective, e.g. where the
background noise is excessive or where the occupants are deaf, visual signals such as rotating
beacon lamps shall be used in addition.
16.4.10.7 Audible alarms provided by public address equipment
(1) Where public~address. equipment is used in stead of co~ntional sounders, it shall be

ens.ured that:
a) alarm of fire is automatically transmitted over the public addr~ss system, taking priority
and over-riding every other facility and circuit conditions of the public address system;
b) other signals such meal-break, start and stop work, are not at any time broadcastby the
public address equipment in a manner which can be confused with a fire alarm signals;
c) during alarm conditions, all microphones are automatically disconnected, except one
designated a "fire microphone" which is retained in circuit so that it can be used for
announcements and instructions relating to the fire;
d) the power supply, cabling and wiring of the system shaH comply with the requirements
of this Section.
16.5 CABLESANDWIRING
16.5.1 Cables
16.5.1.1 General
(1) Cables shall have copper conductors and the cross-sectional area of the conductors shall be
selected on the basis of the current consumption of the equipment used and the line length.
16.5.1.2 Insulation resistance
(1) The insulation resistance of the individual cable with respect to earth shall at least be
400.0Kohm.

-SECTION 16: FIRE ALARM SYSTEM AND FIRE PUMPS
16.5.1.3 Conductors cross section
(1) Conductors shall not be smaller than:
a) 1.5mm2 for individual cables pulled into raceway;

b) O.8mm2 for individual cables laid into raceway;
c) O.8mm2 for an integral assembly of two or more cables;
d) O.5mm2 for an integral assembly of four or more cables.
16.5.1.4 Suitability
(1) Cables shall be suitable for the purpose of the type listed in Annex B of Section 4.
(2) Notwithstanding the requirements in (I) above, cables smaller than 2.5mm2 installed in
raceway shall be equipment-wire type.
16.5.2 Wiring Method
16.5.2.1 Installation
(1) All conductors of a fire alarm system shall bt;~.
a) installed in a Q1etal raceway of the totally enclosed type;

b) incorporated in cable, having metal armQur or sheath;
c) installed in rigid non-metallic conduit where embedded in at least 50.0mm of mansonary
or poured concrete, or installed underground.
16.5.2.2 Conductor in building of combustible construction
(1) Conductors installed in buildings of combustible construction shall be permitted to be:
a) non-metallic sheathed cable; or

b) fire alarm and signal cable.

16.5.2.3 Segregation
(1) The conductors shall be installed so as to be entirely exclusive to a fire alarm installation
and the wiring of the alarm system shall be segregated from the wiring of any other circuits and
shall not enter a fixture, raceway, box or enclosure occupied by other wiring, except as may be
necessary for connection to:
a) the source of supply,

b) a signal,
c) an ancillary device,
d) a communication circuit.
16.5.2.4 Spacing and crossing
(1) Fire-alarm wiring shall be spaced at least 50.0mm away from the circuits of any other
service.
(2) Notwithstanding the requirements in (1) above, where crossings are unavoidable, a bridge-
of suitable non-combustible insulating material, at least 6.0mm thick, shall be securely fitted to
maintain path in air of 50.0mm between circuits.
16.5.2.5 Highest voltage
(1) All conductors contained in the same rl},cewayor cable shall be insulated for the highest
voltage in the raceway or cable.
16.5.2.6 Avoidance of flue-like opening
(1) In order to reduce the likelihood of damage to fire-alarm cables by fire, main fire alann
wiring shall avoid lift wells, staircase, and other flue-like opening.
16.5.2.7 Disruptive electrical influences
(1) If necessary, special measures shall be taken to protect the fire-alarm networks against
disruptive electrical influences (electrical interferences) resulting from lightning strike, switching
on high-power loads, electrical sparks of all types and electromagnetic waves.

16.5.2.8 Connection point
(1) The number of connection points shall be as few as possible.
(2) Any necessary connection point must be soldered or established using another very reliable
mechanical method.
16:6 EQUIPMENT BONDING
16.6.1 Exposed Non-Current Carrying Metal Part
(1) Exposed non-current-carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, including outlet boxes,
conductors, raceway, and cabinets, shall be bonded to earth in accordance with Section 7.
16.6.2 Bonding Conductor
(1) Where a non-metallic wiring system is used, a bonding conductor shall be incorporated in
each cable and shall be sized in accordance with applicable Clauses of Section 7.
16.7 POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
16.7.1 Operating Voltage
(1) The operating voltage of a fire alarm system shall not exceed 230.0V nominal whether
between conductors or· to earth.
16.7.2 Sources of Power
(1) Two mutually independent power sources shall be provided for powering a fire alarm
system. The sources shall be:
a) a general mains or an equivalent network, operated continually; and

b) a rechargeable battery which is able to power the fire alarm system with no interruption
in the events of a main's failure.
,
(2) The power sources shall be permanently connected to the fire alarm system and it shall be
ensured that failure of one power source does not result in failure of the other power source.
Notes: i) Only batteries that are suitable for stationary operation and trickle-charging must be used.
ii) Where no mains supply is available, a primary battery may be used for powt:ring fire alarm systems
provided that a second similar battery in operational condition is held in reserve at all times.

16.7.3 Current Supply
16.7.3.1 General
(1) The power supply from the electrical mains shall:
a) be dimensioned such that unrestricted bperation of the system and the altering facilities
is guaranteed; and
b) also be able to supply the trickle charge current for the battery when the system is in
normal operating condition.
16.7.3.2 Circuit connection
(1) A fire-alarm system shall be supplied by its own separate circuit connected as close as
practicable (without violating other Clauses of this Code) to:
a) the load terminals on the main service disconnect;

'b) the secondary terminal of the transformer, where transformer is necessary in order to •
supply a utilizati0n voltage required by the fire alarm system; or
c) the terminals of a transfer switch, while a fire alarm system receives emergency power
, from an emergency power source which also supply other electrical equipment. '
16.7.3.3 Fusing
(1) A fire alarm's separate circuit shall be provided with its specially marked overcurrent device
, and disconnecting means which shall be clearly identified in a permanent, conspicuous and
)
legible manner as a fire alarm system; and the disconnecting means shall be co loured red and
lockable in the "ON" position.
16.7.3.4 Charging facility
(1) The charging facility shall be dimensioned such that it if capable of recharging a battery,
the charge state of which has dropped to the cut-off voltage, automatically to 80% of its nominal
voltage within a maximum period of 24 hours.

16.7.3.5 Interruption
(1) There shall be no possibility of the fire alarm system power supply being' interrupted as a
result of other plant facilities being switched off.
16.8 FIRE PUMPS
16.8.1 Conductors
(1) Conductors shall be of copper and shall have their ampacity in accordance with Section 4
and the requirements of the pump motor.
16.8.2 Wiring Method
(1) All conductors of the fire pump equipment shall be:
a) installed in a metal raceway of the t~tally enclosed type;

b) incorporated in metal raceway of the totally enclosed type; or
c) incorporated in a cable, having a metal armour sheath of a type listed in Annex B of
Section 4.
16.8.3 Consumers' Service for Fire Pumps
16.8.3.1 Box
(1) Where fire-pump equipment is connected to a consumers' service, a separate box for the fire
pump equipment shall be permitted.
16.8.3.2 Remote location
(1) A service box for the fire pump equipment shall be permitted to be located remote from
other service box.
16.8.3.3 Labelling
(1) A service box for fire pump equipment shall be labelled in a conspicuous, legible, and
permanent manner with the letter "FIRE PUMP".

16.8.4 Protection
16.8.4.1 Overcurrent protection
(1) The rating or setting of the over-current protection for feeders and branch circuits shall be
permitted to be selected to carry locked-rotor current of the motor(s) plus the rated current of
associated equipment on the circuit.
Note: Where the locked-rotor current is not marked on a motor, 600% of the rated current shall be considered to
be the locked-rotor current.
16.8.4.2 Short circuit protection
(1) The instantaneous short circuit characteristic shall be permitted to be selected or set at a
minimum of the normal load current of the associated equipment on the circuit plus 12 times
the full load current of the motor(s).
16.8.4.3 Overload and overheating protection
(1) The branch circuit conductors and control conductors or equ~pment of a fire pump shaU not
require overload or overheating protection and shall be permitted to be protected by the motor
branch-circuit over-current device(s).
16.8.4.4 Earth-/ault circuit interrupter
(1) Earth-fault protection shall not be installed in a fire pump circuit.

ANNEX A (INFORMATIVE)
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS PRACTICAL EXAMPLES
Designations
1/1 : 1 st digit - detector and alarm device group

2nd digit - detector or alarm device number in the detector and alarm device group
FAP : Fire alarm control and indicating panel
TS : Transmission unit for fire alarm signals
...'H1i'
,"o...t- ~.
~,
..
'"V,
'"
VI
'M
on
,..... H
~I ,
""
'" l~ r:..
'8" I~/////~
'8' '8'
'8'
." 'if
g>---'ij'
Figure A.l Exampl.e - Automatic fire alarm system
II"joIN'
'"
In'''" '"
lilT •••"
1Il
Figure A.2 Example - Automatic fire alarm systems with non-automatic fire alarm
device

ELECTRICAL !NSTALLATION OF BUILDINGS
Jl4
r
)111
liS
2110 i.
4/1 (j.il
Jl12·
0 f, ~14
<'>
:i/lS
ll/ll I
III ..,ll~
Jll f, 1I1
JIM . l/lIII, RIO.

. Ill' 1319
,qlG
Hall 2/1
M~
IIG
1/1
1/4
.
III III
, ,I
II? , In 0 ~"IUMn.
'II '''fI'cIt IIwll
IIIUO '01{1
Block circuit diagram BMZ

1/10
- - - ~ 11.".101
'II"
___ -0 t::t
)IlL)
Ilu,n MMII,,,.,
1111"' 102 - IU4IMAt
w.lIt
- - - -«£? lI.n
1"1 ~I (1l1l.lIn
,--- Rus.
--~----:
Fiu O'~'f1ftl~.~
(FWI
uE: 'lull,1 Pil'" IIPTI
IUI.I.,nlll"dt
hhln. COM'Clio"
ISA
Figure A.3 Installation plant of a fire alarm system with block circuit diagram

ANNEX B (INFORMATIVE)
UIT DESIGN
B.l MANUAL ~~D AUTOMATIC CAIJL POINT CIRCUITS
B.1.1 Introduction
Whilst there are but two basic call point control circuits, i.e. 'open circuit' and 'closed circuit',
simple definition of each can be misleading because, in practice, there are employed numerous
variations and combinations of each circuit.
The type of Circuit to be used should be determined by careful consideration of the functions
required from the fire alarm system in the particular building concerned, taking into account
simplicity, reliability, liability to damage, operational supervision, cost, environment and such
other relevant factors. It is unwise to assume, in general, that one type of circuit is better thl:!n
another.
Four simplified but typical, circuits are given below. Alarm and fault-sensing units may be
relays, solid-state circuits or similar devices; call points may have mechanical contacts, solid-
state circuits, variable-resistance devices, etc. It should be appreciated that many other circuit
arrangements are possible and the following circuits should in no way be considered other than
for the purpose of illustration.
B.1.2
Circuit I _ Open circu~ Alarm-sensing unit
o
1
. 0 supply
Figure B.I Open circuit
It
Open Circuit Call Point

Current flows when the call point contacts are closed, causing the alarm-sensing unit to operate
and initiate an alarm signal.
A broken connection/conductor will prevent a call point beyond the break from operating the
alarm-sensing unit.
A short-circuit between conductors will cause the alarm-sensing unit to operate, producing an
alarm signal.
In this circuit, the alarm-sensing unit could be the alarm sounder.
B.1.3 Circuit 2 - Closed circuit
Alarm-Sensing Unit
supply
o
Closed circuit call point
Figure B. 2 Closed circuit
Current is n?rmally flowing through the cond~ctors and call points; the alarm-sensing unit is
hand operated.
When a call point's contacts are opened, the current is interrupted allowing the alarm-sensing
unit to release and initiate an alarm signal.
A broken connection/conductor i!1terrupts the current to the alarm-sensing unit, initiating an

alarm signal.

-----------------.--------------------.-------------------------
A short-circuit between conductors will allow the current to by-pass call points beyond the
short-circuit; thus, a call point beyond the short-circuit cannot interrupt the current and cannot,
therefore, initiate an alarm signal.
B.1.4 Circuit 3 - Combination of open and closed circuits, Type A
High-current '"
Limiting resistor.
Sensing Unit(alarm)
supply
O---------l Low-current ~Open circuit call point

sensing unit (fault)
Figure B.3 Combination of open and closed circuits, Type A
The conductors are closed-circuit connected; a resistor limits the current through two sensing
units to a value sufficient to hold operated the low-current (faults) sensing unit, but insufficient
to operate the high-current (alarm) sensing unit.
Open circuit call points are connected across the conductors. Operation of a call point allows
the current to by~pass the resistor. The resultant increase in current operating the high-current
(alarm) sensing unit which initiates an alarm signal.
A broken connection/conductor will interrupt the current, releasing the low-current (fault)
sensing unit- which initiates a fault signal.
A short-circuit between conductors by-passes the resistor, the resultant increase in current
operates the high-current (alarm) sensing unit, which initiates an alarm signal.
/
/

B.l.S Circuit -I - Combination open and closed circuits, Type B
Medium-current Open circuit
Sensing unit (al~ call point

o 0
High-current sensing Open circuit

Limiting
Supply 1 /
unit (fault) ~ -~~;;i~~~
call point . resistor
O----------~LoW_o"rr.n''.n'~"l ,nin, r..i::::

unit (fault) -
---~- '_._M__ ' . _
Figure B.4 Combination open and closed circuits, Type B
The conductors are "closed circuit" connected, the open-circuit call points being wired in series,
their contacts being bridged by resistors. The values of the call point resistors and of the
limiting resistor are carefully chosen to ensure that the correct current flows in the circuit during
the various conditions of fault and alarm.
Under normal conditions, the current flowing in the circuit is sufficient to hold the low-current
(fault) sensing unit operational, but is insufficient to operate either the medium- or the high-
current alarm or fault-sensing units.
Operation of a call point by-passes its call point resistor. The resultant increase in current is
sufficient to operate the medium-current alarm-sensing unit, which initiates an alarm signal, but
is insufficient to operate the high-current fault-sensing unit.
A broken connection/conductor will interrupt the current, releasing the low-current fault-sensing
unit which initiates a fault signal.
A short-circuit between conductors by-passes the limiting resistor. The resultant increase in
current is sufficient to operate both the medium-current alarm and the high-current fault-sensing
units. The former's attempt to initiate an alarm signal is overridden by the latter and a fault
signal is initiated.
Study of the above circuits will indicate that each circuit has advantages and disadvantages.
Some of these are outlined in Clause B.2.

B.2 ADV ANTAGESANDDISADV ANTAGESOFV ARIOUSCALLPOINT CIRCUITS
b.2.! Circuit 1
a) Advantages
i) This is a simple and reliable circuit.

ii) No current is consumed on stand-by; therefore, a battery and charger of moderate
size and cost may be used.
iii) A broken connection or conductor will not result in a false alarm.
b) Disadvantages
i) There will be no indication of a break in the circuit which may make some parts of
the system inoperative.
ii) A short-circuit between conductors will produce a false alarm.
iii) The call points are not monitored.
B.2.2 Circuit:2
a) Advantages
i) This is a simple and reliable circuit.

ii) The call points are monitored.
iii) The contacts and connections are monitored.
b) Disadvantages
i) Current is consumed on stand-by; therefore, the size and cost of the battery and
charger will be increased.
ii) There will be no indication of a short-circuit between conductors which may make
some parts of the system inoperative.
iii) A broken connection or conductor will cause false alarm.

B.2.3 Circuit 3 Type A
a) Advantages
i) The conductors are monitored.

ii) An open circuit of a connection or a conductor will produce afault signal; not a false
alarm.
b) Disadvantages
i) Current is consumed on stand-by.

ii) A short circuit between conductors will cause a false alarm.
iii) The call points are not monitored.
B.2.4 Circuit 4 Type B
a) Advantages
i) The conductors are monitored.

ii) An open circuit of a connection or a conductor will produce a fault signal, not a
false alarm.
Hi) A short-circuit between conductors will produce afault s~gnal, not a false alarm.
b) Disadvantages
i) Current is consumed on stand-by.

ii) The selection of values of call-point resistors and limiting resistors is critical. A
number of call points operated together may result in a fault signal instead of an
alarm signaL
iii) There is a need for introduction of additional and complex sensing equipment.
310 EBGS-10 1995 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

SECTION 17
SIGNS AND OUTLINE LIGHTING
17.1 SCOPE
(1) This provisions of this Section apply to the installation of signs and outline lighting wherein
the source of light are:
a) incandescent lamps,
b) fluorescent lamps,
c) high-voltage luminous discharge tubes including neon tubes, and
d) high intensity discharge lamps.
Note: The word "sign", when used throughout this Section, includes those of the through-wall type.
17.2 NORMATI\%REFERENCES
a) IEE:1970 The Institute of Electrical Engineers, Regulation for the Electrical

Equipment of Buildings, Fourteenth Edition (1966), Incorporating
Amendments.
b) C22,1: 1990 Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, Safety Standard for Electrical
Installation, Sixteenth Edition
17.3.1 Construction
(1) All signs and outline lighting apparatus, accessories, and fittings manufactured wholly or
in part in the field shall comply with the relevant requirements of:

a) this Code; and

b) the applicable international standards, if any, except so far as these requirements may be
modified by this Code.
(1) Each outline lighting installation and each sign other than the portable type shall be provided
with a disconnecting means which shall:
a) open all unearthed conductors;

b) be suitable for condition of installation such as exposure to weather; and
c) be integral with the sign or outline lighting.
17.3.3 Rating of Disconnecting Means and Control Devices
(1) Switches, flashers, and similar devices breaking inductive loads shall be either of a type
approved for the purpose or have a current rating of not less than twice the current rating of the
loads.
17.3.4 Thermal Protection
(1) Ballasts of the thermally-protected type shall be required for all signs and outline lighting
which employ fluorescent lamps except where the ballasts are of the simple reactance type.
17.3.5 Branch Circuit Capacity
(1) Circuits shall be arranged so that the load imposed by lamps and associated gears shall not
exceed 80% of the branch circuit overcurrent protection.
17.3.6 Location
(1) Signs and outline lighting shall be located so that all the following requirement are met:
a) Any person working thereon is not likely to come into contact with overhead conductors.
b) No part of the sign or its support will interfere with normal work operations performed
on electrical and communication utility lines.
c) No part of the sign or its support is in such proximity to overhead conductors as to
constitute a hazard.

SECTION 17: SIGNS AND OUTLINE LIGHTING
d) Unless mechanical protection is provided to prevent persons or vehicles from coming

into contact with the electrical components of the sign, no part of the sign, other than
its support, shall be located within 2.2m above grade.
17.3.7 Bonding
(1) All conductive non-current-carrying parts of the lighting installation shall be bonded to earth
in accordance with the requirements of Section 7 except for conductive parts of letters attached
to the building and illuminated from the rear.
17.3.8 Protection of Sign Leads
(1) Sign leads which pass through the walls or partitions of the sign structure shall be protected
by non-combustible, moisture-absorption resisting bushings.
17.3.9 Installation of Conductors
(1) Conductors for sign and outlying lighting shall be installed in accordance with the
requirement of Section 8.
17.3.10 Fuseholders and Flashers
(1) Fuseholder, flashers, etc. shall be enclosed in metal and shall-be accessible without the
necessity of removing obstructions or, otherwise, dismantling the sign.
17.4 HIGH-VOLTAGE LUMINOUS DISCHARGE TUBE SIGNS AND OUTLINE LIGHTING
17.4.1 Enclosure
17.4.1.1 General
(1) Enclosure for transformers, switches, timers, relays, sequencing units and other similar
devices shall be of metal or of heat and moisture resistant, non-combustible material.

17.4.1.2 Construction
(1) The enclosure shall be cC'nstructed to prevent the emission of flames or any burning or
ignited material.
17.4.1.3 Ventilation
(1) Openings for ventilation shall be arranged to comply with the requirement of 17.4.1.2 and
shall at least be 100.0mm from live parts.
17.4.1.4 Thickness
(1) Metal enclosures shall not be less than O.8mm thick and at the point where it is intended
that the supply connections be made, the enclosure shall be of not less than 1.6mm in thickness.
17.4.1.5 Marking
(1) Each enclosure housing a transformer shall be marked in accordance with the requirements •
of Clause 2.4.6.
17.4.2 Protection of Uninsulated Part
(1) Doors or covers accessible to the general public and which give access to uninsulated parts
of indoor signs or outline lighting shall either be provided with interlock switches which, on the
opening of the doors or covers, disconnect the primary circuit or shall be fastened so that the
use of other than ordinary tools will be necessary to open them.
17.4.05 Transformers
17.4.3.1 Secondary voltage
(1) The rated secondary open-circuit voltage of transformers shall not exceed 15.0kV, except
as in (2) below.
(2) In end-earthed transformers, rated secondary open-circuit voltage shall not exceed 7.5kV.
.
f ••••.

SECTION 17: SIGNS AND OUTLINE LIGHTING
17.4.3.2 . Open core-and-coil type transformer
(I) Open core-and-coil type transformers shall only be used indoor.
17.4.3.3 Transformers used outdoors
(I) Transformers used outdoor shall be of the weather':'proof type or shall be enclosed in the
sign body or in a separate weather-proof box.
(1) Transformers shall be installed in such location that they are accessible and capable of being
removed and replaced.
(2) They shall be supported by attachment to the enclosure in which they are housed by at least
two studs or bolts.
17.4.3.5 Overcurrent protection
(1) Each transformer shall be protected by an overcurrent device except that two or more
transformers may be protected by one ove-current device if their combined load does not exceed
12.0A.
17.4.4 High-Voltage Wiring Methods
17.4.4.1 Conductor installation
(I) High-voltage conductors shall be installed in:
a) transformer enclosure,
b) sign enclosure,
c) flexible metal conduit,
d) rigid conduit, or
e) other acceptable type of raceways except for surface raceways.

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF BUILDiNGS
17.4.4.2 Conductors run
(1) High-voltage conductors may be run from the ends of gas tubes to the earthed midpoint of
transformers which have terminals at the midpoint.
17.4.4.3 Bends
(1) There shall be no bends in high-voltage conductors.
17.4.4.4 Type of conductors
(1) All high voltage conductors installed inside metal sign enclosures shall be of the
luminous-tube-sign type cables.
17.4.4.5 Length of cable from transformers
(1) In a metalic raceway and in a non-metallic raceway, cables not more than a total of 6.0m
and 16.0m, respectively, shall be run from transformer to other parts of the sign.
17.4.4.6 Connection of conductors
(1) Connection of high-voltage conductors to neon tubing outside the building or structure shall
be made by means of one of the following.
a) an electrode receptacle;
b) a direct connection in the neon tubing outside the building or structure wall provided that
not more than 1.0m of high-voltage wiring extends beyond the end of the raceway;
c) any other acceptable methods.
Note: The connection in (b) shall be electrically secure and provided with acceptable wrapping of insulating tape.
376 EBCS-10 1995

SECTION 18
LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND SIMILAR
EQUIPMENT
18.1 SCOPE
(1) This Section applies to the installation of electrical equipment for passenger, good's or
dual-purpose elevators (lifts), including dumbwaiters, escalators, movmg walks, freight platform
lifts, and elevating devices for the handicapped.
a) C 22.1: 1990 Canadian Electric(il Code Part I, Safety Standard for Electrical
b) NFPA 70/NEC:1986 National Firr Protection Association/American National

18.3 GENERAL
18.3.1 Voltage Limitation
(1) The nominal voltage used for lift operating control and signalling circuits, operating
equipment, driving machine motors, machine brakes, and motor generator sets shall not exceed
the following:
a) 380.0Y for operating control and signalling circuits and related equipment, including
door operator motors.
b) 750.0Y for driving motors, machine brakes, and motor-generator sets.

Exemption: Higher voltages shall be pennitted for driving motors of motor generator sets.
18.3.2 Live Parts Enclosed
(1) All live parts of electric apparatus in hoistways, at landings or in or on the cars of lights and
dumbwaiters or in the well-ways or the landing of escalators, or moving walks shall be enclosed
to protect against accidental contact.
18.4 CONDUCTORS
18.4.1 Installation of Conductors
18.4.1.1 Hoistway door interlocking wiring
(1) The conductors to the hoistway door interlocks from the hoistway riser shall be
flame-retardant and suitable for temperature of not less than 200°C.
18.4.1.2 Travelling cables
(1) Travdling cables used as flexible connections between the lift car and the raceway shall be
of the types of lift cables or other approved type.
18.4.1.3 Other wiring
(1) All conductors in raceways, in or on the cars of lifts and dumbwaiters, in the well-ways of
escalators and moving walks, and in the machine room of lifts, escalators, and moving walks
shall have flame-retardant insulation.
18.4.1.4 Insulation rating
(I) All conductors shall have an insulation voltage rating equal to at least the maximum nominal
circuit voltage rating of any conductor within the enclosure, cable or raceway.
18.4.2 Minimum Size of Conductors
(1) The minimum size of conductors used for lifts, dumbwaiters, escalators, and moving walk
wiring, other than conductors that forms an integral part of control equipment, shall be as follow:

SECTION 18: LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND SIMILAR EQUIPMENT
a) for lighting circuits, 1.5mm2; and

b) for operating control and signalling circuits, 0.5mm2•
18.4.3 Motor Circuit Conductors
(l) Conductors supplying lifts, dumbwaiters, escalator, or moving walk motors shall have an
ampacity of:
(a) if supplying single motor, not less than 150% of the motor full-load current rating.
(b) if supplying two or more motors, not less than 125% of the nameplate current rating
of the highest rated motor in the group plus the sum of the nameplate current ratings
of the remainder of the motors in the group.
18.5 WIRING
18.5.1 Wiring Methods
18.5.1.1 In hoistway, machine rooms, and escalator wellways
(l) Conductors located in hoistway, machine rooms and escalator well-ways, except travelling
cables, shall be installe~ in rigid metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, or metal wireways,
except that flexible metal conduit or armoured cable shall be permitted only if not subjected to
mechanical damage.
Exemption: Mineral-insulated cable or aluminium-sheathed cable may be used if located so that there is no liability
of damage to the sheath.
18.5.1.2 (In cars
(l) Conductors on lift and dumbwaiter cars shall be run in rigid metal conduit, electrical
metallic tubing, or wireways, except that:
a) short runs of flexible metal conduit or armoured cable may be used where they are
securely fastened in place and not exposed to oil or grease;
b) hard usage flexible cord shall be permitted to be used between fixed wiring on the car
and switching or sensing devices on the door or gate, and between the fixed car top
inspection light and an extension light controlled by the same switch, provided it is
securely fastened and so located as to not be subject to mechanical injury;

c) mineral-insulated cable. or aluminium-sheathed cable may be used if located so that there

is no liability or damage to the sheath.
18.5.2 Branch Circuits for Auxiliary Systems
18.5.2.1 Car lighting and accessories
(1) In passenger lifts, at least one branch circuit shall be provided solely for the lighting and
accessories on each car.
18.5.2.2 Air conditioning
(1) Where air conditioning units are installed on the car, they shall be supplied by separate
branch circuits.
18.5.2.3 Protection device location
(1) The overcurrent device protecting each branch circuit shall be located in the machine room.
18.6 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS
18.6.1 Number of Conductors in Raceway
(1) The sum of the cross-sectional area of the operating and control circuit conductors In
raceways shall not exceed 40% the interior cross-sectional area of the raceway.
18.6.2 Supports
(1) Supports for cables or raceways in a hoistway or in an escalator or moving walkways shall
be securely fastened to the guide rail or to hoistway well-way construction.
18.6.3 Different Systems in One Raceway or Travelling Cable
(1) Conductors for operating, control, power, signalling and lighting circuits of 600.0Y or less
shall be permitted to be run in the same travelling cable or raceway system if all conductors are
insulated for maximum voltage found in the cables or raceway system and if all live parts of the
equipment are insulated from earth for the maximum voltage.

(2) Such travelling cable or raceway in (1) above shall be pennitted to include shielded
conductors and/or one or more coaxial cable if such conductors are insulated for the maximum
voltage found in cable or raceway system. Conductors shall be pennitted to be covered with
suitable shielding for telephone, audio, video or higher frequency communication circuits.
18.6.4 Wiring in Hoistway
(1) Main feeders for supplying power to lifts and dumbwaiters shall be installed outside the
hoistway (hoist shaft).
Note: Only wiring, raceways, and cables that are or form part of lift or dumbwaiter installation, including wiring
for signals, for communication with the car, for lighting, heating, air conditioning and ventilating th~ car,
for fire detecting systems, for pit pumps, and for heating and lighting the hoistway, shall be permitted inside
the hoistway.
18.6.5 Electric Equipment in Garages and Similar Occupancies
(1) Electric equipment and wiring used for lifts, dumbwaiters, escalators, and moving walks in
garages shall comply with the requirements of Section 12 (Class I locations). Wiring and
equipment located on the underside of the car platfonn shall be considered as being located in
the hazardous area.
18.6.6 Sidewalk Lifts
(1) Sidewalk lifts with sidewalk doors located exterior to the building shall have all electrical
wiring in metallic tubing and all electrical outlets, switches, junction boxes and fittings shall be
weather-proof.
18.7 TRAVELLING CABLES
18.7.1 Suspension
(1) Travelling cables shall be so suspended at the car and hoistway's ends as to reduce the strain
on the individual copper conductors to a minimum and shall be supported by one of the
following means:
a) by its steel supporting members;

b) by looping the cable around supports for unsupported lengths less than 30.0m;

c) by suspending from the supports by means that automatically tightens around the cable
when tension is increased for unsupported lengths upto 60.0m.
18.7.2 Hazardous (Classified) Location
(1) In hazardous (classified) locations, travelling cables shall be of a type approved for
hazardous (classified) locations and shall be secured to explosion-proof cabinets.
18.7.3 Protection Against Damage
(1) Travelling cable supports shall be so located as to reduce to a minimum the possibility of
damage due to the cable coming into contact with the hoistway construction or equipment in the
hoistway; and where necessary, suitable guards shall be provided to protect the cable against
damage.
18.7.4 Installation
(1) Travelling cable shall be permitted to be run without the use of raceway or conduit for a
distance not exceeding 1.8m from the first point of support on the lift car or hoistway wall
provided the conductors are grouped together and tapped or corded or in the original sheath.
(2) Travelling cables shall be permitted to be continued to lift control panels and to lift car and
machine room connections as fixed wiring provided they are suitably supported and protected
from damage.
18.8 DISCONNECTING MEANS AND CONTROL
18.8.1 General
(1) Lifts, dumbwaiters, escalators, and moving walks shall have a single means for
disconnecting all unearthed main power supply conductors for each unit.
(2) Where multiple driving machines are connected to a single lift, escalator, moving walk or
pumping unit, there shall be one disconnecting means to disconnect the motor(s) and control
devices.

SECTION 18: LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND 'SIMILAR EQUIPMENT
(3) Where there is more than one driving machine in a machine room, disconnecting means
shall be number-marked to correspond to the number-mark of the driving machine which they
control.
18.8.2 Type
(1) The disconnecting means shall be an enclosed, externally operable, fused motor circuit
switch or circuit breaker to be locked in the open position.
(2) No provision shall be made to close the disconnecting means in (1) above from any other
part of the premises; nor shall circuit breakers be opened automatically by a fire alarm system.
18.8.3 Location
(1) Disconnecting means shall be located where they are readily accessible to qualified persons.
18.8.4 Phase Protection
18.8.4.1 Electric lifts
(1) Lifts. driven by polyphase alternating current shall be provided with a means to prevent
starting of the lift when:
a) the phase rotation is in the wrong direction, or

b) there is a failure in any phase.
18.8.4.2 Hydraulic lifts
(1) Hydraulic lifts powered by a polyphase alternating current motor shall be provided with the
means to prevent overheating of the drive system (pump and motor) due to phase-rotation
reversals or failure.
18.9 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
18.9.1 Control and Operating Circuits
(1) Control and operating circuits and signalling circuits shall be protected against overcurrent
in accordance with the requirements of the relevant Clauses of Section 9.

18.9.2 Motors
18.9,2,1 Non-continuous duty
(1) Duty on lift and dumbwaiter driving-machine motors and driving motors of motor-generators
used with generator field control shall be classed as non-continuous. Such motors shall be
protected against overcurrent in accordance with applicable Clauses of Section 11.
18.9,2.2 Continuous duty
(1) Duty on escalators and moving-walk driving motors shall be classed as continuous. Such
motors shall be protected against overcurrent in accordance with applicable Clauses of
Section 11.
18.10 MACHINE ROOM
18.10.1 Guarding Equipment
(1) Lifts, dumbwaiters, escalators, and moving walk driving machines, motor-generator sets,
motor controllers, and disconnecting means shall be installed in a room or enclosure set aside
for that purpose.
(2) The room or the enclosure in (1) above shall be secured against unauthorized access.
18.10.2 Clearance around Control Panels and Disconnecting Means
(1) Sufficient clear working space shall be provided around control panels and disconnecting
means to provide safe and convenient access to all live parts of the equipment necessary for
maintenance and adjustment.
18.11 EARTIllNG
18.11.1 Metal Raceway Attached to Cars
(1) Metal raceways attached to lift cars shall be bonded to earthed metal parts of the car with
which they come into contact.

18.11.2 Electric Lifts
(1) For electric lifts, the frames of all motors, lift machines, controllers, and the metal
enclosures of all electric devices in or on the car or in the hoistway shall be earthed in
accordance with Section 7.
18.11.3 Non-Electric Lifts
(1) For lifts other than electric and having any electric conductors attached to the car, the metal
frame of the car, where normally accessible to persons, shall be earthed in accordance with
Section 7.
18.11.4 Method of Bonding
18.11.4.1 Equipment
(1) Equipment mounted on members of an earthed structural metal frame of a building shall be
deemed to be bonded to earth.
18.11.4.2 Metal car frame supported by cables
(1) Metal car frames supported by metal hoisting cables attached to or running over metal
sheaves or drums of lift machines and affording metal-to-metal contact therewith shall be
deemed to be bonded to earth when the machine is bonded to earth in accordance with
Section 7.
18.12 OVERSPEED
18.12.1 Overspeed Protection
(1) Under overhauling load conditions, a means shall be provided on the load side of each lift
power disconnecting means to prevent the lift from attaining a speed equal to the governor
tripping speed or a speed in excess of .125% of the lift rated speed, whichever is smaller.
(2) Overhauling load conditions shall include all loads upto rated lift loads for goods lifts and
all loads upto 125% for the rated lift loads for passenger lifts.
____ ~~~~~~~===~~~~========J.4
l
18.12.2 Motor-Generator Overspeed Device
(1) Motor generators driven by direct current motors and used to supply direct current for the
operation of lift machine motors shall be provided with speed-limiting devices that will prevent
the lift from attaining, at any time, a speed of more than 125% of its rated speed.
18.13 EMERGENCY POWER
18.13.1 Supply
(1) A lift shall be permitted to operate from an emergency power supply in the event of normal
supply failure, provided the lift operates on such emergency power in accordance with the
emergency power system requirements of a recognized international safety code for lifts.
18.13.2 Disconnection
(1) The disconnecting means shall disconnect the emergency power service from the normal
power service.
18.13.3 Hydraulic Lifts Disconnecting Means
(1) In the case of hydraulic lifts where emergency power is supplied from a second source for
lowering the car only, the disconnecting means shall be provided with an auxiliary contact that
is positively opened mechanically, the opening not being solely dependent on springs, and
connected in the control circuit to prevent movement of the car when the disconnecting means
is open.
18.14 MACHINE ROOMS AND HOISTWAY PITS LIGHTING AND AUXILIARY

SYSTEMS
18.14.1 Machine Room
18.14.1.1 Lighting
(1) Permanent provision of adequate artificial light shall be made in machine rooms of power
lifts.

SECTION 18: LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND'SIMILAR EQUIPMENT
18.14.1.2 Illumination level
(I) IHumination shall be not less than lOO.O/x at floor level.
18.14.1..3 Lighting switch
(1) The machine room lighting switch shall be within easy reach of the entrance to the machine
room.
18.14.1.4 Socket outlet
(1) At least one duplex (twin) socket outlet connected to 16.0A branch circuit supplying no
.othersocket outlets shall be installed in the machine room.
18.14.2 Hoist ·Pits
18.14.2.1 Luminaire
(I) -OneQf mote p.ennaAent luminaire equipped with a guar.d of metal, safety glass or suitable
plastic matedal shaH tbeprovided in aU pits.
t8.14.2.2 Illumination level
The luminaires shall provide an illuminations level of at least lOO.O/x at the pit floor.
18.14.2.3 Lighting switch
(I) A Hghtswitchshall 'be 'provided ,and shall be located so as lobe accessible from the pit
access door.
(1) At least one twin socket outlet connected to a 1'6:0A branch circuit supplying no other
socket outlet shall ,be installed in .each ;pit.
EIHUOPIAN ,BUILDING ,CODE STANDARD EBCS-10 1995387

\SECTION 19
THEATRE INSTALLATION
19.1 SCOPE
(1) This Section applies to electrical equipment and their installations in buildings or parts' of
a building designed, intended, or used for drama, opera, motion picture, or other shows.
(1) The following reference contains provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute •
provisions of ,the Ethiopian Building Code Standard on Electrical Installation of Buildings.
a) C22.1: 1990 Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, Safety Standard for Electrical
Installation, Sixteenth Edition.
19.3 WIRING METHOD
(1) Wiring in stage and stage wing areas, orchestra pits, and projection booths shall be in rigid
metal conduit, armoured cable, lead-sheathed armoured cable, or aluminium-sheathed cable
except that:
a) other wiring methods shall be permitted for temporary work,and

b) flexible cord or cable shall be permitted in accordance with other Clauses in this Section.
(2) Surface raceways shall not be used on the stage side of the proscenium wall.
(3) Wiring in areas other than those listed in (1) above shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the appropriate Sections of this Code.
(4) Circuits for aisle lights located under seats may supply 30 outlets provided that the size of
lamp which can, be used with each outlet is limited by barriers or the equivalent to 25.0W or
less.

SECTION 19: THEATRE INSTALLATION
19.4 FIXED STAGE SWITCHBOARD
(1) Stage switchboard shall be:
a) of the dead-front type, and

b) protected above with a suitable metal guard or hood extending the full length of the
board and completely covering the space between the wall and the board to protect the
latter from falling objects.
(2) Where a stage switchboard has exposed live parts on the back of the board, it shall be
enclosed by the walls of the building, by wire mesh grills, or by other acceptable methods.
(3) The entrance to the enclosures shall have a self-closing door.
(4) Switches shall be of the enclosed type and externally operated.
(5) Pilot lamp on switchboard shall be:
(a) installed within every switchboard enclosure,

(b) connected to the circuit supplying the 'switchboard so that the opening of the master
switch does not cut off the supply to the lamp, and
(c) on an independent circuit protected by an overcurrent device rated or set at not more
than 15.0A.
19.4.1 Fuses
(1) Fuses on switchboards shall be:
a) of either the plug or cartridge type, and

b) provided with enclosures in addition to the switchboard enclosure.
(1) All circuits leaving the switchboard shall have an overcurrent protection device connected
in each unearthed conductor.
\
/ /

ELECTl1lCALINSfALtAflON
,~, , '_'_~"" __"'_<" ••• .. "._ .. _. H __ .•"._,
OF BUILDINGS
_. om. ~_. ••• _
19.4.3 Dimmers
(1) Dimmers shall be connected so as to' be dead when their respective circuit switches are
open.
(2) Dimmers which do Mt open the circuit may be connected in earthed neutral conductor.
(3) The tenninals of dimmers shall be enclosed.
(4) Dimmer faceplates shall be llf1'anged so thllta~cidental contact cannot readily be made with
the faceplate ContactS.
19.4.4 Control ofStllgeand Gallery Pockets
(1) Stage and galiery pockets shall be ~ontrolled from the switchboard.
19.4.5 Conductors
(1) Stage switchboards equipped with re's'istlve~'or transfortfied~typ'€ dimmer :switches ,shaH be
wired witheonductotshaving insulatio'nsuhable for the temperature generated therein; put in
no case shaH the design temperature be less than f2sot.
(2) Th'e conductors in (1) above shall have anampadty of hot less than that of the switch or
overcurtent device to which they are connected.
(3) Holes in the metal enclosure through which conductors pass shaH be bushed.
(4) The strands of the conductor shall be soldered together hefore they are fastened under!a
clamp or binding screw.
(5) Where a conductor of lO.Omm? or 'Of a larger size is connected toa terminal:
-a) it 'shallbe .soldered into a lug;, or
b)a soiderlesscbhnectot .shaH'be used·.
etHloP1AN 13UILDING CODE 'STANDARD

SECTION 19: THEATRE INSTALlATION
19.5 PORT ABLE SWITCHBOARD ON STAGE
19.5.1 Construction of Portabl~ Switc"bo~rds
(1) portable switchboards shall be pla~ed within ~nclosure of substanti!ll construction; but they
may be arranged so that the enclosure is open during operation.
(2) Then~ shall be no live parts exposed wit.hin the, enclosure. ~x.cept thos~.on.dimmer faqeplates.
19.5.2 Supply for Portable SwjtcbbOjlrd
(1) Portable switchboards shall be supplied by means of flexible cord elf cable. of e.xtra"bard
usage type tenninating within the switchboard enclps\lre in an e~terncllly operated, en~loseQ~
fused master switch.
(2) The master switch in (1) llbove shall be arrMged so as tel cyt off qurr~l1t from all apparatus.
within the enclos\lre except the pilot light.
(3) The flexible cord or cable shall have sufficient ~apcity to carry the total load, CijITent of
the switchboard.
(4) The ampere-rating of the fuses of the m!lster switch shall not be greater than tile tQtlllloaQ
current of the swltehboCU'd.
19.6 FIXED STAGE EQUIPMENT
19.6.1 FoptHght$
(1) Where footlights are wired in rigid metal conduit or electrical me.taJli9 tubing, every
lampholder shall b~ instllUed in an indivig)Jal outlet box.
(2) Where footlights are not wired in rigid metal conduit or electrical met/dUe tubing, the wiring
shall be installed in a metlll trough.
19.6.2 Metalwork
(1) The metalwork for footlights, borders, pro!!ceniu!ll sidelights, and strips shall not be les'"
than Q.8mm thick.
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD EBC$-1 0 199~ 391

(2) The metalwork for bunches and portable strips shall be not less than O.5mm thick.
19.6.3 Clearance at Terminals
(1) The terminals of lampholders shall be separated from the metal of the trough by at least
13.0mm.
(1) Borders, proscenium sidelights, and strips shall be constructed so that the flanges of the
reflectors or other suitable guards protect the lamps from mechanical injury and from accidental
contact with scenery or other combustible material.
19.6.5 Suspended Fixtures
(1) Borders and strips shall be so suspended as to be electrically and mechanically safe.
19.6.6 Connections at Lampholders
(1) Conductors shall be soldered to the terminals of lampholders unless other suitable means are •
provided'to obtain positive and reliable connection under severe vibration. -,
19.6.7 Ventilation for Mogul Lampholers
(1) Where the lighting device are equipped with mogullampholders, the lighting devices shall
be constructed with double walls and with adequate ventilation between the walls.
19.6.8 Conductor Insulation for Field-Assembled Fixtures
(1) Foot, border, proscenium, and portable striplight fixtures assembled in the field shall be
wired with conductors having insulation suitable for the temperature at which the conductors will
be operated; but in no case shall the design temperature be less than 125°C.
19.6.9 Branch Circuit Overcurrent Protection
(1) Branch circuits for footlights, border lights, and proscenium sidelights shall have overcurrent
protection in accordance with 15.3.1.4.

19.6~10Pendant Lights Rated More Than 100.0W
(1) Where. a pendent lighting device contains a lamp or group of lamps of more than IOO.OW
capacity, it shall be provided with a guard of not more than 13.0mm mesh so arranged as to
prevent damage from falling glass.
19.6.11Cables for Border Lights
(1) Flexible cord or cable for border lights shall be of extra-hard-usage type.,
(2) The flexible cord or cable shall be fed from points on the grid iron or from other acceptable
overhead points; but they shall not be fed from side walls.
(3) The flexible cord or cable shall be arranged so that strain is taken from clamps and binding
screws.
(4) Where the flexible cord or cable passes through a metal or wooden enclosure, a metal
bushing shall be provided to protect the cord.
(5) Terminals or binding posts to which flexible cords or cables are connected inside the
switchboard enclosure shall be located so as to permit convenient access to them.
19.6.12 Wiring to Arc Pockets
(1) Where the wiring to arc pockets is in rigid metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing, the,
end of the conduit or tubing shall be exposed at a point approximately 300.0mm away from the
pocket, and the wiring shall be continued in flexible metal conduit in the form of a loop at least
600.0mm long, with sufficient slack to permit the raising or lowering of the box.
19.6.13 Socket Outlets and Plugs
(1) Socket outlets intended for the connection of arc lamps shall:
a) have an ampere rating not less than 40.0A, and

b) be supplied by copper conductors not smaller than 16.0mm2•

ELECTRICAl- INSTALLATION OF BUILDINGS
(2) Socket outlets intended for the connection of incandescent lamps shall:
a) have an ampere rating not less than 16.0A, and

b) be supplied by conductors not smaller than 4.0mm2 copper or 6.0mm2 aluminium.
(3) Plugs for arc and incandescent socket outlets shall not be interchangeable.
19.6.14 Curtain Motors
(1) Curtain motors shall be of the closed type.
19.6.15 Flue Damper Control
(1) Where stage flue dampers are released by an electrical device, the circuit operating the
device shall, in normal operation, be closed.
(2) The circuit shall be controlled by at least two single-pole switches enclosed in metal boxes
with self-closing doors without locks or latches.
(3) One switch shall be placed at the electrician's station and the other at a suitable place.
(4) The device shall be:
a) designed for the full voltage of the circuit to which it is connected, or resistance being
inserted;
b) located in the loft above the scenery; and
c) enclosed in a suitable metal box with a tight self-closing door.
19.7 PORT ABLE STAGE EQUIPMENT
19.7.1 Fixtures on Scenery
(1) Fixtures attached to stage scenery shall be:
a) of the internally wired type, or

b) wired with flexible cord or cable suitable for hard usage.
(2) The fixtures shall be secured firmly in place.

(3) The stems of the fixtures shall be carried through to the back of the scenery and shall have
a suitable bushing on the end thereof.
19.7.2 String or Festooned Lights
(1) Joints in the wiring of string or festooned lights shall be staggered where practicable.
(2) Where the lamps of string or festooned lights are enclosed in paper lanterns, shades, or other
devices of combustible material, they shall be equipped with lamp guards.
19.7.3 Flexible Conductors from Portable Equipment
(1) Flexible conductors for arc lamps, bunches, or other portable equipment shall be of extra-
hard-usage type cord or cable; but for separate miscellaneous portable devices operated under
conditions where the conductors are not exposed to severe mechanical injury, reinforced cords
of ordinary type may be used provided that they are protected by an overcurrent device rated
or set at not more than 16.0A.
19.7.4 Portable Equipment for Stage Effects
(1) Portable equipment for stage effects shall be of a type acceptable for the purpose and shall ~
be so located that flames, sparks, or hot particles cannot come in contact with combustible
material.

SECTION 20
EMERGENCY SYSTEMS, UNIT
EQUIPMENT, AND EXIT SIGNS
20.1 SCOPE
(1) This Section applies to:
a) the installation, operation and maintenance of emergency system and unit equipment
intended to supply illumination and to emergency systems intended to ~upply power,
where required by the authority having jurisdiction, and
b) thewiring of exit signs.
(1) The following reference contains provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute
a) C22.1: 1990 Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, Safety Standard for Electrical
20.3 GENERAL
20.3.1 Capacity
(1) Emergency systems and unit equipment shall have adequate capacity and rating to ensure
the satisfactory operation of all connected equipment when the general power supply fails.

SECTION 20: EMERGENCY SYSTEMS, UNIT EQUIPMENT, AND EXIT SIGNS
20.3.2 Instruction
(1) Complete instructions for the operation and maintenance of the emergency system or unit
equipment which shall also specify testing at least once every month td ensure security of
operation, shall be posted on the premises in a frame under glass.
20.3.3 Batteries Maintenance
(1) When batteries are used as a source of supply, the batteries shall be kept:
a) in proper condition, and

b) fully charged at all times.
20.3.4 Lamps
(1) Emergency lights shall be so arranged that the failure of one lamp will not leave the area
normally illuminated by it in total darkness.
20.3.5 Circuits
(1) No appliance or lamp, other than those req~ired for emergency purposes, shall be supplied
by the emergency circuits.
20.3.6 Method of Wiring
20.3.6.1 General
(1) The method of wiring, including that between unit equipment and remote lamps, shall be
in accordance with the provisions of Section 8.
20.3.6.2 Segregation
(1) The wiring shall be kept entirely independent of all other wiring and equipment and shall
not enter a fixture, raceway, box, or cabinet occupied by other wiring except, where necessary:
a) in transfer switch, and

b) in emergency lighting fixtures supplied from two sources.
ETHIOPIAN EmlIDING CODE STANDARD EBCS-10 1995 397

20.4 EMERGENCY SYSTEMS
20.4.1 Supply
(1) The emergency supply shall be a standby supply consisting of:
a) a storage battery of the rechargeable type having sufficient capacity to supply and
maintain the total load of the emergency circuits at not less than 91% of the full voltage
for the time period required by the authority having jurisdiction, but in no case less than
Y2hr, and be equipped with a charging means to maintain the battery in a charged
condition automatically.
Note: Automobile batteries and lead batteries not of the enclosed glass-jar type are not considered suitable.
b) a generator driven by a dependable prime mover and it shall be:
i) of capacity sufficient to carry the load, and

ii) ~rranged to start automatically without failure and without undue delay upon the
failure of the current supply of the principal equipment of the building.
iO.4.2 Control
(1) The current supply for emergency systems shall be controlled by an automatic transfer
switch which energizes the emergency system upon failure of the normal current supply and is
accessible only to authorized persons.
(1) No device capable of interrupting the circuit, other than the overcurrent device for the
current supply of the emergency system, shall be placed ahead of the branch circuit overcurrent
device.
20.4.4 Audible and Visual Trouble Signal Devices
20.4.4.1 Trouble signal
(1) Every emergency system shall be equipped with audible and visual trouble signal devices
which give warning of derangement of the current source or sources and which indicate when
the emergency load is supplied from batteries or generators.
398 EBCS·10 1995 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

20.4.4.2 Wiring
(1) Audible trouble signals may be wired so that:
a) they can be silenced, but a red-warning or trouble light shall continue to provide the
protective function, and
b) when the system is restored to normal, the audible signal wiU:
i) sound, thus indicating the necessity of restoring the s.ilencing switch to its normal
position, or
ii) reset automatically so as to sound for any subsequent operation 'of the emergency
system.
20.4.4.3 Voltagedrop
(1) The voltage drop in the wiring feeding lamps mounted remote from the 'currenfsupply shaH
not exceed 5% of the applied voltage.
20.S UNIT EQUIPMENT
20.S.1Mounting
(1) Each unit equipment shall be mounted with the bottom of enclosure not'less than 2.0m
above the floor wherever practicable.
Note: Unit equipment for 'emergency lighting is defined ,as an -item of equipment that:
i) is intended to provide automatically , in response to ,afailure of a power supply 'to which it is connected,
'specified ,light output and a specified amount of power for illumination purposes, for a specified period
of time, but in any case not :Iess than 30.0min;
ii) comptises,in 'a unit construction, a storage battery , 'charging means to maintain the battery in a charged
condition automatically, lamps, ·ot output terminals to which specifically listed lamps may be connected,
means to energize the lamps when the normal power supply fails and to de-energize the lamps when the
normal power supply is reStored, and means to indicate and test the operating conditions of the
equipment.
ETHIOPIAN BUilDING CODE STANDARD iEBCS..:10 1'995 399

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF BUILDI~GS
20.5.2 Supply Connections
20.5.2.1 Outlet distance
(1) Outlet point to which unit equipment is to be connected shall be not more than 1.5m.from
the location of the unit equipment.
20.5.2.2 Connection to supply
(1) Unit equipment shall be permanently connected to the supply if:
a) the voltage rating exceeds 230.0V, or

b) the marked input rating exceeds 24.0A.
(2) Where the above ratings are not exceeded, the unit equipment may be connected using the
flexible cord and attachment plug supplied with the equipment.
(1) Unit equipment shall be installed in such a manner that it will be automatically acthlated
upon the failure of the power supply to the normal lighting in the area covered by that unit
equipment.
20.5.2.4 Feeding
(1) Unit equipment shall be fed, where practicable, from the same panel board, and may be fed
from the same branch circuit which feeds the normal lighting in the area covered by that unit
equipment.
20.5.2.5 Voltage drop
(1) The circuit conductors to lamps mounted remote from supply source shall be of such size
that the voltage drop does not exceed 5% of the marked output voltage of the unit equipment.
20.5.2.6 Excess load
(1) The number of lamps connected to single equipment shall not result in a load that is in
excess of the watt output rating marked on the equipment for the required emergency period.

20.6 EXIT SIGNS
20.6.1 Power Supply
(1) The power supply for exit signs shall be provided from:
a) a separate circuit or circuits used for no other purpose, or

b) the circuit supplying exit lighting
20.6.2 Wiring
(1) Exit signs shall be wired in accordance with the provisions of Section 8 of this Code.

SECfION 21
MOTION PICfURE STUDIOS, PROJECTION
ROOMS, FILM EXCHANGES AND FACTORIES
21J. SCOPE
(1) This Section sets provisions and installation requirements that apply to motion-picture
studios, projection rooms, exchanges, factories and any building in which motion-picture
films, pyroxylin plastic and nitrocellulose x-ray and photographic films are manufactured,
projected, developed, printed, rewound, repaired or stored.
(1) The following r,eferencescontain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute •
provisions ,ofthe Ethiopian Building Code Standard conElectrical Installat,ionof Buildings:
a) C22.1.:199(:) Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, Safety Standard for

b) NFPA70/NEC:1986 National Fire Pwtection Association / American National

Electrical Code, 1987 Edition
21.3 GENERAL
21-.3.1 Wir.ing Method
(1) The wiring method, unless specifiedofherwise in subclause·of'this Section, shall be rigid
conduit, steel electrical metallic tubing, or mineral-insulated cable.
(2) The wiring for stage-set lighting, stage. ,effects, electric equipment used as stage
properties, ,and other wiring not fixed as to location, shall 'be done with approved flexible
cords and cables.
,402 EBCS-1G1995 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

SECTION 21: MOTION PICTURE STUDIOS, PROJECTION ROOMS, ETC
(3) For portable lamps other than those used as properties in a motion-picture set on a
studio stage or similar location, the lamp holders shall be:
a) unswitched,
b) of composition or metal sheathed procelain, and
c) provided with a guard hook and handle.
21.4 VIEWING, CUTTING AND PATCHING TABLE FIXTURE
(1) All lighting fixtures, except lamps forming an integral part of table equipment, shall be
of the totally-enclosed gasketted type.
21.5 FILM VAULTS AND STORAGE ROOMS
21.5.1 Equipment in Film Vaults and Storage. Rooms
(1) In rooms used for storage of pyroxylin plastic, no socket outlet or attachment plugs
shall be installed.
(2) .No electrical equipment other than that necessary for fixed lighting shall be installed
in film vaults.
21.5.2 Wiring Method in Film Vaults
(1) The wiring method in film-vault shall be rigid-conduit or mineral-insulated cable only,
with threaded joints at couplings boxes and fittings.
(2) Conduit or cable shall not run directly from vault to vault, but only form the switch to
the lighting fixture within the vault.
(3) Conduit shall be sealed off near the switch enclosure with a fitting and compound
approved for the purpose.
21.5.3 Lighting Fixtures in Film Vaults
(l) Lighting fixtures in film vaults shall be of the explosion-proof type approved for the use
in Class I Group C hazardous locations and shall have metal cages or guards protecting the
globs.
j
~-L
(2) The fixtures in (1) above shall be located as close as practicable to the ceiling to avoid
their being damaged through handling of film containers.
21.5.4 Film Vault Circuits
(1) Fixtures shall be controlled by a double pole switch located outside the film vault.
(2) A red pilot light shall be provided to indicate when the switch is closed and shall be
located outside the film vault.
(3) Wiring shall be arranged so that, when the switch is off, all conductors within the film
vault will be dead.
21.6 MOTION PICTURE PROJECTION ROOMS
21.6.1 Lamps in Projection Rooms
(1) Incandescent lamps in projection rooms or booths shall be provided with a lamp guard
unless otherwise protected by noncombustible shades or other enclosures.
21.6.2 Arc Lamp Current Supply
(1) Motor generator sets, frequency changers, transformers, rectifiers, rheostats, and similar
equipment for the supply or control of current to arc lamps or projectors shall be located
in a room separate from the projection room.
21.6.3 Ventilation
(1) Exhaust ventilation fans for the projection room shall be controlled from inside the
projection room.
21.7 MOTORS AND GENERATORS
(1) Motors and generators having brushes or sliding contacts, other than those used on
studio stages or those installed in accordance with Clause 21.6.2, shall be of approved dust-
tight or enclosed types.

SECfION 22
DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING INSTALLATION
22.1 SCOPE
(1) This Section of the Code applies to the installation of x-ray and other diagnostic
imaging equipment operating at any frequency. However, it does not specify safeguards
against direct, stray, or secondary radiation emitted by the equipment.
provisions of the Ethiopian Building Code Standard on Electrical Installation of Buildings:
a) C22.1:1990 Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, Safety Standard for Electrical

b) NFPA70/NEC:1986 National Fire Protection Association! American National

22.3 DEFINITIONS
(1) For the purpose of this Section, in addition to the terms defined in Section 1, the following
definitions shall apply when referring to x-ray or computerized tomography equipment,
long-time rating a rating that is applicable for an operating period of5.0min or more.
momentary rating a rating that is applicable for an operating period of not more than
20.0s.

22.4 mGH-VOLTAGE GUARDING
(1) High-voltage parts shall be mounted within metal enclosures that are bonded to eaith except
when installed in separate rooms or enclosures where a suitable switch shall be:
a) provided to control the circuit supplying diagnostic imaging equipment, and

b) arranged so that it will be in an open position except when the door of the room or
enclosure is locked.
(2) High voltage parts of diagnostic imaging equipment shall be insulated from the enclosure.
(3) Conductors in the high voltage circuits shall be of the shock-proof type.
(4) A milliammetre, if provided, shall be:
a) connected, if practicable, in the lead that is bonded to earth;' or

b) guarded if connected in the high voltage lead.
22.5 CONNECTIONS TO SUPPLY CmCUIT
(1) Permanently connected diagnostic imaging equipment shall be connected to the power
source by means of a wiring method meeting the general requirements of this Code except that
equipment properly supplied by a bran~h circuit rated at not over 30.0A shall be permitted to
be supplied through a suitable attachment plug and hard-service cable or cord.
(2) Mobile diagnostic imaging equipment of any capacity may be connected to its power source
by ,suitable temporary connections and hard-usage cable or cord.
22.6 DISCONNECTING MEANS
. (1) A disconnecting means of adequate capacity for at least 50% of the input required for the
momentary rating or 100% of the input required for the long-time rating of x-ray or·
computerized tomography equipment, whichever is greater, shall be provided in the supply
circuit in a location readily accessible from the radiation control.
406 EBCS-10 1995 ETHIOPIAN BUILDiNG CODE STANDARD

SECTION 22: DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING INSTALLATION
22.7 TRANSFORMERS AND CAPACITORS
(1) Capacitors fonning part of a diagnostic imaging equipment shall be provided with an
automatic means for discharging and grounding 11leplates whenever the transformer primary is
disconnected from the source of supply unless all current-carrying parts of the capacitors and of
the. conductors connected· therewith are:
a) at least 2.5m from the floor and .are inaccessible to unauthorized persons, or
b) within metal enclosures that are bonded to earth or within enclosures of insulating
material if within 2.5m of the floor.
22.8 CONTROL
(1) For stationary equipment, the low-voltage circuit of the step-up transfonner shall contain
an overcurrent device which:
a) has no exposed live parts,

b) protects the radiographic circuit against fault conditions under all operating conditions,
and
c) is installed as part of the equipment or adjacent thereto.
(2) Where as in (I) above, the design of the step-up transfonner is such that branch fuses
having a current rating lower than that of the overcurrent device are required for adequate
protection for fluoroscopic and therapeutic circuits, they shall be added for the protection of
these circuits.
(3) For portable equipment, the requirements of (I) and (2) above shall apply; but, the
overcurrent device shall be located in or on the equipment except that no current-limiting device
is required when the high-voltage parts are within a single metal enclosure that is provided with
a means for bonding to earth.
(4) Where more than one piece of equipment is operated' from the same high-voltage circuit,
each piece or group of equipment, as a unit, shall be provided with a high-voltage switch or
equivalent disconnecting means.

ELECTRlCAL INSTALLATION OF BUILDINGS
22.9 AMPACITY OF SUPPLY CONDUcrORS AND RATING OF OVERCURRENT

PROTECTION
(1) The ampacity of supply conductors and the rating of overcurrent protection devices shall not
be less than:
a) the long-time current rating of x-ray or computerized tomography equipment, or

b) 50% of the maximum momentary current rating· required by x-ray or computerized
tomography equipment on a radiographic setting.
(2) Theampacity of conductors and the rating of overcurrent protection devices for two or more
branch circuits supplying x~ray or computerized tomography units shall not be less than:
a) the sum of the long-time current rating of all x-ray or computerized tomography units
which are intended to be operated at anyone time, or
b) the sum of SO% the mliximum momentary current rating for x-ray or ,computerized
tomography equipment on a radiographic setting for the two largest units plus 20% of
the maximum current rating of the other units.
22.10 .BONDING
(1) N on-current-carrying parts of tube stands, tables and other apparatus shall be bonded to
earth in accordance with the requirements of Part I" Section 7 of this Code.

SECTION 23
ELECTRICAL COMMUNICATION
SYSTEMS
23.1 SCOPE
(1) This Section applies to the installation of electrical communication systems including
infonnation processing systems.
(1) The following reference corttains provisions which, through reference In this text, constitute
a) C221: 1990 Canadian Electrical Code Part 1, Safety Standard for Electrical
Installations, Sixteenth:'Edition.
23.3 GENERAL
.
23.3.1 Circuits in Communication Cables
(i) Radio and television circuits, remote control circuits, fire alarm circuits, or parts thereof
shall be:
a) pennitted to use conductors in a cable assembly of communication building entrance

having other conductors used as communication circuits,
b) deemed to be communication cir.cuits within the portions of circuits that use conductors
within the communication building entrance cable assembly, and
c) suitably protected at the point of interface connection with the communication cable
conductors.

(1) Where the wiring or electrical equipment within the scope of this Section' is installed in
hazardous locations as defined in Sections II, 12, or 14, it shall also comply with the applicable
Clauses of those Sections.
23.3.3 Approved Transformers
(1) Where transformers or other devices supplY current to a communication circuit from an -
electric' supply circuit, the transformers or other devices shall be of a type approved for the
service.
23.4 INSIDE CONDUCTORS
23.4.1, Conductors Arrangement
(1), Conductors shall be neatly arranged and'secured in place in a'convenient and workmanlike
manner.
(2) Raceways for communication circuitsihall be installed in accordance with the requirements
of Section 10 and, in case of metal, they shall be earthed in accordance with the provisions' of
Section 7.
23.4.2 Insulation
(1) Wire and cable used for communication system in a building shall be of the approved types
as specified in Annex B, Section 4 of this Standard.
v j 23.4.3 Earthing Conductors with an Outer Metal Covering
(1) Where a conductor or cable is equipped with an outer metal covering, the covering shall be
earthed.
23.4.4 Separation from Other Conductors
(1) The conductors of an electrical communication system in buildings shall be separated at least
50.0mm from any insulated conductor of a Class 1 circuit or an electric light or power system

SECTION 23: ELECTRICAL COMMUNICATJON SYSTEMS
operating at 380.0V or less, and shall be separated at least 600.0mm. from any insulated
conductor or an electric light or power system operating at more than 380.0V unless:
a) one system is in earthed metal raceways, metal sheathed cable, or earthed armoured
cable,
'b) the Class 1 circuit or electric light or power system operating at 380.0V or less utilizes
a nonmetallic sheathed cable or hard~llsage or extra-hard-usage flexible cord, or
c) both systems are permanently separated by a continuous, firmly fixed non-meta! raceway
in addition to the insulation of the conductors.
(2) Where the light or power conductors are bare, all communication conductors in the same
room or space shall be enclosed in an earthed metal raceway and no opening, such as an outlet
box, may be located within 2.0m of bare conductors of up to and including 15.0kV oLwithin
3.0m of bare conductors above 15.0kV.
(3) The conductors of an electrical communication system shall not be placed in any outlet box,
junction box, raceway, or similar fitting or compartment which contains conductors of electric
light or power systems or of Class I circuits (as defined in Section 10) unless:
a) the communication conductors are separated from the other conductors by an acceptable
partition, or
b) the power or Class 1 conductors are placed solely for the purpose of supplying power
to the communication system, or for connection to remote control equipment.
(4) The conductors of an electrical communication system in a building shall not be placed in
a shaft with the conductors of an electric light or power system unless:
a) the conductors of all systems are insulated and are separated by at least 50.0mm, or
b) the conductors of either system are encased in noncombustible tubing.
(1) Conductors of communication circuits extending through a fire separation shall be installed
so as to limit the spread of fire.
23.4.6 Communication Cable in Boistways
(1) Special permission shall be required to install communication conductors in hoistways.
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING COD TANDARD EBCS-10 1995 411

(2) All conductors, except travelling cables, shall be totally enclosed in continuous metal
raceway.
(3) Pullboxes required for communication interconnection shall be located outside the hoistway.
23.4.7 Communication Conductors in Ducts and Plenum Chambers
(1) Communication conductors shall not be placed in ducts or plenum chambers except as
permitted by relevant Clauses of Section 8.
23.4.8 Data Processing Systems
(1) The interconnecting' cables used in data processing systems shall be permitted to eontain
power and communication conductors where SU9h cables are specifically approved for the
purpose.
23.4.9 ConductorS under Raised Floon
(1) Conductors or communication circuits shall be allowed to be installed, without additional

mechanical protection, under a raised floor provided that:
a) the raised floor is of suitable noncombustible construction;

b) at leasta SO.Omm separation is provided and maintained where the conductor,s are used
to serve data processing systems and are placed parallel to any other power supply
wiring; and
c) the conductors serve the equipment located only on the floor above the raised floor,
where the space under the raised floor is used as an air plenum.
23.4.10 Conductors in Concealed Installations
(1) Where the ends of cables or conductors are not terminated on a device, they shall be capped
or taped.

SECTION 23: ELECTRICAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
23.4.11 Type CFC Under-Carpet Wiring System
23.4.11.1 General
(1) The provisions of Clause 23.4.11 apply to the installation of communication flat-cable-type
(CFC) systems which, together with the connecting devices, shall be approved or acceptable for
the purpose.
23.4.11.2 Use permitted
(1) Type CFC system wiring shall be permitted to be used:
a) only under carpet squares not exceeding 7S0.0mm, and any adhesive used shall be of
release type;
b) as an extension Qf conventional wiring to serve areas or zones, and each run of wiring
from the transition point ~all not exceed IS.0m;
c) on hard, smooth, continuous floor surface made of concrete if sealed, ceramic or

composition flooring, wood, or similar material;
d) in dry or interior damp locations;
e) on floors heated in excess of 30°C only, if approved and identified for that purpose.
23.4.11.3 Use prohibited
(1) Type CFC system wiring shall not be used:
a) outdoors or in wet locations;

b) where subject to corrosive vapours or liquids;
c) in hazardous locations;
d) in dwelling units;
e) in hospitals or institutional buildings except in office areas;
t) on walls except when entering the transition point;
g) under permanent type partitions or walls.

23.4.11.4 Floor protective coverings
(1) Type CFC system wiring shall be covered with abrasion resistant tape, secured to the floor
so as to completely cover all cables, corners, and bare conductor ends.
23.4.11.5 Coverings
(1) Type CFC system wiring shall be permitted to cross over or under each other, and over or
under power supply system wiring provided there is a layer of earthed metal shielding between
the CFC and the power supply syste~ cables.
23.4.11.6 System height
(1) Type CFC system wiring shall not be stacked on top of each other except as required to
enter the transition point.
23.4.11. i" Earthing of shields
(1) Type CFC system wiring equipped with.a metal shield shall be earthed.'
23.5 EQUIPMENT
23.5.1 Communication Equipment in Bathrooms
(I) Communication equipment located in a bathroom shall be permanently fixed on the wall,
and shall be located so that no part may be reached or used from the bath or from the shower
enclosure; however, it shall be permitted to be actuated by means of a cord with an insulating
link. .
(2) Communication jacks shall not be located in a bathroom.
23.5.2 Equipment in Air Ducts, Plenums, or Suspended Ceilings
(1) Communication equipment and terminals shall not be placed in ducts, plenums, or hollow
spaces which are used to transport air nor in suspended ceiling areas except where a duct,
plenum, or hollow space is created by a suspended ceiling having lay-in panels or tiles;
connecting blocks which are a non-protective type may be installed provided they are placed in
an accessible enclosure.
------ --- --- --- --- ---

----------- ----,,----------------------------
23.5.3 Exposed Equipment and Terminations
(1) Exposed communication equipment and/or associated terminations shall be located in a

suitable room separate from electrical light or power installations, except where necessary to
place them in a joint-use room in which case a minimum separation of 900.0mm from electrical
equipment requiring adjustment and maintenance shall be provided and maintained.
23.5.4 Earth Circuits
(1) Communication circuits connected to a telecommunication network and having return path
via local earth or other circuitry which similarly could present a fire hazard, shall be provided
with a current-limiting device installed in or adjacent to the equipment of a type recommended
by the equipment manufacturer as suitable for the application, which will limit the current under
normal operating conditions and under fault conditions, to prevent fire hazards.
23.5.5 Communication Systems in Hospitals
(1) Exposed non-current-carrying metal parts, if they could become energized, of

communications equipment, other than telephone sets, installed in general, intermediate, and
critical care areas of hospitals shall be earthed to conform with the requirements of
Clause 14.4.2(5).
23.6 OUTSIDE CONDUCTORS
23.6.1 Overhead Conductors on Poles
(1) The installation of overhead communication conductors on poles in proximity with power
conductors shall be established in conformity with the rules and regulations of the Ethiopian
Electric Light & Power Authority (EELP A.).
23.6.2 Overhead Conductors on Roofs
(1) Communication conductors passing over buildings shall be kept at least 2.5m above any roof
which may readily be walked upon.
(2) Communication conductors shall not be attached to the upper surfaces of roofs or be run
within 2.0m, measured vertically, of a roof without special permission.

23.6.3 Lightning Conductors
(1) Separation of at least 2.0m shall, where practicable, be maintained between conductors of
communication circuits on buildings and lightning conductors.
23.6.4 Swimming Pools
(1) Where wires or cables are installed over or adjacent to swimming pools, they shall be paced
in accordance with the provisions of Clauses 25.4.2 and 25.4.3 of Section 25.
23.7 UNDERGROUND CIRCUITS
23.7.1 Direct Buried Systems
(1) Where communication conductors or cable assemblies are direct buried, the sheath shall be
suitable for direct burial and the conductor or cable assembly shall:
a) not be installed in the same vertical plane with other underground systems, except when
installed in accordance with (g) below;
b) maintain a minimum horizontal separation of300.0mm from other underground system"s,

except when installed in accordance with (g) below;
c) not be less than 600.0mm deep, unless rock bottom is encountered at a shallower depth
in which case a minimum depth of 450.0mm shall be permitted, except that for service
wire under parkways and lawns, the depth may be reduced to 450.0mm;
d) be placed with a layer of sand 75.0mm deep, both above and below the cable, if in rocky
or stony ground;
e) not be less than 900.0mm deep under an area which is subject to vehicular traffic, except
that the depth may be reduced to 600.0mm when mechanical protection is provided,
which shall consist of:
i) treated plank at least 38.0mm thick or other acceptable material which shall be placed
over the conductor or cable after first backfilling with 75.0mm of sand or earth
containing no rocks or stones, or
ii) a conduit suitable for earth burial placed to facilitate cable replacement and to
minimize traffic vibration damage;
416 EBCS-10 1995 ET:..jIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

f) not be placed in a common trench involving random separation with power supply cables
or wires operating at over 750.0Y; and
g) have a metal sheath when placed in a common trench involving random separation with
power supply cables or wiring operating at 750.0Y or less, in which case the
communication conductor or cable assembly shall not cross under the supply cable~,.
23.7.2 Underground Raceway
(1) Where communication conductors or cable assemblies are placed in underground raceway
systems:
a) the raceway, including laterals, shall be separated from those used for the electric power
system by not less [han 50.0mm of concrete or 300.0mm of well-tamped earth;
b) the raceway shall be located to maintain minimum depth of 600.0mm in areas subject
to vehicular traffic and. 450.0mm in all other areas, except that where rock bottom is
encountered at a shallower depth, the raceway shall be encased in concrete;
c) the raceway shall not terminate in the same manhole, and the conductors or cable
assembly shall not be placed in the same manhole used for electric power system;
d) the cables shall not be placed in the same raceway containing electric lighting or power
supply cables; and
e) the cable sheath shall be suitable for wet locations.
23.8 EARTHING
23.8.1 Bon~ing of Cable Sheath
(1) Where cables, either overhead or underground, enter buildings, the metal sheath or shield
of the cable shall be bonded to earth as close as practicable to the point of entrance or shall be
interrupted as close as practicable to the point of entrance by an insulating joint or equivalent
device.

23.8.2 Cable-Sheath Bonding Conductor
(1) The cable-sheath bonding conductor required by Clause 23.8.1 shall have an ampacity equal
to or greater than that of the outer conductive sheath of the exposed cable except that the
bonding conductor shall not be required to be larger than 10.0mm2 copper.
23.8.3 Earthing Electrode
(1) Earthing conductor shall preferably be connected to a water-pipe earthing electrode as close
to the point of entrance as possible.
(2) Where waterpipe is not readily available and the earthing conductor of the power
consumer's service is connected to the water pipe at the building, the communication system
earthing conductor may be connected to the metal conduit, service equipment enclosures, or to
the earthing cond~ctor of the power consumer's service.
(3) In the absence of a waterpipe, the communication earthing conductor may be connected to
an effectively earthed metal structure or to"an earth rod or pipe driven into. permanently damp
earth; but:
a) steam, gas, or hot water pipes or lightning rod conductors shall not be used as earthing
electrodes; and
b) a driven rod or pipe used for earthing power circuits shall not be used as a
communication earthing electrode unless it is connected to the earthed conductor of a
multi-earthed power neutral.
(4) Where a driven earth rod or pipe is used as an earthing electrode for an electrical
communication system, it shall be separated by at least 2.0m from any other electrodes,
including those used for power circuits, radio, lightning rods, or for any other purpose and shall
be bonded only to that of the power circuits in accordance with applicable Clauses of Section 7.
(5) The normal length of driven earth rod used as the earthing electrode for a communication
system is 1.5m; but, where the normal rod would not reach moist soil when installed, a rod of
suitable additional length shall be used.

23.8.4 Earthing Electrode Connection
(1) The earthing conductor shall be attached to an earthing electrode by means of an approved
bolt clamp except that, in the case of an earth rod, a wire lead may be permanently connected
to the rod.
(2) Where a bolt clamp is used, the earthing conductor shall be soldered or otherwise acceptably
connected to the clamp in an effective manner.
23.8.5 Bonding of Electrodes
(1) A copper conductor not smaller than 10.0mm2 shall be connected between communication
and power earthing electrodes when separate artificial earthing electrodes are required as
described per Clause 23.8.3.

SECTION 24
CO:MMUNITY ANTENNA INSTALLATION
FOR RADIO AND TELEVISION
RECEPTION
24.1. SCOPE
(1) This Section applies to the installation of:
a) community antenna assembly,

b) head station (amplifier and other power sources), and
c) distribution network (conductors, branching boxes and antenna or feeder outlets),
a) C22.1:1990 Canadian electrical Code, Part 1, Safety Standard for Electrical

b) lEC 597 Aerials for the Reception of Sound and Television Broadcasting in
the Frequency Range 30.0MHZ to 1.0GHZ:
i) Part 1-1977, Electrical and mechanical characteristics.

ii) Part 2-1977 Methods of measurement of electrical performance parameters.
iii) Part 3-1983 Methods of measurement of mechanical properties, vibration and
environmental tests.
iv) Part 4-1984 Guide for the preparation of aerial performance specification, detailed
specification sheet format.
420 EBCS~10 1995 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD
-.- -
SECTION 24: COMMUNITY ANTENNA INSTALLATION
c) IEC 728:1982 Cabled Distribution System Primarily Intended for Sound and
Television Signals Operating between 30.0MHz and 1.0GHz.
24.3 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
24.3.1 Mechanical
(1) A community antenna shall comply with' all mechanical properties or requirements outlined
in the IEC 597 and IEC 728.
24.3.2 Electrical
(1) A community antenna shall:
a) be desi.gned for the reception of signals within the permitted bandwidth for sound and
television broadcasting;
b) be immune to extraneous signal interference; and
c) comply with all ether necessary electrical parameters that are required for the satisfactory
operation of the system (see IEC 597 and IEC 728).
24.4 EQUIPMENT
24.4.1 Community Antenna Distribution Amplifiers and Other Power Sources
(1) Amplifiers and other devices which supply current to a community antenna distribution
circuit from an electric supply circuit shall be approved for the purpose.
(2) Where liIllplifiers and other power devices are connected to an electric supply circuit and
enclosed in a cabinet, the cabinet shall be so .located as to be readily accessible and shall be
adequately ventilated.
(3) The chassis and cabinets of the community antenna distribution amplifier or other power
sources, the outer conductive shield of the coaxial cables, and the metal conduit or the metal
cable sheath enclosing the electric supply conductors shall all be connected to the system earth
with a minimum of 16.0m2 copper conductor.

(4) Where a cabinet containing an amplifier or other power device is mounted accessible to the
public, it shall be provided with a lock or similar closing device.
24.4.2 EXDosed Equipment and Terminations
(1) Exposed community antenna distribution equipment and/or associated terminations shall be
located in a suitable room or similar area, separate from electrical light or power installations,
except where necessary to place them in a joint-use room in which case a minimum separation
of 900.0mm from electrical equipment requiring adjustment and maintenance shall be provided
and maintained.
24.4.3 Equipment Earthing
(1) Non-powered equipment and enclosures or equipment powered exclusively by the coaxial
cable shall be considered earthed when they are effectively connected to the earthed outer
conductive coaxial cable shield.
24.5 COMMUNITY ANTENNA DISTRIBUTION NETWORK
24.5.1 Conductor
(1) The conductors used in the distribution network shall consist of coaxial cable having inner
conductor and an outer conductive shield of circular cross-section .•
(2) Conductors placed within buildings shall be of the approved types as specified in Annex B,
Section 4, of this Code.
(3) Conductors placed outside of buildings shall be of the types that are acceptable for the
application.
24.5.2 Voltage Limitation
(1) The coaxial cable shall be permitted to deliver low energy power to equipment directly
associated with the community antenna distribution circuits if the voltage is not over 60.0V and
if the current supply is from an approved amplifier, transformer, or other device having energy
limiting characteristics.
- - --
(1) Where the circuits or equipment within the scope of this Section are installed in hazardous
locations, they shall also comply with the applicable Clauses of Sections 12, 13 and 14.
24.5.4 Supports
(1) Where conductors are attached to or supported on buildings, the attachment or supporting
fixtures shall be acceptable for the purpose.
24.5.5 Earthing of Outer Conductive Shield of a Coaxial Cable
(1) Where coaxial cable is exposed to lightning or to accidental contact with lightning arrester
conductors or power conductors operating at voltage exceeding 380.0V-to-earth, the outer
conductive shield of the coaxial cable shall be earthed at the building as close to the point of
cable entry as possible.
(2) Where the outer conductive shield of a coaxial cable is earthed, no other protective device
shall be required.
(3) Earthing of a coaxial cable shield by means of a protective device shall be permitted -,
provided that the device does not interrupt the earthing system within the building.
24.5.6 Earthing Conductor
(I) The earthing conductor for the outer conductive shield of a coaxial cable shall have rubber
insulation not less than O.8mm in thickness, and shall be covered by a substantial fibrous
covering except that conductors acceptable for the purpose, having less than O.8mm rubber
insulation, or having other kinds of insulation, may be used.
(2) The earthing conductor shall be of copper.
(3) The earthing conductors shall be not smaller than 2.5mm2•
(4) The earthing conductor shall have an ampacity equal to or greater than that of the outer
conductive sheath of the exposed coaxial cable.

ELECTfilCAL INSTALLATION OF BUILDINGS
(5) Where two or more coaxial cables, which have outer conductive shields differing in size and
ampacity, join at a common connection to the earthing conductor, the ampacity of the earthing
conductor shall be equal to or exceed the ampacity of the largest coaxial outer conductive shield.
(6) The earthing conductor shall be run from the coaxial cable shield to the earthing electrode
in as straight a line as possible.
(7) The earthing conductor shall be protected in situations where it is or can be exposed to
mechanical damage.
(1) Earthing electrodes shall conform to the requirements of relevant Clauses of Section 7.
(2) Where artificial earthing electrodes are installed, they shall be in accordance with applicable
Clauses of Section 7 except that the minimum driven length of the rod electrode shall be 2.0m.
(3) Artificial earthing electrodes for community antenna distribution shall be spaced and bonded
with other electrodes in accordance with relevant Clause of Section 7.
24.5.8 Earthing Electrode Connection
(1) The earthing conductor shall be attached to an earthing electrode by means of.an approved
earth clamp except, in the case of an earth rod, a wire lead may be permanently connected to
the rod and the wire lead connected to the earthing conductor by means of pressure connector
or other acceptable means.
(2) Where an earth clamp is used, the earthing conductor shall be acceptably connected to the
clamp in an effective manner.
24.6 CONDUCTORS WITHIN BUILDINGS
24.6.1 Separation from Other Conductors
(1) Conductors of community antenna distribution circuits shall be separated at least 50.0mm
from insulated conductors of electric lighting, power, or Class 1 circuits operating at 380.0V or
less, and shall be separated at least 600.0mm from any insulated conductor of an electric
424 EBCS-10 1995 ETHIOpiAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

lighting, power, or Class 1 circuit operating at more than 380.0V unless effective separation is
afforded by use of:
a) earthing metal raceways for the community antenna distribution circuits, or for the
electric lighting, power and Class I circuits,
b) earthed metal sheathed or armoured cable for the electric lighting, power, and Class 1
conductors,
c) nonmetallic sheathed cable for the electric lighting, power, and Class 1 circuits operating
at 380.0V or less, or
d) raceways of a non-metal type as permitted in Sectio~8 in addition to the insulation on

the community antenna distribution circuit conductors, or the electric lighting power, and
Class I circuit conductors.
(2) Where the electric lighting or power conductors are bare, all community antenna distribution
conductors in the same room or space shall be enclosed in an earthed metal raceway and no
opening, such as an outlet box, shall be located within 2.0m of bare conductors of up to and
including 15.0kV or within 3.0m of bare conductors above 15.0kV.
(3) The conductors of a community antenna: distribution circuit shall not be placed in any
raceway, compartment, outlet box, junction box, or similar fitting which contains conductors of
electric light, power, or Class I circuit unless:
a) the conductors of the community antenna distribution circuit are separated from the
electric light, power, or Class I circuit conductors by an acceptable barrier, or
b) the power or Class I conductors are placed solely for the purpose of supplying power
to the community antenna distribution circuit.
24.6.2 Conductors in a Vertical Shaft
(1) Conductors of a community antenna distribution circuit in a vertical shaft shall be in a

totally enclosed noncombustible raceway.

(1) Conductors of a community antenna distribution circuit extending through fire separation
shall be so installed as to limit fire spread.
24.6.4 Community Antenna Distribution Conductors in Ducts and Plenum Chambers
(1) Community antenna distribution conductors shall not be placed in ducts or plenum chambers
except as permitted by relevant Clauses of Section 2 and Section 8 of this Code.
24.6.5 Raceways
(1) Raceways shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of Section 80
24.7 CONDUCTORS OUTSIDE OF BUILDINGS
24.7.1 Overhead Conductors on Poles
(1) The installation of overhead community antenna distribution conductors in proximity with
power conductors on poles and in aerial spans between buildings, poles, and other structures
shall be established in conformity with rules and regulations of EELP A .
24.7.2 Overhead Conductors on Roofs
(1) Community antenna distribution conductors passing over buildings shall be kept at least
205m above any roof which may be readily walked upon.
(2) Community antenna distribution conductors shall not be attached to the upper surfaces of
roofs or be run within 205m, measured vertically, of a roof without special permission.
24.7.3 Conductors on Buildings
(1) Community antenna distribution conductors on buildings shall be separated from insulated
light or power conductors not in cable or conduit by at least 300.0mm unless, in addition to the
insulation on the conductors, they are permanently separated by a continuous and firmly fixed
non-metal type raceway as permitted in Section 8 0

SECTION 24: COMMUNITY ANTENNA INSTALLAT10N
(2) Community antenna distribution conductors subject to accidental contact with light or power
conductors operating at voltages exceeding 380.0V and attached exposed to buildings shall be
separated from combustible material by being supported on glass, porcelain, or other insulating
material acceptable for the purpose, except that such separation is not required where the outer
conductive sheath of the coaxial cable is earthed.
(3) Community antenna distribution conductors attached to buildings shall not conflict with
other communication conductors attached to the same building and sufficient clearance shall be
provided so that there will not be unnecessary interference to maintenance operations; and in no
case should the conductors, strand, or equipment of one system cause abrasion to the conductors,
strand, or equipment of the other system.
24.7.4 Conductors Entering Buildings
(1) The community antenna distribution conductors shall enter the building either thwugh a
noncombustible, non-absorptive insulating bushing or through a metal raceway except that the
insulating bushing or raceway may be omitted where the entering conductors pass through
masonry or are acceptable for the purpose.
24.7.5 Swimming Pools
(1) Where conductors are installed over or adjacent to swimming pools, they shall be placed in
accordance with the provisions of Clauses 25.4.2 and 25.4.3, Section25 of this Code.
24.8 UNDERGROUND CONDUCTORS
24.8.1 Direct Buried Systems
(1) Where community antenna distribution conductors are direct buried, the sheath shall be
suitable for direct burial and the conductor shall be:
a) installed outside of the same vertical plane which contains differing underground
conductors other than communication conductors, except when installed in accordance
with (f) below;
b) maimtained at a minimum horizontal separation of 300.0mm from differing underground

conductors other than communication conductors, except when installed in accordance
with paragraph (f) below;

c) placed at a minimum depth of 600.0mm, unless rock bottom is encountered at a

shallower depth, in which case a minimum depth of 450.0mm shall be permitted, except
that for service wires under parkways and lawns, the depth may be reduced to 450.0mm;
d) placed with a layer of sand 75.0mm deep, both above and below the cable, if in rocky
or stony ground;
e) placed at a minimum depth of 900.0mm under an area which is subject to vehicular

traffic, except that the depth may be reduced to 600.0mm when mechanical protection
is provided which shall consist of:
i) treated plank at least 38.0mm thick or other acceptable material which shall be placed
~ver the conductor or cable after first back-filling with 75.0mm of sand or earth
containing no rocks or stones; or
ii) a conduit suitable for earth burial placed to facilitate cable replacement and to
minimize traffic vibration damage; and
f) equipped with a metal shield when placed in a common trench involving random
separation with power supply cables or wiring operating at 750.0V or less, in which case
the community antenna distribution conductors shall not cross under the supply cables
24.8.2 Underground Raceway
(1) Where community antenna distribution conductors are placed in underground raceway
systems:
a) the raceway, including materials, shall be separated from those used for the electric
power system by not less than 50.0mm of concrete or 300.0mm of well-ta!T';,r..l -.alth;
b) the raceway shall be located to maintain a minimum depth of 600.0mm in areas subject
to vehicular traffic and 450.0mm in all other areas except that, where rock bottom it
encountered at shallower depth, the raceway shall be encased in concrete;
c) the raceway shall not terminate in the same manhole and the conductors or cable
assembly shall not be placed in the same manhole, used for electric power system,
d) the conductors shall not be placed in the same raceway containing electric lighting,
power or Class 1 circuit conductors; and
e) the cable sheath shall be suitable for wet locations.
428 EBCS-10 1995 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANC,ARD

24.8.3 Underground Block Distribution
(1) Where the entire street circuit is run underground and the circuit is placed so. that it is not
liable to be in contact with electric lighting, power, or Class 1 circuits of more than 380.0V,
insulating bushings or raceways shall not be required where the circuit conductors enter a
building.
24.9 LIGHTNING ARRESTERS FOR RECEIVING STATIONS
24.9.1 Lightning Arrester
(1) A lightning arrester shall:
a) be provided for each lead-in conductor from an outdoor antenna to a receiving statio~
except where such lead-in conductor is protected by a continuous earthed metal shield
between the antenna and the point of entrance to the building;
b) be located outside the building or inside the building between the point of entrance or
the lead-in and the radio set or transformer, and as near as practicable to the entrance to
the conductors to the building; and
c) not be located near combustible material nor in a hazardous location.
24.9.2 Earthing Conductor
24.9.2.1 Material
(1) The earthing conductor shall be of copper, aluminium alloy, copper-clad steel, bronze, or
other corrosion-resistant material unless otherwise specified.
24.9.2.2 Insulation
(1) The earthing conductor may be uninsulated.
24.9.2.3 Support
(1) The earthing conductor shall be securely fastened in place and may be directly attached to
the supporting surface without the use of insulating supports.

24.9.204 Mechanical protection
(1) The earthing conductor shall be protected where exposed to mechanical injury.
24.9.2.5 Earthing conductor to be run in a straight line
(1) The earthing conductor shall be run in as straight a line as is practicable from the lightning
arresters of antenna mast, or both, to the earthing electrode.
24.9.3.1 Earthing electrode
(1) The earthing conductor shall be connected to an earthing electrode as specified in Section 7.
24.9~3.2 Earthing conductors
(1) The earthing conductor may be run either inside or outside the building.
24.9.3.3 Size of protective earth
(1) The size of protective earthing conductor for receiving stations providing earth connection
for mast and lightning arresters shall be in accordance with the provisions of Section 7.
24.9.3.4 Common earth
(1) A single earthing conductor may be used for both protective and operating purposes; but it
must be installed so that disconnection of the operating earth will not be after the protective
earth circuit.
_______
..
ANTENNA (AERIAL) SYSTEMSt
A.I GENERAL
A.I.1 Introduction
An efficient antenna installation is one of the prerequisites for interference-free reception of

radio and television transmission. This can be expected to perform satisfactorily only if it has
been competently desinged and constructed.
A.I.2 Terminology
individual antenna antenna installations that supply radio and television signals to
a single household. Modern household are provided with a
number of antenna sockets. To make an adequate signal level
available at each socket, amplifiers may also be required in
some individual antenna installations (see Figure A.I).
community antenna system antenna installations that supply radio and television signals to
households in one or more buildings. They consists of an
antenna assembly, a head station (amplifier unit) and the
distribution network including the cables, branch-in units,
antenna sockets and the associated receiver connection cables
(see Figure A.3).
It is usual nowadays to install community aerial systems in

apartment buildings. They are considerably more satisfactory
than large number of individual antennas because mutual
interference is eliminated and the most suitable position on the
roof can be chosen for the antenna.
t See Siemens' Electrical Installation Handbook, Part 3, 1979, Siemens.

private wide-band system a special fonn of the community antenna installation. The
signals to be received are fed to the private wide-band system
from a primary cable network (see Figure A.2).
A.1.3 Regulation and Specification
Broadcast receiving antenna installations must comply with the requirements and regulations of
the Ethiopian Telecommunication Authority, if any, or shall meet the technical requirements
outlined in any applicable international standard.
A.2 PLANNING
Before the planning of a system ,is started, an accurate survey of the site should be carried out.
In the process, the followi~g data should be collected with the aid of the building plans 9r from
the direct observation:
Number and position of antenna sockets - Modem antenna system should be equipped with at
least two, and preferably three or four, antenna sockets per apartment. The number and position
of the sockets must be known for planning purposes.
Sound and television broadcast transmissions - The choice of transmission that are worth"
receiving depends on the reception conditions. If these are not known, measurement must be
undertaken with a suitable signal-strength meter.
Position of antenna - The antenna should be erected in the most satisfactory position for
reception and be as far positioned as possible from chimney and power cables.
Amplifiers, frequency-converters and power-supply units - A readily accessible location should

be detennined for the head station under the r<;>of.It must also be conflnned that a connection
to the electricity supply is available, or can be provided, close to the head unit. (see,
Figure A.3)
Quality of reception - To assess the quality of reception, it is necessary to make measurement

with a suitable signal strength meter. The measurement point is detennined by the antenna
location appropriate to the building. If a different location is more satisfactory from the point
of view of reception, it should be adopted after consultation with the building owner or the
architect.

A.3 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
A.3.1 General
The distribution system begins at the output of the head station and ends at the antenna socket
outlets. Its purpose is to provide reliable transmission of the signal from the head stations
through the sockets to the radio and television receivers.
A.3.2 Junction Boxes
Distribution boxes and branching boxes are generally referred to by the term "junction boxes".
Distribution boxes are advantageous where main feeders are run close together, e.g. in apartment
blocks and high-rise buildings, in which no long feeder lines are neGessary.
In long buildings or terrace houses, the use of branching boxes is more satisfactory.
Examples of different types of junction boxes are shown in Figure A.4.
A.3.3 Antenna Sockets
Antenna socket outlets are distinguished according to their mode of application in the distribution
network and their transmission characteristics. Depending on the application, there are available
through-wired sockets, which are used in network arranged on the loop-through principle
(sockets fed in series, Figure AS) and spur sockets which are intended for main-feeder networks
arranged in the spur-line pattern (sockets fed in parallel, Figure A6).
A.3.4 Combined Distribution Method
In a combined distribution method, the sound radio and television signals are carried over the
same main reeders. The antenna socket outlets incorporate a socket for the sound radio and·
another for the television.
Figure A7 shows the combined distribution method applied to a community antenna system with
three television channels. Figure A8 provides a similar arrangement with six television channels.

A.3.5 Private Wide-Band System
Private wide-band cable-network systems supply subscribers on demand with radio and television
transmissions. These are comparable in terms of design to large community antenna systems.
The transmissions are obtained from a broadcast receiving station and relayed via cables and
amplifiers to system connection points on the perimeters of the private properties. Following
this, the received signals are amplified and fed to the antenna sockets (see Figure A.9).
A.4 PROTECTION
As a protection against accidental voltage transfer from the electrical installations, all inactive
conductive parts of the antenna system, such as the antenna post, housings, junction boxes and
amplifiers, outer conductors and metallic sheaths of the antenna cables should be connected
together and earthed, or included in the potential equalization system.
For potential equalization, a permanent connection must be made between the antenna system
and the main equipotential conductor (see Figure A.I 0).
A.5 CONSTRUCTION OF A RECEIVING-ANTENNA SYSTEM
A.5.l General
Reliable performance by radio and television receivers is dependent upon the careful planning
and competent construction of the aerial installation. Information relative to the length and
design of the antenna post is presented in Figure A.II and A.12.
A.5.2 Length of Aerial Post
The necessary length and strength of the post is determined by the number and separation of the
antennas. The upper end of the tubular post is usually closed by the LF/MFIHF and USW
antennas. The order of the other antennas is immaterial in itself. It is appropriate, however, to
mount the antennas that present a high wind load near the bottom so long as higher placing is
not called for on grounds of efficient reception.

A.5.3 Minimum Antenna Separation
Guidance values for the minimum separation "a" in centimeters, between the antennas on the
post are given in Table A.I. The separation should be increased for antennas with a larger
number of elements, particularly if they are aimed in the same direction.
The separation between the lowest antenna unit and the roof should be at least I.Om.
Table A.I Guidance values for the minimum separation "a" [em] between antennas on the spot
ReceptIon Band TV t usw TV III TV IV TVV

TVI 250 140 140 80 80
USW 140 110 80 80 80
TV III 140 80 80 80 80
TVN 80 80 80 60 50
TVV 80 80 80 50 50
A.5.4 Wind load and Bending Moment
The bending moment in the tubular antenna post is calculated from:
(AI)
where, L is length [m] and W is windload [N].
A post should be chosen where permissible bending moment (from the manufacturer's data) is
at least equal to the calculated bending moment Mb in Equation (AI).
The capacity of the structural parts (buildings) to withstand the forces produced in the antenna
installation shall be verified.
A.5.5 Mounting of the Headstation
The headstation is best mounted under the roof in the immediate vicinity of the antenna post
(Figure A13). It should be ensured that a loop is formed in the cable (a water trap) before it

enters the head station to prevent condensat.e from running out of the tabular post into the
amplifier (Figure A.14).
Attention should be paid to good accessibility in consideration of subsequent maintenance. If

there is no suitable wall on which to mount the headstation, it can be mounted on a wooden
board or fTame. Where headstations are mounted in public-accessible places such as, for
example, in stair walls, they should preferably be accommodated in lockable cabinets.
A.6 COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE
A.6.1 Measurement on Commissioning
Such measurements should be carried out in commissioning as are necessary to prove the
technical performance of the aerial system.
Table A.3 shows a measurement schedule, representing a community antenna system in tabular
form, in which the test points and the required measurements are detailed and the results record.
To assess picture quality, the assessment symbols given in Table A.2 should be entered in the
measurement schedule.
Table A.2 Assessment grades for interference according to prescribed assessmen.t

criteria
For reflected
interference
(8) relative to picture
Not
Just
Not 5Assessment
one half
times
visible
visible
visible
Clearly SO
S2
S3 a12 G3
3S1R2
R1
R3
RO GO criteria
G2
G1 Forchannel
interference common
(G) Assessment grades
signal
interference
(R)
nce

A.6.2 Measurement of Amplifier Output Signal Level
In recording the amplifier output signal level in the headstation, the signal levels from the
individual band amplifiers (LF/MF/HF, USW, VHF, UHF) are measured using a calibrated
receiver and compared with the maximum permissible output signal levels of the amplifiers
according to the manufacturers' data. In this process, the manufacturer's instructions for the
measurements and for the proper adjustment of the amplifiers should be followed.
A.6.3 Maintenance
Trouble- free operation of the aerial system is assisted by regular checking of the mechanical and
electrical components.
The following routine checks should be carried out during maintenance:
a) Aerial structure:
- Orientation of aerials,
- Fixing clamps,
- Sealing of roof lead-in,
Seating of earthing clamps.
b) Headstation:
- Measurements as for commissioning at test points TPI and TP2.
- The checking and measurement results from each maintenance operation should be
recorded in a suitable schedule Table A.4 for comparison with other tests.

Table A.3 Measurements on commis'sioning (entries in the measurement sch'edule)
cable of
each
lead main
, receiver
FN5.W
cable
~2 spur
dB
Attenuati
LF/MF
'!"N
IV
MeasurementsOutput
Ouput ~hum,
xposition
LF/MF~94
ote of -6
Test-point
End of dB TV
TV)
Signal-level
of
(Values
of USW xxIVN~84
and
Observe
aerial'
TV IIII
xx commissioning
catalogue
relativehiss
~84
permissible
"lining-up"
level
Sound quality
in IVN ~S4
sound
mono
11~84
s80
~S2
stereo xreference
data
to~S7
measurement'
according
dBI!V)
x
carrier
~40
maximum (see
Picture
~SO
output
to signal
instructions)
quality
x
signal levels in
n
noise
--TPOon
Recommended
distortio
introduc
and
cracking,
--TP3
--TPI
~'TP2 FIMFI
"
additionalhead
ed
the
measurements
by
TV channels
between vision
connecting station
or
Difference
~
x Insert appropriate entries
1) For sound broadcast transmissions, the selectively measured carriers: at least the Lm,s. values of the local and district
transmitters in the LF, MF, HF and USW bands should be measured,
For television transmissions, the channel signal levels (the r,m.s, level of the vision carrier at the point where the
synchronizing pulses occur) in the receiving or distribution channels
2) Assessment of picture quality,

Table A.4 Maintenance schedule
Amplifier stati~~:m ...._mm

..m.. No.: Project : _ No.:
Consumer: _______________________ • • __ ._. __ • _ no _. ~_n _. •• _ •• _. ~ __ •• • __ • u ••• __ • • __ • wow. __ " •• _.". _
Address: Street No.: Contract No.:
Ch .../. ..
G5TP1
TP2
Amplifier
R TP2R- f------
t-- TP2
[dB]
'.hum, Name:
Assessment
Date:
Picture
~ignalleve
nB,nt
dB"V aRof sound:
Name:
quality
chrackling,
Date:
TP1
Date:
noise, hiss) [dB]
Geometry,
I mechanical j-----
Name:
TP1 firmness lSignal leve
.../.
Aerial
Ch ...
.. / ....... structure:
./..
./...
.1...
Sealing
Seating of roofclamps
Equipotential
of earthing lead-in
bonding

LF/MF/HF/USWaerial LF/MF/HF/USWaerial
DO DO Aerial sockel·
a) With one aerial socket b) With two aerial sockets and an amplifier
Figure A.I Structure of an individual aerial installation

'\'HF wide·bRnd amplilier

CP Connection point 11 :>Iece 01 previous
WC nelWQrk Wlde.ban~ c.ble nelw07< r.eJd slallon in loll
,"- :MRln distribution
, , ,\system, fed Irom above
Main dislribution system',
fed from below
'CP 10 WC nolWolk
In basement' '
Apartment building
a) New buildings connected to b) Existing community aerial installation

wideband cable system
Aar\ill structure
Figure A.2 Private wide-band systems
Figure A.3 Structure of a community aerial installation with 24 subscribers
EBCS-10 1995 441

MWl -4 I I • '
caol, I 2'WlY I ). .•••
ay.
: dlSUlDullOfl t Ol$UlbYllOt\ l14.'#j'V
d"lfibullOn
Sino"
blanf\lng
OtSlr1OUl!Of'it 00 ••0"
caDIt. I brHM:/\JnQ
"r-~-ll"
~ ~ f'J"r- '[1' r--u-ffr--.---""'l'----
--At:... DO' •••"n"b"_~:
l :: II II .:::: I
:I ::
II ~
: I::I II:I: I II :I
O'SU'10uhOn l;iol •• DlllllbuiiOt'l "1>1' OllUlbuuOl tlOll
a) Dinribution bOA~ ror IWO, b) Br;\.nchi~, bOlU fur

three ~nd fout m;l,in ~blC1 one and fWD main cilbici
Figure A.4 Types and applications of junction boxes
Oi.lnbYlio-l , .
~~DULIOn
eaol.
DoYOI, orlnct\lno bOl. .••••

11';
.(all~ iOCAtl wiln l.rn;na1lng ' •• i'·.•.•
I'JS C'U:
ttlITMlling;ft$ISIOf (7$ OJ
Figure A.S Through-wired method Fig. A.6 Spur-line method

II
Ch
~I ~'
Ch I
I I 6· Ch 21 USW
t
IIIII
'ft
C~2
Ch
th8
'ft
tlFI
I 12 eh 3~ Ch 8 II LF/MFI
Figure A.7 Community aerial system for LF MF, Figure A.8 Community aerial system for LF,
HF and USW reception and three MF, HF and USW reception and six
television transmission television transmissions
Privale wide;band system
Figure A.9 Wide-band cable network with private wide-band system

\
\
I
I
I
I
cuismm'l
III
1:1,L2: L1 - Phis.
I conductors
I N - neultill conductor
I
I
I
Figure A.tO Protection of an aerial installation by inclusion in the equipotential bonding

of all the metallic conducting systems of a building
LF/MF/HF aenal
f
IV,
USWaerial
UHF aerial
1,-
I
I
L
a
a
J
VHF~al
Figure A.l1 Data relevant to the length of, an Figure A.12 Data relevant to the design of an
aerial post aerial post

Figure A.13 Recommended arrangement of a head station
I'
I
Ring section complelely
lemovl1d oV,era lenglh 015 mm
allhe Ipwesl point ollhe waler
Irap or,shealh
Figure A.14 Formation of a "water trap"
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD EBCS-1d ·1995 445

SECTION 25
SWIMMING POOLS, FOUNTAINS AND
SIMILAR INSTALLATION
25.1 SCOPE
(1) This Section applies to electrical installations, electrical equipment in or adjacent to pools,
and non-electrical metal accessories in a pool or within 3.0m of the inside wall of a pool.
Note: The tenn "pool", as referred to in this Section, is deemed to include permanently installed and storable pools,
hydromassage bathtub, spas and hot tubs, wadding pools, baptismal pools,'and decorative pools.
(1) The following reference contains provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute
a) C 22.1: 1990 Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, Safety Standard Electrical Installation,
Sixteenth Edition.
25.3 DEFINITIONS
(1) In this Section, in additions to the terms defined in Section 1, the following definitions shall
apply:
permanently installed swimming pool a pool constructed in such a manner that it cannot be
disassembled for storage.
storable swimming pool a pool constructed in such a manner that it may be

readily disassembled for storage and reassembled to its
original integrity.

SECTION 25: SWIMMING POOLS, FOUNTAINS AND SIMILAR INSTALLATION
forming shell a structure intended for mounting in a swimming pool structure to

support a wet-niche luminaire assembly.
wet-niche luminaire a luminaire intended for installation in a forming shell mounted in

a pool structure where the luminaire will be completely surrounded
by pool water.
dry-niche Luminaire a luminaire intended for installation in the wall of a pool in a niche
which is sealed against the entry of pool water by a fixed lens.
spa or hot tub a pool or tub designed for the immersion of persons in heated water
circulated in closed system incorporating a filter, heater, pump, and
with or without a motor driven blower, but not intended to be filled
and drained with each use.
hydromassage bathtup a permanently installed bathtub having an integral or remote

waterpump or air blower, and having a fill and drain water system,
and· includes therapeutic pools.
leakage current collector a section of corrosion resistant metal tubing. at least five times as
long as its diameter, provided with a brazed or welded copper lug
.placed in a run of nonmetallic pipe to provide a path to earth for
currerit leakage originating from device in contact with pool water.
decorative pool a pool that could be used as a wadding pool that is larger than
1.5m in any dimensions and that is readily accessible to the public.
25.4 GENERAL
25.4.1 Equipment Installation
(1) Equipment shall not be installed in the walls nor in the water of pools except as permitted
by this Section.

25.4.2 Overhead Wiring
25.4.2.1 General
(1) There shall not be ~y overhead wiring above the pool, diving structures, observation stand,
tower or platform, or above the area extending 3.0m horizontally from the pool edge (see
Figure 25.1) except as permitted by 25.4.2.2 and 25.4.2.3.
25.4.2.2 Communication conductors and cables not exceeding 750.0V
(1) Insulated communication conductors, communication

I antenna distribution conductors, and
neutral supported cables not exceeding 750.0V shall be permitted to be located over a pool,
diving structure, observation stand, tower or platform, or above the area ~xtending 3.0m
horizontally from the pool edge, provided there is a clearance measured radially of at least 4.5m.
25.4.2.3 Conductors oper4ting at no more than 50.0kV
(1) Conductors other than those covered by 25.4.2.2 and operating at not more than 50.0~Y
phase-to-phase shall be permitted to be located above a pool, diving structure, observation stand,
tower or plate, or above the area extending 3.0m horizontally from the pool edge provided there
is a clearance measured radially of at least 7.5m.
25.4.3 Underground Wiring
(1) The horizontal separation between the inside walls of pool and underground conductors,
except for bonding conductors or conductors supplying electrical equipment associated with the
pool and protected by an earth fault circuit breaker, shall be not less than that shown in
Table 25.1.

Table 25.1 Minimum conductor separation from pools
,
0.75
2.00
1.50
0.75
raceways 4.00
3.00
0.75in 1.5
Conductor underground
Conductor Minimum
buried directly in
separation [m]
0- 750.0V
25.4.4 Bonding to Earth
25.4.4.1 General
(1) The metal parts ofthe pool and other non-electrical equipment associated with the pool such
as piping, pool reinforcing steel, ladders, diving board supports, and fences within 1.5m of the
pool, shall be bonded together and to' non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment
such as decorative type-pool luminaries and lighting equipment not located in a forming shells,
metal screens of shields for underwater speakers, conduit, junction boxes, and the like by a
copper bonding conductor.
Exemption: The metal parts of a pool need not be bonded to earth or to each other where the electrical equipment
associated with the pool is:
a) not located within 3.0m of the pool,

b) suitably separated from the pool by a fence, wall, or other barrier, or
c) approved without a bonding conductor
25.4.4.2 Reinforcing steel
(1) Pool reinforcing steel shall be bonded with a minimum of four connections equally spaced
around the perimeter.
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD EBC$-10 1995 449

--------------------------------------------------------------~
25.4.4.3 Bonding conductor size
(1) Bonding conductors for pools shall be:
a) no smaller than 16.0mm2 for permanently installed pools and for all in-ground pools; or
b) as required by Table 7.1 of Section 7 for all other pools.
25.4.4.4 Bonding medium
(1) Metal sheath and raceways shall not be relied upon as the bonding medium and separate
copper bonding conductor shall be used.
Exemptions: a) A metallic conductor between a forming shell and its associated junction box shall be permitted to
be used as the bonding medium provided the forming shell and junction box are installed in the same
structural section.
b) The bonding conductor shall be of copper and not smaller than that required by Table 7.1.
25.4.4.5 Junction box bonding conductor
(1) The bonding conductor from the junction box referred to in Clause 25.4.5 shall be run to
the main distribution board, and, if it is smaller than 16.0mm2, it shall be installed and
mechanically protected in the same manner as the circuit conductor.
25.4.5 Junction and I)eck Boxes
25.4.5.1 General
(1) Junction boxes:
a) shall be permitted to be submerged in decorative pools provided the boxes are marked
for such· usage; and
b) conduits shall be water-tight and provided with a packing seal that will seal\around the
cord and effectively prevent water from entering the box through the conduit from the
forming shell.

25.4.5.2 Deck boxes
(I) Junction "installed on the supply side of conduits extending to fonning shells, referred
hereinafter as "deck boxes", shall be specifically approved for the purpose and shall:
a) be provided with a means for independently tenninating at least three bonding

conductors inside the box and one 16.0mm2 bonding conductor outside the box;
b) not contain the conductors of any circuits other than those used exclusively to s\lPply the
underwater equipment; and
c) be provided with electrical continuity between every connected metal conduit and the
bonding tenninals by means of copper, brass or other corrosion-resistant metal that is
integral with the box.
25.4.5.3 Deck box installation
(1) Deck boxes shall be installed:
a) above the nonnal water level of the pool;

b) so that the top of the box is located at or above the finished level of the pool deck;
c) in a manner or location that the box will not be an obstacle; and
d) in such a manner that any water on the deck will drain away from the box.
25.4.6 Transformers and Transformer Enclosure
25.4.6.1 Location
(1) Transfonners shall not be located within 3.0m of the inside wall of the pool unless suitably
separated from the pool area by a fence, wall or other penn anent barrier which will make the
transfonner not accessible to persons using the pool area.
25.4.6.2 Bonding
(I) A metal shield, if provided between the primary and secondary windings of a transfonner,
shall be bonded to earth.

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF BUllDtNGS
25.4.6.3 Audio transformer
(1) Audio isolation transformers shall:
a) be connected between the audio output terminals of each amplifier and any loudspeaker
which is located within 3.0m of the pool wall; and
b) be located in or adjacent to the amplifier with which they are used; and
c) have an audio output voltage of not more than 75.0V r.m.s.
25.4.7 Socket Outlets
25.4.7.1 Location
(1) Socket outlets shall not be located within 1.5m of the inside walls of the pools.
25.4.7.2 Protection
(1) Sockcl Dutlets located between 1.5m and 3.0m of the inside wall of a pool shall be prote~ted
by an earth-fault circuit breaker.
Note: In maintaining the dimensions referred to in Clause 25.4.7, the distance to be measured is the shortest path
that the power supply cord of an appliance connected to the socket outlet would follow without piercing a
building floor, wall, or ceiling.
25.4.8 Luminaries and Lighting Equipment
25.4.8.1 Wet-niche or submersible luminaire
25.4.8.1.1 General
(1) Wet-niche luminaries shall, except for decorative pools, be mounted in forming shells which
shall have provision for suitable connection to the wiring method used.
25.4.8.1.2 Submersion depth
(1) Wet-niche luminaries shall, unless specifically approved and marked for submersion at a
greater depth, not be submersed in the pool water at a depth of more than 600.0mm, such
distance being measured from the centre of the lense face of the luminaire to the normal water
level.

25.4.8.1.3 Voltage
(1) Wet-niche luminaire shall operate with neither the supply voltage to the luminaire nor the
associated ballast or transformer, if applicable, nor the secondary open-circuit voltage of the
ballast or transformer exceeding 230.0V during either starting or operating voltage.
25.4.8.2 Dry-niche luminaire
25.4.8.2.1 Voltage
(1) Where dry-niche luminaries are installed so as to be accessible from a walkway or a service
tunnel outside the walls of the pool or from a closed drained recess in the wall of the pool,
neither the supply voltage to the fixture nor its associate ballast or transformer shall exceed
380.0V during either starting or operating conditions.
25.4.8.2.2 Accessib~lity
(1) Dry-niche luminaries shall be accessible for maintenance:
a) from a service tunnel or walkway outside the walk of the pool, or

b) through a handhole in the deck of the pool to a closed, drained recess in the wall of the
pool.
25.4.8.3 Metal parts
(1) Metal parts of lumnaires in contact with the pool water shall be of brass or other suitable
corrosion-resistant material
25.4.8.4 Luminaire support
(1) Stands or supports for luminaries shall not be installed within 3.0m of the inside walls of
a swimming pool unless such luminaries are protected by earth-fault circuit breaker.
25.4.8.5 Luminaire protection
(1) Luminaries installed below or within 3.0m of the pool surface or walls, and not suitably
separated from the pool area by fence, wall or other permanent barrier shall be electrically
protected by an earth-fault circuit breaker.

25.4.8.6 Forming shell types
(1) Forming shells for lamps supplied from an earthed circuit or a circuit operating at voltage
exceeding 30.0V shall be made from metal and have provision for a threaded connection to a
rigid metal conduit.
25.4.9 Earth-Fault Circuit Breakers
25.4.9.1 General
(1) Except as permitted in 25.4.9.2, earth-fault circuit breakers required per the provisions of
Clause 25.4.9 shall be of Class A typet.
25.4.9.2 Other classes
(1) Where earth-fault circuit breakers of the Class A type are not available due to rating, the
equipment shall be protected by an earth-fault circuit breaker which will clear an earth fault
within the time specified for Class A type breaker.
(1) Earth-fault circuit breakers shall be:
a) permanently connected,
b) permitted to be applied to a feeder, a branch circuit or an individual device,
c) installed in a location which will facilitate testing required in 25.4.9.4, but not closer
within 3.0m of the pool water.
25.4.9.4 Warning sign
(1) A warning sign shall be located beside the switches controlling circuits, electrically protected
by earth-fault circuit breakers, advising that the circuits are protected and that the equipment
shall be tested regularly.
t See Clause A.2, Annex A.

25.5 PERMANENTLY INSTALLED SWIMMING POOLS
25.5.1 General
(1) The wiring between the wet-niche luminaries and the junction boxes referred to in
Clause 25.4.5 shall be of flexible cord suitable for use in wet locations and supplied as a part
of the luminaire.
25.5.2 Conduit Type
(1) Rigid conduit of copper or other corrosion-resistant metal or rigid PVC conduit shall be
provided between the forming shell of luminaire installed below the pool surface and the
junction box referred to in Clause 25.4.5.
Exemption: Where Clauses 25.5.1 and 25.5.2 do not apply, any suitable wiring method specified in Section 8 of this
Standard shall be permitted.
25.5.3 Circuft Segregation
(1) Conductors on the load side of each earth-fault circuit breakers shall be kept entirely
independent of all other wiring which is not so protected and shall not enter a luminaire
raceway, box, or cabinet occupied by other wiring except for panelboards which house the
breakers.
25.5.4 Drainage
(1) Conduits in the walls and deck of a swimming pool shall be installed so that suitable
drainage is provided.
25.6 STORABLE SWIMMING POOLS
25.6.1 Electrical Equipment

/'
(1) No electrical equipment shall be located in the pool water or on the pool wall unless
specifically approved for the purpose.

25.6.2 Pumps
25.6.2.1 General
(1) Swimming pool pumps located within 3.0m ofthe pool walls shall be specifically approved
for the purpose.
25.6.2.2 Supply
(1) Swimming pool pumps shall be supplied from a pern'lanently installed receptacle located not
less than 1.5m nor more than 7.5m from the pool walls.
25.6.2.3 Protection
(1) Swimming pool pumps shall be protected by an earth fault-circuit breaker if located within
3.0m of the inside walls of the pool and not suitably separated from the pool area by a fence,
wall, or other permanent barrier.
25.7 HYDROMASSAGE BATHTUB
25.7.1 Protection
(1) Electrical equipment forming an integral part of a hydromassage bathtub shall be protected
by an earth-fault circuit breaker of the Class A type.
25.7.2 Control
25.7.2.1 Timer switch
(1) A hydromassage bathtub shall be controlled by an automatic shut-off timer with an "on"
time of not more than 30.0min.
25.7.2.2 Controls location
(1) Electrical controls associated with a hydromassage bathtub shall be located behind a barrier
or shall be located not less than 1.Om horizontally from a wall of the bathtub unless they form
an integral part of an approved factory-built hydromassage bathtub.

25.7.2.3 Earth fault circuit breaker location
(1) Subject to 25.7.2.2 and notwithstanding the provisions of 25.4.9.3(1c), earth-fault circuit
breakers shall be permitted to be closer than 3.0m to the pool but not less than 1.5m from the
pool wall.
25.7.3 Other Electric Equipment
(1) Luminaries, switches, socket outlets, and other electrical equipment not directly associated
with a hydromassage bathtub shall be installed in accordance with relevant Clauses of this Code
covering the installation of equipment in bathrooms.
25.8 SPAS AND HOT TUBS
25.8.1 Bonding to Earth
25.8.1.1 General
(1) Metal parts of spas and hot tubs shall be bonded together and to earth in accordance with
the provisions of Clause 25.4.4.
Exemption: Metal rings or bands used to secure staves or wooden hot tubs need not be bonded.
(1) A copper bonding conductor whose size is not less than that of the circuit conductors
supplying the equipment shall be connected between the control panel of a spa or hot tub and
the consumer's service or distribution panel.
25.8.2 Controls and Other Electrical Equipment"
25.8.2.1 Controls
(1) Controls for spa or hot tub shall be located behind a barrier or shall be located not within
1.5m horizontally from spa or hot tub unless they form an integral part of an approved factory
built spa or hot tub.

(1) Socket outlets shall be installed in accordance with Clause 25.4.7.
25.8.2.3 Luminaries
(1) Luminaires shall be installed in accordance with Clause 25.4.8.
25.8.3 Leakage Current
(1) Leakage current collectors shall be installed in all water inlets and in all water outlets of a
field-assembled spa or hot tub so that all water flows through leakage current collectors.
Exemption: Leakage water current collection shall not be required in a system in which the only component is a
pump marked as "insulated wet-end pump".
25.8.3.2 Insulation and bonding
(1) Leakage current collecto~hall be electrically insulated from the spa or hot tub and shall
be bonded to the control panel or the main service earth with a copper bonding conductor.
(1) The bonding conductor for leakage current collectors shall be not smaller than that required
by Table 7.1, Section 7, where the bonding conductors are mechanically protected in the same
manner as the circuit conductor or a minimum 16.0mm2 copper conductor.
25.8.4 Field-Assembled Units
25.8.4.1 General
(1) Spas and hot tubs, field-assembled within divided components, shall be installed III
accordance with the provisions of Clauses 25.8.1 through 25.8.3, 25.8.4.2 and 25.8.4.3.

SECTION 25: SWiMMING POOLS, FOUNTAINS AND SIMILAR INSTALLATION
25.8.4.2 Component
(1) Individual components, such as pumps, heaters, and blowers, shall be specifically approved
for use with spas or hot tub.
25.8.4.3 Air blower installation
(1) Air blower shall be installed above the tub rim, or other acceptable means shall be used to
prevent water from coming into contact with live parts of the blower.
Note: No conductors would be permitted under any circumstances in the area under line I. In the area above
Line I insulated communication conductors and neutral supported cables operating at 750.0V or less might
be permitted. Any other conductors operating at not more than 50.0kV might be permitted above the area
outlined by line 2.
All dimensions are in metres.
Figure 25.1 Minimum clearances of conductors over swimming pool

A.I AUDIO ISOLATION TRANSFORMERS
Audio isolation trans formes should:
a) have either the primary and secondary windings wound on separate bobbins 'On the
core legs or a grounded metal shield between the primary and secondary windings;
and
b) be capable of withstanding a 60.0Hz test voltage of ,2500.0V applied between the

primary and secondary windings for a period of 1.0min without a breakdown.
Microphones used in the vicinity of pools and baptismal fonts must have audio isolation
transformers and cables with ungrounded conductors installed between them and any mixer,
preamplifier, amplifier or similar equipment.
A.2 AN EARTH FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER
An earth-fault circuit interrupter is a device whose function is to interrupt, WHnm a

predetermined time, the electric circuit to a load when the current to earth exceeds some
predetermined value that is less than that required to operate the overcurrent protective
device of that circuit.
More specifically, a Class A earth-fault circuit interrupter is one which will interrupt the
circuit to the load when the earth-fault current is 6.0mA or more, but not when the earth
f~,ult current is 4.0mA or less in a time:
a) not greater than that given by:
20
T (A.I)
I
46.0 EBCS-10 1995 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

where T is the time in seconds,
I is the earth
fault current in La.ms milliamperes for fault current~ between
4.0mA and 260.0mA.
Note: when the ambient air temperature is less than -SoCor more than 40°C, the minimum tripping
current may be 3.5mA instead of 4.0mA.
b) not greater than 25.0ms for earth-fault currents over 260.0mA.
In addition, a Class A earth-fault circuit interrupter should be capable of interrupting the

circuit to the load in keeping with the above requirements should the identified circuit
conductor (neutral) become inadvertently earthed between the interrupter and the load.
The prime function of a Class A EFCI, therefore, is to provide protection against hazardous
electric shocks from leakage current flowing to earth from defective circuits or equipment.
It does not provided protection against shock should a person make contact with two of the
circuit conductors on the load side of the EFCI.
An EFCI must be applied to a circuit in accordance with the type and rating of the circuit
for which it is designed.
ETHIOPIAN BUilDING CODE STANDARD EBCS-10 1995 46·1

r
SECTION 26
GRAPHICAL SYMBOLS
26.1 SCOPE
(1) This Section of the Code sets provisions for graphical symbols to be used in electrical
installations and degree of protection provided by enclosures for electrical equipment.
(1) The following references contain provisions which, through reference in this text,
constitute provisions of the Ethiopian Building Code Standard on Electrical Installation of
Buildings:
a) mc 529:1989 Degree of protection provided by enclosures (IF

Code).
b) DIN 407117:1983 Graphical Symbols for Diagrams Electrical

Installation.
26.3 DEFINITIONS
(1) For the purpose of this Section of the Code, the following definitions shall apply, in
addition to the terms defined in Section 1:
degree of protection the extent of protection provided by an enclosure

against access to hazardous parts, against ingress of
solid foreign objects and/or against ingress of water
and verified by standardized test methods as
specified in mc 529:1989.
IP (International Protection) Code a coding system to indicate the degree of protection

provided by an enclosure against access to hazardous
parts, ingress of solid foreign objects, ingress of
water and to give additional information in
connection with such protection as specified in mc
529:1989.

SECTION 26: GRAPHICAL SYMBOLS
26.4 SYMBOLS
(1) Symbols for electrical installations and degree of protection provided by enclosures for
electrical equipment (lighting fittings) shall be as indicated in Tables 26.1 and 26.2,
respectively.
Table 26.1 Graphical symbols for electrical installations
// / -----
SYMBOL Overhead
Radio
of line
Signal
Underground
Flexible
Junction line
line
Telephone
Protective
Surface lineConductor
line (PEl installation
line for flush
DESCRIPTION
conductor
conductors
In/Under surfaceline
-"-
• -
\J'--
... --
Identification Supply
Identification ofof Intended
Installation Method general
lines Application
Conductor,
Wiring
Wiring going
going
Wiring down
upward
passing through vertically
line Systems
Note: Darkened symbols indicate flush [recessed] installations.
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD . EBC$-1 0 1995 463

Table 26.1 Graphical symbols for electrical fnstallations (conte'd)
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
Supply Lines (conte'd)

--0-- Junction of conductors for surface installations
Earthing
Surface mounted (central) main distribution

board
Flush mounted (central) main distribution board
Surface mounted sub-distribution board
Flush mounted sub-distribution board
Switchgear
Fuse, general
Three-pole fuse, general
Low voltage HRC fuse
Fuse disconnector
Switch
Automatic breaker for line protection
Breaker with thermal over-current trip, e.g

Motor circuit break-et
Star-delta Motor Starter
o irect-on-I ine starter
Switches used for installation purposes
On-off switch, single-pole
On-off switch, double-pole
On-off switch, triple-pole
Two-circuit switch, single interruption.
Two-way switch, single-pole
Push-button

SECTION 26: GRAPHICAL_SYMBOLS
Table 26.1 Graphical symbols for electrical installations (conte'd)
/ ,
mp -
®
/,.0\
Socket Outlets
)( I TelephoneSYMBOL
rh
'~ ~
,socket outlet Time
Dimmer
Empty
Twin
Florescent
Flood
Luminaires
Socket
switch
box
Antenna
Current--
socket
luminaire
Luminaire
Emergency
Wall mounted
Float with
switch
light
single-phase
Time
DESCRIPTION
switch
outlet
single
general
luminaire
switch
(Projector)
relay
outlet
Light-sensitive
Three-phase
Single-phas'e socket
pulse
socket
with lamp + PE
symbol
luminaire
outlet
switch
socket outlet
socketswitch
switch
outlet+ PE
outlet 7
purposes (conte'd)
'~-Note: Darkened symbols indicate flush [recessed] installations

Table 26.1 Graphical symbols for electrical installations (conte' d)
I
xI
xSYMBOL
I I florescent luminaire
I of DESCRIPTION
-0.
Row Water
Florescent luminaire
Batteryheater
Inverter
Current
Rectifier
Voltage
Microwave
Exterior (Cell) double
transformer
transformer
Indicating lamp
instruments
cooker
luminaire (post top) symbol
Metre
Washing
Kitchen
Hotplate(ki
Electrical
Electric
Convertor
Baking ovenlowatthour-metre)
machine
appliance
range,
appliance,
General
general
Symbol
General
symbol
-Ir--
®
I0+-
f®l
~~
~
IKwhm [£J ®®®S
0 Luminaires(conte'd)
-CID- I [Z]
Indicating
Electrical
Instruments
Power Appliances
Supplyand (Power)
Transformers
Units

SECTION 26: GRAPHICAL SYMBOvO
SYMBOL I
Non-automatic
Call indicator DESCRIPTION
fire alarm
panel deviceindicates
(Number (manual call
fire
Horn
U g
Motor Electric
fan
Generator
Master
Siren
Smoke
Dish
Intercom
AutomaticClock
Bell alarm
Freezer Clock
detector
washer
Telephone Telephone
exchange, exchange
general panel
symbol
Fire
Deep
Air freezer
control
conditioning & indicating
@®0
I~l
=:j)
®
II=:JI
CJ:=:=7
1**
[***
[Q]
E!J
~ I ~
Lf-o-Jlj1 Communication
~
Clothes dryer
call point)
stations, for example 9 stations)
appliances
Signalling Devices
Electrical Appliances(conte'd) I
J

SYMBOL
-
..
---- DESCRIPTION
lr
, Antenna
set
Flame -
detector (rate of rise)
TV
Loud
Radio
Heat ,.detector
speaker
set
detector
Amplifier
Optical (fixed temperature)
detector
EJ
em
oJ
=:::)
1ZSJ II I=::::
Radio, Television and accessories

SECTION 26: GRAPHICAL SYMBOLS
Table 26.2 Graphical symbols for the degree of protection of electrical equipment
(symbols on light fittings)
••
SYMBOL
I Covered
covered
-----,
dust
11s1
Type of
IPproof
foreign 67substances
substance
foreign rain
IIII1.0mm
1.0mm
2.5mm
jet
substancesagainst
IP
IP
IP2260
54
IP 55
43
44
65
23 no
Digit - Protection against
protection
splash ~water
waterproof
nowaterproof
~water
inclined dripping water
protection
53 2nd Digit - Protection
50

SYMBOLS ON LIGHT FITTINGS COMPLYING

WITH IEC 598
•.
Test marks
Lighting fittings for discharge lamps for direct mounting on fixtures and furnitures, which conform in their •
SYMBOL Lighting
Lighti ng fittings
fitti suitable
ngssuitable forformounti
mounting in fire-hazardous
DESCRIPTION locations andElektrotechiker"
premises (VDE 0100)
It certifies the of mounting
IPprocedure
50 (~Association
(dust
?t at 200°C, The
ImpactVDE-test
proof mark is the
lighting symbol
fittings are ofng on association
the
suitable materials
for with
gymnastic unknown
"Verein
and sportsinflammabi
Deutscher
prem ises. Iity.The
The tests are made accordi of
ng
Radio interference suppressionaccording to VDE 0875. All lighting fittings conform to the interference
W to DIifNthey
varnished,
German
C-specifications.
suppression
is 18032
specified.
behaviour
and and or
coated
Electrical
lighting
fordegree
remain VDE
fittings
G.
inflammation
stable By0711.
veneered.
Engineers.) for
using
to
and The
are notapproval
discharge
additional
hardly or
subjectlampsis deformation
based
with on
interference
normally
to this internationally
inflammable sign
suppression are specified
suitable
device
materials,
upto this ifNrules.
for direct
degree
although
temperature. mounting
will
these be on being
reached.
materials normal or easily
W
W
@VJ

ANNEX B (INFORMATIVE)
PROTECTION CLASSES
The light fittings are classified in three categories against electrical shocks depending on the type of
protection.
SYMBOL lamps for connection to low voltage

protective
is, wire
a
insulation
(Max.
protective with
ProtectiveDESCRIPTION
insulation, wire required
Class
Class III
quired.
protective isallowed.
wireprotective
fitting has not
--
For Iighting fittings with incandescent
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING COi)&STANDARD EBCS-10 1995 471

APPENDICES
APPENDIX 1
INSPECTION AND TESTING
1 INITIAL VERIFICATION
1.1 General
(1) Every installation shall, during erection and/or on completion but before being put into
service, be inspected and tested to verify,.so far as is reasonably practicable, that the
requirements of this Electrical Installation Code have been met.
(2) The method of test shall be. such that no danger to persons, livestock or property or
damage to equipment can occur even if the circuit tested is defective.
1.2 Inspection
(1) Detailed inspection shall precede testing and shall normally be carred out with that·
portion of the installation under inspection being disconnected from the supply.
(2) The detailed inspection shall be made to verify that the installed electrical equipment
IS:
a) in compliance with this Electrical installation Code;

b) correctly selected and erected in accordance with this Electrical Installation Code;
and
c) not visibly damaged or defective so as to impair safety.
(3) The detailed inspection shall include at least the checking of the following items, where
relevant to the installation, and, where necessary, during erection:
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD EBCS-10 1995 A-1

a) connection of conductors;
b) identification of conductors;
c) routing of cables in safe zones or mechanical protection;
d) selection of conductors for current carrying capacity and voltage drop in accordance
with the design;
e) connection of single pole devices for protection or switching in phase conductors
only;
t) correct connection socket-outlets and lampholders;
g) presence of fire barriers and protection against thermal effects;
h) methods of protection against direct contact (including measurement of distances,
where appropriate); i.e.,
, i) protection by insulation of live parts,
ii) protection by barrier or enclosure,
ill) protection by obstacles,
iv) protection by placing out of reach;
i) methods of protection against indirect contact; i.e,

i) presence of protective conduqtors,
ii) presence of earthing conductors,
iii) presence of main equipotential bonding conductors,
iv) earthing arrangements for combined protective and functional purposes,
v) use of Class II equipment or equivalent insulation,
vi) non-conducting location (including measurement of distances, where
appropriate),
vii) earth-free local equipotential bonding,
viii) electrical separation;
j) prevention of mutual detrimental influence;

k) presence of appropriate devices for isolation and switching;
1) presence of under-voltage protective devices;
m) choice and setting of protective and monitoring devices (for protection against
indirect contact and/or protection against overcurrent);
n) labelling of circuits, fuses, switches and terminals;
0) selection of equipment and protective measures appropriate to external influences;
p) adequacy of access to switchgear and equipment;
q) presence of danger notices and other warning notices;
r) presence of diagrams, instructions and similar information;
s) erection methods.
A-2 EBCS-10 1995 ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD

APPENDIX 1: INSPECTION AND T1STING
1.3 Testing
1.3.1 Tests to be carried out
(1) The following tests, where relevant, shall be carried out in that sequence.
a) continuity of protective conductors
i) Every protective conductor shall be tested to verify that it is electrically sound

and correctly connected.
b) continuity of ring final circuit conductors
i) A test shall be made to verify the continuity of each conductor, including the
protective conductor, of every ring final circuit.
c) Insulation resistance
i) The insulation resistance between live conductors shall be measured before

the installation is connected to the supply.
ii) Particular attention shall be given to the presence of electronic devices
connected in the installation and, where necessary, such devices shall be
isolated so that they are not damaged by the test voltage and thereafter tested
in accordance with (vi) below.
iii) The insulation resistance shall also be measured between each live conductor
and earth, the PEN conductor in TN-C systems being considered as part of
the earth. Where appropriate during this measurement, phase and neutral
conductors may be connected together.
iv) The insulation resistance measured with the d.c. test voltages indicated in
Table 1 shall be considered satisfactory if the main switchboard, and each
distribution circuit tested separately with all its final circuits connected but
with current-using equipment disconnected, has an insulation resistance not
less than the value given in Table 1.
v) The testing equipment shall be capable of supplying the test voltage indicated
in Table A.1 when loaded with 1.0mA.
vi) Where equipment such as electronic devices are disconnected for the tests
prescribed in a(i) through c (v) above and the equipment has exposed
conductive parts to be connected to protective conductors, the insulation,

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATiON OF BUILDINGS
resistance between the exposed conductive parts and live parts of the
disconnected equipment shall be measured separately and shall be not less
than O.5mega Ohm.
Table 1: Minimum values of insulation- resistance
Circuit nominal voltage [V]0.25

Minimum0.5
5.0insulation resistance
1.0 1000
~O
Test voltage
(mega Ohms) 500 d.c.
[V] circuit is supplied from a safety
Above 500.0V
Up to and up to 500.0V
including 1000.OV with the
Note: i) In the event of any test indicating failure to comply with the requirments of clause (lc) above, that
test and those preceding it (the results of which may have been influenced by the indicated fault)
3hall be repeated after the fault has been rectified.
ii) Reference methods of test are described in Guidance Notes on the Wiring Regulations published
by the Institution of Electrical Engineers (IEE); but the use of other methods giving no less
effective results is not precluded.
d) Site applied insulation
(i) Where insulation applied on site is intended to provide protection against

direct contact, it shall be verified that the insulation is capable of
withstanding, without breakdown or flashover, an applied voltage test
equivalent to that specified in the relevant acceptable Standard for similar
type-tested equipment.
(ii) Where protection against indirect contact is provided by supplementary
insulation applied to equipment during erection, it shall be verified by test
that:
- the insulating enclosure affords a degree of protection not less than

IP2X, and

APPENDIX 1: INSPECTION AND TESTING
- . the insulating enclosure is capable of withstanding, without breakdown

or flashover, an applied voltage test equivalent to that specified in the
l relevant acceptable Standard for similar type tested equipment.
e) Protection by separation of circuits
(i) Where protection against electric shock is provided by SELV, it shall be

verified by inspection and test.
(ii) Where protection against electric shock is provided by electrical separation,
it shall be verified by inspection and test.
t) protection against direct contact, by a barrier or enclosure provided during erection
(i) Where protection against direct contact is intended to be afforded by a

barrier or enclosure provided during erection, it shall be verified by test
that each enclosure or barrier affords a degree of protection not less than
lP2X or lP4X as appropriate.
g) Insulation of non-conducting floors and walls
(i) Where protection against indirect contact is to be provided by a non-

conducting location, the resistance of the floors and walls of the location
to the main protective conductor of the installation shall be measured at
not less than three points on each relevant surface, one of which shall be
not less than 1.0m and not more than 12m from any ~xtraneous conductive
part in the location. The other two measurements shall be made at greater
distances.
(ii) Any insulation or insulating arrangement of extraneous conductive parts:
- when tested at 500.0V d.c. shall not be less than O.5mega ohm;
- shall be able to withstand a test voltage of at least 2.0kV r.m.s, a.c. and
- shall not pass a leakage 'current exceeding 1.0mA in normal conditions of
use.
(h) Polarity
(i) A test of polarity shall be made and it shall be verified that:
- every fuse and single-pole control and protective device is connected

in the phase conductor only;
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD EBC~-l 0 1995 A-5

- centre-contact bayanet and Edisan screw lamphalders in circuits

having an earthed neutral conductar have the auter ar. screwed
contacts connected to. the neutral conductor; and
- wiring has been correctly connected to. sacket-autlets and similar
accessanes.
(i) Earth fault laap impedance
i) Where protective measures that require a knawledge af the earth-fault laap,

impedances are, the relevent impedances shall be measured.
G) Earth electrode resistance
i) Where pratective measures are used, which require a knawledge af the

earth electrode resistance, this shall be measured.
(k) Operatian af residual-current aperated devices
(i) Where pratectian against indirect contact is to. be provided by a resi~ual

current device, its effectiveness shall be verified by a test simulating an
appropriate fault conditian and independent af any test facility incorparated
in the device.
2 ALTERATIONS AND ADDITIONS TO AN INSTALLATION
(1) It shall be verified that every alteratian or additian complies with the requirements af
this Co.de and that it daes nat impair the safety af an existing installatian.
3 PERIODIC INSPECTION AND TESTING
(1) Inspectian comprising careful scrutiny af an installatian shall be carned aut withaut
dismantling or with partial dismantling, as required, supplemented by testing to.provide far:
a) the safety af persans and livestack against the effects af electric shack and burns
even when the circuit is defective,
b) pratectian against damage to. praperty by fire and heat arising from an installatian
defect,
'"
APPENDIX 1: INSPECTION AND rESTING
c) the identification that the installation is not damaged or deteriorated so as to impair

safety;
d) the identification of installation defects or non-compliance with the requirements of

this Code which may give rise to danger.
(2) The frequency of periodic inspection and testing of an installation shall be determined
by the type of installation, its use and operation, the frequency of maintenance and the
external influences to which it is subjected.
4 CERTIFICATION AND REPORTING
4.1 General
(1) Following the initial verification required by Clause 1 or Clause 2 of this Appendix, a
Completion & Inspection Certificate in the form set out in Appendix 2 of this Code shall
be given to the person ordering the work.
(2) Following the periodic inspection and testing described in Clause 3 of this Appendix,
report on the findings and the extents of the periodic inspection and. testing of an
installation, or any part thereof, shall be recorded on a report and given by the person
carrying out the inspection, or by a person authorized to act on his behalf, to the person
ordering the work.
(3) Dangerous conditions arising from non-compliance with this Code, together with any
limitations of the inspection and testing in accordance with Clause 3(1) of this Appendix,
shall be recorded.
4.2 Initial Verification
(1) The Inspection shall comply with the requirement of Clause 1 of this Appendix and any
defects or omissions revealed by the inspection shall be made good before a Completion
& Inspection· Certificate is issued.
(2) The Completion & Inspection Certificate shall be signed by a competent person or
persons stating that the installation has been designed, constructed and inspected and tested
in accordance with the provisions of this Code.

4.3 Alterations and Additions
(1) The requirements of Clause 4.2 fdr the issuance of a Completion & Inspection
Certificate shall apply to all the work of the alterations or additions; any defects or
omissions revealed in that work shall be made good before a Completion Report is issued.
(2) The Contractor or other person responsible for the new work, or a person authorised
to act on his behalf, shall report in writing to the person ordering the work any defects
found in related parts of the existing installation.
A-8 EBCS-10 1995 ETHIOP!At'-J BUILDING CODE STANDARD

APPENDIX 2: FORMS OF COMPLETION AND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE
APPENDIX 2
FORMS OF COMPLETION AND INSPECTION
CERTIFICATE
1. Installation
(1) The forms of completion, inspection and testing shall be made out and signed by
competent persons in respect of the design, construction, inspection and testing of work.
(2) Completed forms shall indicate a responsibility for design, construction, inspection
and testing, whether in relation to new work or further work on an existing installation.

FORMS OF COMPLETION & INSPECTION CERTIFICATE
DETAILS OF THE INSTALLATION
Client:
Address:
DESIGN
"--
I/We, being the person(s) responsible (as indicated by my/our signatures below) for the Design of the electrical
installation, particulars of which are described on Page ... of this Form, CERTIFY that the said work for which I/we have
been responsible is to the best of my/our knowledge and belief in accordance with the Regulations for Electrical
, Installations published by except for the departures, if any, stated in this
Certificate.
The extent of liability of the signatory is limited to the work described above as the subject this Certificate.
For the DESIGN of the installation:
Name (in block letters): Position: Reg. No.

For and on behalf of:
Address:
(2) Signature: (3) Date

CONSTRUCTION
I/We, being the person(s) responsible (as indicated by my/our signature below) for the 'Construction of the electrical
installation, particulars of which are described on Page.... of this Form CERTIFY that the said wt>rkfor which I/we have
been responsible is to the best of my/our knowledge and felief in accordance with the Regulation for Electrical
Installations published by .......................•...................................................................................
except for the departures, if any,
stated in this Certificate.
The extent of liability of the signatory is limited to the work described above as the subject of this '.
Certificate.
For the CONSTRUCTION of the installation:

Address:
(2) Signature: (3) Date:
INSPECTION AND TEST
I/We, being the person(s) responsible (as indicated by my/our signatures below) for the Inspection and Test of the
electrical installation, particulars of which are described on Page ... of this Form, CERTIFY that the said work for which
l/we have been responsible is to the best of my/our knowledge and belief in accordance with the Regulations for
Electrical Installations published by except for departures,
if any, stated in this Certificate.
The extent of liability of the signatory is limited to the work described above as the subject this
~rtificate.
For the INSPECfION AND TEST of the installation:
Address:
I RECOMMEND that this installation be further inspected and tested after an interval of not more than
.......... years.
(2) Signature: (3) Date:
!
NOTE:
1. This document is intended for the initial certification of a new installation or of an alteration or
addition to an existing installation and of an inspection.
2. The·signatures appended are those of the persons authorized by the companies executing the work
of design. construction and inspection and testing respectively. A signatory authorized to certify more
than one category of work shall sign in each of the appropriate places.
SCHEDULE OF ADDITIONAL RECORDS
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD EBCS-10 1995 A-ll

PARTICULARS OF THE INSTALLATION
(Delete or complete items as appropriate)
Type of Installation: New/Alteration/Addition/ to existing installation
Type of Earthing: o TN-C 0 TN-S 0 TN-CS 0 IT 0 IT
Earth Electrode: Resistance ................. ohms
Method of Measurement
Type and Location
Characteristics of the supply at the origin of the installation:
Nominal voltage ............. Volts
Frequency ............. Hz
Number of Phases .
Prospective short-circuit current ................kA
Earth fault loop impedance (z.) .................ohms
Overcurrent protective device: Type . Rating .... A..
Main switch or circuit-breaker Rating ..... A . No of poles .
(if an r.c.d., rated residual operating current IdB ••••••••••••••••• mA.)
Method of earthing:oo for

No
0 ready sheath.o satisfactory
Cable operation
unsatisfactory of o DYes
voltage-operated
on isforeffective.
ich earth-leakage protection.
o Earth-leakage
Buried oearthing
strip/rod/plate
Protective Additional
circuit-breaker,
multiple overhead
current
(p.M.E.)
voltage line conductor
operated
Earth-leakage
impedance of each protection
earth-continuity is afforded
conductor by a 0 current.-operated.
is satisfactory:
oo No
oNo No the installation is correct
Polarity throughout DYes DYes DYes
stated below:
Each item of apparatus tested separately is in good serviceable condition, except as stated below.
parately is not less than 0.5 megao ]
llation is not less than 1 megohm
All
Thereflexible
is nocords, switches,
sign of fuses,ofplugs
overloading and socket-outlets
conductors are except
or accessories in goodas serviceable cop-dition, except as
stated below.
m.
Apparatus tested o includes o does not include portable appliances.
Comments (if any) and departures from the WiriJilgRegulations:
Date: .
Signed
For and on behalf of: .....................................................................................................................................
Address: ...................................................................................................
...................................................................................................

INDEX
Control required 266

A Control switches 320
Controls 457
Controls location 456
Accessibility 453 Corrosion 192
Air blower installation 459
Coverings 414
Air conditioning 380
Alarm signals 346
Ambient temperature 353 D
Audibility of general alarm 355
Audible alarms provided by public address equipment 356
Audio transformer 452 Deck box installation 451
Automatic restarting after overload 264 Deck boxes 451
Auxiliary equipment 326 Deep moist clay soil 191
Available short-circuit current 145 Design 346
Avoidance offlue -like openiJ).g 358 Detached building 147
Detector types 350
B Discrimination 147
Disruptive electrical influence 358
Driving rode electrode 170
Ballast protection 327 Dry - niche luminaire 453
Bends 376
Bonding 169, 171,451 E
Bonding conductor size 450,457,458
Bonding medium 450
Box 361
Earth electrode seal for use within a tanked structure 192
Branch circuit loading and protection 333
Earth fault circuit breaker location 457 .
Branch circuit overcurrent protection 260 Earth rod connection 190
Earth-fault circuit interrupter 362
c Earth-leakage protection 146
Earthed control circuit 267
Earthing and bonding 144
Capacity of protective gear 147
Car lighting and accessories 380 E,arthing Conductors
Earthing conductor /,0 430
be run in a straight lille 430
Ceiling 353 Earthing electrode 430
Ceiling outlet box wiring 325 Earthing of shields 414
Electric lifts 383
Charging facility 360
Circuit connection 360 Enclosed or guarded live parts 144
Circuit segregation 455 Equipment 385
Clothes closets 320 Equipment and power supply 346
Colour coding 323 Excess load 400
Colour rendering j
7 Explosive on flarnnlable atmosphere 347
External metal 189
Common earth 430
Communication conductors and cables not exceeding
750V 448 F
Component 459
Concrete - enclosed electrode 169
Conduit type 455
Conductor installation 375 Fault signal discrimination 347
Feeder conductors 259
Conductor cross section and Insulation 324
Feeder overcurrent protect 261
Conductor in building of combustible construction 357
Feeding 400
Conductor on movable parts 324 Field - assembled unit 458
Conductor run 376
Conductors 331 Floor openings 353
Conductors - two or more motors 258 Floor protective coverings 414
Conductors attaclunent 331 Flue-like openings 351
Conductors cross section 357 Forming shell types 454
Fusing 360
Conductors operating at no more than 50 k.v. 448
Conductors to individual motors 257
Conduit seal 148 G
Conduitto drain 148
Connection of conductors 376
Connection of electrodes 171 General 145,188,190,326,328,331,347,348,349,354,360,
Gonnection point 359 373,397,413,448,449,450,452,454,456,457,458,356
Connection to supply 400 Grouping 143
Construction 374 Grouping of motors on a single branch circuit 261
Construction and requirements 348
Construction of messenger cable 333
Continuity of earthing and bonding conductors 171
Continuous duty 384
Control location 267
Control 327
INDEX
H
Mechanical and electrical requirements 188
Mechanical protection 430
Hazard 327 Metal car frame supported by cables 385
Heat barrier 354 Metal casing of a pump 169
Height consideration 351 Metal parts 453
Height of conductor 332 Meters instruments and relays 284
Highest voltag~ 358 Minimum height ofluminaries 322
Hoistway door interlocking wiring 378 Monitoring 350
Hydraulic lifts 383 Motor supply conductor insulation, temperature 257
Motors and generators 285,286,287 289, 2~1, 293
Motors and generators 285
I Motors and generators 286
Illuminance 37
Multiple services 142
Illumination level 387
In hoistway, machine rooms and escalator wellways 379
N
Independent metal water pipes 168
Installation and bonding 458
Installation 357,375,400,454,458
Installation and type 148 Near or over combustible material 320
lnstanteneous trip circuit interrupters 262 Non - continuous duty 384
Insulation 429 Number and location of overload devices 263
Insulation rating 378 NUmber ·of circuit element 347
Insulation resistance 356
Internal metal 189 o
Interruption 361
J On cars 379
Open core - and soil type transformer 375
Origin of call indication 348
J~ints 189 Other wiring 378
Junction box bonding conductor 450 Other classes 454
Other factors 354
L Outlet boxes to be covered 322
Outlet distance 400
Over current protection 146,327,362375
Over load and over heating protection 362
Labelling 361 Overcurrent protection marked on equipment 260
Lamp holders 326, 332 Overheating protection required 265
Lantern lights 351,353 Overheating protection required for motors 265
Laying 170 Overload protection not required 264
Lengt11of cable from transformers 376 Overload protection required 262
Lighting 386
Lighting fixtures 292
Lighting fixtures 285,286, 288,290
p
Lighting switch 387
Linllts of spacing 352
Live parts 321 Pendant conductors 324
Location 145,451,452 Placement 349
Location oflighting equipment 320 Plate electrode 170
Location of the alarm contrast and indicating panel 346 Portable motors 257
Luminaire 387 Position relative to ceiling 351
Luminaire protection 453 Protection 452,456
Luminaire as a raceway 323 Protection device location 380
Luminaire construction 319 Protection ofuninsulated part 374
Luminaire exposed to flying objects 322 Provision for bonding of future equipment 189
Luminaire in damp or wet location 320 Protection 319
Luminaire support 453 Public water pipe 168
Luminaries 458
R
M
Rated duration of operation 38
Manual call in automatic alarm 349 Rating and ampacity 257
Marking 143,374 Rating or trip selection of overload devices 263
Material 318,429 Recessed luminaire 322
Material for bonding conductors 171 Recessed luminaire wiring 324
Material for system earthing 171 Reinforcing steel 449
Means of disconnect 146 Remote location 361
-~
INDEX
Response time 38 Use of insulators 331

Restricted alanns 355 Use of messenger cables 333
Rod electrode 170 Use permitted 413
Use prohibited 413
s
v
Sandy or gravely soil 191
Secondary conductors 259 Ventilation 374
Secondary voltage 374 Visual alarm signal 356
Sectioned rooms 351 Voltage 31'),453
Segregation 358 Voltage drop 399,400
.Segregation 397
Sequence of control 147 w
Service equipment 328
Shallow top soil 191 Warning sign 454
Short circuit protection 362 Wet niche or submersible luminaire 452
Show windows 320
Wiring 399
Shunting of overload protection during starting 264 Wiring methods 285,286,287,289,291,293
Silencing switch 355 Wiring methods on poler 328
Single service 142 Wiring methods underground 328
Single truss and north-light roofs 353 Wiring oflighting equipment 323
Siting of safety luminaries in hazardous workspaces 38 wiring ofluminaries 323
Size of protective earth 430 Wiring of show-window luminaries 325
Staircases 351
Working space 145
Sock~ outlet 387,458
Soilless than 0.3m deeps 191
Spacing 170
Spacing and crossing 358
Spacing from combustible material 332
Spacing of conductors 332
Special monitoring 351
Split knobs 331
Starters having different sorting and running positions 267
Stationary motors 257
Storage - battery charging equipment 292
Stricken 349
Submersion qepth 452
Suitability 357
Supply 456
Support 429
Supports 321
Switches, controllers, circuit breakers and fuses 87,289,290,293
Switches, motor controllers, circuit breakers and fuses 284
System heights 414
Thermal protection 326

lbickness 374
Times switch 456
Transformer 326
Transformers and capacitors 284, 287,289,290, 293
Transformers used outdoors 375
Transmission circuitry 347
Travelling cables 378
Trouble signal 398
Two - stage alarm 355
Type of insulator 331
Types of conductors 376
Types of overheating protection 265
Types of overload protection 263
Undervoltage protection on feeders or branch circuits 266

Undervoltage protection required for motors 265

Electrical Installation of Buildings: EBCS-10

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Electrical Installation of Buildings: EBCS-10

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EBCS-10

Ethiopian Building Code Standard

The purpose of these standards is to serve as nationally recognized documents, the

• Ministry of Works & Urban Development (MWUD)

---" .------ --- - ---

Section 1 Scope And Definitions

Section 2 Gen~ral Requirements

2.4 Marking of equipment " 26

3.5 Emergency lighting requirements 37

3.6 Lighting requirements for various types of buildings 38

3.7 Outdoor lighting requirements 42

4.1 Scope ',' " 66.

4.5 Ampacity of wires, cables and flexible cords 70

4.6 Flexible cords " 70

Section 5 Service And Service Equipment

5.i Scope " 141

5.5 Service equipment 144

5.7 Metering equipment 149

Section 6 Circuit Loading and Demand Factor

6.1 Scope 150

6.4.1 Current calculation 151

6.5 Services and feeders 151

6.5.1 Single-family dwellings 151

Section 7 Earthing, Bonding, and Lightning Protection

7.1 Scope 157

7,6 Method of earthing , , 164

7.6.1 Effective earthing _ 164

7.7 Bonding methods , \. , 166

7.7.1 Clean sUifaee , 166

7.8 Earthing electrodes .. , , 168

7.8.1 General, , 168

7.9.1 General 171

7.10 Earthing and bonding conductor connections 175

7.10.1 Bonding. conductor connection to raceways 175

Section 7 Earthing, Bonding and LightninlZProtection

7.11 Scope .' 178

7.15 Form and size 184

7.16 Air termination 185

7.18 Earth termination ..........................•............ 190

7.18.1 Termination, , , 190

7.19 Common earthing :., , 192

7.19.1 Common earth potential , 192

7.20 Use of reinforcement for earthing in concrete Structures .. , .. : .. , 193

7.21 Structural ~teel framing for lightning protection , ".,. 194

8.1 Scope ······················ 223

8.4 Conductors ······················ 226

8.5 Open wiring 228

8.5.1 Open and clipped direct 228

8.7 Bare bus bars and risers 230

8.9 Cables, conductors and wiring methods 232

Annex A (Normative): Schedule of methods of installation of cables 233

9.1 Scope 237

; 9.4 Protective devices 238

9.5 Fuses 240

Section 10 Class 1 and Class 2 Circuits

10.1 Scope 245

10.4 Class 1 circuits 247

Section 11 Installation of Electrical Equipment

11.1 Scope 254

11.4 Electric heating and cooking appliances 255

11.5 Heatingequipment ; , 256

11.9 Storage batteries ',' 269

Section 12 Hazardous Locations